Name |
Date |
Size |
#Lines |
LOC |
||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
.. | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
SPI/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
SPL/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
android/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
api/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
arch/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
board/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
build/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
chromium/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
develop/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
device-tree-bindings/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
driver-model/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
imx/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
media/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
mvebu/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
sphinx/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
sphinx-static/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
uImage.FIT/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
uefi/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
usage/ | 18-Mar-2022 | - | ||||
.gitignore | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 7 | 2 | 1 | |
I2C_Edge_Conditions | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.6 KiB | 47 | 36 | |
Makefile | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.4 KiB | 126 | 81 | |
README.440-DDR-performance | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.8 KiB | 91 | 81 | |
README.AMCC-eval-boards-cleanup | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1 KiB | 32 | 20 | |
README.Heterogeneous-SoCs | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.6 KiB | 106 | 76 | |
README.JFFS2 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.5 KiB | 41 | 30 | |
README.JFFS2_NAND | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 219 | 9 | 5 | |
README.LED | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 78 | 54 | |
README.OFT | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 847 | 29 | 17 | |
README.POST | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 25.4 KiB | 733 | 548 | |
README.SNTP | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 720 | 18 | 14 | |
README.SPL | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.8 KiB | 114 | 87 | |
README.TPL | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 50 | 36 | |
README.VLAN | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 551 | 16 | 11 | |
README.VSC3316-3308 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 44 | 33 | |
README.arm-caches | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.2 KiB | 54 | 44 | |
README.arm-relocation | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.8 KiB | 194 | 139 | |
README.armada-secureboot | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 16.9 KiB | 374 | 304 | |
README.asn1 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.4 KiB | 41 | 32 | |
README.atmel_mci | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.3 KiB | 75 | 62 | |
README.atmel_pmecc | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.3 KiB | 50 | 39 | |
README.autoboot | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.8 KiB | 163 | 126 | |
README.bcm7xxx | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.6 KiB | 151 | 130 | |
README.bcmns3 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 75 | 71 | |
README.bedbug | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2 KiB | 79 | 57 | |
README.bitbangMII | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 57 | 46 | |
README.bloblist | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.7 KiB | 83 | 56 | |
README.bootcount | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.6 KiB | 52 | 39 | |
README.boston | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.8 KiB | 59 | 46 | |
README.bus_vcxk | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.8 KiB | 68 | 45 | |
README.cfi | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.8 KiB | 64 | 48 | |
README.chromium | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6.8 KiB | 219 | 145 | |
README.chromium-chainload | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 7.2 KiB | 240 | 149 | |
README.commands.itest | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 636 | 17 | 13 | |
README.commands.spl | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1,014 | 32 | 24 | |
README.console | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.1 KiB | 101 | 72 | |
README.davinci | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.1 KiB | 83 | 56 | |
README.davinci.nand_spl | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5 KiB | 142 | 111 | |
README.dfutftp | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.4 KiB | 119 | 82 | |
README.displaying-bmps | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.2 KiB | 28 | 23 | |
README.distro | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 17.3 KiB | 431 | 320 | |
README.dns | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2 KiB | 63 | 49 | |
README.enetaddr | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.8 KiB | 119 | 93 | |
README.esbc_validate | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 41 | 37 | |
README.ext4 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.2 KiB | 84 | 55 | |
README.falcon | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 8.5 KiB | 233 | 173 | |
README.fdt-control | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 8.4 KiB | 231 | 165 | |
README.fec_mxc | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.4 KiB | 40 | 30 | |
README.fsl-clk | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 127 | 6 | 4 | |
README.fsl-ddr | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 21.4 KiB | 440 | 378 | |
README.fsl-dpaa | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 494 | 11 | 9 | |
README.fsl-esdhc | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 359 | 9 | 7 | |
README.fsl-hwconfig | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.4 KiB | 47 | 32 | |
README.fsl-trustzone-components | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.3 KiB | 26 | 22 | |
README.fsl_iim | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.4 KiB | 49 | 35 | |
README.fuse | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.7 KiB | 68 | 49 | |
README.generic-board | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.5 KiB | 136 | 100 | |
README.generic_usb_ohci | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.6 KiB | 64 | 39 | |
README.gpio | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.1 KiB | 43 | 33 | |
README.gpt | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 11.3 KiB | 299 | 237 | |
README.hwconfig | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2 KiB | 51 | 39 | |
README.i2c | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.6 KiB | 61 | 47 | |
README.iomux | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.6 KiB | 90 | 69 | |
README.kconfig | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6 KiB | 159 | 116 | |
README.kwbimage | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.3 KiB | 105 | 87 | |
README.link-local | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.3 KiB | 76 | 61 | |
README.lynxkdi | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 58 | 39 | |
README.m54418twr | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 8.7 KiB | 246 | 216 | |
README.malta | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 517 | 17 | 10 | |
README.marvell | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.7 KiB | 99 | 72 | |
README.mediatek | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6.1 KiB | 222 | 138 | |
README.memory-test | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.9 KiB | 99 | 82 | |
README.mpc74xx | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 839 | 23 | 16 | |
README.mpc83xx.ddrecc | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.5 KiB | 155 | 110 | |
README.mpc83xxads | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.2 KiB | 98 | 63 | |
README.mpc85xx | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.9 KiB | 167 | 133 | |
README.mpc85xx-sd-spi-boot | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 76 | 55 | |
README.mpc85xx-spin-table | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.5 KiB | 27 | 23 | |
README.mpc85xxcds | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6.1 KiB | 226 | 167 | |
README.multi-dtb-fit | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.7 KiB | 66 | 59 | |
README.mxc_ocotp | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.6 KiB | 52 | 37 | |
README.nand | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 13.4 KiB | 346 | 278 | |
README.nand-boot-ppc440 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2 KiB | 61 | 44 | |
README.ne2000 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 865 | 28 | 17 | |
README.nokia_rx51 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4 KiB | 95 | 71 | |
README.nvme | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.1 KiB | 85 | 64 | |
README.odroid | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 11.6 KiB | 333 | 283 | |
README.omap-ulpi-viewport | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 899 | 28 | 21 | |
README.omap3 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.3 KiB | 200 | 132 | |
README.pblimage | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.1 KiB | 112 | 94 | |
README.pcap | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.3 KiB | 63 | 50 | |
README.plan9 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 785 | 19 | 14 | |
README.power-framework | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6.5 KiB | 167 | 127 | |
README.pxe | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 10.7 KiB | 259 | 200 | |
README.ramboot-ppc85xx | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.2 KiB | 103 | 85 | |
README.rmobile | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.9 KiB | 99 | 71 | |
README.rockchip | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 21.7 KiB | 704 | 514 | |
README.rockusb | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.6 KiB | 57 | 41 | |
README.s5p4418 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.3 KiB | 64 | 35 | |
README.s5pc1xx | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.2 KiB | 73 | 44 | |
README.sata | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.5 KiB | 69 | 46 | |
README.sched | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.8 KiB | 54 | 37 | |
README.scrapyard | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 697 | 12 | 11 | |
README.semihosting | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 39 | 31 | |
README.serial_multi | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 55 | 39 | |
README.sha1 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.8 KiB | 59 | 39 | |
README.silent | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.3 KiB | 29 | 22 | |
README.socfpga | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 6.3 KiB | 179 | 128 | |
README.spear | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.4 KiB | 75 | 64 | |
README.splashprepare | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.7 KiB | 35 | 28 | |
README.srio-pcie-boot-corenet | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.3 KiB | 119 | 98 | |
README.standalone | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.4 KiB | 121 | 91 | |
README.t1040-l2switch | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.9 KiB | 64 | 58 | |
README.tee | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4 KiB | 113 | 79 | |
README.ti-secure | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 10.2 KiB | 227 | 180 | |
README.ubi | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 7.7 KiB | 259 | 199 | |
README.ubispl | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.1 KiB | 142 | 111 | |
README.ublimage | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 4.4 KiB | 142 | 106 | |
README.udp | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 874 | 36 | 25 | |
README.unaligned-memory-access.txt | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 9.5 KiB | 241 | 186 | |
README.uniphier | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 14 KiB | 463 | 344 | |
README.update | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.9 KiB | 98 | 70 | |
README.usb | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 8.4 KiB | 232 | 181 | |
README.vf610 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 302 | 11 | 7 | |
README.video | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 3.8 KiB | 98 | 72 | |
README.virtio | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 8.9 KiB | 254 | 202 | |
README.vxworks | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.2 KiB | 116 | 90 | |
README.watchdog | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.2 KiB | 34 | 26 | |
README.zfs | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 903 | 30 | 21 | |
bounces | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 180 | 4 | 3 | |
conf.py | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 20.6 KiB | 645 | 235 | |
feature-removal-schedule.txt | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 1.2 KiB | 32 | 24 | |
git-mailrc | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 5.2 KiB | 135 | 118 | |
index.rst | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.6 KiB | 117 | 78 | |
kwboot.1 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 2.5 KiB | 85 | 66 | |
mkimage.1 | A D | 18-Mar-2022 | 7 KiB | 243 | 200 |
README.440-DDR-performance
1AMCC suggested to set the PMU bit to 0 for best performace on the 2PPC440 DDR controller. The 440er common DDR setup files (sdram.c & 3spd_sdram.c) are changed accordingly. So all 440er boards using 4these setup routines will automatically receive this performance 5increase. 6 7Please see below some benchmarks done by AMCC to demonstrate this 8performance changes: 9 10 11---------------------------------------- 12SDRAM0_CFG0[PMU] = 1 (U-Boot default for Bamboo, Yosemite and Yellowstone) 13---------------------------------------- 14Stream benchmark results 15------------------------------------------------------------- 16This system uses 8 bytes per DOUBLE PRECISION word. 17------------------------------------------------------------- 18Array size = 2000000, Offset = 0 19Total memory required = 45.8 MB. 20Each test is run 10 times, but only 21the *best* time for each is used. 22------------------------------------------------------------- 23Your clock granularity/precision appears to be 1 microseconds. 24Each test below will take on the order of 112345 microseconds. 25 (= 112345 clock ticks) 26Increase the size of the arrays if this shows that you are not getting 27at least 20 clock ticks per test. 28------------------------------------------------------------- 29WARNING -- The above is only a rough guideline. 30For best results, please be sure you know the precision of your system 31timer. 32------------------------------------------------------------- 33Function Rate (MB/s) RMS time Min time Max time 34Copy: 256.7683 0.1248 0.1246 0.1250 35Scale: 246.0157 0.1302 0.1301 0.1302 36Add: 255.0316 0.1883 0.1882 0.1885 37Triad: 253.1245 0.1897 0.1896 0.1899 38 39 40TTCP Benchmark Results 41ttcp-t: socket 42ttcp-t: connect 43ttcp-t: buflen=8192, nbuf=2048, align=16384/0, port=5000 tcp -> 44localhost 45ttcp-t: 16777216 bytes in 0.28 real seconds = 454.29 Mbit/sec +++ 46ttcp-t: 2048 I/O calls, msec/call = 0.14, calls/sec = 7268.57 47ttcp-t: 0.0user 0.1sys 0:00real 60% 0i+0d 0maxrss 0+2pf 3+1506csw 48 49---------------------------------------- 50SDRAM0_CFG0[PMU] = 0 (Suggested modification) 51Setting PMU = 0 provides a noticeable performance improvement *2% to 525% improvement in memory performance. 53*Improves the Mbit/sec for TTCP benchmark by almost 76%. 54---------------------------------------- 55Stream benchmark results 56------------------------------------------------------------- 57This system uses 8 bytes per DOUBLE PRECISION word. 58------------------------------------------------------------- 59Array size = 2000000, Offset = 0 60Total memory required = 45.8 MB. 61Each test is run 10 times, but only 62the *best* time for each is used. 63------------------------------------------------------------- 64Your clock granularity/precision appears to be 1 microseconds. 65Each test below will take on the order of 120066 microseconds. 66 (= 120066 clock ticks) 67Increase the size of the arrays if this shows that you are not getting 68at least 20 clock ticks per test. 69------------------------------------------------------------- 70WARNING -- The above is only a rough guideline. 71For best results, please be sure you know the precision of your system 72timer. 73------------------------------------------------------------- 74Function Rate (MB/s) RMS time Min time Max time 75Copy: 262.5167 0.1221 0.1219 0.1223 76Scale: 258.4856 0.1238 0.1238 0.1240 77Add: 262.5404 0.1829 0.1828 0.1831 78Triad: 266.8594 0.1800 0.1799 0.1802 79 80TTCP Benchmark Results 81ttcp-t: socket 82ttcp-t: connect 83ttcp-t: buflen=8192, nbuf=2048, align=16384/0, port=5000 tcp -> 84localhost 85ttcp-t: 16777216 bytes in 0.16 real seconds = 804.06 Mbit/sec +++ 86ttcp-t: 2048 I/O calls, msec/call = 0.08, calls/sec = 12864.89 87ttcp-t: 0.0user 0.0sys 0:00real 46% 0i+0d 0maxrss 0+2pf 120+1csw 88 89 902006-07-28, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de> 91
README.AMCC-eval-boards-cleanup
1--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2Cleanup of AMCC eval boards (Walnut/Sycamore, Bubinga, Ebony, Ocotea) 3--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 5Changes to all AMCC eval boards: 6-------------------------------- 7 8o Changed u-boot image size to 256 kBytes instead of 512 kBytes on most 9 boards. 10 11o Use 115200 baud as default console baudrate. 12 13o Added config option to use redundant environment in flash. This is also 14 the default setting. Option for environment in nvram is still available 15 for backward compatibility. 16 17o Merged board specific flash drivers to common flash driver: 18 board/amcc/common/flash.c 19 20 21Sycamore/Walnut (one port supporting both eval boards): 22------------------------------------------------------- 23 24o Cleanup to allow easier "cloning" for different (custom) boards: 25 26 o Moved EBC configuration from board specific asm-file "init.S" 27 using defines in board configuration file. No board specific 28 asm file needed anymore. 29 30 31August 01 2005, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de> 32
README.Heterogeneous-SoCs
1DSP side awareness for Freescale heterogeneous multicore chips based on 2StarCore and Power Architecture 3=============================================================== 4powerpc/mpc85xx code ve APIs and function to get the number, 5configuration and frequencies of all PowerPC cores and devices 6connected to them, but it didnt have the similar code ofr HEterogeneous 7SC3900/DSP cores and such devices like CPRI, MAPLE, MAPLE-ULB etc. 8 9Code for DSP side awareness provides such functionality for Freescale 10Heterogeneous SoCs which are chasis-2 compliant like B4860 and B4420 11 12As part of this feature, following changes have been made: 13========================================================== 14 151. Changed files: 16================= 17- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc85xx/cpu.c 18 19Code added in this file to print the DSP cores and other device's(CPRI, 20MAPLE etc) frequencies 21 22- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc85xx/speed.c 23 24Added Defines and code to extract the frequncy information for all 25required cores and devices from RCW and System frequency 26 27- arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xxx/cpu.c 28 29Added API to get the number of SC cores in running system and Their BIT 30MASK, similar to the code written for PowerPC 31 32- arch/powerpc/include/asm/config_mpc85xx.h 33 34Added top level CONFIG to identify presence of HETEROGENUOUS clusters 35in the system and CONFIGS for SC3900/DSP components 36 37- arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h 38- include/common.h 39 40Added newly added Functions Declaration 41 42- include/e500.h 43 44Global structure updated for dsp cores and other components 45 462. CONFIGs ADDED 47================ 48 49CONFIG_HETROGENOUS_CLUSTERS - Define for checking the presence of 50 DSP/SC3900 core clusters 51 52CONFIG_SYS_FSL_NUM_CC_PLLS - Define for number of PLLs 53 54Though there are only 4 PLLs in B4, but in sequence of PLLs from PLL1 - 55PLL5, PLL3 is Reserved(as mentioned in RM), so this define contains the 56value as 5 not 4, to iterate over all PLLs while coding 57 58CONFIG_SYS_MAPLE - Define for MAPLE Baseband Accelerator 59CONFIG_SYS_CPRI - Define for CPRI Interface 60CONFIG_PPC_CLUSTER_START - Start index of ppc clusters 61CONFIG_DSP_CLUSTER_START - Start index of dsp clusters 62 63Following are the defines for PLL's index that provide the Clocking to 64CPRI, ULB and ETVE components 65 66CONFIG_SYS_CPRI_CLK - Define PLL index for CPRI clock 67CONFIG_SYS_ULB_CLK - Define PLL index for ULB clock 68CONFIG_SYS_ETVPE_CLK - Define PLL index for ETVPE clock 69 703. Changes in MPC85xx_SYS_INFO Global structure 71=============================================== 72 73DSP cores and other device's components have been added in this structure. 74 75freq_processor_dsp[CONFIG_MAX_DSP_CPUS] - Array to contain the DSP core's frequencies 76freq_cpri - To store CPRI frequency 77freq_maple - To store MAPLE frequency 78freq_maple_ulb - To store MAPLE-ULB frequency 79freq_maple_etvpe - To store MAPLE-eTVPE frequency 80 814. U-BOOT LOGS 82============== 834.1 B4860QDS board 84 Boot from NOR flash 85 86U-Boot 2014.07-00222-g70587a8-dirty (Aug 07 2014 - 13:15:47) 87 88CPU0: B4860E, Version: 2.0, (0x86880020) 89Core: e6500, Version: 2.0, (0x80400020) Clock Configuration: 90 CPU0:1600 MHz, CPU1:1600 MHz, CPU2:1600 MHz, CPU3:1600 MHz, 91 DSP CPU0:1200 MHz, DSP CPU1:1200 MHz, DSP CPU2:1200 MHz, DSP CPU3:1200 MHz, 92 DSP CPU4:1200 MHz, DSP CPU5:1200 MHz, 93 CCB:666.667 MHz, 94 DDR:933.333 MHz (1866.667 MT/s data rate) (Asynchronous), IFC:166.667 MHz 95 CPRI:600 MHz 96 MAPLE:600 MHz, MAPLE-ULB:800 MHz, MAPLE-eTVPE:1000 MHz 97 FMAN1: 666.667 MHz 98 QMAN: 333.333 MHz 99 100CPUn - PowerPC core 101DSP CPUn - SC3900 core 102 103Shaveta Leekha(shaveta@freescale.com) 104Created August 7, 2014 105=========================================== 106
README.JFFS2
1JFFS2 options and usage. 2----------------------- 3 4JFFS2 in U-Boot is a read only implementation of the file system in 5Linux with the same name. To use JFFS2 define CONFIG_CMD_JFFS2. 6 7The module adds three new commands. 8fsload - load binary file from a file system image 9fsinfo - print information about file systems 10ls - list files in a directory 11chpart - change active partition 12 13If you do now need the commands, you can enable the filesystem separately 14with CONFIG_FS_JFFS2 and call the jffs2 functions yourself. 15 16If you boot from a partition which is mounted writable, and you 17update your boot environment by replacing single files on that 18partition, you should also define CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_SORT_FRAGMENTS. Scanning 19the JFFS2 filesystem takes *much* longer with this feature, though. 20Sorting is done while inserting into the fragment list, which is 21more or less a bubble sort. That algorithm is known to be O(n^2), 22thus you should really consider if you can avoid it! 23 24 25There only one way for JFFS2 to find the disk. It uses the flash_info 26structure to find the start of a JFFS2 disk (called partition in the code) 27and you can change where the partition is with two defines. 28 29CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK 30 defined the first flash bank to use 31 32CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR 33 defines the first sector to use 34--- 35 36TODO. 37 38 Remove the assumption that JFFS can dereference a pointer 39 into the disk. The current code do not work with memory holes 40 or hardware with a sliding window (PCMCIA). 41
README.JFFS2_NAND
1JFFS2 NAND support: 2 3To enable, use the following #define in the board configuration file: 4 5#define CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND 6 7Configuration of partitions is similar to how this is done in U-Boot 8for JFFS2 on top NOR flash. 9
README.LED
1Status LED 2======================================== 3 4This README describes the status LED API. 5 6The API is defined by the include file include/status_led.h 7 8The first step is to enable CONFIG_LED_STATUS in menuconfig: 9> Device Drivers > LED Support. 10 11If the LED support is only for specific board, enable 12CONFIG_LED_STATUS_BOARD_SPECIFIC in the menuconfig. 13 14Status LEDS 0 to 5 are enabled by the following configurations at menuconfig: 15CONFIG_STATUS_LED0, CONFIG_STATUS_LED1, ... CONFIG_STATUS_LED5 16 17The following should be configured for each of the enabled LEDs: 18CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT<n> 19CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE<n> 20CONFIG_STATUS_LED_FREQ<n> 21Where <n> is an integer 1 through 5 (empty for 0). 22 23CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT is passed into the __led_* functions to identify which LED 24is being acted on. As such, the value choose must be unique with with respect to 25the other CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BIT's. Mapping the value to a physical LED is the 26reponsiblity of the __led_* function. 27 28CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE is the initial state of the LED. It should be set to one 29of these values: CONFIG_LED_STATUS_OFF or CONFIG_LED_STATUS_ON. 30 31CONFIG_STATUS_LED_FREQ determines the LED blink frequency. 32Values range from 2 to 10. 33 34Some other LED macros 35--------------------- 36 37CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BOOT is the LED to light when the board is booting. 38This must be a valid LED number (0-5). 39 40CONFIG_STATUS_LED_RED is the red LED. It is used to signal errors. This must be 41a valid LED number (0-5). Other similar color LED's macros are 42CONFIG_STATUS_LED_GREEN, CONFIG_STATUS_LED_YELLOW and CONFIG_STATUS_LED_BLUE. 43 44General LED functions 45--------------------- 46The following functions should be defined: 47 48__led_init is called once to initialize the LED to CONFIG_STATUS_LED_STATE. 49One time start up code should be placed here. 50 51__led_set is called to change the state of the LED. 52 53__led_toggle is called to toggle the current state of the LED. 54 55Colour LED 56======================================== 57 58Colour LED's are at present only used by ARM. 59 60The functions names explain their purpose. 61 62coloured_LED_init 63red_LED_on 64red_LED_off 65green_LED_on 66green_LED_off 67yellow_LED_on 68yellow_LED_off 69blue_LED_on 70blue_LED_off 71 72These are weakly defined in arch/arm/lib/board.c to noops. Where applicable, define 73these functions in the board specific source. 74 75TBD : Describe older board dependent macros similar to what is done for 76 77TBD : Describe general support via asm/status_led.h 78
README.OFT
1Open Firmware Flat Tree and usage. 2---------------------------------- 3 4As part of the ongoing cleanup of the Linux PPC trees, the preferred 5way to pass bootloader and board setup information is the open 6firmware flat tree. 7 8Please take a look at the following email discussion for some 9background. 10 11 http://ozlabs.org/pipermail/linuxppc-dev/2005-August/019408.html 12 http://ozlabs.org/pipermail/linuxppc-dev/2005-August/019362.html 13 14The generated tree is part static and part dynamic. 15 16There is a static part which is compiled in with DTC and a dynamic 17part which is programmatically appended. 18 19You'll need a fairly recent DTC tool, which is available by git at 20 21 rsync://ozlabs.org/dtc/dtc.git 22 23The xxd binary dumper is needed too which I got from 24 25 ftp://ftp.uni-erlangen.de/pub/utilities/etc/xxd-1.10.tar.gz 26 27 28Pantelis Antoniou, 13 Oct 2005 29
README.POST
1Power-On-Self-Test support in U-Boot 2------------------------------------ 3 4This project is to support Power-On-Self-Test (POST) in U-Boot. 5 61. High-level requirements 7 8The key requirements for this project are as follows: 9 101) The project shall develop a flexible framework for implementing 11 and running Power-On-Self-Test in U-Boot. This framework shall 12 possess the following features: 13 14 o) Extensibility 15 16 The framework shall allow adding/removing/replacing POST tests. 17 Also, standalone POST tests shall be supported. 18 19 o) Configurability 20 21 The framework shall allow run-time configuration of the lists 22 of tests running on normal/power-fail booting. 23 24 o) Controllability 25 26 The framework shall support manual running of the POST tests. 27 282) The results of tests shall be saved so that it will be possible to 29 retrieve them from Linux. 30 313) The following POST tests shall be developed for MPC823E-based 32 boards: 33 34 o) CPU test 35 o) Cache test 36 o) Memory test 37 o) Ethernet test 38 o) Serial channels test 39 o) Watchdog timer test 40 o) RTC test 41 o) I2C test 42 o) SPI test 43 o) USB test 44 454) The LWMON board shall be used for reference. 46 472. Design 48 49This section details the key points of the design for the project. 50The whole project can be divided into two independent tasks: 51enhancing U-Boot/Linux to provide a common framework for running POST 52tests and developing such tests for particular hardware. 53 542.1. Hardware-independent POST layer 55 56A new optional module will be added to U-Boot, which will run POST 57tests and collect their results at boot time. Also, U-Boot will 58support running POST tests manually at any time by executing a 59special command from the system console. 60 61The list of available POST tests will be configured at U-Boot build 62time. The POST layer will allow the developer to add any custom POST 63tests. All POST tests will be divided into the following groups: 64 65 1) Tests running on power-on booting only 66 67 This group will contain those tests that run only once on 68 power-on reset (e.g. watchdog test) 69 70 2) Tests running on normal booting only 71 72 This group will contain those tests that do not take much 73 time and can be run on the regular basis (e.g. CPU test) 74 75 3) Tests running in special "slow test mode" only 76 77 This group will contain POST tests that consume much time 78 and cannot be run regularly (e.g. strong memory test, I2C test) 79 80 4) Manually executed tests 81 82 This group will contain those tests that can be run manually. 83 84If necessary, some tests may belong to several groups simultaneously. 85For example, SDRAM test may run in both normal and "slow test" mode. 86In normal mode, SDRAM test may perform a fast superficial memory test 87only, while running in slow test mode it may perform a full memory 88check-up. 89 90Also, all tests will be discriminated by the moment they run at. 91Specifically, the following groups will be singled out: 92 93 1) Tests running before relocating to RAM 94 95 These tests will run immediately after initializing RAM 96 as to enable modifying it without taking care of its 97 contents. Basically, this group will contain memory tests 98 only. 99 100 2) Tests running after relocating to RAM 101 102 These tests will run immediately before entering the main 103 loop as to guarantee full hardware initialization. 104 105The POST layer will also distinguish a special group of tests that 106may cause system rebooting (e.g. watchdog test). For such tests, the 107layer will automatically detect rebooting and will notify the test 108about it. 109 1102.1.1. POST layer interfaces 111 112This section details the interfaces between the POST layer and the 113rest of U-Boot. 114 115The following flags will be defined: 116 117#define POST_POWERON 0x01 /* test runs on power-on booting */ 118#define POST_NORMAL 0x02 /* test runs on normal booting */ 119#define POST_SLOWTEST 0x04 /* test is slow, enabled by key press */ 120#define POST_POWERTEST 0x08 /* test runs after watchdog reset */ 121#define POST_ROM 0x100 /* test runs in ROM */ 122#define POST_RAM 0x200 /* test runs in RAM */ 123#define POST_MANUAL 0x400 /* test can be executed manually */ 124#define POST_REBOOT 0x800 /* test may cause rebooting */ 125#define POST_PREREL 0x1000 /* test runs before relocation */ 126 127The POST layer will export the following interface routines: 128 129 o) int post_run(struct bd_info *bd, char *name, int flags); 130 131 This routine will run the test (or the group of tests) specified 132 by the name and flag arguments. More specifically, if the name 133 argument is not NULL, the test with this name will be performed, 134 otherwise all tests running in ROM/RAM (depending on the flag 135 argument) will be executed. This routine will be called at least 136 twice with name set to NULL, once from board_init_f() and once 137 from board_init_r(). The flags argument will also specify the 138 mode the test is executed in (power-on, normal, power-fail, 139 manual). 140 141 o) void post_reloc(ulong offset); 142 143 This routine will be called from board_init_r() and will 144 relocate the POST test table. 145 146 o) int post_info(char *name); 147 148 This routine will print the list of all POST tests that can be 149 executed manually if name is NULL, and the description of a 150 particular test if name is not NULL. 151 152 o) int post_log(char *format, ...); 153 154 This routine will be called from POST tests to log their 155 results. Basically, this routine will print the results to 156 stderr. The format of the arguments and the return value 157 will be identical to the printf() routine. 158 159Also, the following board-specific routines will be called from the 160U-Boot common code: 161 162 o) int post_hotkeys_pressed(gd_t *gd) 163 164 This routine will scan the keyboard to detect if a magic key 165 combination has been pressed, or otherwise detect if the 166 power-on long-running tests shall be executed or not ("normal" 167 versus "slow" test mode). 168 169The list of available POST tests be kept in the post_tests array 170filled at U-Boot build time. The format of entry in this array will 171be as follows: 172 173struct post_test { 174 char *name; 175 char *cmd; 176 char *desc; 177 int flags; 178 int (*test)(struct bd_info *bd, int flags); 179}; 180 181 o) name 182 183 This field will contain a short name of the test, which will be 184 used in logs and on listing POST tests (e.g. CPU test). 185 186 o) cmd 187 188 This field will keep a name for identifying the test on manual 189 testing (e.g. cpu). For more information, refer to section 190 "Command line interface". 191 192 o) desc 193 194 This field will contain a detailed description of the test, 195 which will be printed on user request. For more information, see 196 section "Command line interface". 197 198 o) flags 199 200 This field will contain a combination of the bit flags described 201 above, which will specify the mode the test is running in 202 (power-on, normal, power-fail or manual mode), the moment it 203 should be run at (before or after relocating to RAM), whether it 204 can cause system rebooting or not. 205 206 o) test 207 208 This field will contain a pointer to the routine that will 209 perform the test, which will take 2 arguments. The first 210 argument will be a pointer to the board info structure, while 211 the second will be a combination of bit flags specifying the 212 mode the test is running in (POST_POWERON, POST_NORMAL, 213 POST_SLOWTEST, POST_MANUAL) and whether the last execution of 214 the test caused system rebooting (POST_REBOOT). The routine will 215 return 0 on successful execution of the test, and 1 if the test 216 failed. 217 218The lists of the POST tests that should be run at power-on/normal/ 219power-fail booting will be kept in the environment. Namely, the 220following environment variables will be used: post_poweron, 221powet_normal, post_slowtest. 222 2232.1.2. Test results 224 225The results of tests will be collected by the POST layer. The POST 226log will have the following format: 227 228... 229-------------------------------------------- 230START <name> 231<test-specific output> 232[PASSED|FAILED] 233-------------------------------------------- 234... 235 236Basically, the results of tests will be printed to stderr. This 237feature may be enhanced in future to spool the log to a serial line, 238save it in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM), transfer it to a dedicated 239storage server and etc. 240 2412.1.3. Integration issues 242 243All POST-related code will be #ifdef'ed with the CONFIG_POST macro. 244This macro will be defined in the config_<board>.h file for those 245boards that need POST. The CONFIG_POST macro will contain the list of 246POST tests for the board. The macro will have the format of array 247composed of post_test structures: 248 249#define CONFIG_POST \ 250 { 251 "On-board peripherals test", "board", \ 252 " This test performs full check-up of the " \ 253 "on-board hardware.", \ 254 POST_RAM | POST_SLOWTEST, \ 255 &board_post_test \ 256 } 257 258A new file, post.h, will be created in the include/ directory. This 259file will contain common POST declarations and will define a set of 260macros that will be reused for defining CONFIG_POST. As an example, 261the following macro may be defined: 262 263#define POST_CACHE \ 264 { 265 "Cache test", "cache", \ 266 " This test verifies the CPU cache operation.", \ 267 POST_RAM | POST_NORMAL, \ 268 &cache_post_test \ 269 } 270 271A new subdirectory will be created in the U-Boot root directory. It 272will contain the source code of the POST layer and most of POST 273tests. Each POST test in this directory will be placed into a 274separate file (it will be needed for building standalone tests). Some 275POST tests (mainly those for testing peripheral devices) will be 276located in the source files of the drivers for those devices. This 277way will be used only if the test subtantially uses the driver. 278 2792.1.4. Standalone tests 280 281The POST framework will allow to develop and run standalone tests. A 282user-space library will be developed to provide the POST interface 283functions to standalone tests. 284 2852.1.5. Command line interface 286 287A new command, diag, will be added to U-Boot. This command will be 288used for listing all available hardware tests, getting detailed 289descriptions of them and running these tests. 290 291More specifically, being run without any arguments, this command will 292print the list of all available hardware tests: 293 294=> diag 295Available hardware tests: 296 cache - cache test 297 cpu - CPU test 298 enet - SCC/FCC ethernet test 299Use 'diag [<test1> [<test2>]] ... ' to get more info. 300Use 'diag run [<test1> [<test2>]] ... ' to run tests. 301=> 302 303If the first argument to the diag command is not 'run', detailed 304descriptions of the specified tests will be printed: 305 306=> diag cpu cache 307cpu - CPU test 308 This test verifies the arithmetic logic unit of CPU. 309cache - cache test 310 This test verifies the CPU cache operation. 311=> 312 313If the first argument to diag is 'run', the specified tests will be 314executed. If no tests are specified, all available tests will be 315executed. 316 317It will be prohibited to execute tests running in ROM manually. The 318'diag' command will not display such tests and/or run them. 319 3202.1.6. Power failure handling 321 322The Linux kernel will be modified to detect power failures and 323automatically reboot the system in such cases. It will be assumed 324that the power failure causes a system interrupt. 325 326To perform correct system shutdown, the kernel will register a 327handler of the power-fail IRQ on booting. Being called, the handler 328will run /sbin/reboot using the call_usermodehelper() routine. 329/sbin/reboot will automatically bring the system down in a secure 330way. This feature will be configured in/out from the kernel 331configuration file. 332 333The POST layer of U-Boot will check whether the system runs in 334power-fail mode. If it does, the system will be powered off after 335executing all hardware tests. 336 3372.1.7. Hazardous tests 338 339Some tests may cause system rebooting during their execution. For 340some tests, this will indicate a failure, while for the Watchdog 341test, this means successful operation of the timer. 342 343In order to support such tests, the following scheme will be 344implemented. All the tests that may cause system rebooting will have 345the POST_REBOOT bit flag set in the flag field of the correspondent 346post_test structure. Before starting tests marked with this bit flag, 347the POST layer will store an identification number of the test in a 348location in IMMR. On booting, the POST layer will check the value of 349this variable and if it is set will skip over the tests preceding the 350failed one. On second execution of the failed test, the POST_REBOOT 351bit flag will be set in the flag argument to the test routine. This 352will allow to detect system rebooting on the previous iteration. For 353example, the watchdog timer test may have the following 354declaration/body: 355 356... 357#define POST_WATCHDOG \ 358 { 359 "Watchdog timer test", "watchdog", \ 360 " This test checks the watchdog timer.", \ 361 POST_RAM | POST_POWERON | POST_REBOOT, \ 362 &watchdog_post_test \ 363 } 364... 365 366... 367int watchdog_post_test(struct bd_info *bd, int flags) 368{ 369 unsigned long start_time; 370 371 if (flags & POST_REBOOT) { 372 /* Test passed */ 373 return 0; 374 } else { 375 /* disable interrupts */ 376 disable_interrupts(); 377 /* 10-second delay */ 378 ... 379 /* if we've reached this, the watchdog timer does not work */ 380 enable_interrupts(); 381 return 1; 382 } 383} 384... 385 3862.2. Hardware-specific details 387 388This project will also develop a set of POST tests for MPC8xx- based 389systems. This section provides technical details of how it will be 390done. 391 3922.2.1. Generic PPC tests 393 394The following generic POST tests will be developed: 395 396 o) CPU test 397 398 This test will check the arithmetic logic unit (ALU) of CPU. The 399 test will take several milliseconds and will run on normal 400 booting. 401 402 o) Cache test 403 404 This test will verify the CPU cache (L1 cache). The test will 405 run on normal booting. 406 407 o) Memory test 408 409 This test will examine RAM and check it for errors. The test 410 will always run on booting. On normal booting, only a limited 411 amount of RAM will be checked. On power-fail booting a fool 412 memory check-up will be performed. 413 4142.2.1.1. CPU test 415 416This test will verify the following ALU instructions: 417 418 o) Condition register istructions 419 420 This group will contain: mtcrf, mfcr, mcrxr, crand, crandc, 421 cror, crorc, crxor, crnand, crnor, creqv, mcrf. 422 423 The mtcrf/mfcr instructions will be tested by loading different 424 values into the condition register (mtcrf), moving its value to 425 a general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing this value with 426 the expected one. The mcrxr instruction will be tested by 427 loading a fixed value into the XER register (mtspr), moving XER 428 value to the condition register (mcrxr), moving it to a 429 general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing the value of this 430 register with the expected one. The rest of instructions will be 431 tested by loading a fixed value into the condition register 432 (mtcrf), executing each instruction several times to modify all 433 4-bit condition fields, moving the value of the conditional 434 register to a general-purpose register (mfcr) and comparing it 435 with the expected one. 436 437 o) Integer compare instructions 438 439 This group will contain: cmp, cmpi, cmpl, cmpli. 440 441 To verify these instructions the test will run them with 442 different combinations of operands, read the condition register 443 value and compare it with the expected one. More specifically, 444 the test will contain a pre-built table containing the 445 description of each test case: the instruction, the values of 446 the operands, the condition field to save the result in and the 447 expected result. 448 449 o) Arithmetic instructions 450 451 This group will contain: add, addc, adde, addme, addze, subf, 452 subfc, subfe, subme, subze, mullw, mulhw, mulhwu, divw, divwu, 453 extsb, extsh. 454 455 The test will contain a pre-built table of instructions, 456 operands, expected results and expected states of the condition 457 register. For each table entry, the test will cyclically use 458 different sets of operand registers and result registers. For 459 example, for instructions that use 3 registers on the first 460 iteration r0/r1 will be used as operands and r2 for result. On 461 the second iteration, r1/r2 will be used as operands and r3 as 462 for result and so on. This will enable to verify all 463 general-purpose registers. 464 465 o) Logic instructions 466 467 This group will contain: and, andc, andi, andis, or, orc, ori, 468 oris, xor, xori, xoris, nand, nor, neg, eqv, cntlzw. 469 470 The test scheme will be identical to that from the previous 471 point. 472 473 o) Shift instructions 474 475 This group will contain: slw, srw, sraw, srawi, rlwinm, rlwnm, 476 rlwimi 477 478 The test scheme will be identical to that from the previous 479 point. 480 481 o) Branch instructions 482 483 This group will contain: b, bl, bc. 484 485 The first 2 instructions (b, bl) will be verified by jumping to 486 a fixed address and checking whether control was transferred to 487 that very point. For the bl instruction the value of the link 488 register will be checked as well (using mfspr). To verify the bc 489 instruction various combinations of the BI/BO fields, the CTR 490 and the condition register values will be checked. The list of 491 such combinations will be pre-built and linked in U-Boot at 492 build time. 493 494 o) Load/store instructions 495 496 This group will contain: lbz(x)(u), lhz(x)(u), lha(x)(u), 497 lwz(x)(u), stb(x)(u), sth(x)(u), stw(x)(u). 498 499 All operations will be performed on a 16-byte array. The array 500 will be 4-byte aligned. The base register will point to offset 501 8. The immediate offset (index register) will range in [-8 ... 502 +7]. The test cases will be composed so that they will not cause 503 alignment exceptions. The test will contain a pre-built table 504 describing all test cases. For store instructions, the table 505 entry will contain: the instruction opcode, the value of the 506 index register and the value of the source register. After 507 executing the instruction, the test will verify the contents of 508 the array and the value of the base register (it must change for 509 "store with update" instructions). For load instructions, the 510 table entry will contain: the instruction opcode, the array 511 contents, the value of the index register and the expected value 512 of the destination register. After executing the instruction, 513 the test will verify the value of the destination register and 514 the value of the base register (it must change for "load with 515 update" instructions). 516 517 o) Load/store multiple/string instructions 518 519 520The CPU test will run in RAM in order to allow run-time modification 521of the code to reduce the memory footprint. 522 5232.2.1.2 Special-Purpose Registers Tests 524 525TBD. 526 5272.2.1.3. Cache test 528 529To verify the data cache operation the following test scenarios will 530be used: 531 532 1) Basic test #1 533 534 - turn on the data cache 535 - switch the data cache to write-back or write-through mode 536 - invalidate the data cache 537 - write the negative pattern to a cached area 538 - read the area 539 540 The negative pattern must be read at the last step 541 542 2) Basic test #2 543 544 - turn on the data cache 545 - switch the data cache to write-back or write-through mode 546 - invalidate the data cache 547 - write the zero pattern to a cached area 548 - turn off the data cache 549 - write the negative pattern to the area 550 - turn on the data cache 551 - read the area 552 553 The negative pattern must be read at the last step 554 555 3) Write-through mode test 556 557 - turn on the data cache 558 - switch the data cache to write-through mode 559 - invalidate the data cache 560 - write the zero pattern to a cached area 561 - flush the data cache 562 - write the negative pattern to the area 563 - turn off the data cache 564 - read the area 565 566 The negative pattern must be read at the last step 567 568 4) Write-back mode test 569 570 - turn on the data cache 571 - switch the data cache to write-back mode 572 - invalidate the data cache 573 - write the negative pattern to a cached area 574 - flush the data cache 575 - write the zero pattern to the area 576 - invalidate the data cache 577 - read the area 578 579 The negative pattern must be read at the last step 580 581To verify the instruction cache operation the following test 582scenarios will be used: 583 584 1) Basic test #1 585 586 - turn on the instruction cache 587 - unlock the entire instruction cache 588 - invalidate the instruction cache 589 - lock a branch instruction in the instruction cache 590 - replace the branch instruction with "nop" 591 - jump to the branch instruction 592 - check that the branch instruction was executed 593 594 2) Basic test #2 595 596 - turn on the instruction cache 597 - unlock the entire instruction cache 598 - invalidate the instruction cache 599 - jump to a branch instruction 600 - check that the branch instruction was executed 601 - replace the branch instruction with "nop" 602 - invalidate the instruction cache 603 - jump to the branch instruction 604 - check that the "nop" instruction was executed 605 606The CPU test will run in RAM in order to allow run-time modification 607of the code. 608 6092.2.1.4. Memory test 610 611The memory test will verify RAM using sequential writes and reads 612to/from RAM. Specifically, there will be several test cases that will 613use different patterns to verify RAM. Each test case will first fill 614a region of RAM with one pattern and then read the region back and 615compare its contents with the pattern. The following patterns will be 616used: 617 618 1) zero pattern (0x00000000) 619 2) negative pattern (0xffffffff) 620 3) checkerboard pattern (0x55555555, 0xaaaaaaaa) 621 4) bit-flip pattern ((1 << (offset % 32)), ~(1 << (offset % 32))) 622 5) address pattern (offset, ~offset) 623 624Patterns #1, #2 will help to find unstable bits. Patterns #3, #4 will 625be used to detect adherent bits, i.e. bits whose state may randomly 626change if adjacent bits are modified. The last pattern will be used 627to detect far-located errors, i.e. situations when writing to one 628location modifies an area located far from it. Also, usage of the 629last pattern will help to detect memory controller misconfigurations 630when RAM represents a cyclically repeated portion of a smaller size. 631 632Being run in normal mode, the test will verify only small 4Kb regions 633of RAM around each 1Mb boundary. For example, for 64Mb RAM the 634following areas will be verified: 0x00000000-0x00000800, 6350x000ff800-0x00100800, 0x001ff800-0x00200800, ..., 0x03fff800- 6360x04000000. If the test is run in power-fail mode, it will verify the 637whole RAM. 638 639The memory test will run in ROM before relocating U-Boot to RAM in 640order to allow RAM modification without saving its contents. 641 6422.2.2. Common tests 643 644This section describes tests that are not based on any hardware 645peculiarities and use common U-Boot interfaces only. These tests do 646not need any modifications for porting them to another board/CPU. 647 6482.2.2.1. I2C test 649 650For verifying the I2C bus, a full I2C bus scanning will be performed 651using the i2c_probe() routine. If a board defines 652CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS the I2C test will pass if all devices 653listed in CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS are found, and no additional 654devices are detected. If CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS is not defined 655the test will pass if any I2C device is found. 656 657The CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_IGNORES define can be used to list I2C 658devices which may or may not be present when using 659CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_ADDRS. The I2C POST test will pass regardless 660if the devices in CONFIG_SYS_POST_I2C_IGNORES are found or not. 661This is useful in cases when I2C devices are optional (eg on a 662daughtercard that may or may not be present) or not critical 663to board operation. 664 6652.2.2.2. Watchdog timer test 666 667To test the watchdog timer the scheme mentioned above (refer to 668section "Hazardous tests") will be used. Namely, this test will be 669marked with the POST_REBOOT bit flag. On the first iteration, the 670test routine will make a 10-second delay. If the system does not 671reboot during this delay, the watchdog timer is not operational and 672the test fails. If the system reboots, on the second iteration the 673POST_REBOOT bit will be set in the flag argument to the test routine. 674The test routine will check this bit and report a success if it is 675set. 676 6772.2.2.3. RTC test 678 679The RTC test will use the rtc_get()/rtc_set() routines. The following 680features will be verified: 681 682 o) Time uniformity 683 684 This will be verified by reading RTC in polling within a short 685 period of time (5-10 seconds). 686 687 o) Passing month boundaries 688 689 This will be checked by setting RTC to a second before a month 690 boundary and reading it after its passing the boundary. The test 691 will be performed for both leap- and nonleap-years. 692 6932.2.3. MPC8xx peripherals tests 694 695This project will develop a set of tests verifying the peripheral 696units of MPC8xx processors. Namely, the following controllers of the 697MPC8xx communication processor module (CPM) will be tested: 698 699 o) Serial Management Controllers (SMC) 700 701 o) Serial Communication Controllers (SCC) 702 7032.2.3.1. Ethernet tests (SCC) 704 705The internal (local) loopback mode will be used to test SCC. To do 706that the controllers will be configured accordingly and several 707packets will be transmitted. These tests may be enhanced in future to 708use external loopback for testing. That will need appropriate 709reconfiguration of the physical interface chip. 710 711The test routines for the SCC ethernet tests will be located in 712arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/scc.c. 713 7142.2.3.2. UART tests (SMC/SCC) 715 716To perform these tests the internal (local) loopback mode will be 717used. The SMC/SCC controllers will be configured to connect the 718transmitter output to the receiver input. After that, several bytes 719will be transmitted. These tests may be enhanced to make to perform 720"external" loopback test using a loopback cable. In this case, the 721test will be executed manually. 722 723The test routine for the SMC/SCC UART tests will be located in 724arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/serial.c. 725 7262.2.3.3. USB test 727 728TBD 729 7302.2.3.4. SPI test 731 732TBD 733
README.SNTP
1To use SNTP support, add define CONFIG_CMD_SNTP to the 2configuration file of the board. 3 4The "sntp" command gets network time from NTP time server and 5syncronize RTC of the board. This command needs the command line 6parameter of server's IP address or environment variable 7"ntpserverip". The network time is sent as UTC. So if you want to 8set local time to RTC, set the offset in second from UTC to the 9environment variable "time offset". 10 11If the DHCP server provides time server's IP or time offset, you 12don't need to set the above environment variables yourself. 13 14Current limitations of SNTP support: 151. The roundtrip time is ignored. 162. Only the 1st NTP server IP, in the option ntp-servers of DHCP, will 17 be used. 18
README.SPL
1Generic SPL framework 2===================== 3 4Overview 5-------- 6 7To unify all existing implementations for a secondary program loader (SPL) 8and to allow simply adding of new implementations this generic SPL framework 9has been created. With this framework almost all source files for a board 10can be reused. No code duplication or symlinking is necessary anymore. 11 12 13How it works 14------------ 15 16The object files for SPL are built separately and placed in the "spl" directory. 17The final binaries which are generated are u-boot-spl, u-boot-spl.bin and 18u-boot-spl.map. 19 20A config option named CONFIG_SPL_BUILD is enabled by Kconfig for SPL. 21Source files can therefore be compiled for SPL with different settings. 22 23For example: 24 25ifeq ($(CONFIG_SPL_BUILD),y) 26obj-y += board_spl.o 27else 28obj-y += board.o 29endif 30 31obj-$(CONFIG_SPL_BUILD) += foo.o 32 33#ifdef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD 34 foo(); 35#endif 36 37 38The building of SPL images can be enabled by CONFIG_SPL option in Kconfig. 39 40Because SPL images normally have a different text base, one has to be 41configured by defining CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE. The linker script has to be 42defined with CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT. 43 44To support generic U-Boot libraries and drivers in the SPL binary one can 45optionally define CONFIG_SPL_XXX_SUPPORT. Currently following options 46are supported: 47 48CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT (common/libcommon.o) 49CONFIG_SPL_LIBDISK_SUPPORT (disk/libdisk.o) 50CONFIG_SPL_I2C_SUPPORT (drivers/i2c/libi2c.o) 51CONFIG_SPL_GPIO_SUPPORT (drivers/gpio/libgpio.o) 52CONFIG_SPL_MMC_SUPPORT (drivers/mmc/libmmc.o) 53CONFIG_SPL_SERIAL_SUPPORT (drivers/serial/libserial.o) 54CONFIG_SPL_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT (drivers/mtd/spi/libspi_flash.o) 55CONFIG_SPL_SPI_SUPPORT (drivers/spi/libspi.o) 56CONFIG_SPL_FS_FAT (fs/fat/libfat.o) 57CONFIG_SPL_FS_EXT4 58CONFIG_SPL_LIBGENERIC_SUPPORT (lib/libgeneric.o) 59CONFIG_SPL_POWER_SUPPORT (drivers/power/libpower.o) 60CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SUPPORT (drivers/mtd/nand/raw/libnand.o) 61CONFIG_SPL_DRIVERS_MISC_SUPPORT (drivers/misc) 62CONFIG_SPL_DMA (drivers/dma/libdma.o) 63CONFIG_SPL_POST_MEM_SUPPORT (post/drivers/memory.o) 64CONFIG_SPL_NAND_LOAD (drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_spl_load.o) 65CONFIG_SPL_SPI_LOAD (drivers/mtd/spi/spi_spl_load.o) 66CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE (common/spl/spl.c) 67CONFIG_SPL_WATCHDOG_SUPPORT (drivers/watchdog/libwatchdog.o) 68 69Device tree 70----------- 71The U-Boot device tree is filtered by the fdtgrep tools during the build 72process to generate a much smaller device tree used in SPL (spl/u-boot-spl.dtb) 73with: 74- the mandatory nodes (/alias, /chosen, /config) 75- the nodes with one pre-relocation property: 76 'u-boot,dm-pre-reloc' or 'u-boot,dm-spl' 77 78fdtgrep is also used to remove: 79- the properties defined in CONFIG_OF_SPL_REMOVE_PROPS 80- all the pre-relocation properties 81 ('u-boot,dm-pre-reloc', 'u-boot,dm-spl' and 'u-boot,dm-tpl') 82 83All the nodes remaining in the SPL devicetree are bound 84(see doc/driver-model/design.rst). 85 86Debugging 87--------- 88 89When building SPL with DEBUG set you may also need to set CONFIG_PANIC_HANG 90as in most cases do_reset is not defined within SPL. 91 92 93Estimating stack usage 94---------------------- 95 96With gcc 4.6 (and later) and the use of GNU cflow it is possible to estimate 97stack usage at various points in run sequence of SPL. The -fstack-usage option 98to gcc will produce '.su' files (such as arch/arm/cpu/armv7/syslib.su) that 99will give stack usage information and cflow can construct program flow. 100 101Must have gcc 4.6 or later, which supports -fstack-usage 102 1031) Build normally 1042) Perform the following shell command to generate a list of C files used in 105SPL: 106$ find spl -name '*.su' | sed -e 's:^spl/::' -e 's:[.]su$:.c:' > used-spl.list 1073) Execute cflow: 108$ cflow --main=board_init_r `cat used-spl.list` 2>&1 | $PAGER 109 110cflow will spit out a number of warnings as it does not parse 111the config files and picks functions based on #ifdef. Parsing the '.i' 112files instead introduces another set of headaches. These warnings are 113not usually important to understanding the flow, however. 114
README.TPL
1Generic TPL framework 2===================== 3 4Overview 5-------- 6 7TPL---Third Program Loader. 8 9Due to the SPL on some boards(powerpc mpc85xx) has a size limit and cannot 10be compatible with all the external device(e.g. DDR). So add a tertiary 11program loader (TPL) to enable a loader stub loaded by the code from the 12SPL. It loads the final uboot image into DDR, then jump to it to begin 13execution. Now, only the powerpc mpc85xx has this requirement and will 14implemente it. 15 16Keep consistent with SPL, with this framework almost all source files for a 17board can be reused. No code duplication or symlinking is necessary anymore. 18 19How it works 20------------ 21 22There has been a directory $(srctree)/spl which contains only a Makefile. The 23Makefile is shared by SPL and TPL. 24 25The object files are built separately for SPL/TPL and placed in the 26directory spl/tpl. The final binaries which are generated are 27u-boot-{spl|tpl}, u-boot-{spl|tpl}.bin and u-boot-{spl|tpl}.map. 28 29During the TPL build a variable named CONFIG_TPL_BUILD is exported in the 30make environment and also appended to CPPFLAGS with -DCONFIG_TPL_BUILD. 31 32The SPL options are shared by SPL and TPL, the board config file should 33determine which SPL options to choose based on whether CONFIG_TPL_BUILD 34is set. Source files can be compiled for TPL with options chosen in the 35board config file. 36 37TPL use a small device tree (u-boot-tpl.dtb), containing only the nodes with 38the pre-relocation properties: 'u-boot,dm-pre-reloc' and 'u-boot,dm-tpl' 39(see README.SPL for details). 40 41For example: 42 43spl/Makefile: 44LIBS-$(CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT) += common/libcommon.o 45 46CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT is defined in board config file: 47#ifdef CONFIG_TPL_BUILD 48#define CONFIG_SPL_LIBCOMMON_SUPPORT 49#endif 50
README.VLAN
1U-Boot has networking support for VLANs (802.1q), and CDP (Cisco 2Discovery Protocol). 3 4You control the sending/receiving of VLAN tagged packets with the 5"vlan" environmental variable. When not present no tagging is 6performed. 7 8CDP is used mainly to discover your device VLAN(s) when connected to 9a Cisco switch. 10 11Note: In order to enable CDP support a small change is needed in the 12networking driver. You have to enable reception of the 1301:00:0c:cc:cc:cc MAC address which is a multicast address. 14 15Various defines control CDP; see the README section. 16
README.VSC3316-3308
1This file contains API information of the initialization code written for 2Vitesse cross-point devices, VSC3316 and VSC3308 for board B4860QDS 3 4Author: Shaveta Leekha <shaveta@freescale.com> 5 6About Device: 7============= 8VSC 3316/3308 is a low-power, low-cost asynchronous crosspoint switch capable of data rates upto 11.5Gbps. 9 10VSC3316 has 16 input and 16 output ports whereas VSC3308 has 8 input and 8 output ports. Programming of these devices are performed by two-wire or four-wire serial interface. 11 12Initialization: 13=============== 14On reset, VSC devices are in low-power state with all inputs, outputs and connections in an off state. 15First thing required is to program it to interface with either two-wire or four-wire interface. 16In our case the interface is two-wire I2C serial interface. So the value in Interface mode register at address 79.h to be written is 0x02 for two-wire interface. Also for crosspoint connections to be activated, 01.h value need to be written in 75.h (core configuration register). 17 18API Overview: 19============= 20 21 vsc_if_enable(u8 vsc_addr): 22 -------------------------- 23 This API programs VSC to interface with either two-wire or four-wire interface. In our case the interface is two-wire I2C serial interface. So the value in Interface mode register at address 79.h to be written is 0x02 for two-wire interface. 24 Parameters: 25 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board. 26 27 28 vsc3316_config(u8 vsc_addr, int con_arr[][2], u8 num_con): 29 --------------------------------------------------------- 30 This API configures the VSC3316 device for required connections. Connection through the VSC device requires the inputs and outputs to be properly configured. 31 Connection registers are on page 00. It Configures the selected input and output correctly and join them to make a connection. It also program Input state register, Global input ISE, Global input LOS, Global core control, Output mode register and core control registers etc. 32 vsc3308_config(u8 vsc_addr, int con_arr[][2], u8 num_con) does the essential configurations for VSC3308. 33 34 Parameters: 35 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board. 36 con_arr - connection array 37 num_con - number of connections to be configured 38 39 vsc_wp_config(u8 vsc_addr): 40 -------------------------- 41 For crosspoint connections to be activated, 01.h value need to be written in 75.h (core configuration register), which is done by this API. 42 Parameters: 43 vsc_addr - Address of the VSC device on board. 44
README.arm-caches
1Disabling I-cache: 2- Set CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF 3 4Disabling D-cache: 5- Set CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF 6 7Enabling I-cache: 8- Make sure CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF is not set and call icache_enable(). 9 10Enabling D-cache: 11- Make sure CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF is not set and call dcache_enable(). 12 13Enabling Caches at System Startup: 14- Implement enable_caches() for your platform and enable the I-cache and 15 D-cache from this function. This function is called immediately 16 after relocation. 17 18Guidelines for Working with D-cache: 19 20Memory to Peripheral DMA: 21- Flush the buffer after the MPU writes the data and before the DMA is 22 initiated. 23 24Peripheral to Memory DMA: 25- Invalidate the buffer before starting the DMA. In case there are any dirty 26 lines from the DMA buffer in the cache, subsequent cache-line replacements 27 may corrupt the buffer in memory while the DMA is still going on. Cache-line 28 replacement can happen if the CPU tries to bring some other memory locations 29 into the cache while the DMA is going on. 30- Invalidate the buffer after the DMA is complete and before the MPU reads 31 it. This may be needed in addition to the invalidation before the DMA 32 mentioned above, because in some processors memory contents can spontaneously 33 come to the cache due to speculative memory access by the CPU. If this 34 happens with the DMA buffer while DMA is going on we have a coherency problem. 35 36Buffer Requirements: 37- Any buffer that is invalidated(that is, typically the peripheral to 38 memory DMA buffer) should be aligned to cache-line boundary both at 39 at the beginning and at the end of the buffer. 40- If the buffer is not cache-line aligned invalidation will be restricted 41 to the aligned part. That is, one cache-line at the respective boundary 42 may be left out while doing invalidation. 43- A suitable buffer can be alloced on the stack using the 44 ALLOC_CACHE_ALIGN_BUFFER macro. 45 46Cleanup Before Linux: 47- cleanup_before_linux() should flush the D-cache, invalidate I-cache, and 48 disable MMU and caches. 49- The following sequence is advisable while disabling d-cache: 50 1. dcache_disable() - flushes and disables d-cache 51 2. invalidate_dcache_all() - invalid any entry that came to the cache 52 in the short period after the cache was flushed but before the 53 cache got disabled. 54
README.arm-relocation
1To make relocation on arm working, the following changes are done: 2 3At arch level: add linker flag -pie 4 5 This causes the linker to generate fixup tables .rel.dyn and .dynsym, 6 which must be applied to the relocated image before transferring 7 control to it. 8 9 These fixups are described in the ARM ELF documentation as type 23 10 (program-base-relative) and 2 (symbol-relative) 11 12At cpu level: modify linker file and add a relocation and fixup loop 13 14 the linker file must be modified to include the .rel.dyn and .dynsym 15 tables in the binary image, and to provide symbols for the relocation 16 code to access these tables 17 18 The relocation and fixup loop must be executed after executing 19 board_init_f at initial location and before executing board_init_r 20 at final location. 21 22At board level: 23 24 dram_init(): bd pointer is now at this point not accessible, so only 25 detect the real dramsize, and store it in gd->ram_size. Bst detected 26 with get_ram_size(). 27 28TODO: move also dram initialization there on boards where it is possible. 29 30 Setup of the bd_info dram bank info is done in the new function 31 dram_init_banksize() called after bd is accessible. 32 33At lib level: 34 35 Board.c code is adapted from ppc code 36 37* WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING ** WARNING * 38 39Boards which are not fixed to support relocation will be REMOVED! 40 41----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 43For boards which boot from spl, it is possible to save one copy 44if CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE == relocation address! This prevents that uboot code 45is copied again in relocate_code(). 46 47example for the tx25 board booting from NAND Flash: 48 49a) cpu starts 50b) it copies the first page in nand to internal ram 51 (spl code) 52c) end executes this code 53d) this initialize CPU, RAM, ... and copy itself to RAM 54 (this bin must fit in one page, so board_init_f() 55 don;t fit in it ... ) 56e) there it copy u-boot to CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST and 57 starts this image @ CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START 58f) u-boot code steps through board_init_f() and calculates 59 the relocation address and copy itself to it 60 61If CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE == relocation address, the copying of u-boot 62in f) could be saved. 63 64----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65 66TODO 67 68- fill in struct bd_info infos (check) 69- adapt all boards 70 71- maybe adapt CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE (this must be checked from board maintainers) 72 This *must* be done for boards, which boot from NOR flash 73 74 on other boards if CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE = relocation baseaddr, this saves 75 one copying from u-boot code. 76 77- new function dram_init_banksize() is actual board specific. Maybe 78 we make a weak default function in arch/arm/lib/board.c ? 79 80----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81 82Relocation with SPL (example for the tx25 booting from NAND Flash): 83 84- cpu copies the first page from NAND to 0xbb000000 (IMX_NFC_BASE) 85 and start with code execution on this address. 86 87- The First page contains u-boot code from drivers/mtd/nand/raw/mxc_nand_spl.c 88 which inits the dram, cpu registers, reloacte itself to CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE and loads 89 the "real" u-boot to CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST and starts execution 90 @CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START 91 92- This u-boot does no RAM init, nor CPU register setup. Just look 93 where it has to copy and relocate itself to this address. If 94 relocate address = CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE (not the same, as the 95 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE from the spl code), then there is no need 96 to copy, just go on with bss clear and jump to board_init_r. 97 98----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99 100How ELF relocations 23 and 2 work. 101 102TBC 103 104------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 105 106Debugging u-boot in RAM: 107(example on the qong board) 108 109----------------- 110 111a) start debugger 112 113arm-linux-gdb u-boot 114 115[hs@pollux u-boot]$ arm-linux-gdb u-boot 116GNU gdb Red Hat Linux (6.7-2rh) 117Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 118License GPLv3+: GNU GPL version 3 or later <http://gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html> 119This is free software: you are free to change and redistribute it. 120There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law. Type "show copying" 121and "show warranty" for details. 122This GDB was configured as "--host=i686-pc-linux-gnu --target=arm-linux". 123The target architecture is set automatically (currently arm) 124.. 125(gdb) 126 127----------------- 128 129b) connect to target 130 131target remote bdi10:2001 132 133(gdb) target remote bdi10:2001 134Remote debugging using bdi10:2001 1350x8ff17f10 in ?? () 136(gdb) 137 138----------------- 139 140c) discard symbol-file 141 142(gdb) symbol-file 143Discard symbol table from `/home/hs/celf/u-boot/u-boot'? (y or n) y 144No symbol file now. 145(gdb) 146 147----------------- 148 149d) load new symbol table: 150 151(gdb) add-symbol-file u-boot 0x8ff08000 152add symbol table from file "u-boot" at 153 .text_addr = 0x8ff08000 154(y or n) y 155Reading symbols from /home/hs/celf/u-boot/u-boot...done. 156(gdb) c 157Continuing. 158^C 159Program received signal SIGSTOP, Stopped (signal). 1600x8ff17f18 in serial_getc () at serial_mxc.c:192 161192 while (__REG(UART_PHYS + UTS) & UTS_RXEMPTY); 162(gdb) 163 164add-symbol-file u-boot 0x8ff08000 165 ^^^^^^^^^^ 166 get this address from u-boot bdinfo command 167 or get it from gd->relocaddr in gdb 168 169 => bdinfo 170rch_number = XXXXXXXXXX 171boot_params = XXXXXXXXXX 172DRAM bank = XXXXXXXXXX 173-> start = XXXXXXXXXX 174-> size = XXXXXXXXXX 175ethaddr = XXXXXXXXXX 176ip_addr = XXXXXXXXXX 177baudrate = XXXXXXXXXX 178TLB addr = XXXXXXXXXX 179relocaddr = 0x8ff08000 180 ^^^^^^^^^^ 181reloc off = XXXXXXXXXX 182irq_sp = XXXXXXXXXX 183sp start = XXXXXXXXXX 184FB base = XXXXXXXXXX 185 186or interrupt execution by any means and re-load the symbols at the location 187specified by gd->relocaddr -- this is only valid after board_init_f. 188 189(gdb) set $s = gd->relocaddr 190(gdb) symbol-file 191(gdb) add-symbol-file u-boot $s 192 193Now you can use gdb as usual :-) 194
README.armada-secureboot
1The trusted boot framework on Marvell Armada 38x 2================================================ 3 4Contents: 5 61. Overview of the trusted boot 72. Terminology 83. Boot image layout 94. The secured header 105. The secured boot flow 116. Usage example 127. Work to be done 138. Bibliography 14 151. Overview of the trusted boot 16------------------------------- 17 18The Armada's trusted boot framework enables the SoC to cryptographically verify 19a specially prepared boot image. This can be used to establish a chain of trust 20from the boot firmware all the way to the OS. 21 22To achieve this, the Armada SoC requires a specially prepared boot image, which 23contains the relevant cryptographic data, as well as other information 24pertaining to the boot process. Furthermore, a eFuse structure (a 25one-time-writeable memory) need to be configured in the correct way. 26 27Roughly, the secure boot process works as follows: 28 29* Load the header block of the boot image, extract a special "root" public RSA 30 key from it, and verify its SHA-256 hash against a SHA-256 stored in a eFuse 31 field. 32* Load an array of code signing public RSA keys from the header block, and 33 verify its RSA signature (contained in the header block as well) using the 34 "root" RSA key. 35* Choose a code signing key, and use it to verify the header block (excluding 36 the key array). 37* Verify the binary image's signature (contained in the header block) using the 38 code signing key. 39* If all checks pass successfully, boot the image. 40 41The chain of trust is thus as follows: 42 43* The SHA-256 value in the eFuse field verifies the "root" public key. 44* The "root" public key verifies the code signing key array. 45* The selected code signing key verifies the header block and the binary image. 46 47In the special case of building a boot image containing U-Boot as the binary 48image, which employs this trusted boot framework, the following tasks need to 49be addressed: 50 511. Creation of the needed cryptographic key material. 522. Creation of a conforming boot image containing the U-Boot image as binary 53 image. 543. Burning the necessary eFuse values. 55 56(1) will be addressed later, (2) will be taken care of by U-Boot's build 57system (some user configuration is required, though), and for (3) the necessary 58data (essentially a series of U-Boot commands to be entered at the U-Boot 59command prompt) will be created by the build system as well. 60 61The documentation of the trusted boot mode is contained in part 1, chapter 627.2.5 in the functional specification [1], and in application note [2]. 63 642. Terminology 65-------------- 66 67 CSK - Code Signing Key(s): An array of RSA key pairs, which 68 are used to sign and verify the secured header and the 69 boot loader image. 70 KAK - Key Authentication Key: A RSA key pair, which is used 71 to sign and verify the array of CSKs. 72 Header block - The first part of the boot image, which contains the 73 image's headers (also known as "headers block", "boot 74 header", and "image header") 75 eFuse - A one-time-writeable memory. 76 BootROM - The Armada's built-in boot firmware, which is 77 responsible for verifying and starting secure images. 78 Boot image - The complete image the SoC's boot firmware loads 79 (contains the header block and the binary image) 80 Main header - The header in the header block containing information 81 and data pertaining to the boot process (used for both 82 the regular and secured boot processes) 83 Binary image - The binary code payload of the boot image; in this 84 case the U-Boot's code (also known as "source image", 85 or just "image") 86 Secured header - The specialized header in the header block that 87 contains information and data pertaining to the 88 trusted boot (also known as "security header") 89 Secured boot mode - A special boot mode of the Armada SoC in which secured 90 images are verified (non-secure images won't boot); 91 the mode is activated by setting a eFuse field. 92 Trusted debug mode - A special mode for the trusted boot that allows 93 debugging of devices employing the trusted boot 94 framework in a secure manner (untested in the current 95 implementation). 96Trusted boot framework - The ARMADA SoC's implementation of a secure verified 97 boot process. 98 993. Boot image layout 100-------------------- 101 102+-- Boot image --------------------------------------------+ 103| | 104| +-- Header block --------------------------------------+ | 105| | Main header | | 106| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 107| | Secured header | | 108| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 109| | BIN header(s) | | 110| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 111| | REG header(s) | | 112| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 113| | Padding | | 114| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 115| | 116| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 117| | Binary image + checksum | | 118| +------------------------------------------------------+ | 119+----------------------------------------------------------+ 120 1214. The secured header 122--------------------- 123 124For the trusted boot framework, a additional header is added to the boot image. 125The following data are relevant for the secure boot: 126 127 KAK: The KAK is contained in the secured header in the form 128 of a RSA-2048 public key in DER format with a length of 129 524 bytes. 130Header block signature: The RSA signature of the header block (excluding the 131 CSK array), created using the selected CSK. 132Binary image signature: The RSA signature of the binary image, created using 133 the selected CSK. 134 CSK array: The array of the 16 CSKs as RSA-2048 public keys in DER 135 format with a length of 8384 = 16 * 524 bytes. 136 CSK block signature: The RSA signature of the CSK array, created using the 137 KAK. 138 139NOTE: The JTAG delay, Box ID, and Flash ID header fields do play a role in the 140trusted boot process to enable and configure secure debugging, but they were 141not tested in the current implementation of the trusted boot in U-Boot. 142 1435. The secured boot flow 144------------------------ 145 146The steps in the boot flow that are relevant for the trusted boot framework 147proceed as follows: 148 1491) Check if trusted boot is enabled, and perform regular boot if it is not. 1502) Load the secured header, and verify its checksum. 1513) Select the lowest valid CSK from CSK0 to CSK15. 1524) Verify the SHA-256 hash of the KAK embedded in the secured header. 1535) Verify the RSA signature of the CSK block from the secured header with the 154 KAK. 1556) Verify the header block signature (which excludes the CSK block) from the 156 secured header with the selected CSK. 1577) Load the binary image to the main memory and verify its checksum. 1588) Verify the binary image's RSA signature from the secured header with the 159 selected CSK. 1609) Continue the boot process as in the case of the regular boot. 161 162NOTE: All RSA signatures are verified according to the PKCS #1 v2.1 standard 163described in [3]. 164 165NOTE: The Box ID and Flash ID are checked after step 6, and the trusted debug 166mode may be entered there, but since this mode is untested in the current 167implementation, it is not described further. 168 1696. Usage example 170---------------- 171 172### Create key material 173 174To employ the trusted boot framework, cryptographic key material needs to be 175created. In the current implementation, two keys are needed to build a valid 176secured boot image: The KAK private key and a CSK private key (both have to be 1772048 bit RSA keys in PEM format). Note that the usage of more than one CSK is 178currently not supported. 179 180NOTE: Since the public key can be generated from the private key, it is 181sufficient to store the private key for each key pair. 182 183OpenSSL can be used to generate the needed files kwb_kak.key and kwb_csk.key 184(the names of these files have to be configured, see the next section on 185kwbimage.cfg settings): 186 187openssl genrsa -out kwb_kak.key 2048 188openssl genrsa -out kwb_csk.key 2048 189 190The generated files have to be placed in the U-Boot root directory. 191 192Alternatively, instead of copying the files, symlinks to the private keys can 193be placed in the U-Boot root directory. 194 195WARNING: Knowledge of the KAK or CSK private key would enable an attacker to 196generate secured boot images containing arbitrary code. Hence, the private keys 197should be carefully guarded. 198 199### Create/Modifiy kwbimage.cfg 200 201The Kirkwook architecture in U-Boot employs a special board-specific 202configuration file (kwbimage.cfg), which controls various boot image settings 203that are interpreted by the BootROM, such as the boot medium. The support the 204trusted boot framework, several new options were added to faciliate 205configuration of the secured boot. 206 207The configuration file's layout has been retained, only the following new 208options were added: 209 210 KAK - The name of the KAK RSA private key file in the U-Boot 211 root directory, without the trailing extension of ".key". 212 CSK - The name of the (active) CSK RSA private key file in the 213 U-Boot root directory, without the trailing extension of 214 ".key". 215 BOX_ID - The BoxID to be used for trusted debugging (a integer 216 value). 217 FLASH_ID - The FlashID to be used for trusted debugging (a integer 218 value). 219 JTAG_DELAY - The JTAG delay to be used for trusted debugging (a 220 integer value). 221 CSK_INDEX - The index of the active CSK (a integer value). 222SEC_SPECIALIZED_IMG - Flag to indicate whether to include the BoxID and FlashID 223 in the image (that is, whether to use the trusted debug 224 mode or not); no parameters. 225 SEC_BOOT_DEV - The boot device from which the trusted boot is allowed to 226 proceed, identified via a numeric ID. The tested values 227 are 0x34 = NOR flash, 0x31 = SDIO/MMC card; for 228 additional ID values, consult the documentation in [1]. 229 SEC_FUSE_DUMP - Dump the "fuse prog" commands necessary for writing the 230 correct eFuse values to a text file in the U-Boot root 231 directory. The parameter is the architecture for which to 232 dump the commands (currently only "a38x" is supported). 233 234The parameter values may be hardcoded into the file, but it is also possible to 235employ a dynamic approach of creating a Autoconf-like kwbimage.cfg.in, then 236reading configuration values from Kconfig options or from the board config 237file, and generating the actual kwbimage.cfg from this template using Makefile 238mechanisms (see board/gdsys/a38x/Makefile as an example for this approach). 239 240### Set config options 241 242To enable the generation of trusted boot images, the corresponding support 243needs to be activated, and a index for the active CSK needs to be selected as 244well. 245 246Furthermore, eFuse writing support has to be activated in order to burn the 247eFuse structure's values (this option is just needed for programming the eFuse 248structure; production boot images may disable it). 249 250ARM architecture 251 -> [*] Build image for trusted boot 252 (0) Index of active CSK 253 -> [*] Enable eFuse support 254 [ ] Fake eFuse access (dry run) 255 256### Build and test boot image 257 258The creation of the boot image is done via the usual invocation of make (with a 259suitably set CROSS_COMPILE environment variable, of course). The resulting boot 260image u-boot-spl.kwb can then be tested, if so desired. The hdrparser from [5] 261can be used for this purpose. To build the tool, invoke make in the 262'tools/marvell/doimage_mv' directory of [5], which builds a stand-alone 263hdrparser executable. A test can be conducted by calling hdrparser with the 264produced boot image and the following (mandatory) parameters: 265 266./hdrparser -k 0 -t u-boot-spl.kwb 267 268Here we assume that the CSK index is 0 and the boot image file resides in the 269same directory (adapt accordingly if needed). The tool should report that all 270checksums are valid ("GOOD"), that all signature verifications succeed 271("PASSED"), and, finally, that the overall test was successful 272("T E S T S U C C E E D E D" in the last line of output). 273 274### Burn eFuse structure 275 276+----------------------------------------------------------+ 277| WARNING: Burning the eFuse structure is a irreversible | 278| operation! Should wrong or corrupted values be used, the | 279| board won't boot anymore, and recovery is likely | 280| impossible! | 281+----------------------------------------------------------+ 282 283After the build process has finished, and the SEC_FUSE_DUMP option was set in 284the kwbimage.cfg was set, a text file kwb_fuses_a38x.txt should be present in 285the U-Boot top-level directory. It contains all the necessary commands to set 286the eFuse structure to the values needed for the used KAK digest, as well as 287the CSK index, Flash ID and Box ID that were selected in kwbimage.cfg. 288 289Sequentially executing the commands in this file at the U-Boot command prompt 290will write these values to the eFuse structure. 291 292If the SEC_FUSE_DUMP option was not set, the commands needed to burn the fuses 293have to be crafted by hand. The needed fuse lines can be looked up in [1]; a 294rough overview of the process is: 295 296* Burn the KAK public key hash. The hash itself can be found in the file 297 pub_kak_hash.txt in the U-Boot top-level directory; be careful to account for 298 the endianness! 299* Burn the CSK selection, BoxID, and FlashID 300* Enable trusted boot by burning the corresponding fuse (WARNING: this must be 301 the last fuse line written!) 302* Lock the unused fuse lines 303 304The command to employ is the "fuse prog" command previously enabled by setting 305the corresponding configuration option. 306 307For the trusted boot, the fuse prog command has a special syntax, since the 308ARMADA SoC demands that whole fuse lines (64 bit values) have to be written as 309a whole. The fuse prog command itself allows lists of 32 bit words to be 310written at a time, but this is translated to a series of single 32 bit write 311operations to the fuse line, where the individual 32 bit words are identified 312by a "word" counter that is increased for each write. 313 314To work around this restriction, we interpret each line to have three "words" 315(0-2): The first and second words are the values to be written to the fuse 316line, and the third is a lock flag, which is supposed to lock the fuse line 317when set to 1. Writes to the first and second words are memoized between 318function calls, and the fuse line is only really written and locked (on writing 319the third word) if both words were previously set, so that "incomplete" writes 320are prevented. An exception to this is a single write to the third word (index 3212) without previously writing neither the first nor the second word, which 322locks the fuse line without setting any value; this is needed to lock the 323unused fuse lines. 324 325As an example, to write the value 0011223344556677 to fuse line 10, we would 326use the following command: 327 328fuse prog -y 10 0 00112233 44556677 1 329 330Here 10 is the fuse line number, 0 is the index of the first word to be 331written, 00112233 and 44556677 are the values to be written to the fuse line 332(first and second word) and the trailing 1 is the value for the third word 333responsible for locking the line. 334 335A "lock-only" command would look like this: 336 337fuse prog -y 11 2 1 338 339Here 11 is the fuse number, 2 is the index of the first word to be written 340(notice that we only write to word 2 here; the third word for fuse line 341locking), and the 1 is the value for the word we are writing to. 342 343WARNING: According to application note [4], the VHV pin of the SoC must be 344connected to a 1.8V source during eFuse programming, but *must* be disconnected 345for normal operation. The AN [4] describes a software-controlled circuit (based 346on a N-channel or P-channel FET and a free GPIO pin of the SoC) to achieve 347this, but a jumper-based circuit should suffice as well. Regardless of the 348chosen circuit, the issue needs to be addressed accordingly! 349 3507. Work to be done 351------------------ 352 353* Add the ability to populate more than one CSK 354* Test secure debug 355* Test on Armada XP 356 3578. Bibliography 358--------------- 359 360[1] ARMADA(R) 38x Family High-Performance Single/Dual CPU System on Chip 361 Functional Specification; MV-S109094-00, Rev. C; August 2, 2015, 362 Preliminary 363[2] AN-383: ARMADA(R) 38x Families Secure Boot Mode Support; MV-S302501-00 364 Rev. A; March 11, 2015, Preliminary 365[3] Public-Key Cryptography Standards (PKCS) #1: RSA Cryptography 366 Specifications Version 2.1; February 2003; 367 https://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3447.txt 368[4] AN-389: ARMADA(R) VHV Power; MV-S302545-00 Rev. B; January 28, 2016, 369 Released 370[5] Marvell Armada 38x U-Boot support; November 25, 2015; 371 https://github.com/MarvellEmbeddedProcessors/u-boot-marvell 372 3732017-01-05, Mario Six <mario.six@gdsys.cc> 374
README.asn1
1ASN1 2==== 3 4Abstract Syntax Notation One (or ASN1) is a standard by ITU-T and ISO/IEC 5and used as a description language for defining data structure in 6an independent manner. 7Any data described in ASN1 notation can be serialized (or encoded) and 8de-serialized (or decoded) with well-defined encoding rules. 9 10A combination of ASN1 compiler and ASN1 decoder library function will 11provide a function interface for parsing encoded binary into specific 12data structure: 131) define data structure in a text file (*.asn1) 142) define "action" routines for specific "tags" defined in (1) 153) generate bytecode as a C file (*.asn1.[ch]) from *.asn1 file 16 with ASN1 compiler (tools/asn1_compiler) 174) call a ASN1 decoder (asn1_ber_decoder()) with bytecode and data 18 19Usage of ASN1 compiler 20---------------------- 21 asn1_compiler [-v] [-d] <grammar-file> <c-file> <hdr-file> 22 23 <grammar-file>: ASN1 input file 24 <c-file>: generated C file 25 <hdr-file>: generated include file 26 27Usage of ASN1 decoder 28--------------------- 29 int asn1_ber_decoder(const struct asn1_decoder *decoder, void *context, 30 const unsigned char *data, size_t datalen); 31 32 @decoder: bytecode binary 33 @context: context for decoder 34 @data: data to be parsed 35 @datalen: size of data 36 37 38As of writing this, ASN1 compiler and decoder are used to implement 39X509 certificate parser, pcks7 message parser and RSA public key parser 40for UEFI secure boot. 41
README.atmel_mci
1How to use SD/MMC cards with Atmel SoCs having MCI hardware 2----------------------------------------------------------- 32010-08-16 Reinhard Meyer <reinhard.meyer@emk-elektronik.de> 4 5This is a new approach to use Atmel MCI hardware with the 6general MMC framework. Therefore it benefits from that 7framework's abilities to handle SDHC Cards and the ability 8to write blocks. 9 10- AT91SAM9XE512 (tested, will definitely work with XE128 and XE256) 11- AT91SAM9260 (not tested, but MCI is to AT91SAM9XE) 12- AT91SAM9G20 (not tested, should work) 13 14It should work with all other ATMEL devices that have MCI. 15 16The generic driver does NOT assign port pins to the MCI block 17nor does it start the MCI clock. This has to be handled in a 18board/SoC specific manner before the driver is initialized: 19 20example: this is added to at91sam9260_devices.c: 21 22#if defined(CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI) 23void at91_mci_hw_init(void) 24{ 25 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 8, PUP); /* MCCK */ 26#if defined(CONFIG_ATMEL_MCI_PORTB) 27 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 1, PUP); /* MCCDB */ 28 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 0, PUP); /* MCDB0 */ 29 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 5, PUP); /* MCDB1 */ 30 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 4, PUP); /* MCDB2 */ 31 at91_set_b_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 3, PUP); /* MCDB3 */ 32#else 33 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 7, PUP); /* MCCDA */ 34 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 6, PUP); /* MCDA0 */ 35 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 9, PUP); /* MCDA1 */ 36 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 10, PUP); /* MCDA2 */ 37 at91_set_a_periph(AT91_PIO_PORTA, 11, PUP); /* MCDA3 */ 38#endif 39} 40#endif 41 42the board specific file need added: 43... 44#ifdef CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI 45# include <mmc.h> 46#endif 47... 48#ifdef CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI 49/* this is a weak define that we are overriding */ 50int board_mmc_init(struct bd_info *bd) 51{ 52 /* Enable clock */ 53 at91_sys_write(AT91_PMC_PCER, 1 << AT91SAM9260_ID_MCI); 54 at91_mci_hw_init(); 55 56 /* This calls the atmel_mci_init in gen_atmel_mci.c */ 57 return atmel_mci_init((void *)AT91_BASE_MCI); 58} 59 60/* this is a weak define that we are overriding */ 61int board_mmc_getcd(struct mmc *mmc) 62{ 63 return !at91_get_gpio_value(CONFIG_SYS_MMC_CD_PIN); 64} 65 66#endif 67 68and the board definition files needs: 69 70/* SD/MMC card */ 71#define CONFIG_GENERIC_ATMEL_MCI 1 72#define CONFIG_ATMEL_MCI_PORTB 1 /* Atmel XE-EK uses port B */ 73#define CONFIG_SYS_MMC_CD_PIN AT91_PIN_PC9 74#define CONFIG_CMD_MMC 1 75
README.atmel_pmecc
1How to enable PMECC(Programmable Multibit ECC) for nand on Atmel SoCs 2----------------------------------------------------------- 32012-08-22 Josh Wu <josh.wu@atmel.com> 4 5The Programmable Multibit ECC (PMECC) controller is a programmable binary 6BCH(Bose, Chaudhuri and Hocquenghem) encoder and decoder. This controller 7can be used to support both SLC and MLC NAND Flash devices. It supports to 8generate ECC to correct 2, 4, 8, 12 or 24 bits of error per sector (512 or 91024 bytes) of data. 10 11Following Atmel AT91 products support PMECC. 12- AT91SAM9X25, X35, G25, G15, G35 (tested) 13- AT91SAM9N12 (not tested, Should work) 14 15As soon as your nand flash software ECC works, you can enable PMECC. 16 17To use PMECC in this driver, the user needs to set: 18 1. the PMECC correction error bits capability: CONFIG_PMECC_CAP. 19 It can be 2, 4, 8, 12 or 24. 20 2. The PMECC sector size: CONFIG_PMECC_SECTOR_SIZE. 21 It only can be 512 or 1024. 22 23Take 'configs/at91sam9x5ek_nandflash_defconfig' as an example, the board 24configuration file has the following entries: 25 26 CONFIG_PMECC_CAP=2 27 CONFIG_PMECC_SECTOR_SIZE=512 28 CONFIG_SPL_GENERATE_ATMEL_PMECC_HEADER=y 29 30How to enable PMECC header for direct programmable boot.bin 31----------------------------------------------------------- 322014-05-19 Andreas Bießmann <andreas@biessmann.org> 33 34The usual way to program SPL into NAND flash is to use the SAM-BA Atmel tool. 35This however is often not usable when doing field updates. To be able to 36program a SPL binary into NAND flash we need to add the PMECC header to the 37binary before. Chapter '12.4.4.1 NAND Flash Boot: NAND Flash Detection' in 38sama5d3 SoC spec (as of 03. April 2014) defines how this PMECC header has to 39look like. In order to do so we have a new image type added to mkimage to 40generate this PMECC header and integrated this into the build process of SPL. 41 42To enable the generation of atmel PMECC header for SPL one needs to define 43CONFIG_SPL_GENERATE_ATMEL_PMECC_HEADER. The required parameters are taken from 44board configuration and compiled into the host tools atmel_pmecc_params. This 45tool will be called in build process to parametrize mkimage for atmelimage 46type. The mkimage tool has intentionally _not_ compiled in those parameters. 47 48The mkimage image type atmelimage also set the 6'th interrupt vector to the 49correct value. This feature can also be used to setup a boot.bin for MMC boot. 50
README.autoboot
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2001 4 * Dave Ellis, SIXNET, dge@sixnetio.com 5 * 6 */ 7 8Using autoboot configuration options 9==================================== 10 11The basic autoboot configuration options are documented in the main 12U-Boot README. See it for details. They are: 13 14 bootdelay 15 bootcmd 16 CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 17 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND 18 19Some additional options that make autoboot safer in a production 20product are documented here. 21 22Why use them? 23------------- 24 25The basic autoboot feature allows a system to automatically boot to 26the real application (such as Linux) without a user having to enter 27any commands. If any key is pressed before the boot delay time 28expires, U-Boot stops the autoboot process, gives a U-Boot prompt 29and waits forever for a command. That's a good thing if you pressed a 30key because you wanted to get the prompt. 31 32It's not so good if the key press was a stray character on the 33console serial port, say because a user who knows nothing about 34U-Boot pressed a key before the system had time to boot. It's even 35worse on an embedded product that doesn't have a console during 36normal use. The modem plugged into that console port sends a 37character at the wrong time and the system hangs, with no clue as to 38why it isn't working. 39 40You might want the system to autoboot to recover after an external 41configuration program stops autoboot. If the configuration program 42dies or loses its connection (modems can disconnect at the worst 43time) U-Boot will patiently wait forever for it to finish. 44 45These additional configuration options can help provide a system that 46boots when it should, but still allows access to U-Boot. 47 48What they do 49------------ 50 51 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME 52 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN 53 54 "bootretry" environment variable 55 56 These options determine what happens after autoboot is 57 stopped and U-Boot is waiting for commands. 58 59 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME must be defined to enable the boot 60 retry feature. If the environment variable "bootretry" is 61 found then its value is used, otherwise the retry timeout is 62 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME. CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN is optional and 63 defaults to CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME. All times are in seconds. 64 65 If the retry timeout is negative, the U-Boot command prompt 66 never times out. Otherwise it is forced to be at least 67 CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_MIN seconds. If no valid U-Boot command is 68 entered before the specified time the boot delay sequence is 69 restarted. Each command that U-Boot executes restarts the 70 timeout. 71 72 If CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME < 0 the feature is there, but 73 doesn't do anything unless the environment variable 74 "bootretry" is >= 0. 75 76 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED 77 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED_CTRLC 78 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT 79 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR 80 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR 81 82 "bootdelaykey" environment variable 83 "bootstopkey" environment variable 84 85 These options give more control over stopping autoboot. When 86 they are used a specific character or string is required to 87 stop or delay autoboot. 88 89 Define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED (no value required) to enable 90 this group of options. CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR, 91 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR or both should be specified (or 92 specified by the corresponding environment variable), 93 otherwise there is no way to stop autoboot. 94 95 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT is displayed before the boot delay 96 selected by CONFIG_BOOTDELAY starts. If it is not defined 97 there is no output indicating that autoboot is in progress. 98 99 Note that CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT is used as the (only) 100 argument to a printf() call, so it may contain '%' format 101 specifications, provided that it also includes, sepearated by 102 commas exactly like in a printf statement, the required 103 arguments. It is the responsibility of the user to select only 104 such arguments that are valid in the given context. A 105 reasonable prompt could be defined as 106 107 #define CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_PROMPT \ 108 "autoboot in %d seconds\n",bootdelay 109 110 If CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR or "bootdelaykey" is specified 111 and this string is received from console input before 112 autoboot starts booting, U-Boot gives a command prompt. The 113 U-Boot prompt will time out if CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is 114 used, otherwise it never times out. 115 116 If CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR or "bootstopkey" is specified and 117 this string is received from console input before autoboot 118 starts booting, U-Boot gives a command prompt. The U-Boot 119 prompt never times out, even if CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is 120 used. 121 122 The string recognition is not very sophisticated. If a 123 partial match is detected, the first non-matching character 124 is checked to see if starts a new match. There is no check 125 for a shorter partial match, so it's best if the first 126 character of a key string does not appear in the rest of the 127 string. 128 129 The CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_KEYED_CTRLC #define allows for the boot 130 sequence to be interrupted by ctrl-c, in addition to the 131 "bootdelaykey" and "bootstopkey". Setting this variable 132 provides an escape sequence from the limited "password" 133 strings. 134 135 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_ENCRYPTION 136 137 "bootstopkeysha256" environment variable 138 139 - Hash value of the input which unlocks the device and 140 stops autoboot. 141 142 This option allows a string to be entered into U-Boot to stop the 143 autoboot. The string itself is hashed and compared against the hash 144 in the environment variable 'bootstopkeysha256'. If it matches then 145 boot stops and a command-line prompt is presented. 146 147 This provides a way to ship a secure production device which can also 148 be accessed at the U-Boot command line. 149 150 CONFIG_RESET_TO_RETRY 151 152 (Only effective when CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME is also set) 153 After the countdown timed out, the board will be reset to restart 154 again. 155 156 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_USE_MENUKEY 157 CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_MENUKEY 158 159 If this key is pressed to stop autoboot, then the commands in the 160 environment variable 'menucmd' will be executed before boot starts. 161 For example, 33 means "!" in ASCII, so pressing ! at boot would take 162 this action. 163
README.bcm7xxx
1Summary 2======= 3 4This document describes how to use U-Boot on the Broadcom 7445 SoC, as 5a third stage bootloader loaded by Broadcom's BOLT bootloader. 6 7BOLT loads U-Boot as a generic ELF binary. Some U-Boot features such 8as networking are not yet available but other important features are, 9including: 10 11 - ext4 file system traversal 12 13 - support for loading FIT images 14 15 - advanced scripting 16 17 - support for FIT-provided DTBs instead of relying on the 18 BOLT-provided DTB 19 20A customized version of this port has been used in production. The 21same approach may work on other BCM7xxx boards, with some 22configuration adjustments and memory layout experimentation. 23 24Build 25===== 26 27make bcm7445_defconfig 28make 29${CROSS_COMPILE}strip u-boot 30 31Run 32=== 33 34Flash the u-boot binary into board storage, then invoke it from BOLT. 35For example: 36 37BOLT> boot -bsu -elf flash0.u-boot1 38 39This port assumes that I-cache and D-cache are already enabled when 40U-Boot is entered. 41 42Flattened Image Tree Support 43============================ 44 45What follows is an example FIT image source file. Build it with: 46 47mkimage -f image.its image.itb 48 49Booting the resulting image.itb was tested on BOLT v1.20, with the 50following kernels: 51 52https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-3.14 53https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-4.1 54https://github.com/Broadcom/stblinux-4.9 55 56and with a generic ARMv7 root file system. 57 58image.its: 59/dts-v1/; 60/ { 61 description = "BCM7445 FIT"; 62 images { 63 kernel@1 { 64 description = "Linux kernel"; 65 /* 66 * This kernel image output format can be 67 * generated with: 68 * 69 * make vmlinux 70 * ${CROSS_COMPILE}objcopy -O binary -S vmlinux vmlinux.bin 71 * gzip -9 vmlinux.bin 72 * 73 * For stblinux-3.14, the specific Broadcom 74 * board type should be configured in the 75 * kernel, for example CONFIG_BCM7445D0=y. 76 */ 77 data = /incbin/("<vmlinux.bin.gz>"); 78 type = "kernel"; 79 arch = "arm"; 80 os = "linux"; 81 compression = "gzip"; 82 load = <0x8000>; 83 entry = <0x8000>; 84 hash@1 { 85 algo = "sha256"; 86 }; 87 }; 88 ramdisk@1 { 89 description = "Initramfs root file system"; 90 data = /incbin/("<initramfs.cpio.gz>"); 91 type = "ramdisk"; 92 arch = "arm"; 93 os = "linux"; 94 compression = "gzip"; 95 /* 96 * Set the environment variable initrd_high to 97 * 0xffffffff, and set "load" and "entry" here 98 * to 0x0 to keep initramfs in-place and to 99 * accommodate stblinux bmem/CMA reservations. 100 */ 101 load = <0x0>; 102 entry = <0x0>; 103 hash@1 { 104 algo = "sha256"; 105 }; 106 }; 107 fdt@1 { 108 description = "Device tree dumped from BOLT"; 109 /* 110 * This DTB should be similar to the 111 * BOLT-generated device tree, after BOLT has 112 * done its runtime modifications to it. For 113 * example, it can be dumped from within 114 * U-Boot (at ${fdtcontroladdr}), after BOLT 115 * has loaded U-Boot. The result can be added 116 * to the Linux source tree as a .dts file. 117 * 118 * To support modifications to the device tree 119 * in-place in U-Boot, add to Linux's 120 * arch/arm/boot/dts/Makefile: 121 * 122 * DTC_FLAGS ?= -p 4096 123 * 124 * This will leave some padding in the DTB and 125 * thus reserve room for node additions. 126 * 127 * Also, set the environment variable fdt_high 128 * to 0xffffffff to keep the DTB in-place and 129 * to accommodate stblinux bmem/CMA 130 * reservations. 131 */ 132 data = /incbin/("<bolt-<version>.dtb"); 133 type = "flat_dt"; 134 arch = "arm"; 135 compression = "none"; 136 hash@1 { 137 algo = "sha256"; 138 }; 139 }; 140 }; 141 configurations { 142 default = "conf@bcm7445"; 143 conf@bcm7445 { 144 description = "BCM7445 configuration"; 145 kernel = "kernel@1"; 146 ramdisk = "ramdisk@1"; 147 fdt = "fdt@1"; 148 }; 149 }; 150}; 151
README.bcmns3
1BCMNS3 QSPI memory layout 2========================= 3 4BCMNS3 has total 8MB non-volatile SPI flash memory. It is used to store 5different images like fip.bin, nitro firmware, DDR shmo value and other backup 6images. 7 8Following is the QSPI flash memory layout. 9 10/* QSPI layout 11 * |---------------------------|->0x000000 12 * | | 13 * | | 14 * | fip.bin | 15 * | 2MB | 16 * | | 17 * ~ ~ 18 * ~ ~ 19 * | | 20 * | | 21 * | | 22 * |---------------------------|->0x200000 23 * | | 24 * | | 25 * | | 26 * | fip.bin (Mirror) | 27 * | 2MB | 28 * ~ ~ 29 * ~ ~ 30 * | | 31 * | | 32 * | | 33 * |---------------------------|->0x400000 34 * | | 35 * | Nitro NS3 Config | 36 * | 1.5M | 37 * | | 38 * ~ ~ 39 * ~ ~ 40 * | | 41 * |---------------------------|->0x580000 42 * | Nitro NS3 Config | 43 * | 1.5M | 44 * | (Mirror) | 45 * ~ ~ 46 * ~ ~ 47 * | | 48 * |---------------------------|->0x700000 49 * | Nitro NS3 bspd Config | 50 * | 64KB | 51 * ~ ~ 52 * ~ ~ 53 * | | 54 * |---------------------------|->0x710000 55 * | Nitro NS3 bspd Config | 56 * | 64KB | 57 * ~ (Mirror) ~ 58 * ~ ~ 59 * | | 60 * |---------------------------|->0x720000 61 * | SHMOO | 62 * | 64KB | 63 * | | 64 * ~ ~ 65 * ~ ~ 66 * |---------------------------|->0x730000 67 * | Meta Data | 68 * | 832KB | 69 * | | 70 * ~ ~ 71 * ~ ~ 72 * | | 73 * |---------------------------| 74 */ 75
README.bedbug
1BEDBUG Support for U-Boot 2-------------------------- 3 4These changes implement the bedbug (emBEDded deBUGger) debugger in U-Boot. 5A specific implementation is made for the AMCC 405 processor but other flavors 6can be easily implemented. 7 8##################### 9### Modifications ### 10##################### 11 12./common/Makefile 13 Included cmd_bedbug.c and bedbug.c in the Makefile. 14 15./common/command.c 16 Added bedbug commands to command table. 17 18./common/board.c 19 Added call to initialize debugger on startup. 20 21./arch/powerpc/cpu/ppc4xx/Makefile 22 Added bedbug_405.c to the Makefile. 23 24./arch/powerpc/cpu/ppc4xx/start.S 25 Added code to handle the debug exception (0x2000) on the 405. 26 Also added code to handle critical exceptions since the debug 27 is treated as critical on the 405. 28 29./arch/powerpc/cpu/ppc4xx/traps.c 30 Added more detailed output for the program exception to tell 31 if it is an illegal instruction, privileged instruction or 32 a trap. Also added debug trap handler. 33 34./include/ppc_asm.tmpl 35 Added code to handle critical exceptions 36 37################# 38### New Stuff ### 39################# 40 41./include/bedbug/ppc.h 42./include/bedbug/regs.h 43./include/bedbug/bedbug.h 44./include/bedbug/elf.h [obsoleted by new include/elf.h] 45./include/bedbug/tables.h 46./include/cmd_bedbug.h 47./common/cmd_bedbug.c 48./common/bedbug.c 49 Bedbug library includes code for assembling and disassembling 50 PowerPC instructions to/from memory as well as handling 51 hardware breakpoints and stepping through code. These 52 routines are common to all PowerPC processors. 53 54./arch/powerpc/cpu/ppc4xx/bedbug_405.c 55 AMCC PPC405 specific debugger routines. 56 57 58Bedbug support for the MPC860 59----------------------------- 60 61Changes: 62 63 common/cmd_bedbug.c 64 Added call to initialize 860 debugger. 65 66 arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/Makefile 67 Added new file "bedbug_860.c" to the makefile 68 69 arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/start.S 70 Added handler for InstructionBreakpoint (0xfd00) 71 72 arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/traps.c 73 Added new routine DebugException() 74 75New Files: 76 77 arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc8xx/bedbug_860.c 78 CPU-specific routines for 860 debug registers. 79
README.bitbangMII
1This patch rewrites the miiphybb ( Bit-banged MII bus driver ) in order to 2support an arbitrary number of mii buses. This feature is useful when your 3board uses different mii buses for different phys and all (or a part) of these 4buses are implemented via bit-banging mode. 5 6The driver requires that the following macros should be defined into the board 7configuration file: 8 9CONFIG_BITBANGMII - Enable the miiphybb driver 10CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI - Enable the multi bus support 11 12If the CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI is not defined, the board's config file needs 13to define at least the following macros: 14 15MII_INIT - Generic code to enable the MII bus (optional) 16MDIO_DECLARE - Declaration needed to access to the MDIO pin (optional) 17MDIO_ACTIVE - Activate the MDIO pin as out pin 18MDIO_TRISTATE - Activate the MDIO pin as input/tristate pin 19MDIO_READ - Read the MDIO pin 20MDIO(v) - Write v on the MDIO pin 21MDC_DECLARE - Declaration needed to access to the MDC pin (optional) 22MDC(v) - Write v on the MDC pin 23 24The previous macros make the driver compatible with the previous version 25(that didn't support the multi-bus). 26 27When the CONFIG_BITBANGMII_MULTI is also defined, the board code needs to fill 28the bb_miiphy_buses[] array with a record for each required bus and declare 29the bb_miiphy_buses_num variable with the number of mii buses. 30The record (struct bb_miiphy_bus) has the following fields/callbacks (see 31miiphy.h for details): 32 33char name[] - The symbolic name that must be equal to the MII bus 34 registered name 35int (*init)() - Initialization function called at startup time (just 36 before the Ethernet initialization) 37int (*mdio_active)() - Activate the MDIO pin as output 38int (*mdio_tristate)() - Activate the MDIO pin as input/tristate pin 39int (*set_mdio)() - Write the MDIO pin 40int (*get_mdio)() - Read the MDIO pin 41int (*set_mdc)() - Write the MDC pin 42int (*delay)() - Delay function 43void *priv - Private data used by board specific code 44 45The board code will look like: 46 47struct bb_miiphy_bus bb_miiphy_buses[] = { 48 { .name = "miibus#1", .init = b1_init, .mdio_active = b1_mdio_active, ... }, 49 { .name = "miibus#2", .init = b2_init, .mdio_active = b2_mdio_active, ... }, 50 ... 51}; 52int bb_miiphy_buses_num = sizeof(bb_miiphy_buses) / 53 sizeof(bb_miiphy_buses[0]); 54 552009 Industrie Dial Face S.p.A. 56 Luigi 'Comio' Mantellini <luigi.mantellini@idf-hit.com> 57
README.bloblist
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2 3Blob Lists - bloblist 4===================== 5 6Introduction 7------------ 8 9A bloblist provides a way to store collections of binary information (blobs) in 10a central structure. Each record of information is assigned a tag so that its 11owner can find it and update it. Each record is generally described by a C 12structure defined by the code that owns it. 13 14 15Passing state through the boot process 16-------------------------------------- 17 18The bloblist is created when the first U-Boot component runs (often SPL, 19sometimes TPL). It is passed through to each successive part of the boot and 20can be accessed as needed. This provides a way to transfer state from one part 21to the next. For example, TPL may determine that a watchdog reset occurred by 22reading an SoC register. Reading the register may reset the value, so that it 23cannot be read a second time. So TPL can store that in a bloblist record which 24can be passed through to SPL and U-Boot proper, which can print a message 25indicating that something went wrong and the watchdog fired. 26 27 28Blobs 29----- 30 31While each blob in the bloblist can be of any length, bloblists are designed to 32hold small amounts of data, typically a few KB at most. It is not possible to 33change the length of a blob once it has been written. Each blob is normally 34created from a C structure which can beused to access its fields. 35 36 37Blob tags 38--------- 39 40Each blob has a tag which is a 32-bit number. This uniquely identifies the 41owner of the blob. Blob tags are listed in enum blob_tag_t and are named 42with a BLOBT_ prefix. 43 44 45Single structure 46---------------- 47 48There is normally only one bloblist in U-Boot. Since a bloblist can store 49multiple blobs it does not seem useful to allow multiple bloblists. Of course 50there could be reasons for this, such as needing to spread the blobs around in 51different memory areas due to fragmented memory, but it is simpler to just have 52a single bloblist. 53 54 55API 56--- 57 58Bloblist provides a fairly simple API which allows blobs to be created and 59found. All access is via the blob's tag. Blob records are zeroed when added. 60 61 62Finishing the bloblist 63---------------------- 64 65When a part of U-Boot is about to jump to the next part, it can 'finish' the 66bloblist in preparation for the next stage. This involves adding a checksum so 67that the next stage can make sure that the data arrived safely. While the 68bloblist is in use, changes can be made which will affect the checksum, so it 69is easier to calculate the checksum at the end after all changes are made. 70 71 72Future work 73----------- 74 75Bootstage has a mechanism to 'stash' its records for passing to the next part. 76This should move to using bloblist, to avoid having its own mechanism for 77passing information between U-Boot parts. 78 79 80Simon Glass 81sjg@chromium.org 8212-Aug-2018 83
README.bootcount
1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2 3Boot Count Limit 4================ 5 6This allows to detect multiple failed attempts to boot Linux. 7 8After a power-on reset, "bootcount" variable will be initialized with 1, and 9each reboot will increment the value by 1. 10 11If, after a reboot, the new value of "bootcount" exceeds the value of 12"bootlimit", then instead of the standard boot action (executing the contents of 13"bootcmd") an alternate boot action will be performed, and the contents of 14"altbootcmd" will be executed. 15 16If the variable "bootlimit" is not defined in the environment, the Boot Count 17Limit feature is disabled. If it is enabled, but "altbootcmd" is not defined, 18then U-Boot will drop into interactive mode and remain there. 19 20It is the responsibility of some application code (typically a Linux 21application) to reset the variable "bootcount", thus allowing for more boot 22cycles. 23 24BOOTCOUNT_EXT 25------------- 26 27This adds support for maintaining boot count in a file on an EXT filesystem. 28The file to use is define by: 29 30SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_INTERFACE 31SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_DEVPART 32SYS_BOOTCOUNT_EXT_NAME 33 34The format of the file is: 35 36==== ================= 37type entry 38==== ================= 39u8 magic 40u8 version 41u8 bootcount 42u8 upgrade_available 43==== ================= 44 45To prevent unattended usage of "altbootcmd" the "upgrade_available" variable is 46used. 47If "upgrade_available" is 0, "bootcount" is not saved, if "upgrade_available" is 481 "bootcount" is save. 49So the Userspace Application must set the "upgrade_available" and "bootcount" 50variables to 0, if a boot was successfully. 51This also prevents writes on all reboots. 52
README.boston
1MIPS Boston Development Board 2 3--------- 4 About 5--------- 6 7The MIPS Boston development board is built around an FPGA & 3 PCIe controllers, 8one of which is connected to an Intel EG20T Platform Controller Hub which 9provides most connectivity to the board. It is used during the development & 10testing of both new CPUs and the software support for them. It is essentially 11the successor of the older MIPS Malta board. 12 13-------- 14 QEMU 15-------- 16 17U-Boot can be run on a currently out-of-tree branch of QEMU with support for 18the Boston board added. This QEMU code can currently be found in the "boston" 19branch of git://git.linux-mips.org/pub/scm/paul/qemu.git and used like so: 20 21 $ git clone git://git.linux-mips.org/pub/scm/paul/qemu.git -b boston 22 $ cd qemu 23 $ ./configure --target-list=mips64el-softmmu 24 $ make 25 $ ./mips64el-softmmu/qemu-system-mips64el -M boston -m 2G \ 26 -bios u-boot.bin -serial stdio 27 28Please note that QEMU will default to emulating the I6400 CPU which implements 29the MIPS64r6 ISA, and at the time of writing doesn't implement any earlier CPUs 30with support for the CPS features the Boston board relies upon. You will 31therefore need to configure U-Boot to build for MIPSr6 in order to obtain a 32binary that will work in QEMU. 33 34------------- 35 Toolchain 36------------- 37 38If building for MIPSr6 then you will need a toolchain including GCC 5.x or 39newer, or the Codescape toolchain available for download from Imagination 40Technologies: 41 42 http://codescape-mips-sdk.imgtec.com/components/toolchain/2015.06-05/ 43 44The "IMG GNU Linux Toolchain" is capable of building for all current MIPS ISAs, 45architecture revisions & both endiannesses. 46 47-------- 48 TODO 49-------- 50 51 - AHCI support 52 - CPU driver 53 - Exception handling (+UHI?) 54 - Flash support 55 - IOCU support 56 - L2 cache support 57 - More general LCD display driver 58 - Multi-arch-variant multi-endian fat binary 59
README.bus_vcxk
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2008-2009 4 * BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG <www.bus-elektronik.de> 5 * Jens Scharsig <esw@bus-elektronik.de> 6 */ 7 8U-Boot vcxk video controller driver 9====================================== 10 11By defining CONFIG_VIDEO_VCXK this driver can be used with VC2K, VC4K and 12VC8K devices on following boards: 13 14board | ARCH | Vendor 15----------------------------------------------------------------------- 16EB+CPU5282-T1 | MCF5282 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG 17EB+MCF-EVB123 | MCF5282 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG 18EB+CPUx9K2 | AT91RM9200 | BuS Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG 19ZLSA | AT91RM9200 | Ruf Telematik AG 20 21Driver configuration 22-------------------- 23 24The driver needs some defines to describe the target hardware: 25 26CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_BASE 27 28 base address of VCxK hardware memory 29 30CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_DEFAULT_LINEALIGN 31 32 defines the physical alignment of a pixel row 33 34CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_DOUBLEBUFFERED 35 36 some boards that use vcxk prevent read from framebuffer memory. 37 define this option to enable double buffering (needs 16KiB RAM) 38 39CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN 40 41 defines the number of the I/O line PIN in the port 42 valid values for <xxxx> are: 43 44 ACKNOWLEDGE 45 describes the acknowledge line from vcxk hardware 46 47 ENABLE 48 describes the enable line to vcxk hardware 49 50 INVERT 51 describes the invert line to vcxk hardware 52 53 RESET 54 describes the reset line to vcxk hardware 55 56 REQUEST 57 describes the request line to vcxk hardware 58 59CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PORT 60 61 defines the I/O port which is connected with the line 62 for valid values for <xxxx> see CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN 63 64CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_DDR 65 66 defines the register which configures the direction 67 for valid values for <xxxx> see CONFIG_SYS_VCXK_<xxxx>_PIN 68
README.cfi
1The common CFI driver provides this weak default implementation for 2flash_cmd_reset(): 3 4static void __flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info) 5{ 6 /* 7 * We do not yet know what kind of commandset to use, so we issue 8 * the reset command in both Intel and AMD variants, in the hope 9 * that AMD flash roms ignore the Intel command. 10 */ 11 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET); 12 udelay(1); 13 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, FLASH_CMD_RESET); 14} 15void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info) 16 __attribute__((weak,alias("__flash_cmd_reset"))); 17 18Some flash chips seem to have trouble with this reset sequence. 19In this case, board-specific code can override this weak default 20version with a board-specific function. 21 22At the time of writing, there are two boards that define their own 23routine for this. 24 25First, the digsy_mtc board equipped with the M29W128GH from Numonyx 26needs this version to function properly: 27 28void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info) 29{ 30 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET); 31} 32 33In addition, the t3corp board defines the routine thusly: 34 35void flash_cmd_reset(flash_info_t *info) 36{ 37 /* 38 * FLASH at address CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE is a Spansion chip and 39 * needs the Spansion type reset commands. The other flash chip 40 * is located behind a FPGA (Xilinx DS617) and needs the Intel type 41 * reset command. 42 */ 43 if (info->start[0] == CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE) 44 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, AMD_CMD_RESET); 45 else 46 flash_write_cmd(info, 0, 0, FLASH_CMD_RESET); 47} 48 49see also: 50http://www.mail-archive.com/u-boot@lists.denx.de/msg24368.html 51 52 53Config Option 54 55 CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: Number of sectors available on Flash device 56 57 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI_WIDTH: Data-width of the flash device 58 59 CONFIG_CMD_FLASH: Enables Flash command library 60 61 CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER: Enables CFI Flash driver 62 63 CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD: Enables MTD frame work for NOR Flash devices 64
README.chromium
1Chromium OS Support in U-Boot 2============================= 3 4Introduction 5------------ 6 7This describes how to use U-Boot with Chromium OS. Several options are 8available: 9 10 - Running U-Boot from the 'altfw' feature, which is available on selected 11 Chromebooks from 2019 onwards (initially Grunt). Press '1' from the 12 developer-mode screen to get into U-Boot. See here for details: 13 https://sites.google.com/a/chromium.org/dev/chromium-os/poking-around-your-chrome-os-device?pli=1 14 15 - Running U-Boot from the disk partition. This involves signing U-Boot and 16 placing it on the disk, for booting as a 'kernel'. See 17 README.chromium-chainload for information on this. This is the only 18 option on non-U-Boot Chromebooks from 2013 to 2018 and is somewhat 19 more involved. 20 21 - Running U-Boot with Chromium OS verified boot. This allows U-Boot to be 22 used instead of either or both of depthcharge (a bootloader which forked 23 from U-Boot in 2013) and coreboot. See below for more information on 24 this. 25 26 - Running U-Boot from coreboot. This allows U-Boot to run on more devices 27 since many of them only support coreboot as the bootloader and have 28 no bare-metal support in U-Boot. For this, use the 'coreboot' target. 29 30 - Running U-Boot and booting into a Chrome OS image, but without verified 31 boot. This can be useful for testing. 32 33 34U-Boot with Chromium OS verified boot 35------------------------------------- 36 37To obtain: 38 39 git clone https://github.com/sglass68/u-boot.git 40 cd u-boot 41 git checkout cros-master 42 43 cd .. 44 git clone https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromiumos/platform/vboot_reference 45 cd vboot_reference 46 git checkout 45964294 47 # futility: updater: Correct output version for Snow 48 49To build for sandbox: 50 51 UB=/tmp/b/chromeos_sandbox # U-Boot build directory 52 cd u-boot 53 make O=$UB chromeos_sandbox_defconfig 54 make O=$UB -j20 -s VBOOT_SOURCE=/path/to/vboot_reference \ 55 MAKEFLAGS_VBOOT=DEBUG=1 QUIET=1 56 57Replace sandbox with another supported target. 58 59This produces $UB/image.bin which contains the firmware binaries in a SPI 60flash image. 61 62To run on sandbox: 63 64 $UB/tpl/u-boot-tpl -d $UB/u-boot.dtb.out \ 65 -L6 -c "host bind 0 $CROS/src/build/images/cheza/latest/chromiumos_image.bin; vboot go auto" \ 66 -l -w -s state.dtb -r 67 68To run on other boards: 69 Install image.bin in the SPI flash of your device 70 Boot your system 71 72 73Sandbox 74------- 75 76Most Chromium OS development with U-Boot is undertaken using sandbox. There is 77a sandbox target available (chromeos_sandbox) which allows running U-Boot on 78a Linux machine completion with emulations of the display, TPM, disk, etc. 79 80Running sandbox starts TPL, which contains the first phase of vboot, providing 81a device tree and binding a Chromium OS disk image for use to find kernels 82(any Chromium OS image will do). It also saves driver state between U-Boot 83phases into state.dtb and will automatically ensure that memory is shared 84between all phases. TPL will jump to SPL and then on to U-Boot proper. 85 86It is possible to run with debugging on, e.g. 87 88 gdb --args $UB/tpl/u-boot-tpl -d .... 89 90Breakpoints can be set in any U-Boot phase. Overall this is a good debugging 91environment for new verified-boot features. 92 93 94Samus 95----- 96 97Basic support is available for samus, using the chromeos_samus target. If you 98have an em100, use: 99 100 sudo em100 -s -c W25Q128FW -d $UB/image.bin -t -r 101 102to write the image and then boot samus (Power-Refresh). 103 104 105Boot flow 106--------- 107 108Verified boot starts in TPL, which selects the A or B SPL, which in turn selects 109the A or B U-Boot. Then this jumps to the selected kernel. If anything goes 110wrong, the device reboots and the recovery SPL and U-Boot are used instead. 111 112More details are available here: 113 114 https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/chromiumos-design-docs/firmware-boot-and-recovery 115 116 117New uclasses 118------------ 119 120Several uclasses are provided in cros/: 121 122 UCLASS_CROS_AUX_FW Chrome OS auxiliary firmware 123 UCLASS_CROS_FWSTORE Chrome OS firmware storage 124 UCLASS_CROS_NVDATA Chrome OS non-volatile data device 125 UCLASS_CROS_VBOOT_EC Chrome OS vboot EC operations 126 UCLASS_CROS_VBOOT_FLAG Chrome OS verified boot flag 127 128The existing UCLASS_CROS_EC is also used. 129 130 131Commands 132-------- 133 134A new 'vboot' command is provided to run particular vboot stages. The most 135useful command is 'vboot go auto', which continues where the last stage left 136off. 137 138Note that TPL and SPL do not supports commands as yet, so the vboot code is 139called directly from the SPL boot devices (BOOT_DEVICE_CROS_VBOOT). See 140cros_load_image_tpl() and cros_load_image_spl() which both call 141vboot_run_auto(). 142 143 144Config options 145-------------- 146 147The main option is CONFIG_CHROMEOS, which enables a wide array of other options 148so that the required features are present. 149 150 151Device-tree config 152------------------ 153 154Various options are available which control the operation of verified boot. 155See cros/dts/bindings/config.txt for details. Most config is handled at run- 156time, although build-time config (with Kconfig) could also be added fairly 157easily. 158 159 160Porting to other hardware 161------------------------- 162 163A basic port to samus (Chromebook Pixel 2015) is in a basic working state, 164using the chromeos_samus target. Patches will likely be forthcoming in early 1652019. Ports to an ARM board and coreboot (for x86 Chromebooks) are in the 166dreaming state. 167 168 169Tests 170----- 171 172Chromium OS firmware has a very limited set of tests. The tests that originally 173existed in U-Boot were not brought over to coreboot or depthcharge. 174 175The U-Boot tests ('make check') do operate, but at present there are no 176Chromium OS tests available. These will hopefully come together over time. Of 177course the above sandbox feature provides a sort of functional test and can 178detect problems that affect the flow or particular vboot features. 179 180 181U-Boot without Chromium OS verified boot 182---------------------------------------- 183 184The following script can be used to boot a Chrome OS image on coral: 185 186 # Read the image header and obtain the address of the kernel 187 # The offset 4f0 is defined by verified boot and may change for other 188 # Chromebooks 189 read mmc 2:2 100000 0 80; setexpr loader *001004f0; 190 191 # Get the kernel size and calculate the number of blocks (0x200 bytes each) 192 setexpr size *00100518; setexpr blocks $size / 200; 193 194 # Read the full kernel and calculate the address of the setup block 195 read mmc 2:2 100000 80 $blocks; setexpr setup $loader - 1000; 196 197 # Locate the command line 198 setexpr cmdline $loader - 2000; 199 200 # Start the zboot process with the loaded kernel, setup block and cmdline 201 zboot start 100000 0 0 0 $setup $cmdline; 202 203 # Load the kernel, fix up the 'setup' block, dump information 204 zboot load; zboot setup; zboot dump 205 206 # Boot into Chrome OS 207 zboot go 208 209 210TO DO 211----- 212 213Get the full ACPI tables working with Coral 214 215 216Simon Glass 217sjg@chromium.org 2187 October 2018 219
README.chromium-chainload
1Running U-Boot from coreboot on Chromebooks 2=========================================== 3 4U-Boot can be used as a secondary boot loader in a few situations such as from 5UEFI and coreboot (see README.x86). Recent Chromebooks use coreboot even on 6ARM platforms to start up the machine. 7 8This document aims to provide a guide to booting U-Boot on a Chromebook. It 9is only a starting point, and there are many guides on the interwebs. But 10placing this information in the U-Boot tree should make it easier to find for 11those who use U-Boot habitually. 12 13Most of these platforms are supported by U-Boot natively, but it is risky to 14replace the ROM unless you have a servo board and cable to restore it with. 15 16 17For all of these the standard U-Boot build instructions apply. For example on 18ARM: 19 20 sudo apt install gcc-arm-linux-gnueabi 21 mkdir b 22 make O=b/nyan_big CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- nyan-big_defconfig all 23 24You can obtain the vbutil_kernel utility here: 25 26 https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7WYZbZ9zd-3dHlVVXo4VXE2T0U 27 28 29Snow (Samsung ARM Chromebook) 30----------------------------- 31 32See here: 33 34https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/firmware-porting-guide/using-nv-u-boot-on-the-samsung-arm-chromebook 35 36 37Nyan-big 38-------- 39 40Compiled based on information here: 41https://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2015-March/209530.html 42https://git.collabora.com/cgit/user/tomeu/u-boot.git/commit/?h=nyan-big 43https://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2017-May/289491.html 44https://github.com/chromeos-nvidia-androidtv/gnu-linux-on-acer-chromebook-13#copy-data-to-the-sd-card 45 461. Build U-Boot 47 48 mkdir b 49 make -j8 O=b/nyan-big CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- nyan-big_defconfig all 50 51 522. Select a .its file 53 54Select something from doc/chromium which matches your board, or create your 55own. 56 57Note that the device tree node is required, even though it is not actually 58used by U-Boot. This is because the Chromebook expects to pass it to the 59kernel, and crashes if it is not present. 60 61 623. Build and sign an image 63 64 ./b/nyan-big/tools/mkimage -f doc/chromium/nyan-big.its u-boot-chromium.fit 65 echo test >dummy.txt 66 vbutil_kernel --arch arm --keyblock doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel.keyblock \ 67 --signprivate doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel_data_key.vbprivk \ 68 --version 1 --config dummy.txt --vmlinuz u-boot-chromium.fit \ 69 --bootloader dummy.txt --pack u-boot.kpart 70 71 724. Prepare an SD card 73 74 DISK=/dev/sdc # Replace with your actual SD card device 75 sudo cgpt create $DISK 76 sudo cgpt add -b 34 -s 32768 -P 1 -S 1 -t kernel $DISK 77 sudo cgpt add -b 32802 -s 2000000 -t rootfs $DISK 78 sudo gdisk $DISK # Enter command 'w' to write a protective MBR to the disk 79 80 815. Write U-Boot to the SD card 82 83 sudo dd if=u-boot.kpart of=/dev/sdc1; sync 84 85 866. Start it up 87 88Reboot the device in dev mode. Make sure that you have USB booting enabled. To 89do this, login as root (via Ctrl-Alt-forward_arrow) and type 90'enable_dev_usb_boot'. You only need to do this once. 91 92Reboot the device with the SD card inserted. Press Clrl-U at the developer 93mode screen. It should show something like the following on the display: 94 95 U-Boot 2017.07-00637-g242eb42-dirty (May 22 2017 - 06:14:21 -0600) 96 97 Model: Acer Chromebook 13 CB5-311 98 Board: Google/NVIDIA Nyan-big, ID: 1 99 100 Net: No ethernet found. 101 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 102 Tegra124 (Nyan-big) # 103 104 1057. Known problems 106 107On the serial console the word MMC is chopped at the start of the line: 108 109C: sdhci@700b0000: 2, sdhci@700b0400: 1, sdhci@700b0600: 0 110 111This is likely due to some problem with change-over of the serial driver 112during relocation (or perhaps updating the clock setup in board_init()). 113 114 1159. Notes 116 117To check that you copied the u-boot.its file correctly, use these commands. 118You should see that the data at 0x100 in u-boot-chromium.fit is the first few 119bytes of U-Boot: 120 121 hd u-boot-chromium.fit |head -20 122 ... 123 00000100 b8 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................| 124 125 hd b/nyan-big/u-boot.bin |head 126 00000000 b8 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................| 127 128 129The 'data' property of the FIT is set up to start at offset 0x100 bytes into 130the file. The change to CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE is also an offset of 0x100 bytes 131from the load address. If this changes, you either need to modify U-Boot to be 132fully relocatable, or expect it to hang. 133 134 135chromebook_jerry 136---------------- 137 138The instruction are similar to those for Nyan with changes as noted below: 139 1401. Patch U-Boot 141 142Open include/configs/rk3288_common.h 143 144Change: 145 146#define CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE 0x00100000 147 148to: 149 150#define CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE 0x02000100 151 152 153 1542. Build U-Boot 155 156 mkdir b 157 make -j8 O=b/chromebook_jerry CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- \ 158 chromebook_jerry_defconfig all 159 160 1613. See above 162 1634. Build and sign an image 164 165 ./b/chromebook_jerry/tools/mkimage -f doc/chromium/chromebook_jerry.its \ 166 u-boot-chromium.fit 167 echo test >dummy.txt 168 vbutil_kernel --arch arm --keyblock doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel.keyblock \ 169 --signprivate doc/chromium/devkeys/kernel_data_key.vbprivk \ 170 --version 1 --config dummy.txt --vmlinuz u-boot-chromium.fit \ 171 --bootloader dummy.txt --pack u-boot.kpart 172 173 1745. See above 175 1766. See above 177 1787. Start it up 179 180Reboot the device in dev mode. Make sure that you have USB booting enabled. To 181do this, login as root (via Ctrl-Alt-forward_arrow) and type 182'enable_dev_usb_boot'. You only need to do this once. 183 184Reboot the device with the SD card inserted. Press Clrl-U at the developer 185mode screen. It should show something like the following on the display: 186 187 U-Boot 2017.05-00649-g72acdbf-dirty (May 29 2017 - 14:57:05 -0600) 188 189 Model: Google Jerry 190 Net: Net Initialization Skipped 191 No ethernet found. 192 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 193 194 1958. Known problems 196 197None as yet. 198 199 2009. Notes 201 202None as yet. 203 204 205Other notes 206=========== 207 208flashrom 209-------- 210 211 Used to make a backup of your firmware, or to replace it. 212 213 See: https://www.chromium.org/chromium-os/packages/cros-flashrom 214 215 216coreboot 217-------- 218 219Coreboot itself is not designed to actually boot an OS. Instead, a program 220called Depthcharge is used. This originally came out of U-Boot and was then 221heavily hacked and modified such that is is almost unrecognisable. It does 222include a very small part of the U-Boot command-line interface but is not 223usable as a general-purpose boot loader. 224 225In addition, it has a very unusual design in that it does not do device init 226itself, but instead relies on coreboot. This is similar to (in U-Boot) having 227a SPI driver with an empty probe() method, relying on whatever was set up 228beforehand. It can be quite hard to figure out between these two code bases 229what settings are actually used. When chain-loading into U-Boot we must be 230careful to reinit anything that U-Boot expects. If not, some peripherals (or 231the whole machine) may not work. This makes the process of chainloading more 232complicated than it could be on some platforms. 233 234Finally, it supports only a subset of the U-Boot's FIT format. In particular 235it uses a fixed address to load the FIT and does not support load/exec 236addresses. This means that U-Boot must be able to boot from whatever 237address Depthcharge happens to use (it is the CONFIG_KERNEL_START setting 238in Depthcharge). In practice this means that the data in the kernel@1 FIT node 239(see above) must start at the same address as U-Boot's CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE. 240
README.commands.itest
1A slow day today so here is a revised itest command with provisional 2support for comparing strings as well :-)) 3 4Now table driven to allow the operators 5-eq, -ne, -lt, -gt, -le, -ge, ==, !=, <>, <, >, <=, >= 6 7Uses the expected command modifier for integer compares of width 1, 2 or 84 bytes of .b, .w, .l and the new modifer of .s for a string compare. 9String comparison is over the length of the shorter, this hopefully 10avoids missing terminators when using an indirect pointer. 11 12eg. 13if itest.l *40000 == 12345678 then; .... 14if itest.w *40000 != 1234 then; .... 15if itest.b *40000 >= 12 then; .... 16if itest.s *40000 -eq hello then; .... 17
README.commands.spl
1The spl command is used to export a boot parameter image to RAM. Later 2it may implement more functions connected to the SPL. 3 4SUBCOMMAND EXPORT 5To execute the command everything has to be in place as if bootm should be 6used. (kernel image, initrd-image, fdt-image etc.) 7 8export has two subcommands: 9 atags: exports the ATAGS 10 fdt: exports the FDT 11 12Call is: 13spl export <fdt|atags> [kernel_addr] [initrd_addr] [fdt_addr if fdt] 14 15 16TYPICAL CALL 17 18on OMAP3: 19nandecc hw 20nand read 0x82000000 0x280000 0x400000 /* Read kernel image from NAND*/ 21spl export atags /* export ATAGS */ 22nand erase 0x680000 0x20000 /* erase - one page */ 23nand write 0x80000100 0x680000 0x20000 /* write the image - one page */ 24 25call with FDT: 26nandecc hw 27nand read 0x82000000 0x280000 0x400000 /* Read kernel image from NAND*/ 28tftpboot 0x80000100 devkit8000.dtb /* Read fdt */ 29spl export fdt 0x82000000 - 0x80000100 /* export FDT */ 30nand erase 0x680000 0x20000 /* erase - one page */ 31nand write <adress shown by spl export> 0x680000 0x20000 32
README.console
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2000 4 * Paolo Scaffardi, AIRVENT SAM s.p.a - RIMINI(ITALY), arsenio@tin.it 5 */ 6 7U-Boot console handling 8======================== 9 10HOW THE CONSOLE WORKS? 11---------------------- 12 13At system startup U-Boot initializes a serial console. When U-Boot 14relocates itself to RAM, all console drivers are initialized (they 15will register all detected console devices to the system for further 16use). 17 18If not defined in the environment, the first input device is assigned 19to the 'stdin' file, the first output one to 'stdout' and 'stderr'. 20 21You can use the command "coninfo" to see all registered console 22devices and their flags. You can assign a standard file (stdin, 23stdout or stderr) to any device you see in that list simply by 24assigning its name to the corresponding environment variable. For 25example: 26 27 setenv stdin serial <- To use the serial input 28 setenv stdout video <- To use the video console 29 30Do a simple "saveenv" to save the console settings in the environment 31and get them working on the next startup, too. 32 33HOW CAN I USE STANDARD FILE INTO THE SOURCES? 34--------------------------------------------- 35 36You can use the following functions to access the console: 37 38* STDOUT: 39 putc (to put a char to stdout) 40 puts (to put a string to stdout) 41 printf (to format and put a string to stdout) 42 43* STDIN: 44 tstc (to test for the presence of a char in stdin) 45 getc (to get a char from stdin) 46 47* STDERR: 48 eputc (to put a char to stderr) 49 eputs (to put a string to stderr) 50 eprintf (to format and put a string to stderr) 51 52* FILE (can be 'stdin', 'stdout', 'stderr'): 53 fputc (like putc but redirected to a file) 54 fputs (like puts but redirected to a file) 55 fprintf (like printf but redirected to a file) 56 ftstc (like tstc but redirected to a file) 57 fgetc (like getc but redirected to a file) 58 59Remember that all FILE-related functions CANNOT be used before 60U-Boot relocation (done in 'board_init_r' in arch/*/lib/board.c). 61 62HOW CAN I USE STANDARD FILE INTO APPLICATIONS? 63---------------------------------------------- 64 65Use the 'bd_mon_fnc' field of the bd_info structure passed to the 66application to do everything you want with the console. 67 68But REMEMBER that that will work only if you have not overwritten any 69U-Boot code while loading (or uncompressing) the image of your 70application. 71 72For example, you won't get the console stuff running in the Linux 73kernel because the kernel overwrites U-Boot before running. Only 74some parameters like the framebuffer descriptors are passed to the 75kernel in the high memory area to let the applications (the kernel) 76use the framebuffers initialized by U-Boot. 77 78SUPPORTED DRIVERS 79----------------- 80 81Working drivers: 82 83 serial (architecture dependent serial stuff) 84 video (mpc8xx video controller) 85 86Work in progress: 87 88 wl_kbd (Wireless 4PPM keyboard) 89 90Waiting for volounteers: 91 92 lcd (mpc8xx lcd controller; to ) 93 94TESTED CONFIGURATIONS 95--------------------- 96 97The driver has been tested with the following configurations (see 98CREDITS for other contact informations): 99 100- MPC823FADS with AD7176 on a PAL TV (YCbYCr) - arsenio@tin.it 101
README.davinci
1Summary 2======= 3 4Note: this document used to be about the entire family of DaVinci SOCs but the 5support for the DM* family and DA830 has since been dropped. 6 7This README is about U-Boot support for TI's DA850 SoC. This SOC has an OMAP 8part number but is very similar to the DaVinci series. 9 10Currently the following boards are supported: 11 12* TI DA850 EVM 13 14* TI OMAP-L138 LCDK 15 16* Lego EV3 17 18Build 19===== 20 21* TI DA850 EVM: 22 23make da850evm_config 24make 25 26* TI OMAP-L138 LCDK 27 28make omapl138_lcdk_defconfig 29make 30 31* Lego EV3 32 33make legoev3_defconfig 34make 35 36Bootloaders 37=============== 38 39For DA850 an SPL (secondary program loader, see doc/README.SPL) is provided 40to load U-Boot from SPI flash, MMC or NAND. The SPL takes care of the low level 41initialization. 42 43The SPL is built as u-boot.ais for all DA850 defconfigs except those booting 44from NOR flash. The resulting image file can be programmed to the SPI flash 45of the DA850 EVM/LCDK. 46 47Devices that support booting from NOR utilize execute in place (XIP) and do 48not require SPL to perform low level initialization. 49 50Environment Variables 51===================== 52 53The DA850 EVM allows the user to specify the maximum cpu clock allowed by the 54silicon, in Hz, via an environment variable "maxcpuclk". 55 56The maximum clock rate allowed depends on the silicon populated on the EVM. 57Please make sure you understand the restrictions placed on this clock in the 58device specific datasheet before setting up this variable. This information is 59passed to the Linux kernel using the ATAG_REVISION atag. 60 61If "maxcpuclk" is not defined, the configuration CONFIG_DA850_EVM_MAX_CPU_CLK 62is used to obtain this information. 63 64Links 65===== 66 671) TI DA850 EVM 68http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/omap-l138.html 69http://www.logicpd.com/products/development-kits/zoom-omap-l138-evm-development-kit 70 712) TI OMAP-L138 LCDK 72http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/omap-l138.html 73http://www.ti.com/tool/TMDXLCDK138 74 75Davinci special defines 76======================= 77 78CONFIG_SYS_DV_NOR_BOOT_CFG: AM18xx based boards, booting in NOR Boot mode 79 need a "NOR Boot Configuration Word" stored 80 in the NOR Flash. This define adds this. 81 More Info about this, see: 82 spraba5a.pdf chapter 3.1 83
README.davinci.nand_spl
1With this approach, we don't need the UBL any more on DaVinci boards. 2A "make boardname" will compile a u-boot.ubl, with UBL Header, which is 3needed for the RBL to find the "UBL", which actually is a UBL-compatible 4header, nand spl code and u-boot code. 5 6 7As the RBL uses another read function as the "standard" u-boot, 8we need a command, which switches between this two read/write 9functions, so we can write the UBL header and the spl 10code in a format, which the RBL can read. This is realize 11(at the moment in board specific code) in the u-boot command 12nandrbl 13 14nandrbl without arguments returns actual mode (rbl or uboot). 15with nandrbl mode (mode = "rbl" or "uboot") you can switch 16between the two NAND read/write modes. 17 18 19To set up mkimage you need a config file for mkimage, example: 20board/ait/cam_enc_4xx/ublimage.cfg 21 22For information about the configuration please see: 23doc/README.ublimage 24 25Example for the cam_enc_4xx board: 26On the cam_enc_4xx board we have a NAND flash with blocksize = 0x20000 and 27pagesize = 0x800, so the u-boot.ubl image (which you get with: 28"make cam_enc_4xx") looks like this: 29 3000000000 00 ed ac a1 20 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 |.... ...........| 3100000010 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |.... ...........| 3200000020 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................| 33* 3400000800 14 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 10 f0 9f e5 0c f0 9f e5 |................| 3500000810 08 f0 9f e5 04 f0 9f e5 00 f0 9f e5 04 f0 1f e5 |................| 3600000820 00 01 00 00 78 56 34 12 78 56 34 12 78 56 34 12 |....xV4.xV4.xV4.| 37[...] 38* 3900001fe0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................| 4000001ff0 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff |................| 41* 4200003800 14 00 00 ea 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................| 4300003810 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 14 f0 9f e5 |................| 4400003820 80 01 08 81 e0 01 08 81 40 02 08 81 a0 02 08 81 |........@.......| 45 46In the first "page" of the image, we have the UBL Header, needed for 47the RBL to find the spl code. 48 49The spl code starts in the second "page" of the image, with a size 50defined by: 51 52#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL 6 53 54After the spl code, there comes the "real" u-boot code 55@ (6 + 1) * pagesize = 0x3800 56 57------------------------------------------------------------------------ 58Setting up spl code: 59 60/* 61 * RBL searches from Block n (n = 1..24) 62 * so we can define, how many UBL Headers 63 * we write before the real spl code 64 */ 65#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER 5 66#define CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL 6 67 68#define CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS ((CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER * \ 69 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE) + \ 70 (CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL) * \ 71 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE) 72------------------------------------------------------------------------ 73 74Burning into NAND: 75 76step 1: 77The RBL searches from Block n ( n = 1..24) on page 0 for valid UBL 78Headers, so you have to burn the UBL header page from the u-boot.ubl 79image to the blocks, you want to have the UBL header. 80!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with 81 "nandrbl rbl" 82 83step 2: 84You need to setup in the ublimage.cfg, where the RBL can find the spl 85code, and how big it is. 86 87!! RBL always starts reading from page 0 !! 88 89For the AIT board, we have: 90PAGES 6 91START_BLOCK 5 92 93So we need to copy the spl code to block 5 page 0 94!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with 95 "nandrbl rbl" 96 97step 3: 98You need to copy the u-boot image to the block/page 99where the spl code reads it (CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS) 100!! Don;t forget to switch to rbl nand read/write functions with 101 "nandrbl uboot", which is default. 102 103On the cam_enc_4xx board it is: 104#define CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS (0xc0000) 105 106-> this results in following NAND usage on the cam_enc_4xx board: 107 108addr 109 11020000 possible UBL Header 11140000 possible UBL Header 11260000 possible UBL Header 11380000 possilbe UBL Header 114a0000 spl code 115c0000 u-boot code 116 117The above steps are executeed through the following environment vars: 118(using 80000 as address for the UBL header) 119 120pagesz=800 121uboot=/tftpboot/cam_enc_4xx/u-boot.ubl 122load=tftp 80000000 ${uboot} 123writeheader nandrbl rbl;nand erase 80000 ${pagesz};nand write 80000000 80000 ${pagesz};nandrbl uboot 124writenand_spl nandrbl rbl;nand erase a0000 3000;nand write 80000800 a0000 3000;nandrbl uboot 125writeuboot nandrbl uboot;nand erase c0000 5d000;nand write 80003800 c0000 5d000 126update=run load writeheader writenand_spl writeuboot 127 128If you do a "run load update" u-boot, spl + ubl header 129are magically updated ;-) 130 131Note: 132- There seem to be a bug in the RBL code (at least on my HW), 133 In the UBL block, I can set the page to values != 0, so it 134 is possible to burn step 1 and step 2 in one step into the 135 flash, but the RBL ignores the page settings, so I have to 136 burn the UBL Header to a page 0 and the spl code to 137 a page 0 ... :-( 138- If we make the nand read/write functions in the RBL equal to 139 the functions in u-boot (as I have no RBL code, it is only 140 possible in u-boot), we could burn the complete image in 141 one step ... that would be nice ... 142
README.dfutftp
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2015 4# 5# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@majess.pl> 6 7Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU) - extension to use TFTP 8===================================================== 9 10Why? 11---- 12 13* Update TFTP (CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP) only supports writing 14code to NAND memory via TFTP. 15* DFU supports writing data to the variety of mediums (NAND, 16eMMC, SD, partitions, RAM, etc) via USB. 17 18Combination of both solves their shortcomings! 19 20 21Overview 22-------- 23 24This document briefly describes how to use DFU for 25upgrading firmware (e.g. kernel, u-boot, rootfs, etc.) 26via TFTP protocol. 27 28By using Ethernet (TFTP protocol to be precise) it is 29possible to overcome the major problem of USB based DFU - 30the relatively low transfer speed for large files. 31This was caused by DFU standard, which imposed utilization 32of only EP0 for transfer. By using Ethernet we can circumvent 33this shortcoming. 34 35Beagle Bone Black rev. C (BBB) powered by TI's am335x CPU has 36been used as a demo board. 37 38To utilize this feature, one needs to first enable support 39for USB based DFU (CONFIG_DFU_*) and DFU TFTP update 40(CONFIG_DFU_TFTP) described in ./doc/README.update. 41 42The "dfu" command has been extended to support transfer via TFTP - one 43needs to type for example "dfu tftp 0 mmc 0" 44 45As of this writing (SHA1:8d77576371381ade83de475bb639949b44941e8c v2015.10-rc2) 46the update.c code is not enabled (CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP) by any board in the 47contemporary u-boot tree. 48 49 50Environment variables 51--------------------- 52 53The "dfu tftp" command can be used in the "preboot" environment variable 54(when it is enabled by defining CONFIG_PREBOOT). 55This is the preferable way of using this command in the early boot stage 56as opposed to legacy update_tftp() function invocation. 57 58 59Beagle Bone Black (BBB) setup 60----------------------------- 61 621. Setup tftp env variables: 63 * select desired eth device - 'ethact' variable ["ethact=cpsw"] 64 (use "bdinfo" to check current setting) 65 * setup "serverip" and "ipaddr" variables 66 * set "loadaddr" as a fixed buffer where incoming data is placed 67 ["loadaddr=0x81000000"] 68 69######### 70# BONUS # 71######### 72It is possible to use USB interface to emulate ETH connection by setting 73"ethact=usb_ether". In this way one can have very fast DFU transfer via USB. 74 75For 33MiB test image the transfer rate was 1MiB/s for ETH over USB and 200KiB/s 76for pure DFU USB transfer. 77 782. Setup update_tftp variables: 79 * set "updatefile" - the file name to be downloaded via TFTP (stored on 80 the HOST at e.g. /srv/tftp) 81 823. If required, to update firmware on boot, put the "dfu tftp 0 mmc 0" in the 83 "preboot" env variable. Otherwise use this command from u-boot prompt. 84 854. Inspect "dfu" specific variables: 86 * "dfu_alt_info" - information about available DFU entities 87 * "dfu_bufsiz" - variable to set buffer size [in bytes] - when it is not 88 possible to set large enough default buffer (8 MiB @ BBB) 89 90 91 92FIT image format for download 93----------------------------- 94 95To create FIT image for download one should follow the update tftp README file 96(./doc/README.update) with one notable difference: 97 98The original snippet of ./doc/uImage.FIT/update_uboot.its 99 100 images { 101 update@1 { 102 description = "U-Boot binary"; 103 104should look like 105 106 images { 107 u-boot.bin@1 { 108 description = "U-Boot binary"; 109 110where "u-boot.bin" is the DFU entity name to be stored. 111 112 113 114To do 115----- 116 117* Extend dfu-util command to support TFTP based transfers 118* Upload support (via TFTP) 119
README.displaying-bmps
1If you are experiencing hangups/data-aborts when trying to display a BMP image, 2the following might be relevant to your situation... 3 4Some architectures cannot handle unaligned memory accesses, and an attempt to 5perform one will lead to a data abort. On such architectures it is necessary to 6make sure all data is properly aligned, and in many situations simply choosing 7a 32 bit aligned address is enough to ensure proper alignment. This is not 8always the case when dealing with data that has an internal layout such as a 9BMP image: 10 11BMP images have a header that starts with 2 byte-size fields followed by mostly 1232 bit fields. The packed struct that represents this header can be seen below: 13 14typedef struct bmp_header { 15 /* Header */ 16 char signature[2]; 17 __u32 file_size; 18 __u32 reserved; 19 __u32 data_offset; 20 ... etc 21} __attribute__ ((packed)) bmp_header_t; 22 23When placed in an aligned address such as 0x80a00000, char signature offsets 24the __u32 fields into unaligned addresses (in our example 0x80a00002, 250x80a00006, and so on...). When these fields are accessed by U-Boot, a 32 bit 26access is generated at a non-32-bit-aligned address, causing a data abort. 27The proper alignment for BMP images is therefore: 32-bit-aligned-address + 2. 28
README.distro
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2014 Red Hat Inc. 4 * Copyright (c) 2014-2015, NVIDIA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 5 * Copyright (C) 2015 K. Merker <merker@debian.org> 6 */ 7 8Generic Distro Configuration Concept 9==================================== 10 11Linux distributions are faced with supporting a variety of boot mechanisms, 12environments or bootloaders (PC BIOS, EFI, U-Boot, Barebox, ...). This makes 13life complicated. Worse, bootloaders such as U-Boot have a configurable set 14of features, and each board chooses to enable a different set of features. 15Hence, distros typically need to have board-specific knowledge in order to 16set up a bootable system. 17 18This document defines a common set of U-Boot features that are required for 19a distro to support the board in a generic fashion. Any board wishing to 20allow distros to install and boot in an out-of-the-box fashion should enable 21all these features. Linux distros can then create a single set of boot 22support/install logic that targets these features. This will allow distros 23to install on many boards without the need for board-specific logic. 24 25In fact, some of these features can be implemented by any bootloader, thus 26decoupling distro install/boot logic from any knowledge of the bootloader. 27 28This model assumes that boards will load boot configuration files from a 29regular storage mechanism (eMMC, SD card, USB Disk, SATA disk, etc.) with 30a standard partitioning scheme (MBR, GPT). Boards that cannot support this 31storage model are outside the scope of this document, and may still need 32board-specific installer/boot-configuration support in a distro. 33 34To some extent, this model assumes that a board has a separate boot flash 35that contains U-Boot, and that the user has somehow installed U-Boot to this 36flash before running the distro installer. Even on boards that do not conform 37to this aspect of the model, the extent of the board-specific support in the 38distro installer logic would be to install a board-specific U-Boot package to 39the boot partition during installation. This distro-supplied U-Boot can still 40implement the same features as on any other board, and hence the distro's boot 41configuration file generation logic can still be board-agnostic. 42 43Locating Bootable Disks 44----------------------- 45 46Typical desktop/server PCs search all (or a user-defined subset of) attached 47storage devices for a bootable partition, then load the bootloader or boot 48configuration files from there. A U-Boot board port that enables the features 49mentioned in this document will search for boot configuration files in the 50same way. 51 52Thus, distros do not need to manipulate any kind of bootloader-specific 53configuration data to indicate which storage device the system should boot 54from. 55 56Distros simply need to install the boot configuration files (see next 57section) in an ext2/3/4 or FAT partition, mark the partition bootable (via 58the MBR bootable flag, or GPT legacy_bios_bootable attribute), and U-Boot (or 59any other bootloader) will find those boot files and execute them. This is 60conceptually identical to creating a grub2 configuration file on a desktop 61PC. 62 63Note that in the absence of any partition that is explicitly marked bootable, 64U-Boot falls back to searching the first valid partition of a disk for boot 65configuration files. Other bootloaders are recommended to do the same, since 66I believe that partition table bootable flags aren't so commonly used outside 67the realm of x86 PCs. 68 69U-Boot can also search for boot configuration files from a TFTP server. 70 71Boot Configuration Files 72------------------------ 73 74The standard format for boot configuration files is that of extlinux.conf, as 75handled by U-Boot's "syslinux" (disk) or "pxe boot" (network). This is roughly 76as specified at: 77 78http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/BootLoaderSpec/ 79 80... with the exceptions that the BootLoaderSpec document: 81 82* Prescribes a separate configuration per boot menu option, whereas U-Boot 83 lumps all options into a single extlinux.conf file. Hence, U-Boot searches 84 for /extlinux/extlinux.conf then /boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf on disk, or 85 pxelinux.cfg/default over the network. 86 87* Does not document the fdtdir option, which automatically selects the DTB to 88 pass to the kernel. 89 90One example extlinux.conf generated by the Fedora installer is: 91 92------------------------------------------------------------ 93# extlinux.conf generated by anaconda 94 95ui menu.c32 96 97menu autoboot Welcome to Fedora. Automatic boot in # second{,s}. Press a key for options. 98menu title Fedora Boot Options. 99menu hidden 100 101timeout 50 102#totaltimeout 9000 103 104default Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae) 22 (Rawhide) 105 106label Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl) 22 (Rawhide) 107 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl 108 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 drm.debug=0xf 109 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl 110 initrd /boot/initramfs-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl.img 111 112label Fedora (3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae) 22 (Rawhide) 113 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae 114 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 drm.debug=0xf 115 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae 116 initrd /boot/initramfs-3.17.0-0.rc4.git2.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae.img 117 118label Fedora-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc (0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc) 119 kernel /boot/vmlinuz-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc 120 initrd /boot/initramfs-0-rescue-8f6ba7b039524e0eb957d2c9203f04bc.img 121 append ro root=UUID=8eac677f-8ea8-4270-8479-d5ddbb797450 console=ttyS0,115200n8 122 fdtdir /boot/dtb-3.16.0-0.rc6.git1.1.fc22.armv7hl+lpae 123------------------------------------------------------------ 124 125Another hand-crafted network boot configuration file is: 126 127------------------------------------------------------------ 128TIMEOUT 100 129 130MENU TITLE TFTP boot options 131 132LABEL jetson-tk1-emmc 133 MENU LABEL ../zImage root on Jetson TK1 eMMC 134 LINUX ../zImage 135 FDTDIR ../ 136 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=80a5a8e9-c744-491a-93c1-4f4194fd690b 137 138LABEL venice2-emmc 139 MENU LABEL ../zImage root on Venice2 eMMC 140 LINUX ../zImage 141 FDTDIR ../ 142 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=5f71e06f-be08-48ed-b1ef-ee4800cc860f 143 144LABEL sdcard 145 MENU LABEL ../zImage, root on 2GB sdcard 146 LINUX ../zImage 147 FDTDIR ../ 148 APPEND console=ttyS0,115200n8 console=tty1 loglevel=8 rootwait rw earlyprintk root=PARTUUID=b2f82cda-2535-4779-b467-094a210fbae7 149 150LABEL fedora-installer-fk 151 MENU LABEL Fedora installer w/ Fedora kernel 152 LINUX fedora-installer/vmlinuz 153 INITRD fedora-installer/initrd.img.orig 154 FDTDIR fedora-installer/dtb 155 APPEND loglevel=8 ip=dhcp inst.repo=http://10.0.0.2/mirrors/fedora/linux/development/rawhide/armhfp/os/ rd.shell cma=64M 156------------------------------------------------------------ 157 158U-Boot Implementation 159===================== 160 161Enabling the distro options 162--------------------------- 163 164In your board's defconfig, enable the DISTRO_DEFAULTS option by adding 165a line with "CONFIG_DISTRO_DEFAULTS=y". If you want to enable this 166from Kconfig itself, for e.g. all boards using a specific SoC then 167add a "imply DISTRO_DEFAULTS" to your SoC CONFIG option. 168 169In your board configuration file, include the following: 170 171------------------------------------------------------------ 172#ifndef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD 173#include <config_distro_bootcmd.h> 174#endif 175------------------------------------------------------------ 176 177The first of those headers primarily enables a core set of U-Boot features, 178such as support for MBR and GPT partitions, ext* and FAT filesystems, booting 179raw zImage and initrd (rather than FIT- or uImage-wrapped files), etc. Network 180boot support is also enabled here, which is useful in order to boot distro 181installers given that distros do not commonly distribute bootable install 182media for non-PC targets at present. 183 184Finally, a few options that are mostly relevant only when using U-Boot- 185specific boot.scr scripts are enabled. This enables distros to generate a 186U-Boot-specific boot.scr script rather than extlinux.conf as the boot 187configuration file. While doing so is fully supported, and 188CONFIG_DISTRO_DEFAULTS exposes enough parameterization to boot.scr to 189allow for board-agnostic boot.scr content, this document recommends that 190distros generate extlinux.conf rather than boot.scr. extlinux.conf is intended 191to work across multiple bootloaders, whereas boot.scr will only work with 192U-Boot. TODO: document the contract between U-Boot and boot.scr re: which 193environment variables a generic boot.scr may rely upon. 194 195The second of those headers sets up the default environment so that $bootcmd 196is defined in a way that searches attached disks for boot configuration files, 197and executes them if found. 198 199Required Environment Variables 200------------------------------ 201 202The U-Boot "syslinux" and "pxe boot" commands require a number of environment 203variables be set. Default values for these variables are often hard-coded into 204CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS in the board's U-Boot configuration file, so that 205the user doesn't have to configure them. 206 207fdt_addr: 208 209 Mandatory for any system that provides the DTB in HW (e.g. ROM) and wishes 210 to pass that DTB to Linux, rather than loading a DTB from the boot 211 filesystem. Prohibited for any other system. 212 213 If specified a DTB to boot the system must be available at the given 214 address. 215 216fdt_addr_r: 217 218 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the DTB will be loaded or copied to when 219 processing the fdtdir/devicetreedir or fdt/devicetree options in 220 extlinux.conf. 221 222 This is mandatory even when fdt_addr is provided, since extlinux.conf must 223 always be able to provide a DTB which overrides any copy provided by the HW. 224 225 A size of 1MB for the FDT/DTB seems reasonable. 226 227fdtfile: 228 229 Mandatory. the name of the DTB file for the specific board for instance 230 the espressobin v5 board the value is "marvell/armada-3720-espressobin.dtb" 231 while on a clearfog pro it is "armada-388-clearfog-pro.dtb" in the case of 232 a board providing its firmware based DTB this value can be used to override 233 the DTB with a different DTB. fdtfile will automatically be set for you if 234 it matches the format ${soc}-${board}.dtb which covers most 32 bit use cases. 235 AArch64 generally does not match as the Linux kernel put the dtb files under 236 SoC vendor directories. 237 238ramdisk_addr_r: 239 240 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the initial ramdisk will be loaded to 241 when processing the initrd option in extlinux.conf. 242 243 It is recommended that this location be highest in RAM out of fdt_addr_, 244 kernel_addr_r, and ramdisk_addr_r, so that the RAM disk can vary in size 245 and use any available RAM. 246 247kernel_addr_r: 248 249 Mandatory. The location in RAM where the kernel will be loaded to when 250 processing the kernel option in the extlinux.conf. 251 252 The kernel should be located within the first 128M of RAM in order for the 253 kernel CONFIG_AUTO_ZRELADDR option to work, which is likely enabled on any 254 distro kernel. Since the kernel will decompress itself to 0x8000 after the 255 start of RAM, kernel_addr_r should not overlap that area, or the kernel will 256 have to copy itself somewhere else first before decompression. 257 258 A size of 16MB for the kernel is likely adequate. 259 260kernel_comp_addr_r: 261 Optional. This is only required if user wants to boot Linux from a compressed 262 Image(.gz, .bz2, .lzma, .lzo) using the booti command. It represents the 263 location in RAM where the compressed Image will be decompressed temporarily. 264 Once the decompression is complete, the decompressed data will be moved to 265 kernel_addr_r for booting. 266 267kernel_comp_size: 268 Optional. This is only required if user wants to boot Linux from a compressed 269 Image using booti command. It represents the size of the compressed file. The 270 size has to at least the size of loaded image for decompression to succeed. 271 272pxefile_addr_r: 273 274 Mandatory. The location in RAM where extlinux.conf will be loaded to prior 275 to processing. 276 277 A size of 1MB for extlinux.conf is more than adequate. 278 279scriptaddr: 280 281 Mandatory, if the boot script is boot.scr rather than extlinux.conf. The 282 location in RAM where boot.scr will be loaded to prior to execution. 283 284 A size of 1MB for extlinux.conf is more than adequate. 285 286For suggestions on memory locations for ARM systems, you must follow the 287guidelines specified in Documentation/arm/Booting in the Linux kernel tree. 288 289For a commented example of setting these values, please see the definition of 290MEM_LAYOUT_ENV_SETTINGS in include/configs/tegra124-common.h. 291 292Boot Target Configuration 293------------------------- 294 295<config_distro_bootcmd.h> defines $bootcmd and many helper command variables 296that automatically search attached disks for boot configuration files and 297execute them. Boards must provide configure <config_distro_bootcmd.h> so that 298it supports the correct set of possible boot device types. To provide this 299configuration, simply define macro BOOT_TARGET_DEVICES prior to including 300<config_distro_bootcmd.h>. For example: 301 302------------------------------------------------------------ 303#ifndef CONFIG_SPL_BUILD 304#define BOOT_TARGET_DEVICES(func) \ 305 func(MMC, mmc, 1) \ 306 func(MMC, mmc, 0) \ 307 func(USB, usb, 0) \ 308 func(PXE, pxe, na) \ 309 func(DHCP, dhcp, na) 310#include <config_distro_bootcmd.h> 311#endif 312------------------------------------------------------------ 313 314Each entry in the macro defines a single boot device (e.g. a specific eMMC 315device or SD card) or type of boot device (e.g. USB disk). The parameters to 316the func macro (passed in by the internal implementation of the header) are: 317 318- Upper-case disk type (MMC, SATA, SCSI, IDE, USB, DHCP, PXE, VIRTIO). 319- Lower-case disk type (same options as above). 320- ID of the specific disk (MMC only) or ignored for other types. 321 322User Configuration 323================== 324 325Once the user has installed U-Boot, it is expected that the environment will 326be reset to the default values in order to enable $bootcmd and friends, as set 327up by <config_distro_bootcmd.h>. After this, various environment variables may 328be altered to influence the boot process: 329 330boot_targets: 331 332 The list of boot locations searched. 333 334 Example: mmc0, mmc1, usb, pxe 335 336 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the boot order. 337 338boot_prefixes: 339 340 For disk-based booting, the list of directories within a partition that are 341 searched for boot configuration files (extlinux.conf, boot.scr). 342 343 Example: / /boot/ 344 345 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the set of 346 directories which are searched. 347 348boot_scripts: 349 350 The name of U-Boot style boot.scr files that $bootcmd searches for. 351 352 Example: boot.scr.uimg boot.scr 353 354 (Typically we expect extlinux.conf to be used, but execution of boot.scr is 355 maintained for backwards-compatibility.) 356 357 Entries may be removed or re-ordered in this list to affect the set of 358 filenames which are supported. 359 360scan_dev_for_extlinux: 361 362 If you want to disable extlinux.conf on all disks, set the value to something 363 innocuous, e.g. setenv scan_dev_for_extlinux true. 364 365scan_dev_for_scripts: 366 367 If you want to disable boot.scr on all disks, set the value to something 368 innocuous, e.g. setenv scan_dev_for_scripts true. 369 370boot_net_usb_start: 371 372 If you want to prevent USB enumeration by distro boot commands which execute 373 network operations, set the value to something innocuous, e.g. setenv 374 boot_net_usb_start true. This would be useful if you know your Ethernet 375 device is not attached to USB, and you wish to increase boot speed by 376 avoiding unnecessary actions. 377 378boot_net_pci_enum: 379 380 If you want to prevent PCI enumeration by distro boot commands which execute 381 network operations, set the value to something innocuous, e.g. setenv 382 boot_net_pci_enum true. This would be useful if you know your Ethernet 383 device is not attached to PCI, and you wish to increase boot speed by 384 avoiding unnecessary actions. 385 386Interactively booting from a specific device at the u-boot prompt 387================================================================= 388 389For interactively booting from a user-selected device at the u-boot command 390prompt, the environment provides predefined bootcmd_<target> variables for 391every target defined in boot_targets, which can be run be the user. 392 393If the target is a storage device, the format of the target is always 394<device type><device number>, e.g. mmc0. Specifying the device number is 395mandatory for storage devices, even if only support for a single instance 396of the storage device is actually implemented. 397 398For network targets (dhcp, pxe), only the device type gets specified; 399they do not have a device number. 400 401Examples: 402 403 - run bootcmd_usb0 404 boots from the first USB mass storage device 405 406 - run bootcmd_mmc1 407 boots from the second MMC device 408 409 - run bootcmd_pxe 410 boots by tftp using a pxelinux.cfg 411 412The list of possible targets consists of: 413 414- network targets 415 * dhcp 416 * pxe 417 418- storage targets (to which a device number must be appended) 419 * mmc 420 * sata 421 * scsi 422 * ide 423 * usb 424 * virtio 425 426Other *boot* variables than the ones defined above are only for internal use 427of the boot environment and are not guaranteed to exist or work in the same 428way in future u-boot versions. In particular the <device type>_boot 429variables (e.g. mmc_boot, usb_boot) are a strictly internal implementation 430detail and must not be used as a public interface. 431
README.dns
1Domain Name System 2------------------------------------------- 3 4The Domain Name System (DNS) is a hierarchical naming system for computers, 5services, or any resource participating in the Internet. It associates various 6information with domain names assigned to each of the participants. Most 7importantly, it translates domain names meaningful to humans into the numerical 8(binary) identifiers associated with networking equipment for the purpose of 9locating and addressing these devices world-wide. An often used analogy to 10explain the Domain Name System is that it serves as the "phone book" for the 11Internet by translating human-friendly computer hostnames into IP addresses. 12For example, www.example.com translates to 208.77.188.166. 13 14For more information on DNS - http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Domain_Name_System 15 16U-Boot and DNS 17------------------------------------------ 18 19CONFIG_CMD_DNS - controls if the 'dns' command is compiled in. If it is, it 20 will send name lookups to the dns server (env var 'dnsip') 21 Turning this option on will about abou 1k to U-Boot's size. 22 23 Example: 24 25bfin> print dnsip 26dnsip=192.168.0.1 27 28bfin> dns www.google.com 2966.102.1.104 30 31 By default, dns does nothing except print the IP number on 32 the default console - which by itself, would be pretty 33 useless. Adding a third argument to the dns command will 34 use that as the environment variable to be set. 35 36 Example: 37 38bfin> print googleip 39## Error: "googleip" not defined 40bfin> dns www.google.com googleip 4164.233.161.104 42bfin> print googleip 43googleip=64.233.161.104 44bfin> ping ${googleip} 45Using Blackfin EMAC device 46host 64.233.161.104 is alive 47 48 In this way, you can lookup, and set many more meaningful 49 things. 50 51bfin> sntp 52ntpserverip not set 53bfin> dns pool.ntp.org ntpserverip 5472.18.205.156 55bfin> sntp 56Date: 2009-07-18 Time: 4:06:57 57 58 For some helpful things that can be related to DNS in U-Boot, 59 look at the top level README for these config options: 60 CONFIG_CMD_DHCP 61 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS 62 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 63
README.enetaddr
1--------------------------------- 2 Ethernet Address (MAC) Handling 3--------------------------------- 4 5There are a variety of places in U-Boot where the MAC address is used, parsed, 6and stored. This document covers proper usage of each location and the moving 7of data between them. 8 9----------- 10 Locations 11----------- 12 13Here are the places where MAC addresses might be stored: 14 15 - board-specific location (eeprom, dedicated flash, ...) 16 Note: only used when mandatory due to hardware design etc... 17 18 - environment ("ethaddr", "eth1addr", ...) 19 Note: this is the preferred way to permanently store MAC addresses 20 21 - ethernet data (struct eth_device -> enetaddr) 22 Note: these are temporary copies of the MAC address which exist only 23 after the respective init steps have run and only to make usage 24 in other places easier (to avoid constant env lookup/parsing) 25 26 - struct bd_info and/or device tree 27 Note: these are temporary copies of the MAC address only for the 28 purpose of passing this information to an OS kernel we are about 29 to boot 30 31Correct flow of setting up the MAC address (summarized): 32 331. Read from hardware in initialize() function 342. Read from environment in net/eth.c after initialize() 353. The environment variable will be compared to the driver initialized 36 struct eth_device->enetaddr. If they differ, a warning is printed, and the 37 environment variable will be used unchanged. 38 If the environment variable is not set, it will be initialized from 39 eth_device->enetaddr, and a warning will be printed. 40 If both are invalid and CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, a random, 41 locally-assigned MAC is written to eth_device->enetaddr. 424. Program the address into hardware if the following conditions are met: 43 a) The relevant driver has a 'write_addr' function 44 b) The user hasn't set an 'ethmacskip' environment variable 45 c) The address is valid (unicast, not all-zeros) 46 47Previous behavior had the MAC address always being programmed into hardware 48in the device's init() function. 49 50------- 51 Usage 52------- 53 54If the hardware design mandates that the MAC address is stored in some special 55place (like EEPROM etc...), then the board specific init code (such as the 56board-specific misc_init_r() function) is responsible for locating the MAC 57address(es) and initializing the respective environment variable(s) from it. 58Note that this shall be done if, and only if, the environment does not already 59contain these environment variables, i.e. existing variable definitions must 60not be overwritten. 61 62During runtime, the ethernet layer will use the environment variables to sync 63the MAC addresses to the ethernet structures. All ethernet driver code should 64then only use the enetaddr member of the eth_device structure. This is done 65on every network command, so the ethernet copies will stay in sync. 66 67Any other code that wishes to access the MAC address should query the 68environment directly. The helper functions documented below should make 69working with this storage much smoother. 70 71--------- 72 Helpers 73--------- 74 75To assist in the management of these layers, a few helper functions exist. You 76should use these rather than attempt to do any kind of parsing/manipulation 77yourself as many common errors have arisen in the past. 78 79 * void string_to_enetaddr(const char *addr, uchar *enetaddr); 80 81Convert a string representation of a MAC address to the binary version. 82char *addr = "00:11:22:33:44:55"; 83uchar enetaddr[6]; 84string_to_enetaddr(addr, enetaddr); 85/* enetaddr now equals { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 } */ 86 87 * int eth_env_get_enetaddr(char *name, uchar *enetaddr); 88 89Look up an environment variable and convert the stored address. If the address 90is valid, then the function returns 1. Otherwise, the function returns 0. In 91all cases, the enetaddr memory is initialized. If the env var is not found, 92then it is set to all zeros. The common function is_valid_ethaddr() is used 93to determine address validity. 94uchar enetaddr[6]; 95if (!eth_env_get_enetaddr("ethaddr", enetaddr)) { 96 /* "ethaddr" is not set in the environment */ 97 ... try and setup "ethaddr" in the env ... 98} 99/* enetaddr is now set to the value stored in the ethaddr env var */ 100 101 * int eth_env_set_enetaddr(char *name, const uchar *enetaddr); 102 103Store the MAC address into the named environment variable. The return value is 104the same as the env_set() function. 105uchar enetaddr[6] = { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 }; 106eth_env_set_enetaddr("ethaddr", enetaddr); 107/* the "ethaddr" env var should now be set to "00:11:22:33:44:55" */ 108 109 * the %pM format modifier 110 111The %pM format modifier can be used with any standard printf function to format 112the binary 6 byte array representation of a MAC address. 113uchar enetaddr[6] = { 0x00, 0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55 }; 114printf("The MAC is %pM\n", enetaddr); 115 116char buf[20]; 117sprintf(buf, "%pM", enetaddr); 118/* the buf variable is now set to "00:11:22:33:44:55" */ 119
README.esbc_validate
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2015 4 */ 5 6esbc_validate command 7======================================== 8 91. esbc_validate command is meant for validating header and 10 signature of images (Boot Script and ESBC uboot client). 11 SHA-256 and RSA operations are performed using SEC block in HW. 12 This command works on both PBL based and Non PBL based Freescale 13 platforms. 14 Command usage: 15 esbc_validate img_hdr_addr [pub_key_hash] 16 esbc_validate hdr_addr <hash_val> 17 Validates signature using RSA verification. 18 $hdr_addr Address of header of the image to be validated. 19 $hash_val -Optional. It provides Hash of public/srk key to be 20 used to verify signature. 21 222. ESBC uboot client can be linux. Additionally, rootfs and device 23 tree blob can also be signed. 243. In the event of header or signature failure in validation, 25 ITS and ITF bits determine further course of action. 264. In case of soft failure, appropriate error is dumped on console. 275. In case of hard failure, SoC is issued RESET REQUEST after 28 dumping error on the console. 296. KEY REVOCATION Feature: 30 QorIQ platforms like B4/T4 have support of srk key table and key 31 revocation in ISBC code in Silicon. 32 The srk key table allows the user to have a key table with multiple 33 keys and revoke any key in case of particular key gets compromised. 34 In case the ISBC code uses the key revocation and srk key table to 35 verify the u-boot code, the subsequent chain of trust should also 36 use the same. 376. ISBC KEY EXTENSION Feature: 38 This feature allows large number of keys to be used for esbc validation 39 of images. A set of public keys is being signed and validated by ISBC 40 which can be further used for esbc validation of images. 41
README.ext4
1U-Boot supports access of both ext2 and ext4 filesystems, either in read-only 2mode or in read-write mode. 3 4First, to enable support for both ext4 (and, automatically, ext2 as well), 5but without selecting the corresponding commands, enable one of the following: 6 7 CONFIG_FS_EXT4 (for read-only) 8 CONFIG_EXT4_WRITE (for read-write) 9 10Next, to select the ext2-related commands: 11 12 * ext2ls 13 * ext2load 14 15or ext4-related commands: 16 17 * ext4size 18 * ext4ls 19 * ext4load 20 21use one or both of: 22 23 CONFIG_CMD_EXT2 24 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4 25 26Selecting either of the above automatically selects CONFIG_FS_EXT4 if it 27wasn't enabled already. 28 29In addition, to get the write access command "ext4write", enable: 30 31 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4_WRITE 32 33which automatically selects CONFIG_EXT4_WRITE if it wasn't defined 34already. 35 36Also relevant are the generic filesystem commands, selected by: 37 38 CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC 39 40This does not automatically enable EXT4 support for you, you still need 41to do that yourself. 42 43Some sample commands to test ext4 support: 44 451. Check that the commands can be seen in the output of U-Boot help: 46 47 UBOOT #help 48 ... 49 ext4load- load binary file from a Ext4 file system 50 ext4ls - list files in a directory (default /) 51 ext4size - determine a file's size 52 ext4write- create a file in ext4 formatted partition 53 ... 54 552. To list the files in an ext4-formatted partition, run: 56 57 ext4ls <interface> <dev[:part]> [directory] 58 59 For example: 60 UBOOT #ext4ls mmc 0:5 /usr/lib 61 623. To read and load a file from an ext4-formatted partition to RAM, run: 63 64 ext4load <interface> <dev[:part]> [addr] [filename] [bytes] 65 66 For example: 67 UBOOT #ext4load mmc 2:2 0x30007fc0 uImage 68 694. To write a file to an ext4-formatted partition. 70 71 a) First load a file to RAM at a particular address for example 0x30007fc0. 72 Now execute ext4write command: 73 ext4write <interface> <dev[:part]> [filename] [Address] [sizebytes] 74 75 For example: 76 UBOOT #ext4write mmc 2:2 /boot/uImage 0x30007fc0 6183120 77 (here 6183120 is the size of the file to be written) 78 Note: Absolute path is required for the file to be written 79 80References : 81 -- ext4 implementation in Linux Kernel 82 -- Uboot existing ext2 load and ls implementation 83 -- Journaling block device JBD2 implementation in linux Kernel 84
README.falcon
1U-Boot Falcon Mode 2==================== 3 4Introduction 5------------ 6 7This document provides an overview of how to add support for Falcon Mode 8to a board. 9 10Falcon Mode is introduced to speed up the booting process, allowing 11to boot a Linux kernel (or whatever image) without a full blown U-Boot. 12 13Falcon Mode relies on the SPL framework. In fact, to make booting faster, 14U-Boot is split into two parts: the SPL (Secondary Program Loader) and U-Boot 15image. In most implementations, SPL is used to start U-Boot when booting from 16a mass storage, such as NAND or SD-Card. SPL has now support for other media, 17and can generally be seen as a way to start an image performing the minimum 18required initialization. SPL mainly initializes the RAM controller, and then 19copies U-Boot image into the memory. 20 21The Falcon Mode extends this way allowing to start the Linux kernel directly 22from SPL. A new command is added to U-Boot to prepare the parameters that SPL 23must pass to the kernel, using ATAGS or Device Tree. 24 25In normal mode, these parameters are generated each time before 26loading the kernel, passing to Linux the address in memory where 27the parameters can be read. 28With Falcon Mode, this snapshot can be saved into persistent storage and SPL is 29informed to load it before running the kernel. 30 31To boot the kernel, these steps under a Falcon-aware U-Boot are required: 32 331. Boot the board into U-Boot. 34After loading the desired legacy-format kernel image into memory (and DT as 35well, if used), use the "spl export" command to generate the kernel parameters 36area or the DT. U-Boot runs as when it boots the kernel, but stops before 37passing the control to the kernel. 38 392. Save the prepared snapshot into persistent media. 40The address where to save it must be configured into board configuration 41file (CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS for NAND). 42 433. Boot the board into Falcon Mode. SPL will load the kernel and copy 44the parameters which are saved in the persistent area to the required address. 45If a valid uImage is not found at the defined location, U-Boot will be 46booted instead. 47 48It is required to implement a custom mechanism to select if SPL loads U-Boot 49or another image. 50 51The value of a GPIO is a simple way to operate the selection, as well as 52reading a character from the SPL console if CONFIG_SPL_CONSOLE is set. 53 54Falcon Mode is generally activated by setting CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT. This tells 55SPL that U-Boot is not the only available image that SPL is able to start. 56 57Configuration 58---------------------------- 59CONFIG_CMD_SPL Enable the "spl export" command. 60 The command "spl export" is then available in U-Boot 61 mode 62CONFIG_SYS_SPL_ARGS_ADDR Address in RAM where the parameters must be 63 copied by SPL. 64 In most cases, it is <start_of_ram> + 0x100 65 66CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SPL_KERNEL_OFFS Offset in NAND where the kernel is stored 67 68CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS Offset in NAND where the parameters area was saved. 69 70CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NOR_OFS Offset in NOR where the parameters area was saved. 71 72CONFIG_CMD_SPL_WRITE_SIZE Size of the parameters area to be copied 73 74CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT Activate Falcon Mode. 75 76Function that a board must implement 77------------------------------------ 78 79void spl_board_prepare_for_linux(void) : optional 80 Called from SPL before starting the kernel 81 82spl_start_uboot() : required 83 Returns "0" if SPL should start the kernel, "1" if U-Boot 84 must be started. 85 86Environment variables 87--------------------- 88 89A board may chose to look at the environment for decisions about falcon 90mode. In this case the following variables may be supported: 91 92boot_os : Set to yes/Yes/true/True/1 to enable booting to OS, 93 any other value to fall back to U-Boot (including 94 unset) 95falcon_args_file : Filename to load as the 'args' portion of falcon mode 96 rather than the hard-coded value. 97falcon_image_file : Filename to load as the OS image portion of falcon 98 mode rather than the hard-coded value. 99 100Using spl command 101----------------- 102 103spl - SPL configuration 104 105Usage: 106 107spl export <img=atags|fdt> [kernel_addr] [initrd_addr] [fdt_addr ] 108 109img : "atags" or "fdt" 110kernel_addr : kernel is loaded as part of the boot process, but it is not started. 111 This is the address where a kernel image is stored. 112initrd_addr : Address of initial ramdisk 113 can be set to "-" if fdt_addr without initrd_addr is used 114fdt_addr : in case of fdt, the address of the device tree. 115 116The spl export command does not write to a storage media. The user is 117responsible to transfer the gathered information (assembled ATAGS list 118or prepared FDT) from temporary storage in RAM into persistant storage 119after each run of 'spl export'. Unfortunately the position of temporary 120storage can not be predicted nor provided at commandline, it depends 121highly on your system setup and your provided data (ATAGS or FDT). 122However at the end of an succesful 'spl export' run it will print the 123RAM address of temporary storage. The RAM address of FDT will also be 124set in the environment variable 'fdtargsaddr', the new length of the 125prepared FDT will be set in the environment variable 'fdtargslen'. 126These environment variables can be used in scripts for writing updated 127FDT to persistent storage. 128 129Now the user have to save the generated BLOB from that printed address 130to the pre-defined address in persistent storage 131(CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS in case of NAND). 132The following example shows how to prepare the data for Falcon Mode on 133twister board with ATAGS BLOB. 134 135The "spl export" command is prepared to work with ATAGS and FDT. However, 136using FDT is at the moment untested. The ppc port (see a3m071 example 137later) prepares the fdt blob with the fdt command instead. 138 139 140Usage on the twister board: 141-------------------------------- 142 143Using mtd names with the following (default) configuration 144for mtdparts: 145 146device nand0 <omap2-nand.0>, # parts = 9 147 #: name size offset mask_flags 148 0: MLO 0x00080000 0x00000000 0 149 1: u-boot 0x00100000 0x00080000 0 150 2: env1 0x00040000 0x00180000 0 151 3: env2 0x00040000 0x001c0000 0 152 4: kernel 0x00600000 0x00200000 0 153 5: bootparms 0x00040000 0x00800000 0 154 6: splashimg 0x00200000 0x00840000 0 155 7: mini 0x02800000 0x00a40000 0 156 8: rootfs 0x1cdc0000 0x03240000 0 157 158 159twister => nand read 82000000 kernel 160 161NAND read: device 0 offset 0x200000, size 0x600000 162 6291456 bytes read: OK 163 164Now the kernel is in RAM at address 0x82000000 165 166twister => spl export atags 0x82000000 167## Booting kernel from Legacy Image at 82000000 ... 168 Image Name: Linux-3.5.0-rc4-14089-gda0b7f4 169 Image Type: ARM Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed) 170 Data Size: 3654808 Bytes = 3.5 MiB 171 Load Address: 80008000 172 Entry Point: 80008000 173 Verifying Checksum ... OK 174 Loading Kernel Image ... OK 175OK 176cmdline subcommand not supported 177bdt subcommand not supported 178Argument image is now in RAM at: 0x80000100 179 180The result can be checked at address 0x80000100: 181 182twister => md 0x80000100 18380000100: 00000005 54410001 00000000 00000000 ......AT........ 18480000110: 00000000 00000067 54410009 746f6f72 ....g.....ATroot 18580000120: 65642f3d 666e2f76 77722073 73666e20 =/dev/nfs rw nfs 186 187The parameters generated with this step can be saved into NAND at the offset 1880x800000 (value for twister for CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS) 189 190nand erase.part bootparms 191nand write 0x80000100 bootparms 0x4000 192 193Now the parameters are stored into the NAND flash at the address 194CONFIG_CMD_SPL_NAND_OFS (=0x800000). 195 196Next time, the board can be started into Falcon Mode moving the 197setting the gpio (on twister gpio 55 is used) to kernel mode. 198 199The kernel is loaded directly by the SPL without passing through U-Boot. 200 201Example with FDT: a3m071 board 202------------------------------- 203 204To boot the Linux kernel from the SPL, the DT blob (fdt) needs to get 205prepard/patched first. U-Boot usually inserts some dynamic values into 206the DT binary (blob), e.g. autodetected memory size, MAC addresses, 207clocks speeds etc. To generate this patched DT blob, you can use 208the following command: 209 2101. Load fdt blob to SDRAM: 211=> tftp 1800000 a3m071/a3m071.dtb 212 2132. Set bootargs as desired for Linux booting (e.g. flash_mtd): 214=> run mtdargs addip2 addtty 215 2163. Use "fdt" commands to patch the DT blob: 217=> fdt addr 1800000 218=> fdt boardsetup 219=> fdt chosen 220 2214. Display patched DT blob (optional): 222=> fdt print 223 2245. Save fdt to NOR flash: 225=> erase fc060000 fc07ffff 226=> cp.b 1800000 fc060000 10000 227... 228 229 230Falcon Mode was presented at the RMLL 2012. Slides are available at: 231 232http://schedule2012.rmll.info/IMG/pdf/LSM2012_UbootFalconMode_Babic.pdf 233
README.fdt-control
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (c) 2011 The Chromium OS Authors. 4 5Device Tree Control in U-Boot 6============================= 7 8This feature provides for run-time configuration of U-Boot via a flat 9device tree (fdt). U-Boot configuration has traditionally been done 10using CONFIG options in the board config file. This feature aims to 11make it possible for a single U-Boot binary to support multiple boards, 12with the exact configuration of each board controlled by a flat device 13tree (fdt). This is the approach recently taken by the ARM Linux kernel 14and has been used by PowerPC for some time. 15 16The fdt is a convenient vehicle for implementing run-time configuration 17for three reasons. Firstly it is easy to use, being a simple text file. 18It is extensible since it consists of nodes and properties in a nice 19hierarchical format. 20 21Finally, there is already excellent infrastructure for the fdt: a 22compiler checks the text file and converts it to a compact binary 23format, and a library is already available in U-Boot (libfdt) for 24handling this format. 25 26The dts directory contains a Makefile for building the device tree blob 27and embedding it in your U-Boot image. This is useful since it allows 28U-Boot to configure itself according to what it finds there. If you have 29a number of similar boards with different peripherals, you can describe 30the features of each board in the device tree file, and have a single 31generic source base. 32 33To enable this feature, add CONFIG_OF_CONTROL to your board config file. 34 35 36What is a Flat Device Tree? 37--------------------------- 38 39An fdt can be specified in source format as a text file. To read about 40the fdt syntax, take a look at the specification here: 41 42https://www.power.org/resources/downloads/Power_ePAPR_APPROVED_v1.0.pdf 43 44You also might find this section of the Linux kernel documentation 45useful: (access this in the Linux kernel source code) 46 47 Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt 48 49There is also a mailing list: 50 51 http://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/devicetree-discuss 52 53In case you are wondering, OF stands for Open Firmware. 54 55 56Tools 57----- 58 59To use this feature you will need to get the device tree compiler. This is 60provided by U-Boot automatically. If you have a system version of dtc 61(typically in the 'device-tree-compiler' package), it is currently not used. 62 63If you want to build your own dtc, it is kept here: 64 65 git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/dtc/dtc.git 66 67For example: 68 69 $ git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/dtc/dtc.git 70 $ cd dtc 71 $ make 72 $ sudo make install 73 74Then run the compiler (your version will vary): 75 76 $ dtc -v 77 Version: DTC 1.2.0-g2cb4b51f 78 $ make tests 79 $ cd tests 80 $ ./run_tests.sh 81 ********** TEST SUMMARY 82 * Total testcases: 1371 83 * PASS: 1371 84 * FAIL: 0 85 * Bad configuration: 0 86 * Strange test result: 0 87 88You will also find a useful fdtdump utility for decoding a binary file, as 89well as fdtget/fdtput for reading and writing properties in a binary file. 90 91 92Where do I get an fdt file for my board? 93---------------------------------------- 94 95You may find that the Linux kernel has a suitable file. Look in the 96kernel source in arch/<arch>/boot/dts. 97 98If not you might find other boards with suitable files that you can 99modify to your needs. Look in the board directories for files with a 100.dts extension. 101 102Failing that, you could write one from scratch yourself! 103 104 105Configuration 106------------- 107 108Use: 109 110#define CONFIG_DEFAULT_DEVICE_TREE "<name>" 111 112to set the filename of the device tree source. Then put your device tree 113file into 114 115 board/<vendor>/dts/<name>.dts 116 117This should include your CPU or SOC's device tree file, placed in 118arch/<arch>/dts, and then make any adjustments required. 119 120If CONFIG_OF_EMBED is defined, then it will be picked up and built into 121the U-Boot image (including u-boot.bin). This is suitable for debugging 122and development only and is not recommended for production devices. 123 124If CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE is defined, then it will be built and placed in 125a u-boot.dtb file alongside u-boot-nodtb.bin. A common approach is then to 126join the two: 127 128 cat u-boot-nodtb.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin 129 130and then flash image.bin onto your board. Note that U-Boot creates 131u-boot-dtb.bin which does the above step for you also. Resulting 132u-boot.bin is a copy of u-boot-dtb.bin in this case. If you are using 133CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK, then u-boot.img will be built to include the device 134tree binary. 135 136If CONFIG_OF_BOARD is defined, a board-specific routine will provide the 137device tree at runtime, for example if an earlier bootloader stage creates 138it and passes it to U-Boot. 139 140If CONFIG_OF_HOSTFILE is defined, then it will be read from a file on 141startup. This is only useful for sandbox. Use the -d flag to U-Boot to 142specify the file to read. 143 144You cannot use more than one of these options at the same time. 145 146To use a device tree file that you have compiled yourself, pass 147EXT_DTB=<filename> to 'make', as in: 148 149 make EXT_DTB=boot/am335x-boneblack-pubkey.dtb 150 151Then U-Boot will copy that file to u-boot.dtb, put it in the .img file 152if used, and u-boot-dtb.bin. 153 154If you wish to put the fdt at a different address in memory, you can 155define the "fdtcontroladdr" environment variable. This is the hex 156address of the fdt binary blob, and will override either of the options. 157Be aware that this environment variable is checked prior to relocation, 158when only the compiled-in environment is available. Therefore it is not 159possible to define this variable in the saved SPI/NAND flash 160environment, for example (it will be ignored). After relocation, this 161variable will be set to the address of the newly relocated fdt blob. 162It is read-only and cannot be changed. It can optionally be used to 163control the boot process of Linux with bootm/bootz commands. 164 165To use this, put something like this in your board header file: 166 167#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS "fdtcontroladdr=10000\0" 168 169Build: 170 171After board configuration is done, fdt supported u-boot can be build in two ways: 1721) build the default dts which is defined from CONFIG_DEFAULT_DEVICE_TREE 173 $ make 1742) build the user specified dts file 175 $ make DEVICE_TREE=<dts-file-name> 176 177 178Relocation, SPL and TPL 179----------------------- 180 181U-Boot can be divided into three phases: TPL, SPL and U-Boot proper. 182 183The full device tree is available to U-Boot proper, but normally only a subset 184(or none at all) is available to TPL and SPL. See 'Pre-Relocation Support' and 185'SPL Support' in doc/driver-model/design.rst for more details. 186 187 188Using several DTBs in the SPL (CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB) 189---------------------------------------------------- 190In some rare cases it is desirable to let SPL be able to select one DTB among 191many. This usually not very useful as the DTB for the SPL is small and usually 192fits several platforms. However the DTB sometimes include information that do 193work on several platforms (like IO tuning parameters). 194In this case it is possible to use CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB. This option appends to 195the SPL a FIT image containing several DTBs listed in SPL_OF_LIST. 196board_fit_config_name_match() is called to select the right DTB. 197 198If board_fit_config_name_match() relies on DM (DM driver to access an EEPROM 199containing the board ID for example), it possible to start with a generic DTB 200and then switch over to the right DTB after the detection. For this purpose, 201the platform code must call fdtdec_resetup(). Based on the returned flag, the 202platform may have to re-initiliaze the DM subusystem using dm_uninit() and 203dm_init_and_scan(). 204 205 206Limitations 207----------- 208 209U-Boot is designed to build with a single architecture type and CPU 210type. So for example it is not possible to build a single ARM binary 211which runs on your AT91 and OMAP boards, relying on an fdt to configure 212the various features. This is because you must select one of 213the CPU families within arch/arm/cpu/arm926ejs (omap or at91) at build 214time. Similarly you cannot build for multiple cpu types or 215architectures. 216 217That said the complexity reduction by using fdt to support variants of 218boards which use the same SOC / CPU can be substantial. 219 220It is important to understand that the fdt only selects options 221available in the platform / drivers. It cannot add new drivers (yet). So 222you must still have the CONFIG option to enable the driver. For example, 223you need to define CONFIG_SYS_NS16550 to bring in the NS16550 driver, 224but can use the fdt to specific the UART clock, peripheral address, etc. 225In very broad terms, the CONFIG options in general control *what* driver 226files are pulled in, and the fdt controls *how* those files work. 227 228-- 229Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org> 2301-Sep-11 231
README.fec_mxc
1U-Boot config options used in fec_mxc.c 2 3CONFIG_FEC_MXC 4 Selects fec_mxc.c to be compiled into u-boot. Can read out the 5 ethaddr from the SoC eFuses (see below). 6 7CONFIG_MII 8 Must be defined if CONFIG_FEC_MXC is defined. 9 10CONFIG_FEC_XCV_TYPE 11 Defaults to MII100 for 100 Base-tx. 12 RGMII selects 1000 Base-tx reduced pin count interface. 13 RMII selects 100 Base-tx reduced pin count interface. 14 15CONFIG_FEC_MXC_SWAP_PACKET 16 Forced on iff MX28. 17 Swaps the bytes order of all words(4 byte units) in the packet. 18 This should not be specified by a board file. It is cpu specific. 19 20CONFIG_PHYLIB 21 fec_mxc supports PHYLIB and should be used for new boards. 22 23CONFIG_FEC_MXC_NO_ANEG 24 Relevant only if PHYLIB not used. Skips auto-negotiation restart. 25 26CONFIG_FEC_MXC_PHYADDR 27 Optional, selects the exact phy address that should be connected 28 and function fecmxc_initialize will try to initialize it. 29 30CONFIG_FEC_FIXED_SPEED 31 Optional, selects a fixed speed on the MAC interface without asking some 32 phy. This is usefull if there is a direct MAC <-> MAC connection, for 33 example if the CPU is connected directly via the RGMII interface to a 34 ethernet-switch. 35 36Reading the ethaddr from the SoC eFuses: 37if CONFIG_FEC_MXC is defined and the U-Boot environment does not contain the 38ethaddr variable, then its value gets read from the corresponding eFuses in 39the SoC. See the README files of the specific SoC for details. 40
README.fsl-clk
1Freescale system clock options 2 3 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CLK 4 Enable to call get_clocks() in board_init_f() for 5 non-PPC platforms. 6
README.fsl-ddr
1Table of interleaving 2-4 controllers 2===================================== 3 +--------------+-----------------------------------------------------------+ 4 |Configuration | Memory Controller | 5 | | 1 2 3 4 | 6 |--------------+--------------+--------------+-----------------------------+ 7 | Two memory | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | | 8 | complexes +--------------+--------------+ | 9 | | 2-way Intlv'ed | | 10 |--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ | 11 | | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | | 12 | Three memory +--------------+--------------+--------------+ | 13 | complexes | 2-way Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | | 14 | +-----------------------------+--------------+ | 15 | | 3-way Intlv'ed | | 16 +--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ 17 | | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | Not Intlv'ed | 18 | Four memory +--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ 19 | complexes | 2-way Intlv'ed | 2-way Intlv'ed | 20 | +-----------------------------+-----------------------------+ 21 | | 4-way Intlv'ed | 22 +--------------+-----------------------------------------------------------+ 23 24 25Table of 2-way interleaving modes supported in cpu/8xxx/ddr/ 26====================================================== 27 +-------------+---------------------------------------------------------+ 28 | | Rank Interleaving | 29 | +--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 30 |Memory | | | | 2x2 | 4x1 | 31 |Controller | None | 2x1 lower | 2x1 upper | {CS0+CS1}, | {CS0+CS1+ | 32 |Interleaving | | {CS0+CS1} | {CS2+CS3} | {CS2+CS3} | CS2+CS3} | 33 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 34 |None | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | 35 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 36 |Cacheline | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes | 37 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | | 38 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 39 |Page | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes | 40 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | | 41 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 42 |Bank | Yes | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes | 43 | |CS0 Only| | | {CS0+CS1} | | 44 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 45 |Superbank | No | Yes | No | No, Only(*)| Yes | 46 | | | | | {CS0+CS1} | | 47 +-------------+--------+-----------+-----------+------------+-----------+ 48 (*) Although the hardware can be configured with memory controller 49 interleaving using "2x2" rank interleaving, it only interleaves {CS0+CS1} 50 from each controller. {CS2+CS3} on each controller are only rank 51 interleaved on that controller. 52 53 For memory controller interleaving, identical DIMMs are suggested. Software 54 doesn't check the size or organization of interleaved DIMMs. 55 56The ways to configure the ddr interleaving mode 57============================================== 581. In board header file(e.g.MPC8572DS.h), add default interleaving setting 59 under "CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS", like: 60 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ 61 "hwconfig=fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=bank" \ 62 ...... 63 642. Run U-Boot "setenv" command to configure the memory interleaving mode. 65 Either numerical or string value is accepted. 66 67 # disable memory controller interleaving 68 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=null" 69 70 # cacheline interleaving 71 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=cacheline" 72 73 # page interleaving 74 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=page" 75 76 # bank interleaving 77 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=bank" 78 79 # superbank 80 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=superbank" 81 82 # 1KB 3-way interleaving 83 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_1KB" 84 85 # 4KB 3-way interleaving 86 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_4KB" 87 88 # 8KB 3-way interleaving 89 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:ctlr_intlv=3way_8KB" 90 91 # disable bank (chip-select) interleaving 92 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=null" 93 94 # bank(chip-select) interleaving cs0+cs1 95 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1" 96 97 # bank(chip-select) interleaving cs2+cs3 98 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs2_cs3" 99 100 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (cs0+cs1) and (cs2+cs3) (2x2) 101 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_and_cs2_cs3" 102 103 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (cs0+cs1+cs2+cs3) (4x1) 104 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3" 105 106 # bank(chip-select) interleaving (auto) 107 setenv hwconfig "fsl_ddr:bank_intlv=auto" 108 This auto mode only select from cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3, cs0_cs1, null dependings 109 on DIMMs. 110 111Memory controller address hashing 112================================== 113If the DDR controller supports address hashing, it can be enabled by hwconfig. 114 115Syntax is: 116hwconfig=fsl_ddr:addr_hash=true 117 118Memory controller ECC on/off 119============================ 120If ECC is enabled in board configuratoin file, i.e. #define CONFIG_DDR_ECC, 121ECC can be turned on/off by hwconfig. 122 123Syntax is 124hwconfig=fsl_ddr:ecc=off 125 126 127Memory address parity on/off 128============================ 129address parity can be turned on/off by hwconfig. 130Syntax is: 131hwconfig=fsl_ddr:parity=on 132 133 134Memory testing options for mpc85xx 135================================== 1361. Memory test can be done once U-Boot prompt comes up using mtest, or 1372. Memory test can be done with Power-On-Self-Test function, activated at 138 compile time. 139 140 In order to enable the POST memory test, CONFIG_POST needs to be 141 defined in board configuraiton header file. By default, POST memory test 142 performs a fast test. A slow test can be enabled by changing the flag at 143 compiling time. To test memory bigger than 2GB, 36BIT support is needed. 144 Memory is tested within a 2GB window. TLBs are used to map the virtual 2GB 145 window to physical address so that all physical memory can be tested. 146 147Combination of hwconfig 148======================= 149Hwconfig can be combined with multiple parameters, for example, on a supported 150platform 151 152hwconfig=fsl_ddr:addr_hash=true,ctlr_intlv=cacheline,bank_intlv=cs0_cs1_cs2_cs3,ecc=on 153 154 155Table for dynamic ODT for DDR3 156============================== 157For single-slot system with quad-rank DIMM and dual-slot system, dynamic ODT may 158be needed, depending on the configuration. The numbers in the following tables are 159in Ohms. 160 161* denotes dynamic ODT 162 163Two slots system 164+-----------------------+----------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+ 165| Configuration | |DRAM controller| Slot 1 | Slot 2 | 166+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ 167| | | | | | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | 168+ Slot 1 | Slot 2 |Write/Read| Write | Read |-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 169| | | | | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | 170+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 171| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 | off | off | off | off | off | 30 | 30 | 172| Dual Rank | Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 173| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | off | off | 30 | 30 | 120 | off | off | off | 174+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 175| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 | off | off | off | 20 | 20 | | | 176| Dual Rank |Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 177| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | off | off | 20 | 20 | 120 *| off | | | 178+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 179| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | | | off | off | 20 | 20 | 180|Single Rank| Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 181| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | | | 120 | off | off | off | 182+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 183| | | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | | | 30 | 30 | | | 184|Single Rank|Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 185| | | Slot 2 | off | 75 | 30 | 30 | | | 120 *| off | | | 186+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 187| Dual Rank | Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off | | | | | 188+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 189| Empty | Dual Rank | Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 40 | off | off | off | 190+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 191|Single Rank| Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | | | | | | | 192+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 193| Empty |Single Rank| Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 40 | off | | | 194+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 195 196Single slot system 197+-------------+------------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+ 198| | |DRAM controller| Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 3 | Rank 4 | 199|Configuration| Write/Read |-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 200| | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | 201+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 202| | R1 | off | 75 | 120 *| off | off | off | 20 | 20 | off | off | 203| |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 204| | R2 | off | 75 | off | 20 | 120 | off | 20 | 20 | off | off | 205| Quad Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 206| | R3 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | off | off | 120 *| off | off | off | 207| |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 208| | R4 | off | 75 | 20 | 20 | off | off | off | 20 | 120 | off | 209+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 210| | R1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off | 211| Dual Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 212| | R2 | off | 75 | 40 | off | off | off | 213+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 214| Single Rank | R1 | off | 75 | 40 | off | 215+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+ 216 217Reference http://www.xrosstalkmag.com/mag_issues/xrosstalk_oct08_final.pdf 218 http://download.micron.com/pdf/technotes/ddr3/tn4108_ddr3_design_guide.pdf 219 220 221Table for ODT for DDR2 222====================== 223Two slots system 224+-----------------------+----------+---------------+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+ 225| Configuration | |DRAM controller| Slot 1 | Slot 2 | 226+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+--------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ 227| | | | | | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | Rank 1 | Rank 2 | 228+ Slot 1 | Slot 2 |Write/Read| Write | Read |-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 229| | | | | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | 230+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 231| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | off | off | 75 | 75 | off | off | 232| Dual Rank | Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 233| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | off | off | off | off | off | off | 234+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 235| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | off | off | 75 | 75 | | | 236| Dual Rank |Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 237| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | off | off | off | off | | | 238+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 239| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | | | 75 | 75 | off | off | 240|Single Rank| Dual Rank |----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 241| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | | | off | off | off | off | 242+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 243| | | Slot 1 | off | 150 | off | off | | | 75 | 75 | | | 244|Single Rank|Single Rank|----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 245| | | Slot 2 | off | 150 | 75 | 75 | | | off | off | | | 246+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 247| Dual Rank | Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off | | | | | 248+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 249| Empty | Dual Rank | Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 150 | off | off | off | 250+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 251|Single Rank| Empty | Slot 1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | | | | | | | 252+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 253| Empty |Single Rank| Slot 2 | off | 75 | | | | | 150 | off | | | 254+-----------+-----------+----------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+-------+------+ 255 256Single slot system 257+-------------+------------+---------------+-----------------------------+ 258| | |DRAM controller| Rank 1 | Rank 2 | 259|Configuration| Write/Read |-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 260| | | Write | Read | Write | Read | Write | Read | 261+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 262| | R1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off | 263| Dual Rank |------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 264| | R2 | off | 75 | 150 | off | off | off | 265+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+-------+------+ 266| Single Rank | R1 | off | 75 | 150 | off | 267+-------------+------------+-------+-------+-------+------+ 268 269Reference http://www.samsung.com/global/business/semiconductor/products/dram/downloads/applicationnote/ddr2_odt_control_200603.pdf 270 271 272Interactive DDR debugging 273=========================== 274 275For DDR parameter tuning up and debugging, the interactive DDR debugger can 276be activated by setting the environment variable "ddr_interactive" to any 277value. (The value of ddr_interactive may have a meaning in the future, but, 278for now, the presence of the variable will cause the debugger to run.) Once 279activated, U-Boot will show the prompt "FSL DDR>" before enabling the DDR 280controller. The available commands are printed by typing "help". 281 282Another way to enter the interactive DDR debugger without setting the 283environment variable is to send the 'd' character early during the boot 284process. To save booting time, no additional delay is added, so the window 285to send the key press is very short -- basically, it is the time before the 286memory controller code starts to run. For example, when rebooting from 287within U-Boot, the user must press 'd' IMMEDIATELY after hitting enter to 288initiate a 'reset' command. In case of power on/reset, the user can hold 289down the 'd' key while applying power or hitting the board's reset button. 290 291The example flow of using interactive debugging is 292type command "compute" to calculate the parameters from the default 293type command "print" with arguments to show SPD, options, registers 294type command "edit" with arguments to change any if desired 295type command "copy" with arguments to copy controller/dimm settings 296type command "go" to continue calculation and enable DDR controller 297 298Additional commands to restart the debugging are: 299type command "reset" to reset the board 300type command "recompute" to reload SPD and start over 301 302Note, check "next_step" to show the flow. For example, after edit opts, the 303next_step is STEP_ASSIGN_ADDRESSES. After editing registers, the next_step is 304STEP_PROGRAM_REGS. Upon issuing command "go", the debugger will program the 305DDR controller with the current setting without further calculation and then 306exit to resume the booting of the machine. 307 308The detail syntax for each commands are 309 310print [c<n>] [d<n>] [spd] [dimmparms] [commonparms] [opts] [addresses] [regs] 311 c<n> - the controller number, eg. c0, c1 312 d<n> - the DIMM number, eg. d0, d1 313 spd - print SPD data 314 dimmparms - DIMM parameters, calculated from SPD 315 commonparms - lowest common parameters for all DIMMs 316 opts - options 317 addresses - address assignment (not implemented yet) 318 regs - controller registers 319 320edit <c#> <d#> <spd|dimmparms|commonparms|opts|addresses|regs> <element> <value> 321 c<n> - the controller number, eg. c0, c1 322 d<n> - the DIMM number, eg. d0, d1 323 spd - print SPD data 324 dimmparms - DIMM parameters, calculated from SPD 325 commonparms - lowest common parameters for all DIMMs 326 opts - options 327 addresses - address assignment (not implemented yet) 328 regs - controller registers 329 <element> - name of the modified element 330 byte number if the object is SPD 331 <value> - decimal or heximal (prefixed with 0x) numbers 332 333copy <src c#> <src d#> <spd|dimmparms|commonparms|opts|addresses|regs> <dst c#> <dst d#> 334 same as for "edit" command 335 DIMM numbers ignored for commonparms, opts, and regs 336 337reset 338 no arguement - reset the board 339 340recompute 341 no argument - reload SPD and start over 342 343compute 344 no argument - recompute from current next_step 345 346next_step 347 no argument - show current next_step 348 349help 350 no argument - print a list of all commands 351 352go 353 no argument - program memory controller(s) and continue with U-Boot 354 355Examples of debugging flow 356 357 FSL DDR>compute 358 Detected UDIMM UG51U6400N8SU-ACF 359 FSL DDR>print 360 print [c<n>] [d<n>] [spd] [dimmparms] [commonparms] [opts] [addresses] [regs] 361 FSL DDR>print dimmparms 362 DIMM parameters: Controller=0 DIMM=0 363 DIMM organization parameters: 364 module part name = UG51U6400N8SU-ACF 365 rank_density = 2147483648 bytes (2048 megabytes) 366 capacity = 4294967296 bytes (4096 megabytes) 367 burst_lengths_bitmask = 0C 368 base_addresss = 0 (00000000 00000000) 369 n_ranks = 2 370 data_width = 64 371 primary_sdram_width = 64 372 ec_sdram_width = 0 373 registered_dimm = 0 374 n_row_addr = 15 375 n_col_addr = 10 376 edc_config = 0 377 n_banks_per_sdram_device = 8 378 tCKmin_X_ps = 1500 379 tCKmin_X_minus_1_ps = 0 380 tCKmin_X_minus_2_ps = 0 381 tCKmax_ps = 0 382 caslat_X = 960 383 tAA_ps = 13125 384 caslat_X_minus_1 = 0 385 caslat_X_minus_2 = 0 386 caslat_lowest_derated = 0 387 tRCD_ps = 13125 388 tRP_ps = 13125 389 tRAS_ps = 36000 390 tWR_ps = 15000 391 tWTR_ps = 7500 392 tRFC_ps = 160000 393 tRRD_ps = 6000 394 tRC_ps = 49125 395 refresh_rate_ps = 7800000 396 tIS_ps = 0 397 tIH_ps = 0 398 tDS_ps = 0 399 tDH_ps = 0 400 tRTP_ps = 7500 401 tDQSQ_max_ps = 0 402 tQHS_ps = 0 403 FSL DDR>edit c0 opts ECC_mode 0 404 FSL DDR>edit c0 regs cs0_bnds 0x000000FF 405 FSL DDR>go 406 2 GiB left unmapped 407 4 GiB (DDR3, 64-bit, CL=9, ECC off) 408 DDR Chip-Select Interleaving Mode: CS0+CS1 409 Testing 0x00000000 - 0x7fffffff 410 Testing 0x80000000 - 0xffffffff 411 Remap DDR 2 GiB left unmapped 412 413 POST memory PASSED 414 Flash: 128 MiB 415 L2: 128 KB enabled 416 Corenet Platform Cache: 1024 KB enabled 417 SERDES: timeout resetting bank 3 418 SRIO1: disabled 419 SRIO2: disabled 420 MMC: FSL_ESDHC: 0 421 EEPROM: Invalid ID (ff ff ff ff) 422 PCIe1: disabled 423 PCIe2: Root Complex, x1, regs @ 0xfe201000 424 01:00.0 - 8086:10d3 - Network controller 425 PCIe2: Bus 00 - 01 426 PCIe3: disabled 427 In: serial 428 Out: serial 429 Err: serial 430 Net: Initializing Fman 431 Fman1: Uploading microcode version 101.8.0 432 e1000: 00:1b:21:81:d2:e0 433 FM1@DTSEC1, FM1@DTSEC2, FM1@DTSEC3, FM1@DTSEC4, FM1@DTSEC5, e1000#0 [PRIME] 434 Warning: e1000#0 MAC addresses don't match: 435 Address in SROM is 00:1b:21:81:d2:e0 436 Address in environment is 00:e0:0c:00:ea:05 437 438 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 439 => 440
README.fsl-dpaa
1This file documents Freescale DPAA-specific options. 2 3FMan (Frame Manager) 4 - CONFIG_FSL_FM_10GEC_REGULAR_NOTATION 5 on SoCs T4240, T2080, LS1043A, etc, the notation between 10GEC and MAC as below: 6 10GEC1->MAC9, 10GEC2->MAC10, 10GEC3->MAC1, 10GEC4->MAC2 7 on SoCs T1024, etc, the notation between 10GEC and MAC as below: 8 10GEC1->MAC1, 10GEC2->MAC2 9 so we introduce CONFIG_FSL_FM_10GEC_REGULAR_NOTATION to identify the new SoCs on 10 which 10GEC enumeration is consistent with MAC enumeration. 11
README.fsl-esdhc
1Freescale esdhc-specific options 2 3 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ESDHC_LE 4 ESDHC IP is in little-endian mode. Accessing ESDHC registers can be 5 determined by ESDHC IP's endian mode or processor's endian mode. 6 - CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ESDHC_BE 7 ESDHC IP is in big-endian mode. Accessing ESDHC registers can be determined 8 by ESDHC IP's endian mode or processor's endian mode. 9
README.fsl-hwconfig
1Freescale-specific 'hwconfig' options. 2 3This file documents Freescale-specific key:value pairs for the 'hwconfig' 4option. See README.hwconfig for general information about 'hwconfig'. 5 6audclk 7 Specific to the P1022DS reference board. 8 9 This option specifies which of the two oscillator frequencies should be 10 routed to the Wolfson WM8776 codec. The ngPIXIS can be programmed to 11 route either a 11.2896MHz or a 12.288MHz clock. The default is 12 12.288MHz. This option has two effects. First, the MUX on the board 13 will be programmed accordingly. Second, the clock-frequency property 14 in the codec node in the device tree will be updated to the correct 15 value. 16 17 'audclk:11' 18 Select the 11.2896MHz clock 19 20 'audclk:12' 21 Select the 12.288MHz clock 22 23usb 24 Specific to boards have USB controller 25 26 This option specifies the following for a USB controller: 27 28 - which controller mode to use 29 - which USB PHY to use 30 31 This is used by generic USB device-tree fixup function to update 32 modified values of phy type and controller mode. 33 34 Also used for configuring multiple USB controllers such that 35 'usbN' (where N is 1, 2, etc. refers to controller no.) 36 37 'phy_type' 38 Select USB phy type: 'utmi' OR 'ulpi' 39 40 'dr_mode' 41 Select USB controller mode: 'host', 'peripheral' OR 'otg' 42 43 Examples: 44 usb1:dr_mode=host;usb2:dr_mode=peripheral' 45 46 usb1:dr_mode=host,phy_type=utmi;usb2:dr_mode=host' 47
README.fsl-trustzone-components
1Freescale ARM64 SoCs like LS2080A have ARM TrustZone components like 2TZPC-BP147 (TrustZone Protection Controller) and TZASC-400 (TrustZone 3Address Space Controller). 4 5While most of the configuration related programming of these peripherals 6is left to a root-of-trust security software layer (running in EL3 7privilege mode), but still some configurations of these peripherals 8might be required while the bootloader is executing in EL3 privilege 9mode. The following sections define how to turn on these features for 10LS2080A like SoCs. 11 12TZPC-BP147 (TrustZone Protection Controller) 13============================================ 14- Depends on CONFIG_FSL_TZPC_BP147 configuration flag. 15- Separates Secure World and Normal World on-chip RAM (OCRAM) spaces. 16- Provides a programming model to set access control policy via the TZPC 17 TZDECPROT Registers. 18 19TZASC-400 (TrustZone Address Space Controller) 20============================================== 21- Depends on CONFIG_FSL_TZASC_400 configuration flag. 22- Separates Secure World and Normal World external memory spaces for bus masters 23 such as processors and DMA-equipped peripherals. 24- Supports 8 fully programmable address regions, initially inactive at reset, 25 and one base region, always active, that covers the remaining address space. 26
README.fsl_iim
1Driver implementing the fuse API for Freescale's IC Identification Module (IIM) 2 3This IP can be found on the following SoCs: 4 - MPC512x, 5 - i.MX25, 6 - i.MX27, 7 - i.MX31, 8 - i.MX35, 9 - i.MX51, 10 - i.MX53. 11 12The section numbers in this file refer to the i.MX25 Reference Manual. 13 14A fuse word contains 8 fuse bit slots, as explained in 30.4.2.2.1. 15 16A bank contains 256 fuse word slots, as shown by the memory map in 30.3.1. 17 18Some fuse bit or word slots may not have the corresponding fuses actually 19implemented in the fusebox. 20 21See the README files of the SoCs using this driver in order to know the 22conventions used by U-Boot to store some specific data in the fuses, e.g. MAC 23addresses. 24 25Fuse operations: 26 27 Read 28 Read operations are implemented as read accesses to the shadow registers, 29 using "Word y of Bank x" from the register summary in 30.3.2. This is 30 explained in detail in 30.4.5.1. 31 32 Sense 33 Sense operations are implemented as explained in 30.4.5.2. 34 35 Program 36 Program operations are implemented as explained in 30.4.5.3. Following 37 this operation, the shadow registers are reloaded by the hardware (not 38 immediately, but this does not make any difference for a user reading 39 these registers). 40 41 Override 42 Override operations are implemented as write accesses to the shadow 43 registers, as explained in 30.4.5.4. 44 45Configuration: 46 47 CONFIG_FSL_IIM 48 Define this to enable the fsl_iim driver. 49
README.fuse
1Fuse API functions and commands 2 3The fuse API allows to control a fusebox and how it is used by the upper 4hardware layers. 5 6A fuse corresponds to a single non-volatile memory bit that can be programmed 7(i.e. blown, set to 1) only once. The programming operation is irreversible. A 8fuse that has not been programmed reads 0. 9 10Fuses can be used by SoCs to store various permanent configuration and data, 11e.g. boot configuration, security configuration, MAC addresses, etc. 12 13A fuse word is the smallest group of fuses that can be read at once from the 14fusebox control IP registers. This is limited to 32 bits with the current API. 15 16A fuse bank is the smallest group of fuse words having a common ID, as defined 17by each SoC. 18 19Upon startup, the fusebox control IP reads the fuse values and stores them to a 20volatile shadow cache. 21 22See the README files of the drivers implementing this API in order to know the 23SoC- and implementation-specific details. 24 25Functions / commands: 26 27 int fuse_read(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 *val); 28 fuse read <bank> <word> [<cnt>] 29 Read fuse words from the shadow cache. 30 31 int fuse_sense(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 *val); 32 fuse sense <bank> <word> [<cnt>] 33 Sense - i.e. read directly from the fusebox, skipping the shadow cache - 34 fuse words. This operation does not update the shadow cache. 35 36 This is useful to know the true value of fuses if an override has been 37 performed (see below). 38 39 int fuse_prog(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 val); 40 fuse prog [-y] <bank> <word> <hexval> [<hexval>...] 41 Program fuse words. This operation directly affects the fusebox and is 42 irreversible. The shadow cache is updated accordingly or not, depending on 43 each IP. 44 45 Only the bits to be programmed should be set in the input value (i.e. for 46 fuse bits that have already been programmed and hence should be left 47 unchanged by a further programming, it is preferable to clear the 48 corresponding bits in the input value in order not to perform a new 49 hardware programming operation on these fuse bits). 50 51 int fuse_override(u32 bank, u32 word, u32 val); 52 fuse override <bank> <word> <hexval> [<hexval>...] 53 Override fuse words in the shadow cache. 54 55 The fusebox is unaffected, so following this operation, the shadow cache 56 may differ from the fusebox values. Read or sense operations can then be 57 used to get the values from the shadow cache or from the fusebox. 58 59 This is useful to change the behaviors linked to some cached fuse values, 60 either because this is needed only temporarily, or because some of the 61 fuses have already been programmed or are locked (if the SoC allows to 62 override a locked fuse). 63 64Configuration: 65 66 CONFIG_CMD_FUSE 67 Define this to enable the fuse commands. 68
README.generic-board
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# (C) Copyright 2014 Google, Inc 4# Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org> 5 6Background 7---------- 8 9U-Boot traditionally had a board.c file for each architecture. This introduced 10quite a lot of duplication, with each architecture tending to do 11initialisation slightly differently. To address this, a new 'generic board 12init' feature was introduced in March 2013 (further motivation is 13provided in the cover letter below). 14 15All boards and architectures have moved to this as of mid 2016. 16 17 18What has changed? 19----------------- 20 21The main change is that the arch/<arch>/lib/board.c file is removed in 22favour of common/board_f.c (for pre-relocation init) and common/board_r.c 23(for post-relocation init). 24 25Related to this, the global_data and bd_info structures now have a core set of 26fields which are common to all architectures. Architecture-specific fields 27have been moved to separate structures. 28 29 30Further Background 31------------------ 32 33The full text of the original generic board series is reproduced below. 34 35--8<------------- 36 37This series creates a generic board.c implementation which contains 38the essential functions of the major arch/xxx/lib/board.c files. 39 40What is the motivation for this change? 41 421. There is a lot of repeated code in the board.c files. Any change to 43things like setting up the baud rate requires a change in 10 separate 44places. 45 462. Since there are 10 separate files, adding a new feature which requires 47initialisation is painful since it must be independently added in 10 48places. 49 503. As time goes by the architectures naturally diverge since there is limited 51pressure to compare features or even CONFIG options against similar things 52in other board.c files. 53 544. New architectures must implement all the features all over again, and 55sometimes in subtle different ways. This places an unfair burden on getting 56a new architecture fully functional and running with U-Boot. 57 585. While it is a bit of a tricky change, I believe it is worthwhile and 59achievable. There is no requirement that all code be common, only that 60the code that is common should be located in common/board.c rather than 61arch/xxx/lib/board.c. 62 63All the functions of board_init_f() and board_init_r() are broken into 64separate function calls so that they can easily be included or excluded 65for a particular architecture. It also makes it easier to adopt Graeme's 66initcall proposal when it is ready. 67 68http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2012-January/114499.html 69 70This series removes the dependency on generic relocation. So relocation 71happens as one big chunk and is still completely arch-specific. See the 72relocation series for a proposed solution to this for ARM: 73 74http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2011-December/112928.html 75 76or Graeme's recent x86 series v2: 77 78http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot/2012-January/114467.html 79 80Instead of moving over a whole architecture, this series takes the approach 81of simply enabling generic board support for an architecture. It is then up 82to each board to opt in by defining CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD in the board 83config file. If this is not done, then the code will be generated as 84before. This allows both sets of code to co-exist until we are comfortable 85with the generic approach, and enough boards run. 86 87ARM is a relatively large board.c file and one which I can test, therefore 88I think it is a good target for this series. On the other hand, x86 is 89relatively small and simple, but different enough that it introduces a 90few issues to be solved. So I have chosen both ARM and x86 for this series. 91After a suggestion from Wolfgang I have added PPC also. This is the 92largest and most feature-full board, so hopefully we have all bases 93covered in this RFC. 94 95A generic global_data structure is also required. This might upset a few 96people. Here is my basic reasoning: most fields are the same, all 97architectures include and need it, most global_data.h files already have 98#ifdefs to select fields for a particular SOC, so it is hard to 99see why architecures are different in this area. We can perhaps add a 100way to put architecture-specific fields into a separate header file, but 101for now I have judged that to be counter-productive. 102 103Similarly we need a generic bd_info structure, since generic code will 104be accessing it. I have done this in the same way as global_data and the 105same comments apply. 106 107There was dicussion on the list about passing gd_t around as a parameter 108to pre-relocation init functions. I think this makes sense, but it can 109be done as a separate change, and this series does not require it. 110 111While this series needs to stand on its own (as with the link script 112cleanup series and the generic relocation series) the goal is the 113unification of the board init code. So I hope we can address issues with 114this in mind, rather than focusing too narrowly on particular ARM, x86 or 115PPC issues. 116 117I have run-tested ARM on Tegra Seaboard only. To try it out, define 118CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD in your board file and rebuild. Most likely on 119x86 and PPC at least it will hang, but if you are lucky it will print 120something first :-) 121 122I have run this though MAKEALL with CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_BOARD on for all 123ARM, PPC and x86 boards. There are a few failures due to errors in 124the board config, which I have sent patches for. The main issue is 125just the difference between __bss_end and __bss_end__. 126 127Note: the first group of commits are required for this series to build, 128but could be separated out if required. I have included them here for 129convenience. 130 131------------->8-- 132 133Simon Glass, sjg@chromium.org 134March 2014 135Updated after final removal, May 2016 136
README.generic_usb_ohci
1Notes on the the generic USB-OHCI driver 2======================================== 3 4This driver (drivers/usb/usb_ohci.[ch]) is the result of the merge of 5various existing OHCI drivers that were basically identical beside 6cpu/board dependant initalization. This initalization has been moved 7into cpu/board directories and are called via the hooks below. 8 9Configuration options 10---------------------- 11 12 CONFIG_USB_OHCI_NEW: enable the new OHCI driver 13 14 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_BOARD_INIT: call the board dependant hooks: 15 16 - extern int board_usb_init(void); 17 - extern int usb_board_stop(void); 18 - extern int usb_cpu_init_fail(void); 19 20 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_CPU_INIT: call the cpu dependant hooks: 21 22 - extern int usb_cpu_init(void); 23 - extern int usb_cpu_stop(void); 24 - extern int usb_cpu_init_fail(void); 25 26 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_REGS_BASE: defines the base address of the OHCI 27 registers 28 29 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_SLOT_NAME: slot name 30 31 CONFIG_SYS_USB_OHCI_MAX_ROOT_PORTS: maximal number of ports of the 32 root hub. 33 34 35Endianness issues 36------------------ 37 38The USB bus operates in little endian, but unfortunately there are 39OHCI controllers that operate in big endian such as ppc4xx. For these the 40config option 41 42 CONFIG_SYS_OHCI_BE_CONTROLLER 43 44needs to be defined. 45 46 47PCI Controllers 48---------------- 49 50You'll need to define 51 52 CONFIG_PCI_OHCI 53 54If you have several USB PCI controllers, define 55 56 CONFIG_PCI_OHCI_DEVNO: number of the OHCI device in PCI list 57 58If undefined, the first instance found in PCI space will be used. 59 60PCI Controllers need to do byte swapping on register accesses, so they 61should to define: 62 63 CONFIG_SYS_OHCI_SWAP_REG_ACCESS 64
README.gpio
1 2GPIO hog (CONFIG_GPIO_HOG) 3-------- 4 5All the GPIO hog are initialized in gpio_hog_probe_all() function called in 6board_r.c just before board_late_init() but you can also acces directly to 7the gpio with gpio_hog_lookup_name(). 8 9 10Example, for the device tree: 11 12 tca6416@20 { 13 compatible = "ti,tca6416"; 14 reg = <0x20>; 15 #gpio-cells = <2>; 16 gpio-controller; 17 18 env_reset { 19 gpio-hog; 20 input; 21 gpios = <6 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; 22 }; 23 boot_rescue { 24 gpio-hog; 25 input; 26 line-name = "foo-bar-gpio"; 27 gpios = <7 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; 28 }; 29 }; 30 31You can than access the gpio in your board code with: 32 33 struct gpio_desc *desc; 34 int ret; 35 36 ret = gpio_hog_lookup_name("boot_rescue", &desc); 37 if (ret) 38 return; 39 if (dm_gpio_get_value(desc) == 1) 40 printf("\nBooting into Rescue System\n"); 41 else if (dm_gpio_get_value(desc) == 0) 42 printf("\nBoot normal\n"); 43
README.gpt
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2012 Samsung Electronics 4# 5# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@samsung.com> 6 7Glossary: 8======== 9- UUID -(Universally Unique Identifier) 10- GUID - (Globally Unique ID) 11- EFI - (Extensible Firmware Interface) 12- UEFI - (Unified EFI) - EFI evolution 13- GPT (GUID Partition Table) - it is the EFI standard part 14- partitions - lists of available partitions (defined at u-boot): 15 ./include/configs/{target}.h 16 17Introduction: 18============= 19This document describes the GPT partition table format and usage of 20the gpt command in u-boot. 21 22UUID introduction: 23==================== 24 25GPT for marking disks/partitions is using the UUID. It is supposed to be a 26globally unique value. A UUID is a 16-byte (128-bit) number. The number of 27theoretically possible UUIDs is therefore about 3 x 10^38. 28More often UUID is displayed as 32 hexadecimal digits, in 5 groups, 29separated by hyphens, in the form 8-4-4-4-12 for a total of 36 characters 30(32 digits and 4 hyphens) 31 32For instance, GUID of Basic data partition: EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7 33and GUID of Linux filesystem data: 0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4 34 35Historically there are 5 methods to generate this number. The oldest one is 36combining machine's MAC address and timer (epoch) value. 37 38Successive versions are using MD5 hash, random numbers and SHA-1 hash. All major 39OSes and programming languages are providing libraries to compute UUID (e.g. 40uuid command line tool). 41 42GPT brief explanation: 43====================== 44 45 Layout: 46 ------- 47 48 -------------------------------------------------- 49 LBA 0 |Protective MBR | 50 ---------------------------------------------------------- 51 LBA 1 |Primary GPT Header | Primary 52 -------------------------------------------------- GPT 53 LBA 2 |Entry 1|Entry 2| Entry 3| Entry 4| 54 -------------------------------------------------- 55 LBA 3 |Entries 5 - 128 | 56 | | 57 | | 58 ---------------------------------------------------------- 59 LBA 34 |Partition 1 | 60 | | 61 ----------------------------------- 62 |Partition 2 | 63 | | 64 ----------------------------------- 65 |Partition n | 66 | | 67 ---------------------------------------------------------- 68 LBA -34 |Entry 1|Entry 2| Entry 3| Entry 4| Backup 69 -------------------------------------------------- GPT 70 LBA -33 |Entries 5 - 128 | 71 | | 72 | | 73 LBA -2 | | 74 -------------------------------------------------- 75 LBA -1 |Backup GPT Header | 76 ---------------------------------------------------------- 77 78For a legacy reasons, GPT's LBA 0 sector has a MBR structure. It is called 79"protective MBR". 80Its first partition entry ID has 0xEE value, and disk software, which is not 81handling the GPT sees it as a storage device without free space. 82 83It is possible to define 128 linearly placed partition entries. 84 85"LBA -1" means the last addressable block (in the mmc subsystem: 86"dev_desc->lba - 1") 87 88Primary/Backup GPT header: 89---------------------------- 90Offset Size Description 91 920 8 B Signature ("EFI PART", 45 46 49 20 50 41 52 54) 938 4 B Revision (For version 1.0, the value is 00 00 01 00) 9412 4 B Header size (in bytes, usually 5C 00 00 00 meaning 92 bytes) 9516 4 B CRC32 of header (0 to header size), with this field zeroed 96 during calculation 9720 4 B Reserved (ZERO); 9824 8 B Current LBA (location of this header copy) 9932 8 B Backup LBA (location of the other header copy) 10040 8 B First usable LBA for partitions (primary partition table last 101 LBA + 1) 10248 8 B Last usable LBA (secondary partition table first LBA - 1) 10356 16 B Disk GUID (also referred as UUID on UNIXes) 10472 8 B Partition entries starting LBA (always 2 in primary copy) 10580 4 B Number of partition entries 10684 4 B Size of a partition entry (usually 128) 10788 4 B CRC32 of partition array 10892 * Reserved; must be ZERO (420 bytes for a 512-byte LBA) 109 110TOTAL: 512 B 111 112 113IMPORTANT: 114 115GPT headers and partition entries are protected by CRC32 (the POSIX CRC32). 116 117Primary GPT header and Backup GPT header have swapped values of "Current LBA" 118and "Backup LBA" and therefore different CRC32 check-sum. 119 120CRC32 for GPT headers (field "CRC of header") are calculated up till 121"Header size" (92), NOT 512 bytes. 122 123CRC32 for partition entries (field "CRC32 of partition array") is calculated for 124the whole array entry ( Number_of_partition_entries * 125sizeof(partition_entry_size (usually 128))) 126 127Observe, how Backup GPT is placed in the memory. It is NOT a mirror reflect 128of the Primary. 129 130 Partition Entry Format: 131 ---------------------- 132 Offset Size Description 133 134 0 16 B Partition type GUID (Big Endian) 135 16 16 B Unique partition GUID in (Big Endian) 136 32 8 B First LBA (Little Endian) 137 40 8 B Last LBA (inclusive) 138 48 8 B Attribute flags [+] 139 56 72 B Partition name (text) 140 141 Attribute flags: 142 Bit 0 - System partition 143 Bit 1 - Hide from EFI 144 Bit 2 - Legacy BIOS bootable 145 Bit 48-63 - Defined and used by the individual partition type 146 For Basic data partition : 147 Bit 60 - Read-only 148 Bit 62 - Hidden 149 Bit 63 - Not mount 150 151Creating GPT partitions in U-Boot: 152============== 153 154To restore GUID partition table one needs to: 1551. Define partition layout in the environment. 156 Format of partitions layout: 157 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...; 158 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=...;" 159 or 160 "uuid_disk=${uuid_gpt_disk};name=${uboot_name}, 161 size=${uboot_size},uuid=${uboot_uuid};" 162 163 The fields 'name' and 'size' are mandatory for every partition. 164 The field 'start' is optional. 165 166 If field 'size' of the last partition is 0, the partition is extended 167 up to the end of the device. 168 169 The fields 'uuid' and 'uuid_disk' are optional if CONFIG_RANDOM_UUID is 170 enabled. A random uuid will be used if omitted or they point to an empty/ 171 non-existent environment variable. The environment variable will be set to 172 the generated UUID. The 'gpt guid' command reads the current value of the 173 uuid_disk from the GPT. 174 175 The field 'bootable' is optional, it is used to mark the GPT partition 176 bootable (set attribute flags "Legacy BIOS bootable"). 177 "name=u-boot,size=60MiB;name=boot,size=60Mib,bootable;name=rootfs,size=0" 178 It can be used to locate bootable disks with command 179 "part list <interface> <dev> -bootable <varname>", 180 please check out doc/README.distro for use. 181 1822. Define 'CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION' and 'CONFIG_CMD_GPT' 183 1843. From u-boot prompt type: 185 gpt write mmc 0 $partitions 186 187Checking (validating) GPT partitions in U-Boot: 188=============================================== 189 190Procedure is the same as above. The only change is at point 3. 191 192At u-boot prompt one needs to write: 193 gpt verify mmc 0 [$partitions] 194 195where [$partitions] is an optional parameter. 196 197When it is not provided, only basic checks based on CRC32 calculation for GPT 198header and PTEs are performed. 199When provided, additionally partition data - name, size and starting 200offset (last two in LBA) - are compared with data defined in '$partitions' 201environment variable. 202 203After running this command, return code is set to 0 if no errors found in 204on non-volatile medium stored GPT. 205 206Following line can be used to assess if GPT verification has succeed: 207 208U-BOOT> gpt verify mmc 0 $partitions 209U-BOOT> if test $? = 0; then echo "GPT OK"; else echo "GPT ERR"; fi 210 211Renaming GPT partitions from U-Boot: 212==================================== 213 214GPT partition names are a mechanism via which userspace and U-Boot can 215communicate about software updates and boot failure. The 'gpt guid', 216'gpt read', 'gpt rename' and 'gpt swap' commands facilitate 217programmatic renaming of partitions from bootscripts by generating and 218modifying the partitions layout string. Here is an illustration of 219employing 'swap' to exchange 'primary' and 'backup' partition names: 220 221U-BOOT> gpt swap mmc 0 primary backup 222 223Afterwards, all partitions previously named 'primary' will be named 224'backup', and vice-versa. Alternatively, single partitions may be 225renamed. In this example, mmc0's first partition will be renamed 226'primary': 227 228U-BOOT> gpt rename mmc 0 1 primary 229 230The GPT functionality may be tested with the 'sandbox' board by 231creating a disk image as described under 'Block Device Emulation' in 232doc/arch/index.rst: 233 234=>host bind 0 ./disk.raw 235=> gpt read host 0 236[ . . . ] 237=> gpt swap host 0 name othername 238[ . . . ] 239 240Partition type GUID: 241==================== 242 243For created partition, the used partition type GUID is 244PARTITION_BASIC_DATA_GUID (EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7). 245 246If you define 'CONFIG_PARTITION_TYPE_GUID', a optionnal parameter 'type' 247can specify a other partition type guid: 248 249 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...; 250 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=..., 251 type=0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4;" 252 253Some strings can be also used at the place of known GUID : 254 "system" = PARTITION_SYSTEM_GUID 255 (C12A7328-F81F-11D2-BA4B-00A0C93EC93B) 256 "mbr" = LEGACY_MBR_PARTITION_GUID 257 (024DEE41-33E7-11D3-9D69-0008C781F39F) 258 "msft" = PARTITION_MSFT_RESERVED_GUID 259 (E3C9E316-0B5C-4DB8-817D-F92DF00215AE) 260 "data" = PARTITION_BASIC_DATA_GUID 261 (EBD0A0A2-B9E5-4433-87C0-68B6B72699C7) 262 "linux" = PARTITION_LINUX_FILE_SYSTEM_DATA_GUID 263 (0FC63DAF-8483-4772-8E79-3D69D8477DE4) 264 "raid" = PARTITION_LINUX_RAID_GUID 265 (A19D880F-05FC-4D3B-A006-743F0F84911E) 266 "swap" = PARTITION_LINUX_SWAP_GUID 267 (0657FD6D-A4AB-43C4-84E5-0933C84B4F4F) 268 "lvm" = PARTITION_LINUX_LVM_GUID 269 (E6D6D379-F507-44C2-A23C-238F2A3DF928) 270 "u-boot-env" = PARTITION_U_BOOT_ENVIRONMENT 271 (3DE21764-95BD-54BD-A5C3-4ABE786F38A8) 272 273 "uuid_disk=...;name=u-boot,size=60MiB,uuid=...; 274 name=kernel,size=60MiB,uuid=...,type=linux;" 275 276They are also used to display the type of partition in "part list" command. 277 278 279Useful info: 280============ 281 282Two programs, namely: 'gdisk' and 'parted' are recommended to work with GPT 283recovery. Both are able to handle GUID partitions. 284Please, pay attention at -l switch for parted. 285 286"uuid" program is recommended to generate UUID string. Moreover it can decode 287(-d switch) passed in UUID string. It can be used to generate partitions UUID 288passed to u-boot environment variables. 289If optional CONFIG_RANDOM_UUID is defined then for any partition which environment 290uuid is unset, uuid is randomly generated and stored in correspond environment 291variable. 292 293note: 294Each string block of UUID generated by program "uuid" is in big endian and it is 295also stored in big endian in disk GPT. 296Partitions layout can be printed by typing "mmc part". Note that each partition 297GUID has different byte order than UUID generated before, this is because first 298three blocks of GUID string are in Little Endian. 299
README.hwconfig
1To enable this feature just define CONFIG_HWCONFIG in your board 2config file. 3 4This implements a simple hwconfig infrastructure: an 5interface for software knobs to control hardware. 6 7This a is very simple implementation, i.e. it is implemented 8via the `hwconfig' environment variable. Later we could write 9some "hwconfig <enable|disable|list>" commands, ncurses 10interface for Award BIOS-like interface, and frame-buffer 11interface for AMI GUI[1] BIOS-like interface with mouse 12support[2]. 13 14Current implementation details/limitations: 15 161. Doesn't support options dependencies and mutual exclusion. 17 We can implement this by integrating apt-get[3] into Das 18 U-Boot. But I haven't bothered yet. 19 202. Since we don't implement a hwconfig command, i.e. we're working 21 with the environment directly, there is no way to tell that 22 toggling a particular option will need a reboot to take 23 effect. So, for now it's advised to always reboot the 24 target after modifying the hwconfig variable. 25 263. We support hwconfig options with arguments. For example, 27 28 set hwconfig "dr_usb:mode=peripheral,phy_type=ulpi" 29 30 This selects three hwconfig options: 31 1. dr_usb - enable Dual-Role USB controller; 32 2. dr_usb_mode:peripheral - USB in Function mode; 33 3. dr_usb_phy_type:ulpi - USB should work with ULPI PHYs. 34 35The purpose of this simple implementation is to refine the 36internal API and then we can continue improving the user 37experience by adding more mature interfaces, like a hwconfig 38command with bells and whistles. Or not adding, if we feel 39that the current interface fits people's needs. 40 41[1] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_Megatrends 42[2] Regarding ncurses and GUI with mouse support -- I'm just 43 kidding. 44[3] The comment regarding apt-get is also a joke, meaning that 45 dependency tracking could be non-trivial. For example, for 46 enabling HW feature X we may need to disable Y, and turn Z 47 into reduced mode (like RMII-only interface for ethernet, 48 no MII). 49 50 It's quite trivial to implement simple cases though. 51
README.i2c
1I2C Bus Arbitration 2=================== 3 4While I2C supports multi-master buses this is difficult to get right. 5The implementation on the master side in software is quite complex. 6Clock-stretching and the arbitrary time that an I2C transaction can take 7make it difficult to share the bus fairly in the face of high traffic. 8When one or more masters can be reset independently part-way through a 9transaction it is hard to know the state of the bus. 10 11U-Boot provides a scheme based on two 'claim' GPIOs, one driven by the 12AP (Application Processor, meaning the main CPU) and one driven by the EC 13(Embedded Controller, a small CPU aimed at handling system tasks). With 14these they can communicate and reliably share the bus. This scheme has 15minimal overhead and involves very little code. The scheme can survive 16reboots by either side without difficulty. 17 18Since U-Boot runs on the AP, the terminology used is 'our' claim GPIO, 19meaning the AP's, and 'their' claim GPIO, meaning the EC's. This terminology 20is used by the device tree bindings in Linux also. 21 22The driver is implemented as an I2C mux, as it is in Linux. See 23i2c-arb-gpio-challenge for the implementation. 24 25GPIO lines are shared between the AP and EC to manage the bus. The AP and EC 26each have a 'bus claim' line, which is an output that the other can see. 27 28- AP_CLAIM: output from AP, signalling to the EC that the AP wants the bus 29- EC_CLAIM: output from EC, signalling to the AP that the EC wants the bus 30 31The basic algorithm is to assert your line when you want the bus, then make 32sure that the other side doesn't want it also. A detailed explanation is best 33done with an example. 34 35Let's say the AP wants to claim the bus. It: 36 371. Asserts AP_CLAIM 382. Waits a little bit for the other side to notice (slew time) 393. Checks EC_CLAIM. If this is not asserted, then the AP has the bus, and we 40 are done 414. Otherwise, wait for a few milliseconds (retry time) and see if EC_CLAIM is 42 released 435. If not, back off, release the claim and wait for a few more milliseconds 44 (retry time again) 456. Go back to 1 if things don't look wedged (wait time has expired) 467. Panic. The other side is hung with the CLAIM line set. 47 48The same algorithm applies on the EC. 49 50To release the bus, just de-assert the claim line. 51 52Typical delays are: 53- slew time 10 us 54- retry time 3 ms 55- wait time - 50ms 56 57In general the traffic is fairly light, and in particular the EC wants access 58to the bus quite rarely (maybe every 10s or 30s to check the battery). This 59scheme works very nicely with very low contention. There is only a 10 us 60wait for access to the bus assuming that the other side isn't using it. 61
README.iomux
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2008 4 * Gary Jennejohn, DENX Software Engineering GmbH <garyj@denx.de> 5 */ 6 7U-Boot console multiplexing 8=========================== 9 10HOW CONSOLE MULTIPLEXING WORKS 11------------------------------ 12 13This functionality is controlled with CONFIG_CONSOLE_MUX in the board 14configuration file. 15 16Two new files, common/iomux.c and include/iomux.h, contain the heart 17(iomux_doenv()) of the environment setting implementation. 18 19iomux_doenv() is called in common/cmd_nvedit.c to handle setenv and in 20common/console.c in console_init_r() during bootup to initialize 21stdio_devices[]. 22 23A user can use a comma-separated list of devices to set stdin, stdout 24and stderr. For example: "setenv stdin serial,nc". NOTE: No spaces 25are allowed around the comma(s)! 26 27The length of the list is limited by malloc(), since the array used 28is allocated and freed dynamically. 29 30It should be possible to specify any device which console_assign() 31finds acceptable, but the code has only been tested with serial and 32nc. 33 34iomux_doenv() prevents multiple use of the same device, e.g. "setenv 35stdin nc,nc,serial" will discard the second nc. iomux_doenv() is 36not able to modify the environment, however, so that "pri stdin" still 37shows "nc,nc,serial". 38 39The major change in common/console.c was to modify fgetc() to call 40the iomux_tstc() routine in a for-loop. iomux_tstc() in turn calls 41the tstc() routine for every registered device, but exits immediately 42when one of them returns true. fgetc() then calls iomux_getc(), 43which calls the corresponding getc() routine. fgetc() hangs in 44the for-loop until iomux_tstc() returns true and the input can be 45retrieved. 46 47Thus, a user can type into any device registered for stdin. No effort 48has been made to demulitplex simultaneous input from multiple stdin 49devices. 50 51fputc() and fputs() have been modified to call iomux_putc() and 52iomux_puts() respectively, which call the corresponding output 53routines for every registered device. 54 55Thus, a user can see the ouput for any device registered for stdout 56or stderr on all devices registered for stdout or stderr. As an 57example, if stdin=serial,nc and stdout=serial,nc then all output 58for serial, e.g. echos of input on serial, will appear on serial and nc. 59 60Just as with the old console code, this statement is still true: 61If not defined in the environment, the first input device is assigned 62to the 'stdin' file, the first output one to 'stdout' and 'stderr'. 63 64If CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV is defined then multiple input/output 65devices can be set at boot time if defined in the environment. 66 67CAVEATS 68------- 69 70Note that common/iomux.c calls console_assign() for every registered 71device as it is discovered. This means that the environment settings 72for application consoles will be set to the last device in the list. 73 74On a slow machine, such as MPC852T clocked at 66MHz, the overhead associated 75with calling tstc() and then getc() means that copy&paste will normally not 76work, even when stdin=stdout=stderr=serial. 77On a faster machine, such as a sequoia, cut&paste of longer (about 80 78characters) lines works fine when serial is the only device used. 79 80Using nc as a stdin device results in even more overhead because nc_tstc() 81is quite slow. Even on a sequoia cut&paste does not work on the serial 82interface when nc is added to stdin, although there is no character loss using 83the ethernet interface for input. In this test case stdin=serial,nc and 84stdout=serial. 85 86In addition, the overhead associated with sending to two devices, when one of 87them is nc, also causes problems. Even on a sequoia cut&paste does not work 88on the serial interface (stdin=serial) when nc is added to stdout (stdout= 89serial,nc). 90
README.kconfig
1Kconfig in U-Boot 2================= 3 4This document describes the configuration infrastructure of U-Boot. 5 6The conventional configuration was replaced by Kconfig at v2014.10-rc1 release. 7 8 9Language Specification 10---------------------- 11 12Kconfig originates in Linux Kernel. 13See the file "Documentation/kbuild/kconfig*.txt" in your Linux Kernel 14source directory for a basic specification of Kconfig. 15 16 17Difference from Linux's Kconfig 18------------------------------- 19 20Here are some worth-mentioning configuration targets. 21 22- silentoldconfig 23 24 This target updates .config, include/generated/autoconf.h and 25 include/configs/* as in Linux. In U-Boot, it also does the following 26 for the compatibility with the old configuration system: 27 28 * create a symbolic link "arch/${ARCH}/include/asm/arch" pointing to 29 the SoC/CPU specific header directory 30 * create include/config.h 31 * create include/autoconf.mk 32 * create spl/include/autoconf.mk (SPL and TPL only) 33 * create tpl/include/autoconf.mk (TPL only) 34 35 If we could completely switch to Kconfig in a long run 36 (i.e. remove all the include/configs/*.h), those additional processings 37 above would be removed. 38 39- defconfig 40 41 In U-Boot, "make defconfig" is a shorthand of "make sandbox_defconfig" 42 43- <board>_defconfig 44 45 Now it works as in Linux. 46 The prefixes such as "+S:" in *_defconfig are deprecated. 47 You can simply remove the prefixes. Do not add them for new boards. 48 49- <board>_config 50 51 This does not exist in Linux's Kconfig. 52 "make <board>_config" works the same as "make <board>_defconfig". 53 Prior to Kconfig, in U-Boot, "make <board>_config" was used for the 54 configuration. It is still supported for backward compatibility, so 55 we do not need to update the distro recipes. 56 57 58The other configuration targets work as in Linux Kernel. 59 60 61Migration steps to Kconfig 62-------------------------- 63 64Prior to Kconfig, the C preprocessor based board configuration had been used 65in U-Boot. 66 67Although Kconfig was introduced and some configs have been moved to Kconfig, 68many of configs are still defined in C header files. It will take a very 69long term to move all of them to Kconfig. In the interim, the two different 70configuration infrastructures should coexist. 71The configuration files are generated by both Kconfig and the old preprocessor 72based configuration as follows: 73 74Configuration files for use in C sources 75 - include/generated/autoconf.h (generated by Kconfig for Normal) 76 - include/configs/<board>.h (exists for all boards) 77 78Configuration file for use in makefiles 79 - include/config/auto.conf (generated by Kconfig) 80 - include/autoconf.mk (generated by the old config for Normal) 81 - spl/include/autoconfig.mk (generated by the old config for SPL) 82 - tpl/include/autoconfig.mk (generated by the old config for TPL) 83 84When adding a new CONFIG macro, it is highly recommended to add it to Kconfig 85rather than to a header file. 86 87 88Conversion from boards.cfg to Kconfig 89------------------------------------- 90 91Prior to Kconfig, boards.cfg was a primary database that contained Arch, CPU, 92SoC, etc. of all the supported boards. It was deleted when switching to 93Kconfig. Each field of boards.cfg was converted as follows: 94 95 Status -> "S:" entry of MAINTAINERS 96 Arch -> CONFIG_SYS_ARCH defined by Kconfig 97 CPU -> CONFIG_SYS_CPU defined by Kconfig 98 SoC -> CONFIG_SYS_SOC defined by Kconfig 99 Vendor -> CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR defined by Kconfig 100 Board -> CONFIG_SYS_BOARD defined by Kconfig 101 Target -> File name of defconfig (configs/<target>_defconfig) 102 Options -> CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS defined by Kconfig 103 Maintainers -> "M:" entry of MAINTAINERS 104 105 106Tips to add/remove boards 107------------------------- 108 109When adding a new board, the following steps are generally needed: 110 111 [1] Add a header file include/configs/<target>.h 112 [2] Make sure to define necessary CONFIG_SYS_* in Kconfig: 113 Define CONFIG_SYS_CPU="cpu" to compile arch/<arch>/cpu/<cpu> 114 Define CONFIG_SYS_SOC="soc" to compile arch/<arch>/cpu/<cpu>/<soc> 115 Define CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR="vendor" to compile board/<vendor>/common/* 116 and board/<vendor>/<board>/* 117 Define CONFIG_SYS_BOARD="board" to compile board/<board>/* 118 (or board/<vendor>/<board>/* if CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR is defined) 119 Define CONFIG_SYS_CONFIG_NAME="target" to include 120 include/configs/<target>.h 121 [3] Add a new entry to the board select menu in Kconfig. 122 The board select menu is located in arch/<arch>/Kconfig or 123 arch/<arch>/*/Kconfig. 124 [4] Add a MAINTAINERS file 125 It is generally placed at board/<board>/MAINTAINERS or 126 board/<vendor>/<board>/MAINTAINERS 127 [5] Add configs/<target>_defconfig 128 129When removing an obsolete board, the following steps are generally needed: 130 131 [1] Remove configs/<target>_defconfig 132 [2] Remove include/configs/<target>.h if it is not used by any other boards 133 [3] Remove board/<vendor>/<board>/* or board/<board>/* if it is not used 134 by any other boards 135 [4] Update MAINTAINERS if necessary 136 [5] Remove the unused entry from the board select menu in Kconfig 137 [6] Add an entry to doc/README.scrapyard 138 139 140TODO 141---- 142 143- The option field of boards.cfg, which was used for the pre-Kconfig 144 configuration, moved to CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS verbatim now. 145 Board maintainers are expected to implement proper Kconfig options 146 and switch over to them. Eventually CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS will go away. 147 CONFIG_SYS_EXTRA_OPTIONS should not be used for new boards. 148 149- In the pre-Kconfig, a single board had multiple entries in the boards.cfg 150 file with differences in the option fields. The corresponding defconfig 151 files were auto-generated when switching to Kconfig. Now we have too many 152 defconfig files compared with the number of the supported boards. It is 153 recommended to have only one defconfig per board and allow users to select 154 the config options. 155 156- Move the config macros in header files to Kconfig. When we move at least 157 macros used in makefiles, we can drop include/autoconfig.mk, which makes 158 the build scripts much simpler. 159
README.kwbimage
1--------------------------------------------- 2Kirkwood Boot Image generation using mkimage 3--------------------------------------------- 4 5This document describes the U-Boot feature as it 6is implemented for the Kirkwood family of SoCs. 7 8The Kirkwood SoC's can boot directly from NAND FLASH, 9SPI FLASH, SATA etc. using its internal bootRom support. 10 11for more details refer section 24.2 of Kirkwood functional specifications. 12ref: www.marvell.com/products/embedded.../kirkwood/index.jsp 13 14Command syntax: 15-------------- 16./tools/mkimage -l <kwboot_file> 17 to list the kwb image file details 18 19./tools/mkimage -n <board specific configuration file> \ 20 -T kwbimage -a <start address> -e <execution address> \ 21 -d <input_raw_binary> <output_kwboot_file> 22 23for ex. 24./tools/mkimage -n ./board/Marvell/openrd_base/kwbimage.cfg \ 25 -T kwbimage -a 0x00600000 -e 0x00600000 \ 26 -d u-boot.bin u-boot.kwb 27 28 29kwbimage support available with mkimage utility will generate kirkwood boot 30image that can be flashed on the board NAND/SPI flash. The make target 31which uses mkimage to produce such an image is "u-boot.kwb". For example: 32 33 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build 34 make distclean 35 make yourboard_config 36 make u-boot.kwb 37 38 39Board specific configuration file specifications: 40------------------------------------------------ 411. This file must present in the $(BOARDDIR). The default name is 42 kwbimage.cfg. The name can be set as part of the full path 43 to the file using CONFIG_SYS_KWD_CONFIG (probably in 44 include/configs/<yourboard>.h). The path should look like: 45 $(CONFIG_BOARDDIR)/<yourkwbimagename>.cfg 462. This file can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first 47 character to put comments 483. This file can have configuration command lines as mentioned below, 49 any other information in this file is treated as invalid. 50 51Configuration command line syntax: 52--------------------------------- 531. Each command line is must have two strings, first one command or address 54 and second one data string 552. Following are the valid command strings and associated data strings:- 56 Command string data string 57 -------------- ----------- 58 BOOT_FROM nand/spi/sata 59 NAND_ECC_MODE default/rs/hamming/disabled 60 NAND_PAGE_SIZE any uint16_t hex value 61 SATA_PIO_MODE any uint32_t hex value 62 DDR_INIT_DELAY any uint32_t hex value 63 DATA regaddr and regdara hex value 64 you can have maximum 55 such register programming commands 65 663. All commands are optional to program 67 68Typical example of kwimage.cfg file: 69----------------------------------- 70 71# Boot Media configurations 72BOOT_FROM nand 73NAND_ECC_MODE default 74NAND_PAGE_SIZE 0x0800 75 76# Configure RGMII-0 interface pad voltage to 1.8V 77DATA 0xFFD100e0 0x1b1b1b9b 78# DRAM Configuration 79DATA 0xFFD01400 0x43000c30 80DATA 0xFFD01404 0x37543000 81DATA 0xFFD01408 0x22125451 82DATA 0xFFD0140C 0x00000a33 83DATA 0xFFD01410 0x000000cc 84DATA 0xFFD01414 0x00000000 85DATA 0xFFD01418 0x00000000 86DATA 0xFFD0141C 0x00000C52 87DATA 0xFFD01420 0x00000040 88DATA 0xFFD01424 0x0000F17F 89DATA 0xFFD01428 0x00085520 90DATA 0xFFD0147C 0x00008552 91DATA 0xFFD01504 0x0FFFFFF1 92DATA 0xFFD01508 0x10000000 93DATA 0xFFD0150C 0x0FFFFFF5 94DATA 0xFFD01514 0x00000000 95DATA 0xFFD0151C 0x00000000 96DATA 0xFFD01494 0x00030000 97DATA 0xFFD01498 0x00000000 98DATA 0xFFD0149C 0x0000E803 99DATA 0xFFD01480 0x00000001 100# End of Header extension 101DATA 0x0 0x0 102 103------------------------------------------------ 104Author: Prafulla Wadaskar <prafulla@marvell.com> 105
README.link-local
1------------------------------------------ 2 Link-local IP address auto-configuration 3------------------------------------------ 4 5Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network 6for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration. 7This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed 8to exist in all environments that the device must operate. 9 10This is an implementation of RFC3927. 11 12---------- 13 Commands 14---------- 15 16When CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL is defined in the board config file, 17the "linklocal" command is available. This running this will 18take approximately 5 seconds while the address is negotiated. 19 20------------------------ 21 Environment interation 22------------------------ 23 24The "llipaddr" variable is set with the most recently 25negotiated address and is preferred in future negotiations. 26 27The "ipaddr", "netmask", and "gatewayip" variables are set 28after successful negotiation to enable network access. 29 30------------- 31 Limitations 32------------- 33 34RFC3927 requires that addresses are continuously checked to 35avoid conflicts, however this can only happen when the net_loop 36is getting called. It is possible for a conflict to go undetected 37until a command that accesses the network is executed. 38 39Using NetConsole is one way to ensure that net_loop is always 40processing packets and monitoring for conflicts. 41 42This is also not a concern if the feature is use to connect 43directly to another machine that may not be running a DHCP server. 44 45---------------- 46 Example script 47---------------- 48 49This script allows use of DHCP and/or Link-local controlled 50by env variables. It depends on CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL, CONFIG_CMD_DHCP, 51and CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL. 52If both fail or are disabled, static settings are used. 53 54#define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ 55 "ipconfigcmd=if test \\\"$dhcpenabled\\\" -ne 0;" \ 56 "then " \ 57 "dhcpfail=0;dhcp || dhcpfail=1;" \ 58 "else " \ 59 "dhcpfail=-1;" \ 60 "fi;" \ 61 "if test \\\"$linklocalenabled\\\" -ne 0 -a " \ 62 "\\\"$dhcpfail\\\" -ne 0;" \ 63 "then " \ 64 "linklocal;" \ 65 "llfail=0;" \ 66 "else " \ 67 "llfail=-1;" \ 68 "fi;" \ 69 "if test \\\"$llfail\\\" -ne 0 -a " \ 70 "\\\"$dhcpfail\\\" -ne 0; " \ 71 "then " \ 72 "setenv ipaddr $sipaddr; " \ 73 "setenv netmask $snetmask; " \ 74 "setenv gatewayip $sgatewayip; " \ 75 "fi;\0" \ 76
README.lynxkdi
1 LYNX KDI SUPPORT 2 3 Last Update: July 20, 2003 4======================================================================= 5 6This file describes support for LynuxWorks KDI within U-Boot. Support 7is enabled by defining CONFIG_LYNXKDI. 8 9 10LYNXOS AND BLUECAT SUPPORTED 11============================ 12Both LynxOS and BlueCat linux KDIs are supported. The implementation 13automatically detects which is being booted. When you use mkimage 14you should specify "lynxos" for both (see target-specific notes). 15 16 17SUPPORTED ARCHITECTURE/TARGETS 18============================== 19The following targets have been tested: 20 21-PowerPC MPC8260ADS 22 23 24FILES TO LOOK AT 25================ 26include/lynxkdi.h -defines a simple struct passed to a kdi. 27common/lynxkdi.c -implements the call to the kdi. 28common/cmd_bootm.c -top-level command implementation ("bootm"). 29 30 31==================================================================== 32TARGET SPECIFIC NOTES 33==================================================================== 34 35MPC8260ADS 36=========== 37The default LynxOS and BlueCat implementations require some 38modifications to the config file. 39 40Edit include/configs/MPC8260ADS.h to use the following: 41 42#define CONFIG_SYS_IMMR 0xFA200000 43#define CONFIG_SYS_BCSR 0xFA100000 44#define CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM 0xFA101801 45 46When creating a LynxOS or BlueCat u-boot image using mkimage, 47you must specify the following: 48 49Both: -A ppc -O lynxos -T kernel -C none 50LynxOS: -a 0x00004000 -e 0x00004020 51BlueCat: -a 0x00500000 -e 0x00507000 52 53To pass the MAC address to BlueCat you should define the 54"fcc2_ether_addr" parameter in the "bootargs" environment 55variable. E.g.: 56 57==> setenv bootargs fcc2_ether_addr=00:11:22:33:44:55:66 58
README.m54418twr
1Freescale MCF54418TWR ColdFire Development Board 2================================================ 3 4TsiChung Liew(Tsi-Chung.Liew@freescale.com) 5Created Mar 22, 2012 6=========================================== 7 8 9Changed files: 10============== 11 12- board/freescale/m54418twr/m54418twr.c Dram setup 13- board/freescale/m54418twr/Makefile Makefile 14- board/freescale/m54418twr/config.mk config make 15- board/freescale/m54418twr/u-boot.lds Linker description 16- board/freescale/m54418twr/sbf_dram_init.S 17 DDR/SDRAM initialization 18 19- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/cpu.c cpu specific code 20- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/cpu_init.c Flexbus ChipSelect, Mux pins setup, icache and RTC extra regs 21- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/interrupts.c cpu specific interrupt support 22- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/speed.c system, pci, flexbus, and cpu clock 23- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/Makefile Makefile 24- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/config.mk config make 25- arch/m68k/cpu/mcf5445x/start.S start up assembly code 26 27- doc/README.m54418twr This readme file 28 29- drivers/net/mcffec.c ColdFire common FEC driver 30- drivers/net/mcfmii.c ColdFire common MII driver 31- drivers/serial/mcfuart.c ColdFire common UART driver 32 33- arch/m68k/include/asm/bitops.h Bit operation function export 34- arch/m68k/include/asm/byteorder.h Byte order functions 35- arch/m68k/include/asm/fec.h FEC structure and definition 36- arch/m68k/include/asm/global_data.h Global data structure 37- arch/m68k/include/asm/immap.h ColdFire specific header file and driver macros 38- arch/m68k/include/asm/immap_5441x.h mcf5441x specific header file 39- arch/m68k/include/asm/io.h io functions 40- arch/m68k/include/asm/m5441x.h mcf5441x specific header file 41- arch/m68k/include/asm/posix_types.h Posix 42- arch/m68k/include/asm/processor.h header file 43- arch/m68k/include/asm/ptrace.h Exception structure 44- arch/m68k/include/asm/rtc.h Realtime clock header file 45- arch/m68k/include/asm/string.h String function export 46- arch/m68k/include/asm/timer.h Timer structure and definition 47- arch/m68k/include/asm/types.h Data types definition 48- arch/m68k/include/asm/uart.h Uart structure and definition 49- arch/m68k/include/asm/u-boot.h u-boot structure 50 51- include/configs/M54418TWR.h Board specific configuration file 52 53- arch/m68k/lib/board.c board init function 54- arch/m68k/lib/cache.c 55- arch/m68k/lib/interrupts.c Coldfire common interrupt functions 56- arch/m68k/lib/time.c Timer functions (Dma timer and PIT) 57- arch/m68k/lib/traps.c Exception init code 58 591 MCF5441x specific Options/Settings 60==================================== 611.1 pre-loader is no longer suppoer in thie coldfire family 62 631.2 Configuration settings for M54418TWR Development Board 64CONFIG_MCF5441x -- define for all MCF5441x CPUs 65CONFIG_M54418 -- define for all Freescale MCF54418 CPUs 66 67CONFIG_MCFUART -- define to use common CF Uart driver 68CONFIG_SYS_UART_PORT -- define UART port number, start with 0, 1 and 2 69CONFIG_BAUDRATE -- define UART baudrate 70 71CONFIG_MCFFEC -- define to use common CF FEC driver 72CONFIG_MII -- enable to use MII driver 73CONFIG_SYS_DISCOVER_PHY -- enable PHY discovery 74CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER -- Set FEC Receive buffer 75CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN -- 76CONFIG_SYS_FEC0_PINMUX -- Set FEC0 Pin configuration 77CONFIG_SYS_FEC1_PINMUX -- Set FEC1 Pin configuration 78CONFIG_SYS_FEC0_MIIBASE -- Set FEC0 MII base register 79CONFIG_SYS_FEC1_MIIBASE -- Set FEC0 MII base register 80MCFFEC_TOUT_LOOP -- set FEC timeout loop 81CONFIG_HAS_ETH1 -- define to enable second FEC in u-boot 82 83CONFIG_MCFTMR -- define to use DMA timer 84 85CONFIG_SYS_IMMR -- define for MBAR offset 86 87CONFIG_EXTRA_CLOCK -- Enable extra clock such as vco, flexbus, pci, etc 88 89CONFIG_SYS_MBAR -- define MBAR offset 90 91CONFIG_MONITOR_IS_IN_RAM -- Not support 92 93CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR -- defines the base address of the MCF54455 internal SRAM 94 95CONFIG_SYS_CSn_BASE -- defines the Chip Select Base register 96CONFIG_SYS_CSn_MASK -- defines the Chip Select Mask register 97CONFIG_SYS_CSn_CTRL -- defines the Chip Select Control register 98 99CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE -- defines the DRAM Base 100 1012. MEMORY MAP UNDER U-BOOT AND LINUX KERNEL 102=========================================== 1032.1. System memory map: 104 MRAM: 0x00000000-0x0003FFFF (256KB) 105 DDR: 0x40000000-0x47FFFFFF (128MB) 106 SRAM: 0x80000000-0x8000FFFF (64KB) 107 IP: 0xE0000000-0xFFFFFFFF (512MB) 108 1093. COMPILATION 110============== 1113.1 To create U-Boot the gcc-4.x compiler set (ColdFire ELF version) 112from codesourcery.com was used. Download it from: 113http://www.codesourcery.com/gnu_toolchains/coldfire/download.html 114 1153.2 Compilation 116 export CROSS_COMPILE=cross-compile-prefix 117 cd u-boot 118 make distclean 119 make M54418TWR_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 50Mhz input clock 120 make M54418TWR_nand_mii_config, or - default to nand flash boot, mii mode, 25Mhz input clock 121 make M54418TWR_nand_rmii_config, or - default to nand flash boot, rmii mode, 50Mhz input clock 122 make M54418TWR_nand_rmii_lowfreq_config, or - default to nand flash boot, rmii mode, 50Mhz input clock 123 make M54418TWR_serial_mii_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 25Mhz input clock 124 make M54418TWR_serial_rmii_config, or - default to spi serial flash boot, 50Mhz input clock 125 make 126 1274. SCREEN DUMP 128============== 1294.1 M54418TWR Development board 130 Boot from NAND flash (NOTE: May not show exactly the same) 131 132U-Boot 2012.10-00209-g12ae1d8-dirty (Oct 18 2012 - 15:54:54) 133 134CPU: Freescale MCF54418 (Mask:a3 Version:1) 135 CPU CLK 250 MHz BUS CLK 125 MHz FLB CLK 125 MHz 136 INP CLK 50 MHz VCO CLK 500 MHz 137Board: Freescale MCF54418 Tower System 138SPI: ready 139DRAM: 128 MiB 140NAND: 256 MiB 141In: serial 142Out: serial 143Err: serial 144Net: FEC0, FEC1 145-> pri 146baudrate=115200 147bootargs=root=/dev/mtdblock2 rw rootfstype=jffs2 mtdparts=NAND:1M(u-boot)ro,7M(k 148ernel)ro,-(jffs2) console=ttyS0,115200 149bootdelay=2 150eth1addr=00:e0:0c:bc:e5:61 151ethact=FEC0 152ethaddr=00:e0:0c:bc:e5:60 153fileaddr=40010000 154filesize=27354 155gatewayip=192.168.1.1 156hostname=M54418TWR 157inpclk=50000000 158ipaddr=192.168.1.2 159load=tftp ${loadaddr} ${u-boot}; 160loadaddr=0x40010000 161mem=129024k 162netdev=eth0 163netmask=255.255.255.0 164prog=nand device 0;nand erase 0 40000;nb_update ${loadaddr} ${filesize};save 165serverip=192.168.1.1 166stderr=serial 167stdin=serial 168stdout=serial 169u-boot=u-boot.bin 170upd=run load; run prog 171 172Environment size: 653/131068 bytes 173-> bdinfo 174memstart = 0x40000000 175memsize = 0x08000000 176flashstart = 0x00000000 177flashsize = 0x00000000 178flashoffset = 0x00000000 179sramstart = 0x80000000 180sramsize = 0x00010000 181mbar = 0xFC000000 182cpufreq = 250 MHz 183busfreq = 125 MHz 184flbfreq = 125 MHz 185inpfreq = 50 MHz 186vcofreq = 500 MHz 187ethaddr = 00:e0:0c:bc:e5:60 188eth1addr = 00:e0:0c:bc:e5:61 189ip_addr = 192.168.1.2 190baudrate = 115200 bps 191-> help 192? - alias for 'help' 193base - print or set address offset 194bdinfo - print Board Info structure 195boot - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' 196bootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' 197bootelf - Boot from an ELF image in memory 198bootm - boot application image from memory 199bootp - boot image via network using BOOTP/TFTP protocol 200bootvx - Boot vxWorks from an ELF image 201cmp - memory compare 202coninfo - print console devices and information 203cp - memory copy 204crc32 - checksum calculation 205dcache - enable or disable data cache 206dhcp - boot image via network using DHCP/TFTP protocol 207echo - echo args to console 208editenv - edit environment variable 209env - environment handling commands 210exit - exit script 211false - do nothing, unsuccessfully 212go - start application at address 'addr' 213help - print command description/usage 214icache - enable or disable instruction cache 215iminfo - print header information for application image 216imxtract- extract a part of a multi-image 217itest - return true/false on integer compare 218loop - infinite loop on address range 219md - memory display 220mdio - MDIO utility commands 221mii - MII utility commands 222mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing address) 223mtest - simple RAM read/write test 224mw - memory write (fill) 225nand - NAND sub-system 226nb_update- Nand boot update program 227nboot - boot from NAND device 228nfs - boot image via network using NFS protocol 229nm - memory modify (constant address) 230ping - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network host 231printenv- print environment variables 232reginfo - print register information 233reset - Perform RESET of the CPU 234run - run commands in an environment variable 235saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage 236setenv - set environment variables 237sf - SPI flash sub-system 238showvar - print local hushshell variables 239sleep - delay execution for some time 240source - run script from memory 241sspi - SPI utility command 242test - minimal test like /bin/sh 243tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol 244true - do nothing, successfully 245version - print monitor, compiler and linker version 246
README.malta
1MIPS Malta board 2 3How to flash using a MIPS Navigator Probe: 4 5 - Ensure that your Malta has jumper JP1 fitted. Without this jumper you will 6 be unable to flash your Malta using a Navigator Probe. 7 8 - Connect Navigator Console to your probe and Malta as usual. 9 10 - Within Navigator Console run the following commands: 11 12 source /path/to/u-boot/board/imgtec/malta/flash-malta-boot.tcl 13 reset 14 flash-boot /path/to/u-boot/u-boot.bin 15 16 - You should now be able to reboot your Malta to a U-Boot shell. 17
README.marvell
1Marvell U-Boot Build Instructions 2================================= 3 4This document describes how to compile the U-Boot and how to change U-Boot configuration 5 6Build Procedure 7---------------- 81. Install required packages: 9 10 # sudo apt-get install libssl-dev 11 # sudo apt-get install device-tree-compiler 12 # sudo apt-get install swig libpython-dev 13 142. Set the cross compiler: 15 16 # sudo apt-get install gcc-aarch64-linux-gnu 17 # export CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- 18 193. Clean-up old residuals: 20 21 # make mrproper 22 234. Configure the U-Boot: 24 25 # make <defconfig_file> 26 27 - For the Armada-70x0/80x0 DB board use "mvebu_db_armada8k_defconfig" 28 - For the Armada-80x0 MacchiatoBin use "make mvebu_mcbin-88f8040_defconfig" 29 - For the Armada-3700 DB board use "make mvebu_db-88f3720_defconfig" 30 - For the Armada-3700 EspressoBin use "make mvebu_espressobin-88f3720_defconfig" 31 325. Configure the device-tree and build the U-Boot image: 33 34 For the Armada-70x0/80x0 DB board compile u-boot and set the required device-tree using: 35 36 # make DEVICE_TREE=<name> 37 38 NOTE: 39 Compilation with "mvebu_db_armada8k_defconfig" requires explicitly exporting DEVICE_TREE 40 for the requested board. 41 By default, u-boot is compiled with armada-8040-db device-tree. 42 Using A80x0 device-tree on A70x0 might break the device. 43 In order to prevent this, the required device-tree MUST be set during compilation. 44 All device-tree files are located in ./arch/arm/dts/ folder. 45 46 For other DB boards (MacchiatoBin, EspressoBin and 3700 DB board) compile u-boot with 47 just default device-tree from defconfig using: 48 49 # make 50 51 NOTE: 52 The u-boot.bin should not be used as a stand-alone image. 53 The ARM Trusted Firmware (ATF) build process uses this image to generate the 54 flash image. See TF-A Build Instructions for Marvell Platforms for more details at: 55 https://trustedfirmware-a.readthedocs.io/en/latest/plat/marvell/armada/build.html 56 57Configuration update 58--------------------- 59 To update the U-Boot configuration, please refer to doc/README.kconfig 60 61 62Permanent ethernet MAC address 63------------------------------- 64 Prior flashing new U-Boot version (as part of ATF image) it is suggested to backup 65 permanent ethernet MAC addresses as they are stored only in U-Boot env storage (SPI or eMMC). 66 Some boards like EspressoBin have MAC addresses printed on sticker. Some boards got assigned 67 only one address other may also more than one. To print current MAC addresses run: 68 69 # echo $ethaddr 70 # echo $eth1addr 71 # echo $eth2addr 72 # echo $eth3addr 73 # ... 74 75 MAC addresses 00:51:82:11:22:00, 00:51:82:11:22:01, 00:51:82:11:22:02, 00:51:82:11:22:03 76 and F0:AD:4E:03:64:7F are default hardcoded values found in Marvell's and Armbian U-Boot 77 forks and therefore *not* unique. Usage of static hardcoded MAC addresses should be avoided. 78 When original address is lost (e.g. erased by Armbian boot scripts for EspressoBin) it is 79 suggested to generate new random one. 80 81 After flashing new U-Boot version it is suggested to reset U-Boot env variables to default 82 and then set correct permanent ethernet MAC addresses. 83 84 # env default -a 85 # setenv ethaddr XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX 86 # setenv eth1addr XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX 87 # setenv eth2addr YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY 88 # setenv eth3addr ZZ:ZZ:ZZ:ZZ:ZZ:ZZ 89 # ... 90 # saveenv 91 92 Where value for ethaddr is required permanent ethernet MAC address and values for ethNaddr 93 are optional per-port MAC addresses. When optional ethNaddr variables are not defined then 94 they are inherited from required ethaddr variable. eth1addr contains MAC address for the 95 wan port, other for particular lan ports. 96 97 Recent Linux kernel versions use correct permanent ethernet MAC address from U-Boot env as 98 U-Boot will inject it into kernel's device-tree. 99
README.mediatek
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2018 MediaTek Inc. 4# Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@kernel.org> 5 6 7This document describes how to compile the U-Boot and how to change U-Boot 8configuration about the MediaTek SoCs. 9 10 11Build Procedure 12=============== 13 -Set the cross compiler: 14 15 # export CROSS_COMPILE=/path/to/toolchain/arm-linux-gnueabi- 16 17 -Clean-up old residuals: 18 19 # make mrproper 20 21 -Configure the U-Boot: 22 23 # make <defconfig_file> 24 # make 25 26 - For the MT7623n bananapi R2 board use "mt7623n_bpir2_defconfig" 27 - For the MT7629 reference board use "mt7629_rfb_defconfig" 28 29 30Boot sequence 31============= 32 -Bootrom -> MTK preloader -> U-Boot 33 34 - MT7623n 35 36 This version of U-Boot doesn't implement SPL. So, MTK preloader binary 37 is needed to boot up: 38 39 https://github.com/BPI-SINOVOIP/BPI-R2-bsp/tree/master/mt-pack/mtk/bpi-r2/bin 40 41 42 -Bootrom -> SPL -> U-Boot 43 44 - MT7629 45 46 47Configuration update 48==================== 49 To update the U-Boot configuration, please refer to doc/README.kconfig 50 51 52MediaTek image header 53===================== 54Currently there are two image headers used for MediaTek chips: 55 56 - BootROM image header. This header is used by the first stage bootloader. It records 57 the desired compatible boot device, integrity information and its load address. 58 59 The on-chip BootROM will firstly verify integrity and compatibility of the bootloader. 60 61 If verification passed, the BootROM will then load the bootloader into on-chip SRAM, 62 and pass control to it. 63 64 Note that this header is actually a combination of three independent headers: 65 Device header, BRLYT header and GFH header. 66 67 Used by U-Boot SPL of MT7629 and preloader of MT7623. 68 69 70 - MediaTek legacy image header. This header was originally used by the legacy image. It 71 basically records the load address, image size and image name. 72 73 After all low level initializations passed, the preloader will locate the LK image and 74 load it into DRAM, and pass control to it. 75 76 Now this header is used by U-Boot of MT7623. 77 78 79To generate these two headers with mkimage: 80 81 # mkimage -T mtk_image -a <load_addr> -n <option_string> -d <input_file> <image_file> 82 83 - mtk_image means using MediaTek's header generation method. 84 85 86 - load_addr is the load address of this image. 87 For first stage bootloader like U-Boot SPL or preloader, it usually points to the 88 on-chip SRAM. 89 90 For second stage bootloader like U-Boot, it usually points to the DRAM. 91 92 93 - option_string contains options to generate the header. 94 95 The option string is using the follow format: 96 key1=value1;key2=value2;... 97 98 The following key names are valid: 99 lk: If lk=1, LK image header is used. Otherwise BootROM image header is used. 100 101 lkname: The name of the LK image header. The maximum length is 32. 102 The default value is "U-Boot". 103 104 media: Desired boot device. The valid values are: 105 nand : Parallel NAND 106 snand: Serial NAND 107 nor : Serial NOR 108 emmc : eMMC 109 sdmmc: SD 110 111 nandinfo: Desired NAND device type, a combination of page size, oob size and 112 optional device capacity. Valid types are: 113 2k+64 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size 114 2k+120 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 120B oob size 115 2k+128 : for Serial NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size 116 4k+256 : for Serial NAND, 4KiB page size + 256B oob size 117 1g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 1Gbit size 118 2g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 2Gbit size 119 4g:2k+64 : for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 64B oob size, total 4Gbit size 120 2g:2k+128: for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size, total 2Gbit size 121 4g:2k+128: for Parallel NAND, 2KiB page size + 128B oob size, total 4Gbit size 122 123 124MT7629 partitions on Serial NOR 125=============================== 126 127 Start End Size Description 128 00000000 - 0000ffff: 64KiB U-Boot SPL 129 00010000 - 0005ffff: 320KiB U-Boot 130 00060000 - 0006ffff: 64KiB U-Boot env / MediaTek NVRAM 131 00070000 - 000affff: 256KiB RF calibration data 132 000b0000 - xxxxxxxx: all left Firmware image 133 134 135BPi-R2 (MT7623N) partitions on SD 136================================= 137 Please note that the last two partitions can vary from different Linux distributions 138 depending on the MBR partition table. 139 140 Start End Size Description 141 00000000 - 000001ff: 512B Device header (with MBR partition table) 142 00000200 - 000007ff: 1536B BRLYT header 143 00000800 - 0004ffff: 318KiB Preloader (with GFH header) 144 00050000 - 000fffff: 704KiB U-Boot 145 00100000 - 063fffff: 99MiB Reserved 146 06400000 - 163fffff: 256MiB Partition 1 (FAT32) 147 16400000 - xxxxxxxx: all left Partition 2 (ext4) 148 149 150Upgrading notice on Serial NOR 151============================== 152Example: MT7629 153 154 The command sf is used to operate the Serial NOR device: 155 156 - To probe current NOR flash: 157 158 # sf probe 159 160 - To erase a region: 161 162 # sf erase <offset> <len> 163 164 - To write data to an offset: 165 166 # sf write <data_addr> <offset> <len> 167 168 - To boot kernel: 169 170 # bootm 0x300b0000 171 172 The memory address range 0x30000000 - 0x3fffffff is mapped to the NOR flash. 173 The DRAM starts at 0x40000000. 174 175 Please note that the output binary u-boot-mtk.bin is a combination of SPL and U-Boot, 176 and it should be write to beginning of the flash. 177 178 Otherwise you should use standalone files: 179 180 spl/u-boot-spl-mtk.bin for SPL, 181 u-boot.img for U-Boot. 182 183 184Upgrading notice on SD / eMMC 185============================= 186Example: MT7623 187 188 Normally only Preloader and U-Boot can be upgraded within U-Boot, and other partitions 189 should be written in PC. 190 191 - To probe current SD card / eMMC: 192 193 # mmc dev 0 for eMMC 194 # mmc dev 1 for SD 195 196 - To erase a region: 197 198 # mmc erase <blk_offset> <blk_num> 199 200 - To write data to a block offset: 201 202 # mmc write <data_addr> <blk_offset> <blk_num> 203 204 - To load kernel image from partition 1: 205 206 # fatload mmc 0:1 <load_address> <path_to_kernel_uImage> for eMMC 207 # fatload mmc 1:1 <load_address> <path_to_kernel_uImage> for SD 208 209 - To boot kernel: 210 211 # bootm <load_address> 212 213 The DRAM starts at 0x80000000. 214 215 Please note that we use block offset and block count for SD card, not the byte offset. 216 The block size is always 512 bytes for SD card. 217 218 219Documentation 220============= 221 http://wiki.banana-pi.org/Banana_Pi_BPI-R2 222
README.memory-test
1The most frequent cause of problems when porting U-Boot to new 2hardware, or when using a sloppy port on some board, is memory errors. 3In most cases these are not caused by failing hardware, but by 4incorrect initialization of the memory controller. So it appears to 5be a good idea to always test if the memory is working correctly, 6before looking for any other potential causes of any problems. 7 8U-Boot implements 3 different approaches to perform memory tests: 9 101. The get_ram_size() function (see "common/memsize.c"). 11 12 This function is supposed to be used in each and every U-Boot port 13 determine the presence and actual size of each of the potential 14 memory banks on this piece of hardware. The code is supposed to be 15 very fast, so running it for each reboot does not hurt. It is a 16 little known and generally underrated fact that this code will also 17 catch 99% of hardware related (i. e. reliably reproducible) memory 18 errors. It is strongly recommended to always use this function, in 19 each and every port of U-Boot. 20 212. The "mtest" command. 22 23 This is probably the best known memory test utility in U-Boot. 24 Unfortunately, it is also the most problematic, and the most 25 useless one. 26 27 There are a number of serious problems with this command: 28 29 - It is terribly slow. Running "mtest" on the whole system RAM 30 takes a _long_ time before there is any significance in the fact 31 that no errors have been found so far. 32 33 - It is difficult to configure, and to use. And any errors here 34 will reliably crash or hang your system. "mtest" is dumb and has 35 no knowledge about memory ranges that may be in use for other 36 purposes, like exception code, U-Boot code and data, stack, 37 malloc arena, video buffer, log buffer, etc. If you let it, it 38 will happily "test" all such areas, which of course will cause 39 some problems. 40 41 - It is not easy to configure and use, and a large number of 42 systems are seriously misconfigured. The original idea was to 43 test basically the whole system RAM, with only exempting the 44 areas used by U-Boot itself - on most systems these are the areas 45 used for the exception vectors (usually at the very lower end of 46 system memory) and for U-Boot (code, data, etc. - see above; 47 these are usually at the very upper end of system memory). But 48 experience has shown that a very large number of ports use 49 pretty much bogus settings of CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START and 50 CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END; this results in useless tests (because 51 the ranges is too small and/or badly located) or in critical 52 failures (system crashes). 53 54 Because of these issues, the "mtest" command is considered depre- 55 cated. It should not be enabled in most normal ports of U-Boot, 56 especially not in production. If you really need a memory test, 57 then see 1. and 3. above resp. below. 58 593. The most thorough memory test facility is available as part of the 60 POST (Power-On Self Test) sub-system, see "post/drivers/memory.c". 61 62 If you really need to perform memory tests (for example, because 63 it is mandatory part of your requirement specification), then 64 enable this test which is generic and should work on all archi- 65 tectures. 66 67WARNING: 68 69It should pointed out that _all_ these memory tests have one 70fundamental, unfixable design flaw: they are based on the assumption 71that memory errors can be found by writing to and reading from memory. 72Unfortunately, this is only true for the relatively harmless, usually 73static errors like shorts between data or address lines, unconnected 74pins, etc. All the really nasty errors which will first turn your 75hair gray, only to make you tear it out later, are dynamical errors, 76which usually happen not with simple read or write cycles on the bus, 77but when performing back-to-back data transfers in burst mode. Such 78accesses usually happen only for certain DMA operations, or for heavy 79cache use (instruction fetching, cache flushing). So far I am not 80aware of any freely available code that implements a generic, and 81efficient, memory test like that. The best known test case to stress 82a system like that is to boot Linux with root file system mounted over 83NFS, and then build some larger software package natively (say, 84compile a Linux kernel on the system) - this will cause enough context 85switches, network traffic (and thus DMA transfers from the network 86controller), varying RAM use, etc. to trigger any weak spots in this 87area. 88 89Note: An attempt was made once to implement such a test to catch 90memory problems on a specific board. The code is pretty much board 91specific (for example, it includes setting specific GPIO signals to 92provide triggers for an attached logic analyzer), but you can get an 93idea how it works: see "examples/standalone/test_burst*". 94 95Note 2: Ironically enough, the "test_burst" did not catch any RAM 96errors, not a single one ever. The problems this code was supposed 97to catch did not happen when accessing the RAM, but when reading from 98NOR flash. 99
README.mpc74xx
1This file contains status information for the port of U-Boot to the 2Motorola mpc74xx series of CPUs. 3 4Author: Josh Huber <huber@mclx.com> 5 Mission Critical Linux, Inc. 6 7Currently the support for these CPUs is pretty minimal, but enough to 8get things going. (much like the support for the Galileo Eval Board) 9 10There is a framework in place to enable the L2 cache, and to program 11the BATs. Currently, there are still problems with the code which 12sets up the L2 cache, so it's not enabled. (IMHO, it shouldn't be 13anyway). Additionally, there is support for enabling the MMU, which 14we also don't do. The BATs are programmed just for the benefit of 15jumping into Linux in a sane configuration. 16 17Most of the code was based on other cpus supported by U-Boot. 18 19If you find any errors in the CPU setup code, please send us a note. 20 21Thanks, 22Josh 23
README.mpc83xx.ddrecc
1Overview 2======== 3 4The overall usage pattern for ECC diagnostic commands is the following: 5 6 * (injecting errors is initially disabled) 7 8 * define inject mask (which tells the DDR controller what type of errors 9 we'll be injecting: single/multiple bit etc.) 10 11 * enable injecting errors - from now on the controller injects errors as 12 indicated in the inject mask 13 14IMPORTANT NOTICE: enabling injecting multiple-bit errors is potentially 15dangerous as such errors are NOT corrected by the controller. Therefore caution 16should be taken when enabling the injection of multiple-bit errors: it is only 17safe when used on a carefully selected memory area and used under control of 18the 'ecc testdw' 'ecc testword' command (see example 'Injecting Multiple-Bit 19Errors' below). In particular, when you simply set the multiple-bit errors in 20inject mask and enable injection, U-Boot is very likely to hang quickly as the 21errors will be injected when it accesses its code, data etc. 22 23 24Use cases for DDR 'ecc' command: 25================================ 26 27Before executing particular tests reset target board or clear status registers: 28 29=> ecc captureclear 30=> ecc errdetectclr all 31=> ecc sbecnt 0 32 33 34Injecting Single-Bit Errors 35--------------------------- 36 371. Set 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask 38 39=> ecc injectdatahi 1 40 412. Run test over some memory region 42 43=> ecc testdw 200000 10 44 453. Check ECC status 46 47=> ecc status 48... 49Memory Data Path Error Injection Mask High/Low: 00000001 00000000 50... 51Memory Single-Bit Error Management (0..255): 52 Single-Bit Error Threshold: 255 53 Single Bit Error Counter: 16 54... 55Memory Error Detect: 56 Multiple Memory Errors: 0 57 Multiple-Bit Error: 0 58 Single-Bit Error: 0 59... 60 6116 errors were generated, Single-Bit Error flag was not set as Single Bit Error 62Counter did not reach Single-Bit Error Threshold. 63 644. Make sure used memory region got re-initialized with 0x0123456789abcdef 65 66=> md 200000 6700200000: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 6800200010: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 6900200020: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7000200030: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7100200040: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7200200050: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7300200060: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7400200070: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 7500200080: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................ 7600200090: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................ 77 78Injecting Multiple-Bit Errors 79----------------------------- 80 811. Set more than 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask 82 83=> ecc injectdatahi 1 84=> ecc injectdatalo 1 85 862. Run test over some memory region 87 88=> ecc testword 200000 1 89 903. Check ECC status 91 92=> ecc status 93... 94Memory Data Path Error Injection Mask High/Low: 00000001 00000001 95... 96Memory Error Detect: 97 Multiple Memory Errors: 0 98 Multiple-Bit Error: 1 99 Single-Bit Error: 0 100... 101 102The Multiple Memory Errors flags not set and Multiple-Bit Error flags are set. 103 1044. Make sure used memory region got re-initialized with 0x0123456789abcdef 105 106=> md 200000 10700200000: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 10800200010: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 10900200020: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11000200030: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11100200040: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11200200050: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11300200060: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11400200070: 01234567 89abcdef 01234567 89abcdef .#Eg.....#Eg.... 11500200080: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................ 11600200090: deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef deadbeef ................ 117 118 119Test Single-Bit Error Counter and Threshold 120------------------------------------------- 121 1221. Set 1 bit in Data Path Error Inject Mask 123 124=> ecc injectdatahi 1 125 1262. Enable error injection 127 128=> ecc inject en 129 1303. Let u-boot run for a with Single-Bit error injection enabled 131 1324. Disable error injection 133 134=> ecc inject dis 135 1364. Check status 137 138=> ecc status 139 140... 141Memory Single-Bit Error Management (0..255): 142 Single-Bit Error Threshold: 255 143 Single Bit Error Counter: 199 144 145Memory Error Detect: 146 Multiple Memory Errors: 1 147 Multiple-Bit Error: 0 148 Single-Bit Error: 1 149... 150 151Observe that Single-Bit Error is 'on' which means that Single-Bit Error Counter 152reached Single-Bit Error Threshold. Multiple Memory Errors bit is also 'on', that 153is Counter reached Threshold more than one time (it wraps back after reaching 154Threshold). 155
README.mpc83xxads
1Freescale MPC83xx ADS Boards 2----------------------------------------- 3 40. Toolchain / Building 5 6 $ PATH=$PATH:/usr/powerpc/bin 7 $ CROSS_COMPILE=powerpc-linux- 8 $ export PATH CROSS_COMPILE 9 10 $ powerpc-linux-gcc -v 11 Reading specs from /usr/powerpc/lib/gcc/powerpc-linux/3.4.3/specs 12 Configured with: ../configure --prefix=/usr/powerpc 13 --exec-prefix=/usr/powerpc --target=powerpc-linux --enable-shared 14 --disable-nls --disable-multilib --enable-languages=c,c++,ada,f77,objc 15 Thread model: posix 16 gcc version 3.4.3 (Debian) 17 18 $ powerpc-linux-as -v 19 GNU assembler version 2.15 (powerpc-linux) using BFD version 2.15 20 21 22 $ make MPC8349ADS_config 23 Configuring for MPC8349ADS board... 24 25 $ make 26 27 281. Board Switches and Jumpers 29 30 312. Memory Map 32 332.1. The memory map should look pretty much like this: 34 35 0x0000_0000 0x7fff_ffff DDR 2G 36 0x8000_0000 0x9fff_ffff PCI MEM 512M 37 0xc000_0000 0xdfff_ffff Rapid IO 512M 38 0xe000_0000 0xe00f_ffff CCSR 1M 39 0xe200_0000 0xe2ff_ffff PCI IO 16M 40 0xf000_0000 0xf7ff_ffff SDRAM 128M 41 0xf800_0000 0xf80f_ffff BCSR 1M 42 0xfe00_0000 0xffff_ffff FLASH (boot bank) 16M 43 44 453. Definitions 46 473.1 Explanation of NEW definitions in: 48 49 include/configs/MPC8349ADS.h 50 51 CONFIG_MPC83xx MPC83xx family 52 CONFIG_MPC8349 MPC8349 specific 53 CONFIG_TSEC_ENET Use on-chip 10/100/1000 ethernet 54 55 564. Compilation 57 58 Assuming you're using BASH shell: 59 60 export CROSS_COMPILE=your-cross-compile-prefix 61 cd u-boot 62 make distclean 63 make MPC8349ADS_config 64 make 65 665. Downloading and Flashing Images 67 685.0 Download over serial line using Kermit: 69 70 loadb 71 [Drop to kermit: 72 ^\c 73 send <u-boot-bin-image> 74 c 75 ] 76 77 78 Or via tftp: 79 80 tftp 10000 u-boot.bin 81 825.1 Reflash U-Boot Image using U-Boot 83 84 tftp 10000 u-boot.bin 85 protect off fe000000 fe09ffff 86 erase fe000000 fe09ffff 87 88 cp.b 10000 fe000000 xxxx 89or 90 cp.b 10000 fe000000 a0000 91 92You might have to supply the correct byte count for 'xxxx' from 93the TFTP. Maybe a0000 will work too, that corresponds to the 94erased sectors. 95 96 976. Notes 98
README.mpc85xx
1External Debug Support 2---------------------- 3 4Freescale's e500v1 and e500v2 cores (used in mpc85xx chips) have some 5restrictions on external debugging (JTAG). In particular, for the debugger to 6be able to receive control after a single step or breakpoint: 7 - MSR[DE] must be set 8 - A valid opcode must be fetchable, through the MMU, from the debug 9 exception vector (IVPR + IVOR15). 10 11To maximize the time during which this requirement is met, U-Boot sets MSR[DE] 12immediately on entry and keeps it set. It also uses a temporary TLB to keep a 13mapping to a valid opcode at the debug exception vector, even if we normally 14don't support exception vectors being used that early, and that's not the area 15where U-Boot currently executes from. 16 17Note that there may still be some small windows where debugging will not work, 18such as in between updating IVPR and IVOR15. 19 20Config Switches: 21---------------- 22 23Please refer README section "MPC85xx External Debug Support" 24 25Major Config Switches during various boot Modes 26---------------------------------------------- 27 28NOR boot 29 !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && !defined(CONFIG_SPL) 30NOR boot Secure 31 !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC) 32RAMBOOT(SD, SPI & NAND boot) 33 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) 34RAMBOOT Secure (SD, SPI & NAND) 35 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC) 36NAND SPL BOOT 37 defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) && defined(CONFIG_NAND_SPL) 38 39 40TLB Entries during u-boot execution 41----------------------------------- 42 43Note: Sequence number is in order of execution 44 45A) defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) i.e. SD, SPI, NAND RAMBOOT & NAND_SPL boot 46 47 1) TLB entry to overcome e500 v1/v2 debug restriction 48 Location : Label "_start_e500" 49 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB 50 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE 51 Properties : 256K, AS0, I, IPROT 52 53 2) TLB entry for working in AS1 54 Location : Label "create_init_ram_area" 55 TLB Entry : 15 56 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE 57 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT 58 59 3) TLB entry for the stack during AS1 60 Location : Lable "create_init_ram_area" 61 TLB Entry : 14 62 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR --> CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR 63 Properties : 16K, AS1, IPROT 64 65 4) TLB entry for CCSRBAR during AS1 execution 66 Location : cpu_init_early_f 67 TLB Entry : 13 68 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR --> CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR 69 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G 70 71 5) Invalidate unproctected TLB Entries 72 Location : cpu_init_early_f 73 Invalidated: 13 74 75 6) Create TLB entries as per boards/freescale/<board>/tlb.c 76 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> init_tlbs() 77 Properties : ..., AS0, ... 78 Please note It can overwrites previous TLB Entries. 79 80 7) Disable TLB Entries of AS1 81 Location : cpu_init_f --> disable_tlb() 82 Disable : 15, 14 83 84 8) Update Flash's TLB entry 85 Location : Board_init_r 86 TLB entry : Search from TLB entries 87 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE_PHYS 88 Properties : Board specific size, AS0, I, G, IPROT 89 90 91B) !defined(CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT) i.e. NOR boot 92 93 1) TLB entry to overcome e500 v1/v2 debug restriction 94 Location : Label "_start_e500" 95 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB 96#if defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC) 97 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_PBI_FLASH_WINDOW 98 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT 99#else 100 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE & 0xffc00000 --> 0xffc00000 101 Properties : 4M, AS0, I, G, IPROT 102#endif 103 104 2) TLB entry for working in AS1 105 Location : Label "create_init_ram_area" 106 TLB Entry : 15 107#if defined(CONFIG_NXP_ESBC) 108 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_PBI_FLASH_WINDOW 109 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G, IPROT 110#else 111 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE & 0xffc00000 --> 0xffc00000 112 Properties : 4M, AS1, I, G, IPROT 113#endif 114 115 3) TLB entry for the stack during AS1 116 Location : Lable "create_init_ram_area" 117 TLB Entry : 14 118 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR --> CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR 119 Properties : 16K, AS1, IPROT 120 121 4) TLB entry for CCSRBAR during AS1 execution 122 Location : cpu_init_early_f 123 TLB Entry : 13 124 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR --> CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR 125 Properties : 1M, AS1, I, G 126 127 5) TLB entry for Errata workaround CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399 128 Location : cpu_init_early_f 129 TLB Entry : 9 130 EPN -->RPN : SRAM_BASE_ADDR --> SRAM_BASE_ADDR 131 Properties : 1M, AS1, I 132 133 6) CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399 Adjust flash's phys addr 134 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> setup_ifc 135 TLB Entry : Get Flash TLB 136 EPN -->RPN : Adjusted flash_phys --> Adjusted flash_phys 137 Properties : 4M, AS1, I, G, IPROT 138 139 7) CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_IFC_A003399: E500 v1,v2 debug restriction 140 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> setup_ifc 141 TLB Entry : CONFIG_SYS_PPC_E500_DEBUG_TLB 142 EPN -->RPN : Adjusted flash_phys --> Adjusted flash_phys 143 Properties : 4M, AS0, I, G, IPROT 144 145 8) Invalidate unproctected TLB Entries 146 Location : cpu_init_early_f 147 Invalidated: 13, 9 148 149 9) Create TLB entries as per boards/freescale/<board>/tlb.c 150 Location : cpu_init_early_f --> init_tlbs() 151 Properties : ..., AS0, ... 152 Note: It can overwrites previous TLB Entries 153 154 10) Disable TLB Entries of AS1 155 Location : cpu_init_f --> disable_tlb() 156 Disable : 15, 14 157 158 11) Create DDR's TLB entriy 159 Location : Board_init_f -> dram_init 160 TLB entry : Search free TLB entry 161 162 12) Update Flash's TLB entry 163 Location : Board_init_r 164 TLB entry : Search from TLB entries 165 EPN -->RPN : CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE --> CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE_PHYS 166 Properties : Board specific size, AS0, I, G, IPROT 167
README.mpc85xx-sd-spi-boot
1---------------------------------------- 2Booting from On-Chip ROM (eSDHC or eSPI) 3---------------------------------------- 4 5boot_format is a tool to write SD bootable images to a filesystem and build 6SD/SPI images to a binary file for writing later. 7 8When booting from an SD card/MMC, boot_format puts the configuration file and 9the RAM-based U-Boot image on the card. 10When booting from an EEPROM, boot_format generates a binary image that is used 11to boot from this EEPROM. 12 13Where to get boot_format: 14======================== 15 16you can browse it online at: 17http://git.freescale.com/git/cgit.cgi/ppc/sdk/boot-format.git/ 18 19Building 20======== 21 22Run the following to build this project 23 24 $ make 25 26Execution 27========= 28 29boot_format runs under a regular Linux machine and requires a super user mode 30to run. Execute boot_format as follows. 31 32For building SD images by writing directly to a file system on SD media: 33 34 $ boot_format $config u-boot.bin -sd $device 35 36Where $config is the included config.dat file for your platform and $device 37is the target block device for the SD media on your computer. 38 39For build binary images directly a local file: 40 41 $ boot_format $config u-boot.bin -spi $file 42 43Where $file is the target file. Also keep in mind the u-boot.bin file needs 44to be the u-boot built for your particular platform and target media. 45 46Example: To generate a u-boot.bin for a P1022DS booting from SD, run the 47following in the u-boot repository: 48 49 $ make P1022DS_SDCARD 50 51Configuration Files 52=================== 53 54Below are the configuration files to be used with a particular platform. Keep 55in mind that some of these config files are tied to the platforms DDR speed. 56Please see the SoC reference manual for more documentation. 57 58P1022DS config_sram_p1022ds.dat 59P2020DS config_sram_p2020ds.dat 60P1020RDB config_ddr2_1g_p1020rdb_533M.dat 61P1020RDB config_ddr2_1g_p1020rdb_667M.dat 62P2020RDB config_ddr2_1g_p2020rdb_800M.dat 63P2020RDB config_ddr2_1g_p2020rdb_667M.dat 64P2020RDB config_ddr3_1gb_64bit_p2020rdb_pc.dat 65P1020RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_800M.dat 66P1011RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_800M.dat 67P1010RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1010rdb_800M.dat 68P1021RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_800M.dat 69P1022DS config_ddr3_2gb_p1022ds.dat 70P1024RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_667M.dat 71P1025RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_667M.dat 72P1016RDB config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_667M.dat 73P1020UTM config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_800M.dat 74P1020MBG config_ddr3_1gb_p1_p2_rdb_pc_800M.dat 75MPC8536DS config_ddr2_512m_mpc8536ds_667M.dat 76
README.mpc85xx-spin-table
1Spin table in cache 2===================================== 3As specified by ePAPR v1.1, the spin table needs to be in cached memory. After 4DDR is initialized and U-Boot relocates itself into DDR, the spin table is 5accessible for core 0. It is part of release.S, within 4KB range after 6__secondary_start_page. For other cores to use the spin table, the booting 7process is described below: 8 9Core 0 sets up the reset page on the top 4K of memory (or 4GB if total memory 10is more than 4GB), and creates a TLB to map it to 0xffff_f000, regardless of 11the physical address of this page, with WIMGE=0b01010. Core 0 also enables boot 12page translation for secondary cores to use this page of memory. Then 4KB 13memory is copied from __secondary_start_page to the boot page, after flusing 14cache because this page is mapped as normal DDR. Before copying the reset page, 15core 0 puts the physical address of the spin table (which is in release.S and 16relocated to the top of mapped memory) into a variable __spin_table_addr so 17that secondary cores can see it. 18 19When secondary cores boot up from 0xffff_f000 page, they only have one default 20TLB. While booting, they set up another TLB in AS=1 space and jump into 21the new space. The new TLB covers the physical address of the spin table page, 22with WIMGE =0b00100. Now secondary cores can keep polling the spin table 23without stress DDR bus because both the code and the spin table is in cache. 24 25For the above to work, DDR has to set the 'M' bit of WIMGE, in order to keep 26cache coherence. 27
README.mpc85xxcds
1Motorola MPC85xxCDS boards 2-------------------------- 3 4The CDS family of boards consists of a PCI backplane called the 5"Arcadia", a PCI-form-factor carrier card that plugs into a PCI slot, 6and a CPU daughter card that bolts onto the daughter card. 7 8Much of the content of the README.mpc85xxads for the 85xx ADS boards 9applies to the 85xx CDS boards as well. In particular the toolchain, 10the switch nomenclature, and the basis for the memory map. There are 11some differences, though. 12 13 14Building U-Boot 15--------------- 16 17The Binutils in current ELDK toolchain will not support MPC85xx 18chip. You need to use binutils-2.14.tar.bz2 (or newer) from 19 http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/binutils. 20 21The 85xx CDS code base is known to compile using: 22 gcc (GCC) 3.2.2 20030217 (Yellow Dog Linux 3.0 3.2.2-2a) 23 24 25Memory Map 26---------- 27 28The memory map for U-Boot and linux has been extended w.r.t. the ADS 29platform to allow for utilization of all 85xx CDS devices. The memory 30map is setup for linux to operate properly. The linux source when 31configured for MPC85xx CDS has been updated to reflect the new memory 32map. 33 34The mapping is: 35 36 0x0000_0000 0x7fff_ffff DDR 2G 37 0x8000_0000 0x9fff_ffff PCI1 MEM 512M 38 0xa000_0000 0xbfff_ffff PCI2 MEM 512M 39 0xe000_0000 0xe00f_ffff CCSR 1M 40 0xe200_0000 0xe2ff_ffff PCI1 IO 16M 41 0xe300_0000 0xe3ff_ffff PCI2 IO 16M 42 0xf000_0000 0xf7ff_ffff SDRAM 128M 43 0xf800_0000 0xf80f_ffff NVRAM/CADMUS (*) 1M 44 0xff00_0000 0xff7f_ffff FLASH (2nd bank) 8M 45 0xff80_0000 0xffff_ffff FLASH (boot bank) 8M 46 47 (*) The system control registers (CADMUS) start at offset 0xfdb0_4000 48 within the NVRAM/CADMUS region of memory. 49 50 51Using Flash 52----------- 53 54The CDS board has two flash banks, each 8MB in size (2^23 = 0x00800000). 55There is a switch which allows the boot-bank to be selected. The switch 56settings for updating flash are given below. 57 58The U-Boot commands for copying the boot-bank into the secondary bank are 59as follows: 60 61 erase ff780000 ff7fffff 62 cp.b fff80000 ff780000 80000 63 64 65U-Boot/kermit commands for downloading an image, then copying 66it into the secondary bank: 67 68 loadb 69 [Drop to kermit: 70 ^\c 71 send <u-boot-bin-image> 72 c 73 ] 74 75 erase ff780000 ff7fffff 76 cp.b $loadaddr ff780000 80000 77 78 79U-Boot commands for downloading an image via tftp and flashing 80it into the second bank: 81 82 tftp 10000 <u-boot.bin.image> 83 erase ff780000 ff7fffff 84 cp.b 10000 ff780000 80000 85 86 87After copying the image into the second bank of flash, be sure to toggle 88SW2[2] on the carrier card before resetting the board in order to set the 89secondary bank as the boot-bank. 90 91 92Carrier Board Switches 93---------------------- 94 95As a reminder, you should read the README.mpc85xxads too. 96 97Most switches on the carrier board should not be changed. The only 98user-settable switches on the carrier board are used to configure 99the flash banks and determining the PCI slot. 100 101The first two bits of SW2 control how flash is used on the board: 102 103 12345678 104 -------- 105 SW2=00XXXXXX FLASH: Boot bank 1, bank 2 available. 106 01XXXXXX FLASH: Boot bank 2, bank 1 available (swapped). 107 10XXXXXX FLASH: Boot promjet, bank 1 available 108 11XXXXXX FLASH: Boot promjet, bank 2 available 109 110The boot bank is always mapped to FF80_0000 and listed first by 111the "flinfo" command. The secondary bank is always FF00_0000. 112 113When using PCI, linux needs to know to which slot the CDS carrier is 114connected.. By convention, the user-specific bits of SW2 are used to 115convey this information: 116 117 12345678 118 -------- 119 SW2=xxxxxx00 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot0 of the Arcadia 120 xxxxxx01 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot1 of the Arcadia 121 xxxxxx10 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot2 of the Arcadia 122 xxxxxx11 PCI SLOT INFORM: The CDS carrier is in slot3 of the Arcadia 123 124These are cleverly, er, clearly silkscreened as Slot 1 through 4, 125respectively, on the Arcadia near the support posts. 126 127 128The default setting of all switches on the carrier board is: 129 130 12345678 131 -------- 132 SW1=01101100 133 SW2=0x1111yy x=Flash bank, yy=PCI slot 134 SW3=11101111 135 SW4=10001000 136 137 1388555/41 CPU Card Switches 139------------------------- 140 141Most switches on the CPU Card should not be changed. However, the 142frequency can be changed by setting SW3: 143 144 12345678 145 -------- 146 SW3=XX00XXXX == CORE:CCB 2:1 147 XX01XXXX == CORE:CCB 5:2 148 XX10XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:1 149 XX11XXXX == CORE:CCB 7:2 150 XXXX1000 == CCB:SYSCLK 8:1 151 XXXX1010 == CCB:SYSCLK 10:1 152 153A safe default setting for all switches on the CPU board is: 154 155 12345678 156 -------- 157 SW1=10001111 158 SW2=01000111 159 SW3=00001000 160 SW4=11111110 161 162 1638548 CPU Card Switches 164---------------------- 165And, just to be confusing, in this set of switches: 166 167 ON = 1 168 OFF = 0 169 170Default 171 SW1=11111101 172 SW2=10011111 173 SW3=11001000 (8X) (2:1) 174 SW4=11110011 175 176 SW3=X000XXXX == CORE:CCB 4:1 177 X001XXXX == CORE:CCB 9:2 178 X010XXXX == CORE:CCB 1:1 179 X011XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:2 180 X100XXXX == CORE:CCB 2:1 181 X101XXXX == CORE:CCB 5:2 182 X110XXXX == CORE:CCB 3:1 183 X111XXXX == CORE:CCB 7:2 184 XXXX0000 == CCB:SYSCLK 16:1 185 XXXX0001 == RESERVED 186 XXXX0010 == CCB:SYSCLK 2:1 187 XXXX0011 == CCB:SYSCLK 3:1 188 XXXX0100 == CCB:SYSCLK 4:1 189 XXXX0101 == CCB:SYSCLK 5:1 190 XXXX0110 == CCB:SYSCLK 6:1 191 XXXX0111 == RESERVED 192 XXXX1000 == CCB:SYSCLK 8:1 193 XXXX1001 == CCB:SYSCLK 9:1 194 XXXX1010 == CCB:SYSCLK 10:1 195 XXXX1011 == RESERVED 196 XXXX1100 == CCB:SYSCLK 12:1 197 XXXX1101 == CCB:SYSCLK 20:1 198 XXXX1110 == RESERVED 199 XXXX1111 == RESERVED 200 201 202eDINK Info 203---------- 204 205One bank of flash may contain an eDINK image. 206 207Memory Map: 208 209 CCSRBAR @ 0xe0000000 210 Flash Bank 1 @ 0xfe000000 211 Flash Bank 2 @ 0xff000000 212 Ram @ 0 213 214Commands for downloading a U-Boot image to memory from edink: 215 216 env -c 217 time -s 4/8/2004 4:30p 218 dl -k -b -o 100000 219 [Drop to kermit: 220 ^\c 221 transmit /binary <u-boot-bin-image> 222 c 223 ] 224 225 fu -l 100000 fe780000 80000 226
README.multi-dtb-fit
1MULTI DTB FIT and SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT 2 3The purpose of this feature is to enable U-Boot or the SPL to select its DTB 4from a FIT appended at the end of the binary. 5It comes in two flavors: U-Boot (CONFIG_MULTI_DTB_FIT) and SPL 6(CONFIG_SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT). 7 8U-Boot flavor: 9Usually the DTB is selected by the SPL and passed down to U-Boot. But some 10platforms don't use the SPL. In this case MULTI_DTB_FIT can used to provide 11U-Boot with a choice of DTBs. 12The relevant DTBs are packed into a FIT (list provided by CONFIG_OF_LIST). The 13FIT is automatically generated at the end of the compilation and appended to 14u-boot.bin so that U-Boot can locate it and select the correct DTB from inside 15the FIT. 16The selection is done using board_fit_config_name_match() (same as what the SPL 17uses to select the DTB for U-Boot). The selection happens during fdtdec_setup() 18which is called during before relocation by board_init_f(). 19 20SPL flavor: 21the SPL uses only a small subset of the DTB and it usually depends more 22on the SOC than on the board. So it's usually fine to include a DTB in the 23SPL that doesn't exactly match the board. There are howerver some cases 24where it's not possible. In the later case, in order to support multiple 25boards (or board revisions) with the same SPL binary, SPL_MULTI_DTB_FIT 26can be used. 27The relevant DTBs are packed into a FIT. This FIT is automatically generated 28at the end of the compilation, compressed and appended to u-boot-spl.bin, so 29that SPL can locate it and select the correct DTB from inside the FIT. 30CONFIG_SPL_OF_LIST is used to list the relevant DTBs. 31The compression stage is optional but reduces the impact on the size of the 32SPL. LZO and GZIP compressions are supported. By default, the area where the 33FIT is uncompressed is dynamicaly allocated but this behaviour can be changed 34for platforms that don't provide a HEAP big enough to contain the uncompressed 35FIT. 36The SPL uses board_fit_config_name_match() to find the correct DTB within the 37FIT (same as what the SPL uses to select the DTB for U-Boot). 38Uncompression and selection stages happen in fdtdec_setup() which is called 39during the early initialization stage of the SPL (spl_early_init() or 40spl_init()) 41 42Impacts and performances (SPL flavor): 43The impact of this option is relatively small. Here are some numbers measured 44for a TI DRA72 platform: 45 46 +----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 47 | size | size delta | SPL boot | boot time | 48 | (bytes) | (bytes) | time (s) | delta (s) | 49+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 50| 1 DTB | | | | | 51+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 52| reference | 125305 | 0 | 1.389 | 0 | 53| LZO (dynamic allocation) | 125391 | 86 | 1.381 | -0.008 | 54+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 55| 4 DTBs (DRA7, DRA71, | | | | | 56| DRA72, DRA72 revC) | | | | | 57+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 58| LZO (dynamic allocation) | 125991 | 686 | 1.39 | 0.001 | 59| LZO (user defined area) | 125927 | 622 | 1.403 | 0.014 | 60| GZIP (user defined area) | 133880 | 8575 | 1.421 | 0.032 | 61| No compression (in place) | 137472 | 12167 | 1.412 | 0.023 | 62+---------------------------+----------+------------+-----------+------------+ 63 64Note: SPL boot time is the time elapsed between the 'reset' command is entered 65and the time when the first U-Boot (not SPL) version string is displayed. 66
README.mxc_ocotp
1Driver implementing the fuse API for Freescale's On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) 2on MXC 3 4This IP can be found on the following SoCs: 5 - Vybrid VF610, 6 - i.MX6. 7 8Note that this IP is different from albeit similar to the IPs of the same name 9that can be found on the following SoCs: 10 - i.MX23, 11 - i.MX28, 12 - i.MX50. 13 14The section numbers in this file refer to the i.MX6 Reference Manual. 15 16A fuse word contains 32 fuse bit slots, as explained in 46.2.1. 17 18A bank contains 8 fuse word slots, as explained in 46.2.1 and shown by the 19memory map in 46.4. 20 21Some fuse bit or word slots may not have the corresponding fuses actually 22implemented in the fusebox. 23 24See the README files of the SoCs using this driver in order to know the 25conventions used by U-Boot to store some specific data in the fuses, e.g. MAC 26addresses. 27 28Fuse operations: 29 30 Read 31 Read operations are implemented as read accesses to the shadow registers, 32 using "Bankx Wordy" from the memory map in 46.4. This is explained in 33 detail by the first two paragraphs in 46.2.1.2. 34 35 Sense 36 Sense operations are implemented as the direct fusebox read explained by 37 the steps in 46.2.1.2. 38 39 Program 40 Program operations are implemented as explained by the steps in 46.2.1.3. 41 Following this operation, the shadow registers are not reloaded by the 42 hardware. 43 44 Override 45 Override operations are implemented as write accesses to the shadow 46 registers, as explained by the first paragraph in 46.2.1.3. 47 48Configuration: 49 50 CONFIG_MXC_OCOTP 51 Define this to enable the mxc_ocotp driver. 52
README.nand
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2NAND FLASH commands and notes 3 4See NOTE below!!! 5 6# (C) Copyright 2003 7# Dave Ellis, SIXNET, dge@sixnetio.com 8# 9 10Commands: 11 12 nand bad 13 Print a list of all of the bad blocks in the current device. 14 15 nand device 16 Print information about the current NAND device. 17 18 nand device num 19 Make device `num' the current device and print information about it. 20 21 nand erase off|partition size 22 nand erase clean [off|partition size] 23 Erase `size' bytes starting at offset `off'. Alternatively partition 24 name can be specified, in this case size will be eventually limited 25 to not exceed partition size (this behaviour applies also to read 26 and write commands). Only complete erase blocks can be erased. 27 28 If `erase' is specified without an offset or size, the entire flash 29 is erased. If `erase' is specified with partition but without an 30 size, the entire partition is erased. 31 32 If `clean' is specified, a JFFS2-style clean marker is written to 33 each block after it is erased. 34 35 This command will not erase blocks that are marked bad. There is 36 a debug option in cmd_nand.c to allow bad blocks to be erased. 37 Please read the warning there before using it, as blocks marked 38 bad by the manufacturer must _NEVER_ be erased. 39 40 nand info 41 Print information about all of the NAND devices found. 42 43 nand read addr ofs|partition size 44 Read `size' bytes from `ofs' in NAND flash to `addr'. Blocks that 45 are marked bad are skipped. If a page cannot be read because an 46 uncorrectable data error is found, the command stops with an error. 47 48 nand read.oob addr ofs|partition size 49 Read `size' bytes from the out-of-band data area corresponding to 50 `ofs' in NAND flash to `addr'. This is limited to the 16 bytes of 51 data for one 512-byte page or 2 256-byte pages. There is no check 52 for bad blocks or ECC errors. 53 54 nand write addr ofs|partition size 55 Write `size' bytes from `addr' to `ofs' in NAND flash. Blocks that 56 are marked bad are skipped. If a page cannot be read because an 57 uncorrectable data error is found, the command stops with an error. 58 59 As JFFS2 skips blocks similarly, this allows writing a JFFS2 image, 60 as long as the image is short enough to fit even after skipping the 61 bad blocks. Compact images, such as those produced by mkfs.jffs2 62 should work well, but loading an image copied from another flash is 63 going to be trouble if there are any bad blocks. 64 65 nand write.trimffs addr ofs|partition size 66 Enabled by the CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TRIMFFS macro. This command will write to 67 the NAND flash in a manner identical to the 'nand write' command 68 described above -- with the additional check that all pages at the end 69 of eraseblocks which contain only 0xff data will not be written to the 70 NAND flash. This behaviour is required when flashing UBI images 71 containing UBIFS volumes as per the UBI FAQ[1]. 72 73 [1] http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/doc/ubi.html#L_flasher_algo 74 75 nand write.oob addr ofs|partition size 76 Write `size' bytes from `addr' to the out-of-band data area 77 corresponding to `ofs' in NAND flash. This is limited to the 16 bytes 78 of data for one 512-byte page or 2 256-byte pages. There is no check 79 for bad blocks. 80 81 nand read.raw addr ofs|partition [count] 82 nand write.raw addr ofs|partition [count] 83 Read or write one or more pages at "ofs" in NAND flash, from or to 84 "addr" in memory. This is a raw access, so ECC is avoided and the 85 OOB area is transferred as well. If count is absent, it is assumed 86 to be one page. As with .yaffs2 accesses, the data is formatted as 87 a packed sequence of "data, oob, data, oob, ..." -- no alignment of 88 individual pages is maintained. 89 90Configuration Options: 91 92 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS 93 NAND Offset from where SPL will read u-boot image. This is the starting 94 address of u-boot MTD partition in NAND. 95 96 CONFIG_CMD_NAND 97 Enables NAND support and commands. 98 99 CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TORTURE 100 Enables the torture command (see description of this command below). 101 102 CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_DEVICE 103 The maximum number of NAND devices you want to support. 104 105 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_ECCPOS 106 If specified, overrides the maximum number of ECC bytes 107 supported. Useful for reducing image size, especially with SPL. 108 This must be at least 48 if nand_base.c is used. 109 110 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_OOBFREE 111 If specified, overrides the maximum number of free OOB regions 112 supported. Useful for reducing image size, especially with SPL. 113 This must be at least 2 if nand_base.c is used. 114 115 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_MAX_CHIPS 116 The maximum number of NAND chips per device to be supported. 117 118 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SELF_INIT 119 Traditionally, glue code in drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand.c has driven 120 the initialization process -- it provides the mtd and nand 121 structs, calls a board init function for a specific device, 122 calls nand_scan(), and registers with mtd. 123 124 This arrangement does not provide drivers with the flexibility to 125 run code between nand_scan_ident() and nand_scan_tail(), or other 126 deviations from the "normal" flow. 127 128 If a board defines CONFIG_SYS_NAND_SELF_INIT, drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand.c 129 will make one call to board_nand_init(), with no arguments. That 130 function is responsible for calling a driver init function for 131 each NAND device on the board, that performs all initialization 132 tasks except setting mtd->name, and registering with the rest of 133 U-Boot. Those last tasks are accomplished by calling nand_register() 134 on the new mtd device. 135 136 Example of new init to be added to the end of an existing driver 137 init: 138 139 /* chip is struct nand_chip, and is now provided by the driver. */ 140 mtd = nand_to_mtd(&chip); 141 142 /* 143 * Fill in appropriate values if this driver uses these fields, 144 * or uses the standard read_byte/write_buf/etc. functions from 145 * nand_base.c that use these fields. 146 */ 147 chip.IO_ADDR_R = ...; 148 chip.IO_ADDR_W = ...; 149 150 if (nand_scan_ident(mtd, CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_CHIPS, NULL)) 151 error out 152 153 /* 154 * Insert here any code you wish to run after the chip has been 155 * identified, but before any other I/O is done. 156 */ 157 158 if (nand_scan_tail(mtd)) 159 error out 160 161 /* 162 * devnum is the device number to be used in nand commands 163 * and in mtd->name. Must be less than CONFIG_SYS_MAX_NAND_DEVICE. 164 */ 165 if (nand_register(devnum, mtd)) 166 error out 167 168 In addition to providing more flexibility to the driver, it reduces 169 the difference between a U-Boot driver and its Linux counterpart. 170 nand_init() is now reduced to calling board_nand_init() once, and 171 printing a size summary. This should also make it easier to 172 transition to delayed NAND initialization. 173 174 Please convert your driver even if you don't need the extra 175 flexibility, so that one day we can eliminate the old mechanism. 176 177 178 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ONFI_DETECTION 179 Enables detection of ONFI compliant devices during probe. 180 And fetching device parameters flashed on device, by parsing 181 ONFI parameter page. 182 183Platform specific options 184========================= 185 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC 186 Enables omap_gpmc.c driver for OMAPx and AMxxxx platforms. 187 GPMC controller is used for parallel NAND flash devices, and can 188 do ECC calculation (not ECC error detection) for HAM1, BCH4, BCH8 189 and BCH16 ECC algorithms. 190 191 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ELM 192 Enables omap_elm.c driver for OMAPx and AMxxxx platforms. 193 ELM controller is used for ECC error detection (not ECC calculation) 194 of BCH4, BCH8 and BCH16 ECC algorithms. 195 Some legacy platforms like OMAP3xx do not have in-built ELM h/w engine, 196 thus such SoC platforms need to depend on software library for ECC error 197 detection. However ECC calculation on such plaforms would still be 198 done by GPMC controller. 199 200 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_AM33XX_BCH 201 Enables SPL-NAND driver (am335x_spl_bch.c) which supports ELM based 202 hardware ECC correction. This is useful for platforms which have ELM 203 hardware engine and use NAND boot mode. 204 Some legacy platforms like OMAP3xx do not have in-built ELM h/w engine, 205 so those platforms should use CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE for enabling 206 SPL-NAND driver with software ECC correction support. 207 208 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ECCSCHEME 209 On OMAP platforms, this CONFIG specifies NAND ECC scheme. 210 It can take following values: 211 OMAP_ECC_HAM1_CODE_SW 212 1-bit Hamming code using software lib. 213 (for legacy devices only) 214 OMAP_ECC_HAM1_CODE_HW 215 1-bit Hamming code using GPMC hardware. 216 (for legacy devices only) 217 OMAP_ECC_BCH4_CODE_HW_DETECTION_SW 218 4-bit BCH code (unsupported) 219 OMAP_ECC_BCH4_CODE_HW 220 4-bit BCH code (unsupported) 221 OMAP_ECC_BCH8_CODE_HW_DETECTION_SW 222 8-bit BCH code with 223 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine, 224 - error detection using software library. 225 - requires CONFIG_BCH to enable software BCH library 226 (For legacy device which do not have ELM h/w engine) 227 OMAP_ECC_BCH8_CODE_HW 228 8-bit BCH code with 229 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine, 230 - error detection using ELM hardware engine. 231 OMAP_ECC_BCH16_CODE_HW 232 16-bit BCH code with 233 - ecc calculation using GPMC hardware engine, 234 - error detection using ELM hardware engine. 235 236 How to select ECC scheme on OMAP and AMxx platforms ? 237 ----------------------------------------------------- 238 Though higher ECC schemes have more capability to detect and correct 239 bit-flips, but still selection of ECC scheme is dependent on following 240 - hardware engines present in SoC. 241 Some legacy OMAP SoC do not have ELM h/w engine thus such 242 SoC cannot support BCHx_HW ECC schemes. 243 - size of OOB/Spare region 244 With higher ECC schemes, more OOB/Spare area is required to 245 store ECC. So choice of ECC scheme is limited by NAND oobsize. 246 247 In general following expression can help: 248 NAND_OOBSIZE >= 2 + (NAND_PAGESIZE / 512) * ECC_BYTES 249 where 250 NAND_OOBSIZE = number of bytes available in 251 OOB/spare area per NAND page. 252 NAND_PAGESIZE = bytes in main-area of NAND page. 253 ECC_BYTES = number of ECC bytes generated to 254 protect 512 bytes of data, which is: 255 3 for HAM1_xx ecc schemes 256 7 for BCH4_xx ecc schemes 257 14 for BCH8_xx ecc schemes 258 26 for BCH16_xx ecc schemes 259 260 example to check for BCH16 on 2K page NAND 261 NAND_PAGESIZE = 2048 262 NAND_OOBSIZE = 64 263 2 + (2048 / 512) * 26 = 106 > NAND_OOBSIZE 264 Thus BCH16 cannot be supported on 2K page NAND. 265 266 However, for 4K pagesize NAND 267 NAND_PAGESIZE = 4096 268 NAND_OOBSIZE = 224 269 ECC_BYTES = 26 270 2 + (4096 / 512) * 26 = 210 < NAND_OOBSIZE 271 Thus BCH16 can be supported on 4K page NAND. 272 273 274 CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC_PREFETCH 275 On OMAP platforms that use the GPMC controller 276 (CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_GPMC_PREFETCH), this options enables the code that 277 uses the prefetch mode to speed up read operations. 278 279NOTE: 280===== 281 282The Disk On Chip driver is currently broken and has been for some time. 283There is a driver in drivers/mtd/nand/raw, taken from Linux, that works with 284the current NAND system but has not yet been adapted to the u-boot 285environment. 286 287Additional improvements to the NAND subsystem by Guido Classen, 10-10-2006 288 289JFFS2 related commands: 290 291 implement "nand erase clean" and old "nand erase" 292 using both the new code which is able to skip bad blocks 293 "nand erase clean" additionally writes JFFS2-cleanmarkers in the oob. 294 295Miscellaneous and testing commands: 296 "markbad [offset]" 297 create an artificial bad block (for testing bad block handling) 298 299 "scrub [offset length]" 300 like "erase" but don't skip bad block. Instead erase them. 301 DANGEROUS!!! Factory set bad blocks will be lost. Use only 302 to remove artificial bad blocks created with the "markbad" command. 303 304 "torture offset [size]" 305 Torture block to determine if it is still reliable. 306 Enabled by the CONFIG_CMD_NAND_TORTURE configuration option. 307 This command returns 0 if the block is still reliable, else 1. 308 If the block is detected as unreliable, it is up to the user to decide to 309 mark this block as bad. 310 The analyzed block is put through 3 erase / write cycles (or less if the block 311 is detected as unreliable earlier). 312 This command can be used in scripts, e.g. together with the markbad command to 313 automate retries and handling of possibly newly detected bad blocks if the 314 nand write command fails. 315 It can also be used manually by users having seen some NAND errors in logs to 316 search the root cause of these errors. 317 The underlying nand_torture() function is also useful for code willing to 318 automate actions following a nand->write() error. This would e.g. be required 319 in order to program or update safely firmware to NAND, especially for the UBI 320 part of such firmware. 321 Optionally, a second parameter size can be given to test multiple blocks with 322 one call. If size is not a multiple of the NAND's erase size, then the block 323 that contains offset + size will be tested in full. If used with size, this 324 command returns 0 if all tested blocks have been found reliable, else 1. 325 326 327NAND locking command (for chips with active LOCKPRE pin) 328 329 "nand lock" 330 set NAND chip to lock state (all pages locked) 331 332 "nand lock tight" 333 set NAND chip to lock tight state (software can't change locking anymore) 334 335 "nand lock status" 336 displays current locking status of all pages 337 338 "nand unlock [offset] [size]" 339 unlock consecutive area (can be called multiple times for different areas) 340 341 "nand unlock.allexcept [offset] [size]" 342 unlock all except specified consecutive area 343 344I have tested the code with board containing 128MiB NAND large page chips 345and 32MiB small page chips. 346
README.nand-boot-ppc440
1----------------------------- 2NAND boot on PPC440 platforms 3----------------------------- 4 5This document describes the U-Boot NAND boot feature as it 6is implemented for the AMCC Sequoia (PPC440EPx) board. 7 8The PPC440EP(x)/GR(x) cpu's can boot directly from NAND FLASH, 9completely without NOR FLASH. This can be done by using the NAND 10boot feature of the 440 NAND flash controller (NDFC). 11 12Here a short description of the different boot stages: 13 14a) IPL (Initial Program Loader, integrated inside CPU) 15------------------------------------------------------ 16Will load first 4k from NAND (SPL) into cache and execute it from there. 17 18b) SPL (Secondary Program Loader) 19--------------------------------- 20Will load special U-Boot version (NUB) from NAND and execute it. This SPL 21has to fit into 4kByte. It sets up the CPU and configures the SDRAM 22controller and the NAND controller so that the special U-Boot image can be 23loaded from NAND to SDRAM. 24This special image is build in the directory "nand_spl". 25 26c) NUB (NAND U-Boot) 27-------------------- 28This NAND U-Boot (NUB) is a special U-Boot version which can be started 29from RAM. Therefore it mustn't (re-)configure the SDRAM controller. 30 31On 440EPx the SPL is copied to internal SRAM before the NAND controller 32is set up. While still running from cache, I experienced problems accessing 33the NAND controller. 34 35 36Example: Build and install NAND boot image for Sequoia (440EPx): 37 38a) Configure for sequoia with NAND boot support: 39# make sequoia_nand_config 40 41b) Build image(s) 42# make 43 44This will generate the SPL image in the "nand_spl" directory: 45nand_spl/u-boot-spl.bin 46Also another image is created spanning a whole NAND block (16kBytes): 47nand_spl/u-boot-spl-16k.bin 48The main NAND U-Boot image is generated in the toplevel directory: 49u-boot.bin 50A combined image of u-boot-spl-16k.bin and u-boot.bin is also created: 51u-boot-nand.bin 52 53This image should be programmed at offset 0 in the NAND flash: 54 55# tftp 100000 /tftpboot/sequoia/u-boot-nand.bin 56# nand erase 0 60000 57# nand write 100000 0 60000 58 59 60September 07 2006, Stefan Roese <sr@denx.de> 61
README.ne2000
1This driver supports NE2000 compatible cards (those based on DP8390, 2DP83902 and similar). It can be used with PCMCIA/CF cards provided 3that the CCR is correctly initialized. 4 5The code is based on sources from the Linux kernel (pcnet_cs.c, 68390.h) and eCOS(if_dp83902a.c, if_dp83902a.h). Both of these 2 7wonderful world are GPL, so this is, of course, GPL. 8 9I developed and tested this driver on a custom PXA255 based system and 10with a billionton CF network card connected to the PCMCIA interface of 11the micro (have a look at README.PXA_CF for the support of this port). 12 13The options you have to specify in the config file are (with the 14value for my board as an example): 15 16#define CONFIG_DRIVER_NE2000 17 18- Enables the driver 19 20#define CONFIG_DRIVER_NE2000_BASE (0x20000000+0x300) 21 22- Address where the board is mapped 23 24 25Enjoy! 26 27Christian Pellegrin <chri@ascensit.com> 28
README.nokia_rx51
1Board: Nokia RX-51 aka N900 2 3This board definition results in a u-boot.bin which can be chainloaded 4from NOLO in qemu or on a real N900. It does very little hardware config 5because NOLO has already configured the board. Only needed is enabling 6internal eMMC memory via twl4030 regulator which is not enabled by NOLO. 7 8NOLO is expecting a kernel image and will treat any image it finds in 9onenand as such. This u-boot is intended to be flashed to the N900 like 10a kernel. In order to transparently boot the original kernel, it will be 11appended to u-boot.bin at 0x40000. NOLO will load the entire image into 12(random) memory and execute u-boot, which saves hw revision, boot reason 13and boot mode ATAGs set by NOLO. Then the bootscripts will attempt to load 14uImage or boot.scr from a fat, ext2/ext3 or ext4 filesystem in external 15SD card or internal eMMC memory. If this fails or keyboard is closed then 16the appended kernel image will be booted using some generated and some 17stored ATAGs (see boot order). 18 19For generating combined image of u-boot and kernel there is a simple script 20called u-boot-gen-combined. It is available in following repository: 21 22 https://github.com/pali/u-boot-maemo 23 24There is support for hardware watchdog. Hardware watchdog is started by 25NOLO so u-boot must kick watchdog to prevent reboot device (but not very 26often, max every 2 seconds). There is also support for framebuffer display 27output with ANSI escape codes and the N900 HW keyboard input. 28 29When U-Boot is starting it enable IBE bit in Auxiliary Control Register, 30which is needed for Thumb-2 ISA support. It is workaround for errata 430973. 31 32Default boot order: 33 34 * 0. if keyboard is closed boot automatically attached kernel image 35 * 1. try boot from external SD card 36 * 2. try boot from internal eMMC memory 37 * 3. try boot from attached kernel image 38 39Boot from SD or eMMC in this order: 40 41 * 1. 42 * 1.1 find boot.scr on first fat partition 43 * 1.2 find uImage on first fat partition 44 * 1.3 same order for 2. - 4. fat partition 45 * 2. same as 1. but for ext2/3 partition 46 * 3. same as 1. but for ext4 partition 47 48 49Available additional commands/variables: 50 51 * run sdboot - Boot from external SD card (see boot order) 52 * run emmcboot - Boot from internal eMMC memory (see boot order) 53 * run attachboot - Boot attached kernel image (attached to U-Boot binary) 54 55 * run scriptload - Load boot script ${mmcscriptfile} 56 * run scriptboot - Run loaded boot script 57 * run kernload - Load kernel image ${mmckernfile} 58 * run initrdload - Load initrd image ${mmcinitrdfile} 59 * run kernboot - Boot loaded kernel image 60 * run kerninitrdboot - Boot loaded kernel image with loaded initrd image 61 62 * run trymmcscriptboot - Try to load and boot script ${mmcscriptfile} 63 * run trymmckernboot - Try to load and boot kernel image ${mmckernfile} 64 * run trymmckerninitrdboot - Try to load and boot kernel image ${mmckernfile} 65 with initrd image ${mmcinitrdfile} 66 67Additional variables for loading files from mmc: 68 69 * mmc ${mmcnum} (0 - external, 1 - internal) 70 * partition number ${mmcpart} (1 - 4) 71 * parition type ${mmctype} (fat, ext2, ext4) 72 73Additional variables for booting kernel: 74 75 * setup_omap_atag - Add OMAP table into atags structure (needs maemo kernel) 76 * setup_console_atag - Enable serial console in OMAP table 77 * setup_boot_reason_atag - Change boot reason in OMAP table 78 * setup_boot_mode_atag - Change boot mode in OMAP table 79 80 Variable setup_omap_atag is automatically set when booting attached kernel. 81 When variable setup_omap_atag is set, variable setup_console_atag is unset 82 and u-boot standard output is set to serial then setup_console_atag is 83 automatically set to 1. So output from Maemo kernel would go to serial port. 84 85UBIFS support: 86 87 UBIFS support is disabled, because U-Boot image is too big and cannot be 88 flashed with attached zImage to RX-51 kernel nand area. For enabling UBIFS 89 support add following lines into file configs/nokia_rx51_defconfig 90 91 CONFIG_CMD_UBI=y 92 CONFIG_CMD_UBIFS=y 93 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP=y 94 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT=1 95
README.nvme
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2017 NXP Semiconductors 4# Copyright (C) 2017 Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com> 5 6What is NVMe 7============ 8 9NVM Express (NVMe) is a register level interface that allows host software to 10communicate with a non-volatile memory subsystem. This interface is optimized 11for enterprise and client solid state drives, typically attached to the PCI 12express interface. It is a scalable host controller interface designed to 13address the needs of enterprise and client systems that utilize PCI express 14based solid state drives (SSD). The interface provides optimized command 15submission and completion paths. It includes support for parallel operation by 16supporting up to 64K I/O queues with up to 64K commands per I/O queue. 17 18The device is comprised of some number of controllers, where each controller 19is comprised of some number of namespaces, where each namespace is comprised 20of some number of logical blocks. A namespace is a quantity of non-volatile 21memory that is formatted into logical blocks. An NVMe namespace is equivalent 22to a SCSI LUN. Each namespace is operated as an independent "device". 23 24How it works 25------------ 26There is an NVMe uclass driver (driver name "nvme"), an NVMe host controller 27driver (driver name "nvme") and an NVMe namespace block driver (driver name 28"nvme-blk"). The host controller driver is supposed to probe the hardware and 29do necessary initialization to put the controller into a ready state at which 30it is able to scan all available namespaces attached to it. Scanning namespace 31is triggered by the NVMe uclass driver and the actual work is done in the NVMe 32namespace block driver. 33 34Status 35------ 36It only support basic block read/write functions in the NVMe driver. 37 38Config options 39-------------- 40CONFIG_NVME Enable NVMe device support 41CONFIG_CMD_NVME Enable basic NVMe commands 42 43Usage in U-Boot 44--------------- 45To use an NVMe hard disk from U-Boot shell, a 'nvme scan' command needs to 46be executed for all NVMe hard disks attached to the NVMe controller to be 47identified. 48 49To list all of the NVMe hard disks, try: 50 51 => nvme info 52 Device 0: Vendor: 0x8086 Rev: 8DV10131 Prod: CVFT535600LS400BGN 53 Type: Hard Disk 54 Capacity: 381554.0 MB = 372.6 GB (781422768 x 512) 55 56and print out detailed information for controller and namespaces via: 57 58 => nvme detail 59 60Raw block read/write to can be done via the 'nvme read/write' commands: 61 62 => nvme read a0000000 0 11000 63 64 => tftp 80000000 /tftpboot/kernel.itb 65 => nvme write 80000000 0 11000 66 67Of course, file system command can be used on the NVMe hard disk as well: 68 69 => fatls nvme 0:1 70 32376967 kernel.itb 71 22929408 100m 72 73 2 file(s), 0 dir(s) 74 75 => fatload nvme 0:1 a0000000 /kernel.itb 76 => bootm a0000000 77 78Testing NVMe with QEMU x86 79-------------------------- 80QEMU supports NVMe emulation and we can test NVMe driver with QEMU x86 running 81U-Boot. Please see README.x86 for how to build u-boot.rom image for QEMU x86. 82 83Example command line to call QEMU x86 below with emulated NVMe device: 84$ ./qemu-system-i386 -drive file=nvme.img,if=none,id=drv0 -device nvme,drive=drv0,serial=QEMUNVME0001 -bios u-boot.rom 85
README.odroid
1 U-Boot for Odroid X2/U3/XU3/XU4/HC1 2======================== 3 41. Summary 5========== 6This is a quick instruction for setup Odroid boards. 7Board config: odroid_config for X2/U3 8Board config: odroid-xu3_config for XU3/XU4/HC1 9 102. Supported devices 11==================== 12This U-BOOT config can be used on three boards: 13- Odroid U3 14- Odroid X2 15with CPU Exynos 4412 rev 2.0 and 2GB of RAM 16- Odroid XU3 17- Odroid XU4 18- Odroid HC1 19with CPU Exynos5422 and 2GB of RAM 20 213. Boot sequence 22================ 23iROM->BL1->(BL2 + TrustZone)->U-BOOT 24 25This version of U-BOOT doesn't implement SPL. So, BL1, BL2, and TrustZone 26binaries are needed to boot up. 27 28<< X2/U3 >> 29It can be found in "boot.tar.gz" from here: 30http://dev.odroid.com/projects/4412boot/wiki/FrontPage?action=download&value=boot.tar.gz 31or here: 32http://odroid.in/guides/ubuntu-lfs/boot.tar.gz 33 34<< XU3/XU4 >> 35It can be downloaded from: 36https://github.com/hardkernel/u-boot/tree/odroidxu3-v2012.07/sd_fuse/hardkernel_1mb_uboot 37 38 394. Boot media layout 40==================== 41The table below shows SD/eMMC cards layout for U-Boot. 42The block offset is starting from 0 and the block size is 512B. 43 ------------------------------------- 44| Binary | Block offset| part type | 45| name | SD | eMMC |(eMMC only)| 46 ------------------------------------- 47| Bl1 | 1 | 0 | 1 (boot) | 48| Bl2 | 31 | 30 | 1 (boot) | 49| U-Boot | 63 | 62 | 1 (boot) | 50| Tzsw | 2111 | 2110 | 1 (boot) | 51| Uboot Env | 2560 | 2560 | 0 (user) | 52 ------------------------------------- 53 545. Prepare the SD boot card - with SD card reader 55================================================= 56To prepare bootable media you need boot binaries provided by hardkernel. 57From the downloaded files, You can find: 58- bl1.bin 59- tzsw.bin 60- bl2.bin 61- sd_fusing.sh 62- u-boot.bin 63(The file names can be slightly different, but you can distinguish what they are 64without problem) 65 66This is all you need to boot this board. But if you want to use your custom 67U-Boot then you need to change u-boot.bin with your own U-Boot binary* 68and run the script "sd_fusing.sh" - this script is valid only for SD card. 69 70*note: 71The proper binary file of current U-Boot is u-boot-dtb.bin. 72 73quick steps for Linux: 74- Download all files from the link at point 3 and extract it if needed. 75- put any SD card into the SD reader 76- check the device with "dmesg" 77- run ./sd_fusing.sh /dev/sdX - where X is SD card device (but not a partition) 78Check if Hardkernel U-Boot is booting, and next do the same with your U-Boot. 79 806. Prepare the eMMC boot card 81 with a eMMC card reader (boot from eMMC card slot) 82===================================================== 83To boot the device from the eMMC slot you should use a special card reader 84which supports eMMC partition switch. All of the boot binaries are stored 85on the eMMC boot partition which is normally hidden. 86 87The "sd_fusing.sh" script can be used after updating offsets of binaries 88according to the table from point 4. Be sure that you are working on the right 89eMMC partition - its size is usually very small, about 1-4 MiB. 90 917. Prepare the eMMC boot card 92 with a SD card reader (boot from SD card slot) 93================================================= 94If you have an eMMC->microSD adapter you can prepare the card as in point 5. 95But then the device can boot only from the SD card slot. 96 978. Prepare the boot media using Hardkernel U-Boot 98================================================= 99You can update the U-Boot to the custom one if you have a working bootloader 100delivered with the board on the eMMC/SD card. Then follow the steps: 101- install the android fastboot tool 102- connect a micro usb cable to the board 103- on the U-Boot prompt, run command: fastboot (as a root) 104- on the host, run command: "fastboot flash bootloader u-boot-dtb.bin" 105- the custom U-Boot should start after the board resets. 106 1079. Partition layout 108==================== 109Default U-Boot environment is setup for fixed partition layout. 110 111Partition table: MSDOS. Disk layout and files as listed in the table below. 112 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- --------------------------------- 113| Num | Name | FS | Size | Offset | Reguired files | 114| | | Type | MiB | MiB | | 115 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- --------------------------------- 116| 1 | BOOT | fat | 100 | 2 | kernel, fdt** | 117| 2 | ROOT | ext4 | - | | any Linux system | 118 ----- ------ ------ ------ -------- --------------------------------- 119 120**note: 121Supported fdt files are: 122- exynos4412-odroidx2.dtb 123- exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb 124- exynos5422-odroidxu3.dtb 125- exynos5422-odroidxu3-lite.dtb 126- exynos5422-odroidxu4.dtb 127- exynos5422-odroidhc1.dtb 128 129Supported kernel files are: 130- Image.itb 131- zImage 132- uImage 133 134The default environmental variable "dfu_alt_info" is set* for above layout. 135Each partition size is just an example, dfu_alt_info tries init two partitions. 136The size of each is not important. 137 138*note: 139$dfu_alt_info is set on a boot time and it is concatenated using two variables: 140- $dfu_alt_boot(set dynamically) 141- $dfu_alt_system(from current env). 142 143To add any changes to dfu_alt_info - please modify $dfu_alt_system only. 144Changes are visible after board reset. 145 14610. The environment and booting the kernel 147========================================== 148There are three macros defined in config for various boot options: 149Two for both, kernel with device tree support and also without it: 150- boot_uimg - load uImage 151- boot_zimg - load zImage 152If proper fdt file exists then it will be automatically loaded, 153so for old kernel types, please remove fdt file from boot partition. 154 155The third boot option for multi image support (more info: doc/uImage.FIT/) 156- boot_fit - for binary file: "Image.itb" 157 158Default boot command: "autoboot" 159And the boot sequence is: 160- boot_fit - if "Image.itb" exists 161- boot_zimg - if "zImage" exists 162- boot_uimg - if "uImage" exists 163 16411. USB host support 165==================== 166NOTE: This section is only for Odroid X2/U3. 167 168The ethernet can be accessed after starting the USB subsystem in U-Boot. 169The adapter does not come with a preconfigured MAC address, and hence it needs 170to be set before starting USB. 171setenv usbethaddr 02:DE:AD:BE:EF:FF 172 173Note that in this example a locally managed MAC address is chosen. Care should 174be taken to make these MAC addresses unique within the same subnet. 175 176Start the USB subsystem: 177Odroid # setenv usbethaddr 02:DE:AD:BE:EF:FF 178Odroid # usb start 179(Re)start USB... 180USB0: USB EHCI 1.00 181scanning bus 0 for devices... 4 USB Device(s) found 182 scanning usb for storage devices... 1 Storage Device(s) found 183 scanning usb for ethernet devices... 1 Ethernet Device(s) found 184Odroid # 185 186Automatic IP assignment: 187------------------------ 188If the ethernet is connected to a DHCP server (router maybe with DHCP enabled), 189then the below will automatically assign an ip address through DHCP. 190setenv autoload no 191dhcp 192 193Odroid # setenv autoload no 194Odroid # dhcp 195Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 196BOOTP broadcast 1 197DHCP client bound to address 192.168.1.10 (524 ms) 198Odroid # 199 200Note that this automatically sets the many IP address related variables in 201U-Boot that is obtained from the DHCP server. 202 203Odroid # printenv ipaddr netmask gatewayip dnsip 204ipaddr=192.168.1.10 205netmask=255.255.255.0 206gatewayip=192.168.1.1 207dnsip=192.168.1.1 208 209Ping example: 210The ping command can be used a test to check connectivity. In this example, 211192.168.1.27 is a pingable server in the network. 212Odroid # ping 192.168.1.27 213Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 214Using sms0 device 215host 192.168.1.27 is alive 216Odroid # 217 218Static IP assignment: 219--------------------- 220In the case where there are no DHCP servers in the network, or you want to 221set the IP address statically, it can be done by: 222Odroid # setenv ipaddr 192.168.1.10 223Odroid # ping 192.168.1.27 224Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 225Using sms0 device 226host 192.168.1.27 is alive 227 228TFTP booting: 229------------- 230Say there exists a tftp server in the network with address 192.168.1.27 and 231it serves a kernel image (zImage.3.17) and a DTB blob (exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb) 232that needs to be loaded and booted. It can be accomplished as below: 233(Assumes that you have setenv usbethaddr, and have not set autoload to no) 234 235Odroid # setenv serverip 192.168.1.27 236Odroid # tftpboot 0x40080000 zImage.3.17 237Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 238Using sms0 device 239TFTP from server 192.168.1.27; our IP address is 192.168.1.10 240Filename 'zImage.3.17'. 241Load address: 0x40080000 242Loading: ################################################################# 243 ################################################################# 244 ################################################################# 245 ####################### 246 52.7 KiB/s 247done 248Bytes transferred = 3194200 (30bd58 hex) 249Odroid # tftpboot 0x42000000 exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb 250Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 251Using sms0 device 252TFTP from server 192.168.1.27; our IP address is 192.168.1.10 253Filename 'exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb'. 254Load address: 0x42000000 255Loading: #### 256 40 KiB/s 257done 258Bytes transferred = 46935 (b757 hex) 259Odroid # printenv bootargs 260bootargs=Please use defined boot 261Odroid # setenv bootargs console=ttySAC1,115200n8 root=/dev/mmcblk0p2 rootwait 262Odroid # bootz 40080000 - 42000000 263Kernel image @ 0x40080000 [ 0x000000 - 0x30bd58 ] 264## Flattened Device Tree blob at 42000000 265 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x42000000 266 Loading Device Tree to 4fff1000, end 4ffff756 ... OK 267 268Starting kernel ... 269 270[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0xa00 271... etc ... 272 273In the above example you can substitute 'dhcp' for 'tftpboot' as well. 274 275USB Storage booting: 276-------------------- 277Similarly we can use the USB storage to load the kernel image/initrd/fdt etc 278and boot. For this example, there is a USB drive plugged in. It has a FAT 2791st partition and an EXT 2nd partition. Using the generic FS (ls/load) makes 280it even easier to work with FAT/EXT file systems. 281For this example the second EXT partition is used for booting and as rootfs. 282The boot files - kernel and the dtb are present in the /boot directory of the 283second partition. 284 285Odroid # usb start 286(Re)start USB... 287USB0: USB EHCI 1.00 288scanning bus 0 for devices... 4 USB Device(s) found 289 scanning usb for storage devices... 1 Storage Device(s) found 290 scanning usb for ethernet devices... 291Error: sms0 address not set. <----- Note the error as usbethaddr 292Warning: failed to set MAC address <----- is not set. 2931 Ethernet Device(s) found 294Odroid # usb part 0 295 296Partition Map for USB device 0 -- Partition Type: DOS 297 298Part Start Sector Num Sectors UUID Type 299 1 3072 263168 000c4046-01 06 300 2 266240 13457408 000c4046-02 83 301 302Odroid # ls usb 0:2 /boot 303<DIR> 4096 . 304<DIR> 4096 .. 305 353 boot.scr 306 281 boot.txt 307 101420 config-3.8.13.23 308 2127254 initrd.img-3.8.13.23 309 2194825 uInitrd 310 2194825 uInitrd-3.8.13.23 311 2453112 zImage 312 101448 config-3.8.13.26 313 2127670 uInitrd-3.8.13.26 314 2127606 initrd.img-3.8.13.26 315 3194200 zImage.3.17 <--- Kernel 316 46935 exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb <--- DTB 317Odroid # load usb 0:2 40080000 /boot/zImage.3.17 3183194200 bytes read in 471 ms (6.5 MiB/s) 319Odroid # load usb 0:2 42000000 /boot/exynos4412-odroidu3.dtb 32046935 bytes read in 233 ms (196.3 KiB/s) 321Odroid # setenv bootargs console=ttySAC1,115200n8 root=/dev/sda2 rootwait 322Odroid # bootz 40080000 - 42000000 323Kernel image @ 0x40080000 [ 0x000000 - 0x30bd58 ] 324## Flattened Device Tree blob at 42000000 325 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x42000000 326 Loading Device Tree to 4fff1000, end 4ffff756 ... OK 327 328Starting kernel ... 329 330[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0xa00 331 332Please refer to README.usb for additional information. 333
README.omap-ulpi-viewport
1Reference code ""drivers/usb/ulpi/omap-ulpi-viewport.c" 2 3Contains the ulpi read write api's to perform 4any ulpi phy port access on omap platform. 5 6On omap ehci reg map contains INSNREG05_ULPI 7register which offers the ulpi phy access so 8any ulpi phy commands should be passsed using this 9register. 10 11omap-ulpi-viewport.c is a low level function 12implementation of "drivers/usb/ulpi/ulpi.c" 13 14To enable and use omap-ulpi-viewport.c 15we require CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT_OMAP and 16CONFIG_USB_ULPI be enabled in config file. 17 18Any ulpi ops request can be done with ulpi.c 19and soc specific binding and usage is done with 20omap-ulpi-viewport implementation. 21 22Ex: scenario: 23omap-ehci driver code requests for ulpi phy reset if 24ehci is used in phy mode, which will call ulpi phy reset 25the ulpi phy reset does ulpi_read/write from viewport 26implementation which will do ulpi reset using the 27INSNREG05_ULPI register. 28
README.omap3
1 2Summary 3======= 4 5This README is about U-Boot support for TI's ARM Cortex-A8 based OMAP3 [1] 6family of SoCs. TI's OMAP3 SoC family contains an ARM Cortex-A8. Additionally, 7some family members contain a TMS320C64x+ DSP and/or an Imagination SGX 2D/3D 8graphics processor and various other standard peripherals. 9 10Currently the following boards are supported: 11 12* OMAP3530 BeagleBoard [2] 13 14* Gumstix Overo [3] 15 16* TI EVM [4] 17 18* OpenPandora Ltd. Pandora [5] 19 20* TI/Logic PD Zoom MDK [6] 21 22* TI/Logic PD Zoom 2 [7] 23 24* CompuLab Ltd. CM-T35 [8] 25 26Build 27===== 28 29* BeagleBoard: 30 31make omap3_beagle_config 32make 33 34* Gumstix Overo: 35 36make omap3_overo_config 37make 38 39* TI EVM: 40 41make omap3_evm_config 42make 43 44* Zoom 2: 45 46make omap3_zoom2_config 47make 48 49* CM-T35: 50 51make cm_t35_config 52make 53 54 55Custom commands 56=============== 57 58To make U-Boot for OMAP3 support NAND device SW or HW ECC calculation, U-Boot 59for OMAP3 supports custom user command 60 61nandecc hw/sw 62 63To be compatible with NAND drivers using SW ECC (e.g. kernel code) 64 65nandecc sw 66 67enables SW ECC calculation. HW ECC enabled with 68 69nandecc hw 70 71is typically used to write 2nd stage bootloader (known as 'x-loader') which is 72executed by OMAP3's boot rom and therefore has to be written with HW ECC. 73 74For all other commands see 75 76help 77 78Interfaces 79========== 80 81gpio 82---- 83 84To set a bit : 85 86 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) { 87 gpio_direction_output(N, 0); 88 gpio_set_value(N, 1); 89 } 90 91To clear a bit : 92 93 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) { 94 gpio_direction_output(N, 0); 95 gpio_set_value(N, 0); 96 } 97 98To read a bit : 99 100 if (!gpio_request(N, "")) { 101 gpio_direction_input(N); 102 val = gpio_get_value(N); 103 gpio_free(N); 104 } 105 if (val) 106 printf("GPIO N is set\n"); 107 else 108 printf("GPIO N is clear\n"); 109 110dma 111--- 112void omap3_dma_init(void) 113 Init the DMA module 114int omap3_dma_get_conf_chan(uint32_t chan, struct dma4_chan *config); 115 Read config of the channel 116int omap3_dma_conf_chan(uint32_t chan, struct dma4_chan *config); 117 Write config to the channel 118int omap3_dma_conf_transfer(uint32_t chan, uint32_t *src, uint32_t *dst, 119 uint32_t sze) 120 Config source, destination and size of a transfer 121int omap3_dma_wait_for_transfer(uint32_t chan) 122 Wait for a transfer to end - this hast to be called before a channel 123 or the data the channel transferd are used. 124int omap3_dma_get_revision(uint32_t *minor, uint32_t *major) 125 Read silicon Revision of the DMA module 126 127NAND 128==== 129 130There are some OMAP3 devices out there with NAND attached. Due to the fact that 131OMAP3 ROM code can only handle 1-bit hamming ECC for accessing first page 132(place where SPL lives) we require this setup for u-boot at least when reading 133the second progam within SPL. A lot of newer NAND chips however require more 134than 1-bit ECC for the pages, some can live with 1-bit for the first page. To 135handle this we can switch to another ECC algorithm after reading the payload 136within SPL. 137 138BCH8 139---- 140 141To enable hardware assisted BCH8 (8-bit BCH [Bose, Chaudhuri, Hocquenghem]) on 142OMAP3 devices we can use the BCH library in lib/bch.c. To do so add CONFIG_BCH 143and set CONFIG_NAND_OMAP_ECCSCHEME=5 (refer README.nand) for selecting BCH8_SW. 144The NAND OOB layout is the same as in linux kernel, if the linux kernel BCH8 145implementation for OMAP3 works for you so the u-boot version should also. 146When you require the SPL to read with BCH8 there are two more configs to 147change: 148 149 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS (must be the same as .eccpos in 150 GPMC_NAND_HW_BCH8_ECC_LAYOUT defined in 151 arch/arm/include/asm/arch-omap3/omap_gpmc.h) 152 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE must be 512 153 * CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES must be 13 for this BCH8 setup 154 155Acknowledgements 156================ 157 158OMAP3 U-Boot is based on U-Boot tar ball [9] for BeagleBoard and EVM done by 159several TI employees. 160 161Links 162===== 163 164[1] OMAP3: 165 166http://www.ti.com/omap3 (high volume) and 167http://www.ti.com/omap35x (broad market) 168 169[2] OMAP3530 BeagleBoard: 170 171http://beagleboard.org/ 172 173[3] Gumstix Overo: 174 175http://www.gumstix.net/Overo/ 176 177[4] TI EVM: 178 179http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/tmdxevm3503.html 180 181[5] OpenPandora Ltd. Pandora: 182 183http://openpandora.org/ 184 185[6] TI/Logic PD Zoom MDK: 186 187http://www.logicpd.com/products/devkit/ti/zoom_mobile_development_kit 188 189[7] TI/Logic PD Zoom 2 190 191http://www.logicpd.com/sites/default/files/1012659A_Zoom_OMAP34x-II_MDP_Brief.pdf 192 193[8] CompuLab Ltd. CM-T35: 194 195http://www.compulab.co.il/t3530/html/t3530-cm-datasheet.htm 196 197[9] TI OMAP3 U-Boot: 198 199http://beagleboard.googlecode.com/files/u-boot_beagle_revb.tar.gz 200
README.pblimage
1------------------------------------------------------------------ 2Freescale PBL(pre-boot loader) Boot Image generation using mkimage 3------------------------------------------------------------------ 4 5The CoreNet SoC's can boot directly from eSPI FLASH, SD/MMC and 6NAND, etc. These SoCs use PBL to load RCW and/or pre-initialization 7instructions. For more details refer section 5 Pre-boot loader 8specifications of reference manual P3041RM/P4080RM/P5020RM at link: 9http://www.freescale.com/webapp/search/Serp.jsp?Reference+Manuals 10 11Building PBL Boot Image and boot steps 12-------------------------------------- 13 141. Building PBL Boot Image. 15 The default Image is u-boot.pbl. 16 17 For eSPI boot(available on P2041/P3041/P4080/P5020/P5040/T4240): 18 To build the eSPI boot image: 19 make <board_name>_SPIFLASH 20 21 For SD boot(available on P2041/P3041/P4080/P5020/P5040/T4240): 22 To build the SD boot image: 23 make <board_name>_SDCARD 24 25 For Nand boot(available on P2041/P3041/P5020/P5040): 26 To build the NAND boot image: 27 make <board_name>_NAND 28 29 302. pblimage support available with mkimage utility will generate Freescale PBL 31boot image that can be flashed on the board eSPI flash, SD/MMC and NAND. 32Following steps describe it in detail. 33 34 1). Boot from eSPI flash 35 Write u-boot.pbl to eSPI flash from offset 0x0. 36 for ex in u-boot: 37 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl 38 =>sf probe 0 39 =>sf erase 0 100000 40 =>sf write 100000 0 $filesize 41 Change SW1[1:5] = off off on off on. 42 43 2). Boot from SD/MMC 44 Write u-boot.pbl to SD/MMC from offset 0x1000. 45 for ex in u-boot: 46 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl 47 =>mmcinfo 48 =>mmc write 100000 8 441 49 Change SW1[1:5] = off off on on off. 50 51 3). Boot from Nand 52 Write u-boot.pbl to Nand from offset 0x0. 53 for ex in u-boot: 54 =>tftp 100000 u-boot.pbl 55 =>nand info 56 =>nand erase 0 100000 57 =>nand write 100000 0 $filesize 58 Change SW1[1:5] = off on off off on 59 Change SW7[1:4] = on off off on 60 61Board specific configuration file specifications: 62------------------------------------------------ 631. Configuration files rcw.cfg and pbi.cfg must present in the 64board/freescale/corenet_ds/, rcw.cfg is for RCW, pbi.cfg is for 65PBI instructions. File name must not be changed since they are used 66in Makefile. 672. These files can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first 68character to put comments 69 70Typical example of rcw.cfg file: 71----------------------------------- 72 73#PBL preamble and RCW header 74aa55aa55 010e0100 75#64 bytes RCW data 764c580000 00000000 18185218 0000cccc 7740464000 3c3c2000 58000000 61000000 7800000000 00000000 00000000 008b6000 7900000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 80 81Typical example of pbi.cfg file: 82----------------------------------- 83 84#PBI commands 85#Initialize CPC1 8609010000 00200400 8709138000 00000000 88091380c0 00000100 8909010100 00000000 9009010104 fff0000b 9109010f00 08000000 9209010000 80000000 93#Configure LAW for CPC1 9409000d00 00000000 9509000d04 fff00000 9609000d08 81000013 9709000010 00000000 9809000014 ff000000 9909000018 81000000 100#Initialize eSPI controller 10109110000 80000403 10209110020 2d170008 10309110024 00100008 10409110028 00100008 1050911002c 00100008 106#Flush PBL data 10709138000 00000000 108091380c0 00000000 109 110------------------------------------------------ 111Author: Shaohui Xie<Shaohui.Xie@freescale.com> 112
README.pcap
1PCAP: 2 3U-boot supports live Ethernet packet capture in PCAP(2.4) format. 4This is enabled by CONFIG_CMD_PCAP. 5 6The capture is stored on physical memory, and should be copied to 7a machine capable of parsing and displaying PCAP files (IE. wireshark) 8If networking works properly one can copy the capture file from physical memory 9using tftpput, or save it to local storage with (sf write, mmc write, fatwrite, etc) 10 11the pcap capturing requires maximum buffer size. 12when the buffer is full an error message will be displayed and then packets 13will silently drop. 14the actual capture file size is populate in the environment variable "pcapsize". 15 16Usage example: 17 18# Initialize pcap capture to physical address (0x100000) with maximum size of 19# 100000 bytes. 20 21# Start capture 22pcap start 23 24# Initialize network activity 25env set ipaddr 10.0.2.15; env set serverip 10.0.2.2; tftp uImage64 26 27# Stop capture 28pcap stop 29 30# pcap init 0x100000 100000 31PCAP capture initialized: addr: 0xffffffff80100000 max length: 100000 32 33# pcap start 34# env set ipaddr 10.0.2.15; env set serverip 10.0.2.2; tftp uImage64 35eth0@10000000: PHY present at 0 36eth0@10000000: link up, 1000Mbps full-duplex (lpa: 0x7c00) 37Using eth0@10000000 device 38TFTP from server 10.0.2.2; our IP address is 10.0.2.15 39Filename 'uImage64'. 40Load address: 0xffffffff88000000 41Loading: ################################################################# 42 ################################################################# 43 ################################################################# 44 ################################################################# 45!!! Buffer is full, consider increasing buffer size !!! 46 ################################################################# 47 ################################################################# 48 ################################################################# 49 ################################################################# 50 ################################################################# 51 # 52 18.2 MiB/s 53done 54Bytes transferred = 8359376 (7f8dd0 hex) 55PCAP status: 56 Initialized addr: 0xffffffff80100000 max length: 100000 57 Status: Active. file size: 99991 58 Incoming packets: 66 Outgoing packets: 67 59 60# pcap stop 61# tftpput 0xffffffff80100000 $pcapsize 10.0.2.2:capture.pcap 62 63
README.plan9
1Plan 9 from Bell Labs kernel images require additional setup to pass 2configuration information to the kernel. An environment variable named 3confaddr must be defined with the same value as CONFADDR (see mem.h). 4Use of this facility is optional, but should be preferable to manual 5configuration. 6 7When booting an image, arguments supplied to the bootm command will be 8copied to CONFADDR. If no arguments are specified, the contents of the 9bootargs environment variable will be copied. 10 11If no command line arguments or bootargs are defined, CONFADDR is left 12uninitialized to permit manual configuration. For example, PC-style 13configuration could be simulated by issuing a fatload in bootcmd: 14 15 # setenv bootcmd fatload mmc 0 $confaddr plan9.ini; ...; bootm 16 17Steven Stallion 18June 2013 19
README.power-framework
1# 2# (C) Copyright 2014 Samsung Electronics 3# Lukasz Majewski <l.majewski@samsung.com> 4# 5# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 6# 7 8Introduction 9------------ 10 11This document describes the second version of the u-boot's PMIC (Power 12Management IC) framework. As a reference boards please consider Samsungs' Trats 13and Trats2. 14 15Background 16---------- 17 18Boards supported by u-boot are getting increasingly complex. Developers and 19designers strive to cut down power consumption. Hence several different types of 20devices are now available on the board - namely power managers (PMIC), fuel 21gauges (FG), micro USB interface controllers (MUIC), batteries, multi-function 22devices (MFD). 23 24Explanation of key design decisions 25----------------------------------- 26 27One package can integrate PMIC and MUIC with different addresses on the I2C bus. 28The same device - e.g. MAX8997 uses two different I2C busses and addresses. 29 30Power devices use not only I2C for communication, but SPI as well. Additionally 31different ICs use different endianess. For this reason struct pmic holds 32information about I2C/SPI transmission, which is used with generic 33pmic_req_write() function. 34 35The "flat" hierarchy for power devices works well when each device performs only 36one operation - e.g. PMIC enables LDO. 37 38The problem emerges when we have a device (battery) which conceptually shall be 39the master and uses methods exported by other devices. We need to control MUIC 40to start charging the battery, use PMIC to reduce board's overall power 41consumption (by disabling not needed LDOs, BUCKs) and get current state of 42energy on the battery from FG. 43Up till now u-boot doesn't support device model, so a simple one had to be 44added. 45 46The directory hierarchy has following structure: 47./include/power/<device_name>_<device_function>.h 48e.g. ./include/power/max8997_pmic.h 49 50./drivers/power/pmic/power_{core files}.c 51e.g. ./drivers/power/pmic/power_core.c 52 53./drivers/power/pmic/<device_function>/<device_function>_<device_name>.c 54e.g. ./drivers/power/pmic/pmic_max8997.c 55e.g. ./drivers/power/battery/trats/bat_trats.c 56e.g. ./drivers/power/fuel_gauge/fg_max17042.c 57 58The framework classifies devices by their function - separate directories should 59be maintained for different classes of devices. 60 61Current design 62-------------- 63 64Everything is a power device described by struct pmic. Even battery is 65considered as a valid power device. This helps for better management of those 66devices. 67 68- Block diagram of the hierarchy: 69 ----------------- 70 --------| BAT |------------ 71 | | | | 72 | ----------------- | 73 | | | 74 \|/ \|/ \|/ 75 ----------- ----------------- --------- 76 |FG | |MUIC | |CHRG | 77 | | | | | | 78 ----------- ----------------- --------- 79 80 811. When hierarchy is not needed (no complex battery charge): 82 83Definition of the struct pmic is only required with proper name and parameters 84for communication. This is enough to use the "pmic" command in the u-boot 85prompt to change values of device's register (enable/disable LDO, BUCK). 86 87The PG, MUIC and CHRG above are regarded to be in the same level in the 88hierarchy. 89 902. Complex battery charging. 91 92To charge a battery, information from several "abstract" power devices is 93needed (defined at ./include/power/pmic.h): 94- FG device (struct power_fg): 95 -- *fg_battery_check - check if battery is not above its limits 96 -- *fg_battery_update - update the pmic framework with current 97 battery state(voltage and current capacity) 98 99- Charger device (struct power_chrq): 100 -- *chrg_type - type/capacity of the charger (including information 101 about USB cable disconnection) 102 -- *chrg_bat_present - detection if battery to be charged is 103 present 104 -- *chrg_state - status of the charger - if it is enabled or 105 disabled 106 107- Battery device (struct power_battery): 108 -- *battery_init - assign proper callbacks to be used by top 109 hierarchy battery device 110 -- *battery_charge - called from "pmic" command, responsible 111 for performing the charging 112 113Now two batteries are supported; trats and trats2 [*]. Those differ in the way 114how they handle the exact charging. Trats uses polling (MAX8997) and trats2 115relies on the PMIC/MUIC HW completely (MAX77693). 116 117__Example for trats (this can be very different for other board):__ 118 -- *fg_battery_check -> FG device (fg_max17042.c) 119 -- *fg_battery_update -> FG device (fg_max17042.c) 120 -- *chrg_type -> MUIC device (muic_max8997.c) 121 -- *chrg_bat_present -> PMIC device (pmic_max8997.c) 122 -- *chrg_state -> PMIC device (pmic_max8997.c) 123 -- *battery_init -> BAT device (bat_trats.c) 124 -- *battery_charge -> BAT device (bat_trats.c) 125 126Also the struct pmic holds method (*low_power_mode) for reducing board's 127power consumption when one calls "pmic BAT_TRATS bat charge" command. 128 129How to add a new power device 130----------------------------- 131 1321. Simple device should be added with creation of file 133<pmic_function>_<pmic_name>.c, <pmic_name>_<pmic_function>.h according to the 134proposed and described above scheme. 135 136Then "pmic" command supports reading/writing/dump of device's internal 137registers. 138 1392. Charging battery with hierarchy 140Define devices as listed at 1. 141 142Define battery file (bat_<board>.c). Please also note that one might need a 143corresponding battery model description for FG. 144 145For points 1 and 2 use a generic function power_init_board() to initialise the 146power framework on your board. 147 148For reference, please look into the trats/trats2 boards. 149 150TO DO list (for PMICv3) - up till v2014.04 151------------------------------------------ 152 1531. Description of the devices related to power via device tree is not available. 154This is the main problem when a developer tries to build a multi-boot u-boot 155binary. The best would be to parse the DTS from Linux kernel. 156 1572. To support many instances of the same IC, like two MAX8997, one needs to 158copy the corresponding pmic_max8997.c file with changed name to "MAX8997_PMICX", 159where X is the device number. This problem will be addressed when extended 160pmic_core.c will support storing available devices in a list. 161 1623. Definition of batteries [*] (for trats/trats2) should be excluded from the 163code responsible for charging them and since it in fact describes the charging 164profile it should be put to a separate file. 165 1664. Adjust the framework to work with the device model. 167
README.pxe
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * Copyright 2010-2011 Calxeda, Inc. 4 */ 5 6The 'pxe' commands provide a near subset of the functionality provided by 7the PXELINUX boot loader. This allows U-Boot based systems to be controlled 8remotely using the same PXE based techniques that many non U-Boot based servers 9use. 10 11Commands 12======== 13 14pxe get 15------- 16 syntax: pxe get 17 18 follows PXELINUX's rules for retrieving configuration files from a tftp 19 server, and supports a subset of PXELINUX's config file syntax. 20 21 Environment 22 ----------- 23 'pxe get' requires two environment variables to be set: 24 25 pxefile_addr_r - should be set to a location in RAM large enough to hold 26 pxe files while they're being processed. Up to 16 config files may be 27 held in memory at once. The exact number and size of the files varies with 28 how the system is being used. A typical config file is a few hundred bytes 29 long. 30 31 bootfile,serverip - these two are typically set in the DHCP response 32 handler, and correspond to fields in the DHCP response. 33 34 'pxe get' optionally supports these two environment variables being set: 35 36 ethaddr - this is the standard MAC address for the ethernet adapter in use. 37 'pxe get' uses it to look for a configuration file specific to a system's 38 MAC address. 39 40 pxeuuid - this is a UUID in standard form using lower case hexadecimal 41 digits, for example, 550e8400-e29b-41d4-a716-446655440000. 'pxe get' uses 42 it to look for a configuration file based on the system's UUID. 43 44 File Paths 45 ---------- 46 'pxe get' repeatedly tries to download config files until it either 47 successfully downloads one or runs out of paths to try. The order and 48 contents of paths it tries mirrors exactly that of PXELINUX - you can 49 read in more detail about it at: 50 51 http://syslinux.zytor.com/wiki/index.php/Doc/pxelinux 52 53pxe boot 54-------- 55 syntax: pxe boot [pxefile_addr_r] 56 57 Interprets a pxe file stored in memory. 58 59 pxefile_addr_r is an optional argument giving the location of the pxe file. 60 The file must be terminated with a NUL byte. 61 62 Environment 63 ----------- 64 There are some environment variables that may need to be set, depending 65 on conditions. 66 67 pxefile_addr_r - if the optional argument pxefile_addr_r is not supplied, 68 an environment variable named pxefile_addr_r must be supplied. This is 69 typically the same value as is used for the 'pxe get' command. 70 71 bootfile - typically set in the DHCP response handler based on the 72 same field in the DHCP respone, this path is used to generate the base 73 directory that all other paths to files retrieved by 'pxe boot' will use. 74 If no bootfile is specified, paths used in pxe files will be used as is. 75 76 serverip - typically set in the DHCP response handler, this is the IP 77 address of the tftp server from which other files will be retrieved. 78 79 kernel_addr_r, initrd_addr_r - locations in RAM at which 'pxe boot' will 80 store the kernel(or FIT image) and initrd it retrieves from tftp. These 81 locations will be passed to the bootm command to boot the kernel. These 82 environment variables are required to be set. 83 84 fdt_addr_r - location in RAM at which 'pxe boot' will store the fdt blob it 85 retrieves from tftp. The retrieval is possible if 'fdt' label is defined in 86 pxe file and 'fdt_addr_r' is set. If retrieval is possible, 'fdt_addr_r' 87 will be passed to bootm command to boot the kernel. 88 89 fdt_addr - the location of a fdt blob. 'fdt_addr' will be passed to bootm 90 command if it is set and 'fdt_addr_r' is not passed to bootm command. 91 92 fdtoverlay_addr_r - location in RAM at which 'pxe boot' will temporarily store 93 fdt overlay(s) before applying them to the fdt blob stored at 'fdt_addr_r'. 94 95pxe file format 96=============== 97The pxe file format is nearly a subset of the PXELINUX file format; see 98http://syslinux.zytor.com/wiki/index.php/PXELINUX. It's composed of one line 99commands - global commands, and commands specific to labels. Lines begining 100with # are treated as comments. White space between and at the beginning of 101lines is ignored. 102 103The size of pxe files and the number of labels is only limited by the amount 104of RAM available to U-Boot. Memory for labels is dynamically allocated as 105they're parsed, and memory for pxe files is statically allocated, and its 106location is given by the pxefile_addr_r environment variable. The pxe code is 107not aware of the size of the pxefile memory and will outgrow it if pxe files 108are too large. 109 110Supported global commands 111------------------------- 112Unrecognized commands are ignored. 113 114default <label> - the label named here is treated as the default and is 115 the first label 'pxe boot' attempts to boot. 116 117menu title <string> - sets a title for the menu of labels being displayed. 118 119menu include <path> - use tftp to retrieve the pxe file at <path>, which 120 is then immediately parsed as if the start of its 121 contents were the next line in the current file. nesting 122 of include up to 16 files deep is supported. 123 124prompt <flag> - if 1, always prompt the user to enter a label to boot 125 from. if 0, only prompt the user if timeout expires. 126 127timeout <num> - wait for user input for <num>/10 seconds before 128 auto-booting a node. 129 130label <name> - begin a label definition. labels continue until 131 a command not recognized as a label command is seen, 132 or EOF is reached. 133 134Supported label commands 135------------------------ 136labels end when a command not recognized as a label command is reached, or EOF. 137 138menu default - set this label as the default label to boot; this is 139 the same behavior as the global default command but 140 specified in a different way 141 142kernel <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the kernel 143 (or FIT image) at <path>. it will be stored at the address 144 indicated in the kernel_addr_r environment variable, and 145 that address will be passed to bootm to boot this kernel. 146 For FIT image, The configuration specification can be 147 appended to the file name, with the format: 148 <path>#<conf>[#<extra-conf[#...]] 149 It will passed to bootm with that address. 150 (see: doc/uImage.FIT/command_syntax_extensions.txt) 151 It useful for overlay selection in pxe file 152 (see: doc/uImage.FIT/overlay-fdt-boot.txt) 153 154fdtoverlays <path> [...] - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the DT 155 overlay(s) at <path>. it will be temporarily stored at the 156 address indicated in the fdtoverlay_addr_r environment variable, 157 and then applied in the load order to the fdt blob stored at the 158 address indicated in the fdt_addr_r environment variable. 159 160append <string> - use <string> as the kernel command line when booting this 161 label. 162 163initrd <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the initrd 164 at <path>. it will be stored at the address indicated in 165 the initrd_addr_r environment variable, and that address 166 will be passed to bootm. 167 168fdt <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve the fdt blob 169 at <path>. it will be stored at the address indicated in 170 the fdt_addr_r environment variable, and that address will 171 be passed to bootm. 172 173fdtdir <path> - if this label is chosen, use tftp to retrieve a fdt blob 174 relative to <path>. If the fdtfile environment variable 175 is set, <path>/<fdtfile> is retrieved. Otherwise, the 176 filename is generated from the soc and board environment 177 variables, i.e. <path>/<soc>-<board>.dtb is retrieved. 178 If the fdt command is specified, fdtdir is ignored. 179 180localboot <flag> - Run the command defined by "localcmd" in the environment. 181 <flag> is ignored and is only here to match the syntax of 182 PXELINUX config files. 183 184Example 185------- 186Here's a couple of example files to show how this works. 187 188------------/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/menus/base.menu----------- 189menu title Linux selections 190 191# This is the default label 192label install 193 menu label Default Install Image 194 kernel kernels/install.bin 195 append console=ttyAMA0,38400 debug earlyprintk 196 initrd initrds/uzInitrdDebInstall 197 198# Just another label 199label linux-2.6.38 200 kernel kernels/linux-2.6.38.bin 201 append root=/dev/sdb1 202 203# The locally installed kernel 204label local 205 menu label Locally installed kernel 206 append root=/dev/sdb1 207 localboot 1 208------------------------------------------------------------- 209 210------------/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default------------------- 211menu include pxelinux.cfg/menus/base.menu 212timeout 500 213 214default linux-2.6.38 215------------------------------------------------------------- 216 217When a pxe client retrieves and boots the default pxe file, 218'pxe boot' will wait for user input for 5 seconds before booting 219the linux-2.6.38 label, which will cause /tftpboot/kernels/linux-2.6.38.bin 220to be downloaded, and boot with the command line "root=/dev/sdb1" 221 222Differences with PXELINUX 223========================= 224The biggest difference between U-Boot's pxe and PXELINUX is that since 225U-Boot's pxe support is written entirely in C, it can run on any platform 226with network support in U-Boot. Here are some other differences between 227PXELINUX and U-Boot's pxe support. 228 229- U-Boot's pxe does not support the PXELINUX DHCP option codes specified 230 in RFC 5071, but could be extended to do so. 231 232- when U-Boot's pxe fails to boot, it will return control to U-Boot, 233 allowing another command to run, other U-Boot command, instead of resetting 234 the machine like PXELINUX. 235 236- U-Boot's pxe doesn't rely on or provide an UNDI/PXE stack in memory, it 237 only uses U-Boot. 238 239- U-Boot's pxe doesn't provide the full menu implementation that PXELINUX 240 does, only a simple text based menu using the commands described in 241 this README. With PXELINUX, it's possible to have a graphical boot 242 menu, submenus, passwords, etc. U-Boot's pxe could be extended to support 243 a more robust menuing system like that of PXELINUX's. 244 245- U-Boot's pxe expects U-Boot uimg's as kernels. Anything that would work 246 with the 'bootm' command in U-Boot could work with the 'pxe boot' command. 247 248- U-Boot's pxe only recognizes a single file on the initrd command line. It 249 could be extended to support multiple. 250 251- in U-Boot's pxe, the localboot command doesn't necessarily cause a local 252 disk boot - it will do whatever is defined in the 'localcmd' env 253 variable. And since it doesn't support a full UNDI/PXE stack, the 254 type field is ignored. 255 256- the interactive prompt in U-Boot's pxe only allows you to choose a label 257 from the menu. If you want to boot something not listed, you can ctrl+c 258 out of 'pxe boot' and use existing U-Boot commands to accomplish it. 259
README.ramboot-ppc85xx
1 RAMBOOT for MPC85xx Platforms 2 ============================== 3 4RAMBOOT literally means boot from DDR. But since DDR is volatile memory some 5pre-mechanism is required to load the DDR with the bootloader binary. 6- In case of SD and SPI boot this is done by BootROM code inside the chip 7 itself. 8- In case of NAND boot FCM supports loading initial 4K code from NAND flash 9 which can initialize the DDR and get the complete bootloader copied to DDR. 10 11In addition to the above there could be some more methods to initialize the DDR 12and load it manually. 13Two of them are described below.There is also an explanation as to where these 14methods could be handy. 151. Load the RAM based bootloader onto DDR via JTAG/BDI interface. And then 16 execute the bootloader from DDR. 17 This may be handy in the following cases: 18 - In very early stage of platform bringup where other boot options are not 19 functional because of various reasons. 20 - In case the support to program the flashes on the board is not available. 21 222. Load the RAM based bootloader onto DDR using already existing bootloader on 23 the board.And then execute the bootloader from DDR. 24 Some usecases where this may be used: 25 - While developing some new feature of u-boot, for example USB driver or 26 SPI driver. 27 Suppose the board already has a working bootloader on it. And you would 28 prefer to keep it intact, at the same time want to test your bootloader. 29 In this case you can get your test bootloader binary into DDR via tftp 30 for example. Then execute the test bootloader. 31 - Suppose a platform already has a propreitery bootloader which does not 32 support for example AMP boot. In this case also RAM boot loader can be 33 utilized. 34 35 So basically when the original bootloader is required to be kept intact 36 RAM based bootloader can offer an updated bootloader on the system. 37 38Both the above Bootloaders are slight variants of SDcard or SPI Flash 39bootloader or for that matter even NAND bootloader. 40All of them define CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT. 41The main difference among all of them is the way the pre-environment is getting 42configured and who is doing that. 43- In case of SD card and SPI flash bootloader this is done by On Chip BootROM inside the Si itself. 44- In case of NAND boot SPL/TPL code does it with some support from Si itself. 45- In case of the pure RAM based bootloaders we have to do it by JTAG manually or already existing bootloader. 46 47How to use them: 481. Using JTAG 49 Boot up in core hold off mode or stop the core after reset using JTAG 50 interface. 51 Preconfigure DDR/L2SRAM through JTAG interface. 52 - setup DDR controller registers. 53 - setup DDR LAWs 54 - setup DDR TLB 55 Load the RAM based boot loader to the proper location in DDR/L2SRAM. 56 set up IAR (Instruction counter properly) 57 Enable the core to execute. 58 592. Using already existing bootloader. 60 get the rambased boot loader binary into DDR/L2SRAM via tftp. 61 execute the RAM based bootloader. 62 => tftp 11000000 u-boot-ram.bin 63 => go 1107f000 64 65Please note that L2SRAM can also be used instead of DDR if the SOC has 66sufficient size of L2SRAM. 67 68Necessary Code changes Required: 69===================================== 70Please note that below mentioned changes are for 85xx platforms. 71They have been tested on P1020/P2020/P1010 RDB. 72 73The main difference between the above two methods from technical perspective is 74that in 1st case SOC is just out of reset so it is in default configuration. 75(CCSRBAR is at 0xff700000). 76In the 2nd case bootloader has already re-located CCSRBAR to 0xffe00000 77 781. File name-> boards.cfg 79 There can be added specific Make options for RAMBoot. We can keep different 80 options for the two cases mentioned above. 81 for example 82 P1020RDB_JTAG_RAMBOOT and P1020RDB_GO_RAMBOOT. 83 842. platform config file 85 for example include/configs/P1_P2_RDB.h 86 87 #ifdef CONFIG_RAMBOOT 88 #define CONFIG_SDCARD 89 #endif 90 91 This will finally use the CONFIG_SYS_RAMBOOT. 92 933. Change CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT in menuconfig accordingly. 94 In the section of the particular SOC, for example P1020, pseudo code 95 96 #if defined(CONFIG_GO) 97 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 0xffe00000 98 #else 99 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 0xff700000 100 #endif 101 102For JTAG RAMBOOT this is not required because CCSRBAR is at ff700000. 103
README.rmobile
1Summary 2======= 3 4This README is about U-Boot support for Renesas's ARM Cortex-A9 based RMOBILE[1] 5and Cortex-A9/A53/A57 based R-Car[2] family of SoCs. Renesas's RMOBILE/R-Car SoC 6family contains an ARM Cortex-A9/A53/A57. 7 8Currently the following boards are supported: 9 10| SoC | Board | defconfig 11|===============+========================================+=================== 12| R8A73A0 | KMC KZM-A9-GT [3] | kzm9g_config 13| R8A7734 | Atmark-Techno Armadillo-800-EVA [4] | armadillo-800eva_config 14|===============+========================================+=================== 15| R8A7790 H2 | Renesas Electronics Lager | lager_defconfig 16| | Renesas Electronics Stout | stout_defconfig 17|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 18| R8A7791 M2-W | Renesas Electronics Koelsch | koelsch_defconfig 19| | Renesas Electronics Porter | porter_defconfig 20|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 21| R8A7792 V2H | Renesas Electronics Blanche | blanche_defconfig 22|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 23| R8A7793 M2-N | Renesas Electronics Gose | gose_defconfig 24|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 25| R8A7794 E2 | Renesas Electronics Alt | alt_defconfig 26| | Renesas Electronics Silk | silk_defconfig 27|===============+========================================+=================== 28| R8A7795 H3 | Renesas Electronics Salvator-XS ES2.0+ | r8a7795_salvator-x_defconfig 29| R8A7795 H3 | Renesas Electronics ULCB ES2.0+ | r8a7795_ulcb 30|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 31| R8A7796 M3-W | Renesas Electronics Salvator-X | r8a7796_salvator-x_defconfig 32| R8A7796 M3-W | Renesas Electronics ULCB | r8a7796_ulcb 33|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 34| R8A77965 M3-N | Renesas Electronics Salvator-XS | r8a77965_salvator-x_defconfig 35| R8A77965 M3-N | Renesas Electronics ULCB | r8a77965_ulcb 36|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 37| R8A77970 V3M | Renesas Electronics Eagle | r8a77970_eagle_defconfig 38|---------------+----------------------------------------+------------------- 39| R8A77995 D3 | Renesas Electronics Draak | r8a77995_draak_defconfig 40'===============+========================================+=================== 41 42Toolchain 43========= 44 45Either ARMv7 toolchain for 32bit Cortex-A9 systems or ARMv8 (aarch64) 46toolchain for 64bit Cortex-A53/A57 systems. Currently we compile the 4732bit systems with -march=armv5 to allow more compilers to work. (For 48U-Boot code this has no performance impact.) 49 50Currently, ELDK[5], Linaro[6], CodeSourcery[7] and Emdebian[8] supports 51ARMv7. Modern distributions also contain ARMv7 and ARMv8 crosstoolchains 52in their package feeds. 53 54Build 55===== 56 57Locate defconfig in the table above. Then apply standard build procedure: 58 59 make <board>_defconfig 60 make 61 62 Note: Armadillo-800-EVA's U-Boot supports booting from SDcard only. 63 Please see "B.2 Appendix B Boot Specifications" in hardware manual. 64 65Links 66===== 67 68[1] Renesas RMOBILE: 69 70http://am.renesas.com/products/soc/assp/mobile/r_mobile/index.jsp 71 72[2] Renesas R-Car: 73 74http://am.renesas.com/products/soc/assp/automotive/index.jsp 75 76[3] KZM-A9-GT 77 78http://www.kmckk.co.jp/kzma9-gt/index.html 79 80[4] Armadillo-800-EVA 81 82http://armadillo.atmark-techno.com/armadillo-800-EVA 83 84[5] ELDK 85 86http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/ELDK-5/WebHome#Section_1.6. 87 88[6] Linaro 89 90http://www.linaro.org/downloads/ 91 92[7] CodeSourcey 93 94http://www.mentor.com/embedded-software/codesourcery 95 96[8] Emdebian 97 98http://www.emdebian.org/crosstools.html 99
README.rockchip
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2015 Google. Inc 4# Written by Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org> 5 6U-Boot on Rockchip 7================== 8 9A wide range of Rockchip SoCs are supported in mainline U-Boot 10 11Warning 12======= 13This document is being moved to doc/board/rockchip, so information on it 14might be incomplete or outdated. 15 16Prerequisites 17============= 18 19You will need: 20 21 - Firefly RK3288 board or something else with a supported RockChip SoC 22 - Power connection to 5V using the supplied micro-USB power cable 23 - Separate USB serial cable attached to your computer and the Firefly 24 (connect to the micro-USB connector below the logo) 25 - rkflashtool [3] 26 - openssl (sudo apt-get install openssl) 27 - Serial UART connection [4] 28 - Suitable ARM cross compiler, e.g.: 29 sudo apt-get install gcc-4.7-arm-linux-gnueabi 30 31Building 32======== 33 341. To build RK3288 board: 35 36 CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabi- make O=firefly firefly-rk3288_defconfig all 37 38 (or you can use another cross compiler if you prefer) 39 402. To build RK3308 board: 41 - Get the rkbin 42 => git clone https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin.git 43 44 - Compile U-Boot 45 => cd /path/to/u-boot 46 => export BL31=/path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3308_bl31_v2.22.elf 47 => make roc-cc-rk3308_defconfig 48 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- all 49 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3308 -T rksd -d /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3308_ddr_589MHz_uart2_m0_v1.26.bin idbloader.img 50 => cat spl/u-boot-spl.bin >> idbloader.img 51 523. To build RK3399 board: 53 54 Option 1: Package the image with Rockchip miniloader: 55 56 - Compile U-Boot 57 58 => cd /path/to/u-boot 59 => make nanopi-neo4-rk3399_defconfig 60 => make 61 62 - Get the rkbin 63 64 => git clone https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin.git 65 66 - Create trust.img 67 68 => cd /path/to/rkbin 69 => ./tools/trust_merger RKTRUST/RK3399TRUST.ini 70 71 - Create uboot.img 72 73 => cd /path/to/rkbin 74 => ./tools/loaderimage --pack --uboot /path/to/u-boot/u-boot-dtb.bin uboot.img 75 76 (Get trust.img and uboot.img) 77 78 Option 2: Package the image with SPL: 79 80 - Export cross compiler path for aarch64 81 82 - Compile ATF 83 84 For Puma board. 85 86 => git clone git://git.theobroma-systems.com/arm-trusted-firmware.git 87 => cd arm-trusted-firmware 88 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- PLAT=rk3399 bl31 89 90 (export bl31.bin) 91 => export BL31=/path/to/arm-trusted-firmware/build/rk3399/release/bl31/bl31.bin 92 93 For rest of rk3399 boards. 94 95 => git clone https://github.com/ARM-software/arm-trusted-firmware.git 96 => cd arm-trusted-firmware 97 98 (export cross compiler path for Cortex-M0 MCU likely arm-none-eabi-) 99 => make realclean 100 => make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- PLAT=rk3399 101 102 (export bl31.elf) 103 => export BL31=/path/to/arm-trusted-firmware/build/rk3399/release/bl31/bl31.elf 104 105 - Compile PMU M0 firmware 106 107 This is optional for most of the rk3399 boards and required only for Puma board. 108 109 => git clone git://git.theobroma-systems.com/rk3399-cortex-m0.git 110 => cd rk3399-cortex-m0 111 112 (export cross compiler path for Cortex-M0 PMU) 113 => make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-cortex_m0-eabi- 114 115 (export rk3399m0.bin) 116 => export PMUM0=/path/to/rk3399-cortex-m0/rk3399m0.bin 117 118 - Compile U-Boot 119 120 => cd /path/to/u-boot 121 => make orangepi-rk3399_defconfig 122 => make 123 124 (Get spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin, u-boot.itb images and some boards would get 125 spl/u-boot-spl.bin since it doesn't enable CONFIG_SPL_OF_CONTROL 126 127 If TPL enabled on the target, get tpl/u-boot-tpl-dtb.bin or tpl/u-boot-tpl.bin 128 if CONFIG_TPL_OF_CONTROL not enabled) 129 130Writing to the board with USB 131============================= 132 133For USB to work you must get your board into ROM boot mode, either by erasing 134your MMC or (perhaps) holding the recovery button when you boot the board. 135To erase your MMC, you can boot into Linux and type (as root) 136 137 dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/mmcblk0 bs=1M 138 139Connect your board's OTG port to your computer. 140 141To create a suitable image and write it to the board: 142 143 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rkimage -d \ 144 ./firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \ 145 cat out | openssl rc4 -K 7c4e0304550509072d2c7b38170d1711 | rkflashtool l 146 147If all goes well you should something like: 148 149 U-Boot SPL 2015.07-rc1-00383-ge345740-dirty (Jun 03 2015 - 10:06:49) 150 Card did not respond to voltage select! 151 spl: mmc init failed with error: -17 152 ### ERROR ### Please RESET the board ### 153 154You will need to reset the board before each time you try. Yes, that's all 155it does so far. If support for the Rockchip USB protocol or DFU were added 156in SPL then we could in principle load U-Boot and boot to a prompt from USB 157as several other platforms do. However it does not seem to be possible to 158use the existing boot ROM code from SPL. 159 160 161Writing to the eMMC with USB on ROC-RK3308-CC 162============================================= 163For USB to work you must get your board into Bootrom mode, 164either by erasing the eMMC or short circuit the GND and D0 165on core board. 166 167Connect the board to your computer via tyepc. 168=> rkdeveloptool db rk3308_loader_v1.26.117.bin 169=> rkdeveloptool wl 0x40 idbloader.img 170=> rkdeveloptool wl 0x4000 u-boot.itb 171=> rkdeveloptool rd 172 173Then you will see the boot log from Debug UART at baud rate 1500000: 174DDR Version V1.26 175REGFB: 0x00000032, 0x00000032 176In 177589MHz 178DDR3 179 Col=10 Bank=8 Row=14 Size=256MB 180msch:1 181Returning to boot ROM... 182 183U-Boot SPL 2020.01-rc1-00225-g34b681327f (Nov 14 2019 - 10:58:04 +0800) 184Trying to boot from MMC1 185INFO: Preloader serial: 2 186NOTICE: BL31: v1.3(release):30f1405 187NOTICE: BL31: Built : 17:08:28, Sep 23 2019 188INFO: Lastlog: last=0x100000, realtime=0x102000, size=0x2000 189INFO: ARM GICv2 driver initialized 190INFO: Using opteed sec cpu_context! 191INFO: boot cpu mask: 1 192INFO: plat_rockchip_pmu_init: pd status 0xe b 193INFO: BL31: Initializing runtime services 194WARNING: No OPTEE provided by BL2 boot loader, Booting device without OPTEE initialization. SMC`s destined for OPTEE will rK 195ERROR: Error initializing runtime service opteed_fast 196INFO: BL31: Preparing for EL3 exit to normal world 197INFO: Entry point address = 0x600000 198INFO: SPSR = 0x3c9 199 200 201U-Boot 2020.01-rc1-00225-g34b681327f (Nov 14 2019 - 10:58:47 +0800) 202 203Model: Firefly ROC-RK3308-CC board 204DRAM: 254 MiB 205MMC: dwmmc@ff480000: 0, dwmmc@ff490000: 1 206rockchip_dnl_key_pressed read adc key val failed 207Net: No ethernet found. 208Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 209Card did not respond to voltage select! 210switch to partitions #0, OK 211mmc1(part 0) is current device 212Scanning mmc 1:4... 213Found /extlinux/extlinux.conf 214Retrieving file: /extlinux/extlinux.conf 215151 bytes read in 3 ms (48.8 KiB/s) 2161: kernel-mainline 217Retrieving file: /Image 21814737920 bytes read in 377 ms (37.3 MiB/s) 219append: earlycon=uart8250,mmio32,0xff0c0000 console=ttyS2,1500000n8 220Retrieving file: /rk3308-roc-cc.dtb 22128954 bytes read in 4 ms (6.9 MiB/s) 222Flattened Device Tree blob at 01f00000 223Booting using the fdt blob at 0x1f00000 224## Loading Device Tree to 000000000df3a000, end 000000000df44119 ... OK 225 226Starting kernel ... 227[ 0.000000] Booting Linux on physical CPU 0x0000000000 [0x410fd042] 228[ 0.000000] Linux version 5.4.0-rc1-00040-g4dc2d508fa47-dirty (andy@B150) (gcc version 6.3.1 20170404 (Linaro GCC 6.3-209 229[ 0.000000] Machine model: Firefly ROC-RK3308-CC board 230[ 0.000000] earlycon: uart8250 at MMIO32 0x00000000ff0c0000 (options '') 231[ 0.000000] printk: bootconsole [uart8250] enabled 232 233Booting from an SD card 234======================= 235 236To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/sdc): 237 238 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \ 239 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \ 240 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 && \ 241 sudo dd if=firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.img of=/dev/sdc seek=16384 242 243This puts the Rockchip header and SPL image first and then places the U-Boot 244image at block 16384 (i.e. 8MB from the start of the SD card). This 245corresponds with this setting in U-Boot: 246 247 #define CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR 0x4000 248 249Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see 250something like: 251 252 U-Boot 2016.01-rc2-00309-ge5bad3b-dirty (Jan 02 2016 - 23:41:59 -0700) 253 254 Model: Radxa Rock 2 Square 255 DRAM: 2 GiB 256 MMC: dwmmc@ff0f0000: 0, dwmmc@ff0c0000: 1 257 *** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment 258 259 In: serial 260 Out: vop@ff940000.vidconsole 261 Err: serial 262 Net: Net Initialization Skipped 263 No ethernet found. 264 Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 265 => 266 267The rockchip bootrom can load and boot an initial spl, then continue to 268load a second-stage bootloader (ie. U-Boot) as soon as the control is returned 269to the bootrom. Both the RK3288 and the RK3036 use this special boot sequence. 270The configuration option enabling this is: 271 272 CONFIG_SPL_ROCKCHIP_BACK_TO_BROM=y 273 274You can create the image via the following operations: 275 276 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \ 277 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out && \ 278 cat firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.bin >> out && \ 279 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 280 281Or: 282 ./firefly-rk3288/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rksd -d \ 283 firefly-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin:firefly-rk3288/u-boot-dtb.bin \ 284 out && \ 285 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 286 287If you have an HDMI cable attached you should see a video console. 288 289For evb_rk3036 board: 290 ./evb-rk3036/tools/mkimage -n rk3036 -T rksd -d evb-rk3036/spl/u-boot-spl.bin out && \ 291 cat evb-rk3036/u-boot-dtb.bin >> out && \ 292 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 293 294Or: 295 ./evb-rk3036/tools/mkimage -n rk3036 -T rksd -d \ 296 evb-rk3036/spl/u-boot-spl.bin:evb-rk3036/u-boot-dtb.bin out && \ 297 sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 298 299Note: rk3036 SDMMC and debug uart use the same iomux, so if you boot from SD, the 300 debug uart must be disabled 301 302 303Booting from an SD card on RK3288 with TPL 304========================================== 305 306Since the size of SPL can't be exceeded 0x8000 bytes in RK3288, it is not possible add 307new SPL features like Falcon mode or etc. 308 309So introduce TPL so-that adding new features to SPL is possible because now TPL should 310run minimal with code like DDR, clock etc and rest of new features in SPL. 311 312As of now TPL is added on Vyasa-RK3288 board. 313 314To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/mmcblk0): 315 316 sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=64 && 317 sudo dd if=u-boot-dtb.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=16384 318 319Booting from an SD card on RK3188 320================================= 321 322For rk3188 boards the general storage onto the card stays the same as 323described above, but the image creation needs a bit more care. 324 325The bootrom of rk3188 expects to find a small 1kb loader which returns 326control to the bootrom, after which it will load the real loader, which 327can then be up to 29kb in size and does the regular ddr init. This is 328handled by a single image (built as the SPL stage) that tests whether 329it is handled for the first or second time via code executed from the 330boot0-hook. 331 332Additionally the rk3188 requires everything the bootrom loads to be 333rc4-encrypted. Except for the very first stage the bootrom always reads 334and decodes 2kb pages, so files should be sized accordingly. 335 336# copy tpl, pad to 1020 bytes and append spl 337tools/mkimage -n rk3188 -T rksd -d spl/u-boot-spl.bin out 338 339# truncate, encode and append u-boot.bin 340truncate -s %2048 u-boot.bin 341cat u-boot.bin | split -b 512 --filter='openssl rc4 -K 7C4E0304550509072D2C7B38170D1711' >> out 342 343Booting from an SD card on Pine64 Rock64 (RK3328) 344================================================= 345 346For Rock64 rk3328 board the following three parts are required: 347TPL, SPL, and the u-boot image tree blob. 348 349 - Write TPL/SPL image at 64 sector 350 351 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=64 352 353 - Write u-boot image tree blob at 16384 sector 354 355 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/mmcblk0 seek=16384 356 357Booting from an SD card on RK3399 358================================= 359 360To write an image that boots from an SD card (assumed to be /dev/sdc): 361 362Option 1: Package the image with Rockchip miniloader: 363 364 - Create idbloader.img 365 366 => cd /path/to/u-boot 367 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3399 -T rksd -d /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3399_ddr_800MHz_v1.20.bin idbloader.img 368 => cat /path/to/rkbin/bin/rk33/rk3399_miniloader_v1.19.bin >> idbloader.img 369 370 - Write idbloader.img at 64 sector 371 372 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/sdc seek=64 373 374 - Write trust.img at 24576 375 376 => sudo dd if=trust.img of=/dev/sdc seek=24576 377 378 - Write uboot.img at 16384 sector 379 380 => sudo dd if=uboot.img of=/dev/sdc seek=16384 381 => sync 382 383Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see 384something like: 385 386DDR Version 1.20 20190314 387In 388Channel 0: DDR3, 933MHz 389Bus Width=32 Col=10 Bank=8 Row=15 CS=1 Die Bus-Width=16 Size=1024MB 390no stride 391ch 0 ddrconfig = 0x101, ddrsize = 0x20 392pmugrf_os_reg[2] = 0x10006281, stride = 0x17 393OUT 394Boot1: 2019-03-14, version: 1.19 395CPUId = 0x0 396ChipType = 0x10, 239 397mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000 398mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select! 399emmc reinit 400mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000 401mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select! 402emmc reinit 403mmc: ERROR: SDHCI ERR:cmd:0x102,stat:0x18000 404mmc: ERROR: Card did not respond to voltage select! 405SdmmcInit=2 1 406mmc0:cmd5,20 407SdmmcInit=0 0 408BootCapSize=0 409UserCapSize=60543MB 410FwPartOffset=2000 , 0 411StorageInit ok = 45266 412SecureMode = 0 413SecureInit read PBA: 0x4 414SecureInit read PBA: 0x404 415SecureInit read PBA: 0x804 416SecureInit read PBA: 0xc04 417SecureInit read PBA: 0x1004 418SecureInit read PBA: 0x1404 419SecureInit read PBA: 0x1804 420SecureInit read PBA: 0x1c04 421SecureInit ret = 0, SecureMode = 0 422atags_set_bootdev: ret:(0) 423GPT 0x3380ec0 signature is wrong 424recovery gpt... 425GPT 0x3380ec0 signature is wrong 426recovery gpt fail! 427LoadTrust Addr:0x4000 428No find bl30.bin 429Load uboot, ReadLba = 2000 430hdr 0000000003380880 + 0x0:0x88,0x41,0x3e,0x97,0xe6,0x61,0x54,0x23,0xe9,0x5a,0xd1,0x2b,0xdc,0x2f,0xf9,0x35, 431 432Load OK, addr=0x200000, size=0x9c9c0 433RunBL31 0x10000 434NOTICE: BL31: v1.3(debug):370ab80 435NOTICE: BL31: Built : 09:23:41, Mar 4 2019 436NOTICE: BL31: Rockchip release version: v1.1 437INFO: GICv3 with legacy support detected. ARM GICV3 driver initialized in EL3 438INFO: Using opteed sec cpu_context! 439INFO: boot cpu mask: 0 440INFO: plat_rockchip_pmu_init(1181): pd status 3e 441INFO: BL31: Initializing runtime services 442INFO: BL31: Initializing BL32 443INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_primary_helper:337: Initializing (1.1.0-195-g8f090d20 #6 Fri Dec 7 06:11:20 UTC 2018 aarch64) 444 445INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_primary_helper:338: Release version: 1.2 446 447INF [0x0] TEE-CORE:init_teecore:83: teecore inits done 448INFO: BL31: Preparing for EL3 exit to normal world 449INFO: Entry point address = 0x200000 450INFO: SPSR = 0x3c9 451 452 453U-Boot 2019.04-rc4-00136-gfd121f9641-dirty (Apr 16 2019 - 14:02:47 +0530) 454 455Model: FriendlyARM NanoPi NEO4 456DRAM: 1022 MiB 457MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0 458Loading Environment from MMC... *** Warning - bad CRC, using default environment 459 460In: serial@ff1a0000 461Out: serial@ff1a0000 462Err: serial@ff1a0000 463Model: FriendlyARM NanoPi NEO4 464Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000 465Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 466=> 467 468Option 2: Package the image with SPL: 469 470 - Prefix rk3399 header to SPL image 471 472 => cd /path/to/u-boot 473 => ./tools/mkimage -n rk3399 -T rksd -d spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin out 474 475 - Write prefixed SPL at 64th sector 476 477 => sudo dd if=out of=/dev/sdc seek=64 478 479 - Write U-Boot proper at 16384 sector 480 481 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/sdc seek=16384 482 => sync 483 484Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see 485something like: 486 487U-Boot SPL board init 488Trying to boot from MMC1 489 490 491U-Boot 2019.01-00004-g14db5ee998 (Mar 11 2019 - 13:18:41 +0530) 492 493Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board 494DRAM: 2 GiB 495MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0 496Loading Environment from MMC... OK 497In: serial@ff1a0000 498Out: serial@ff1a0000 499Err: serial@ff1a0000 500Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board 501Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000 502Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 503=> 504 505Option 3: Package the image with TPL: 506 507 - Write tpl+spl at 64th sector 508 509 => sudo dd if=idbloader.img of=/dev/sdc seek=64 510 511 - Write U-Boot proper at 16384 sector 512 513 => sudo dd if=u-boot.itb of=/dev/sdc seek=16384 514 => sync 515 516Put this SD (or micro-SD) card into your board and reset it. You should see 517something like: 518 519U-Boot TPL board init 520Trying to boot from BOOTROM 521Returning to boot ROM... 522 523U-Boot SPL board init 524Trying to boot from MMC1 525 526 527U-Boot 2019.07-rc1-00241-g5b3244767a (May 08 2019 - 10:51:06 +0530) 528 529Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board 530DRAM: 2 GiB 531MMC: dwmmc@fe310000: 2, dwmmc@fe320000: 1, sdhci@fe330000: 0 532Loading Environment from MMC... OK 533In: serial@ff1a0000 534Out: serial@ff1a0000 535Err: serial@ff1a0000 536Model: Orange Pi RK3399 Board 537Net: eth0: ethernet@fe300000 538Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0 539=> 540 541Using fastboot on rk3288 542======================== 543- Write GPT partition layout to mmc device which fastboot want to use it to 544store the image 545 546 => gpt write mmc 1 $partitions 547 548- Invoke fastboot command to prepare 549 550 => fastboot 1 551 552- Start fastboot request on PC 553 554 fastboot -i 0x2207 flash loader evb-rk3288/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin 555 556You should see something like: 557 558 => fastboot 1 559 WARNING: unknown variable: partition-type:loader 560 Starting download of 357796 bytes 561 .. 562 downloading of 357796 bytes finished 563 Flashing Raw Image 564 ........ wrote 357888 bytes to 'loader' 565 566Booting from SPI 567================ 568 569To write an image that boots from SPI flash (e.g. for the Haier Chromebook or 570Bob): 571 572 ./chromebook_jerry/tools/mkimage -n rk3288 -T rkspi \ 573 -d chromebook_jerry/spl/u-boot-spl-dtb.bin spl.bin && \ 574 dd if=spl.bin of=spl-out.bin bs=128K conv=sync && \ 575 cat spl-out.bin chromebook_jerry/u-boot-dtb.img >out.bin && \ 576 dd if=out.bin of=out.bin.pad bs=4M conv=sync 577 578This converts the SPL image to the required SPI format by adding the Rockchip 579header and skipping every second 2KB block. Then the U-Boot image is written at 580offset 128KB and the whole image is padded to 4MB which is the SPI flash size. 581The position of U-Boot is controlled with this setting in U-Boot: 582 583 #define CONFIG_SYS_SPI_U_BOOT_OFFS 0x20000 584 585If you have a Dediprog em100pro connected then you can write the image with: 586 587 sudo em100 -s -c GD25LQ32 -d out.bin.pad -r 588 589When booting you should see something like: 590 591 U-Boot SPL 2015.07-rc2-00215-g9a58220-dirty (Jun 23 2015 - 12:11:32) 592 593 594 U-Boot 2015.07-rc2-00215-g9a58220-dirty (Jun 23 2015 - 12:11:32 -0600) 595 596 Model: Google Jerry 597 DRAM: 2 GiB 598 MMC: 599 Using default environment 600 601 In: serial@ff690000 602 Out: serial@ff690000 603 Err: serial@ff690000 604 => 605 606Future work 607=========== 608 609Immediate priorities are: 610 611- USB host 612- USB device 613- Run CPU at full speed (code exists but we only see ~60 DMIPS maximum) 614- NAND flash 615- Boot U-Boot proper over USB OTG (at present only SPL works) 616 617 618Development Notes 619================= 620 621There are plenty of patches in the links below to help with this work. 622 623[1] https://github.com/rkchrome/uboot.git 624[2] https://github.com/linux-rockchip/u-boot-rockchip.git branch u-boot-rk3288 625[3] https://github.com/linux-rockchip/rkflashtool.git 626[4] http://wiki.t-firefly.com/index.php/Firefly-RK3288/Serial_debug/en 627 628rkimage 629------- 630 631rkimage.c produces an SPL image suitable for sending directly to the boot ROM 632over USB OTG. This is a very simple format - just the string RK32 (as 4 bytes) 633followed by u-boot-spl-dtb.bin. 634 635The boot ROM loads image to 0xff704000 which is in the internal SRAM. The SRAM 636starts at 0xff700000 and extends to 0xff718000 where we put the stack. 637 638rksd 639---- 640 641rksd.c produces an image consisting of 32KB of empty space, a header and 642u-boot-spl-dtb.bin. The header is defined by 'struct header0_info' although 643most of the fields are unused by U-Boot. We just need to specify the 644signature, a flag and the block offset and size of the SPL image. 645 646The header occupies a single block but we pad it out to 4 blocks. The header 647is encoding using RC4 with the key 7c4e0304550509072d2c7b38170d1711. The SPL 648image can be encoded too but we don't do that. 649 650The maximum size of u-boot-spl-dtb.bin which the boot ROM will read is 32KB, 651or 0x40 blocks. This is a severe and annoying limitation. There may be a way 652around this limitation, since there is plenty of SRAM, but at present the 653board refuses to boot if this limit is exceeded. 654 655The image produced is padded up to a block boundary (512 bytes). It should be 656written to the start of an SD card using dd. 657 658Since this image is set to load U-Boot from the SD card at block offset, 659CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_SECTOR, dd should be used to write 660u-boot-dtb.img to the SD card at that offset. See above for instructions. 661 662rkspi 663----- 664 665rkspi.c produces an image consisting of a header and u-boot-spl-dtb.bin. The 666resulting image is then spread out so that only the first 2KB of each 4KB 667sector is used. The header is the same as with rksd and the maximum size is 668also 32KB (before spreading). The image should be written to the start of 669SPI flash. 670 671See above for instructions on how to write a SPI image. 672 673rkmux.py 674-------- 675 676You can use this script to create #defines for SoC register access. See the 677script for usage. 678 679 680Device tree and driver model 681---------------------------- 682 683Where possible driver model is used to provide a structure to the 684functionality. Device tree is used for configuration. However these have an 685overhead and in SPL with a 32KB size limit some shortcuts have been taken. 686In general all Rockchip drivers should use these features, with SPL-specific 687modifications where required. 688 689GPT partition layout 690---------------------------- 691 692Rockchip use a unified GPT partition layout in open source support. 693With this GPT partition layout, uboot can be compatilbe with other components, 694like miniloader, trusted-os, arm-trust-firmware. 695 696There are some documents about partitions in the links below. 697http://rockchip.wikidot.com/partitions 698 699-- 700Jagan Teki <jagan@amarulasolutions.com> 70127 Mar 2019 702Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org> 70324 June 2015 704
README.rockusb
1Rockusb (Rockchip USB protocol) 2===================================================== 3 4Overview 5-------- 6 7Rockusb protocol is widely used by Rockchip SoC based devices. It can 8read/write info, image to/from devices. This document briefly describes how to 9use Rockusb for upgrading firmware (e.g. kernel, u-boot, rootfs, etc.). 10 11Tools 12-------- 13There are many tools can support Rockusb protocol. rkdeveloptool 14(https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkdeveloptool) is open source, 15It is maintained by Rockchip. People don't want to build from source 16can download from here 17(https://github.com/rockchip-linux/rkbin/blob/master/tools/rkdeveloptool) 18 19Usage 20-------- 21The Usage of Rockusb command is: 22 23rockusb <USB_controller> <devtype> <dev[:part]> 24 25e.g. rockusb 0 mmc 0 26 27On your U-Boot console, type this command to enter rockusb mode. 28On your host PC. use lsusb command. you should see a usb device 29using 0x2207 as its USB verdor id. 30 31for more detail about the rkdeveloptool. please read the usage. 32 33rkdeveloptool -h 34 35use rkdeveloptool wl command to write lba. BeginSec is the lba on device 36you want to write. 37 38sudo rkdeveloptool wl <BeginSec> <File> 39 40to flash U-Boot image use below command. U-Boot binary is made by mkimage. 41see doc/README.rockchip for more detail about how to get U-Boot binary. 42 43sudo rkdeveloptool wl 64 <U-Boot binary> 44 45Current set of rkdeveloptool commands supported: 46- rci: Read Chip Info 47- rfi: Read Flash Id 48- rd : Reset Device 49- td : Test Device Ready 50- rl : Read blocks using LBA 51- wl : Write blocks using LBA 52- wlx: Write partition 53 54To do 55----- 56* Fully support Rockusb protocol 57
README.s5p4418
1 2Summary 3======= 4 5This README is about U-Boot support for SAMSUNG's/NEXELL's ARM Cortex-A9 based 6S5P4418 SoC. It is based on FriendlyARM's U-Boot v2016.01 for the NanoPi2 7(and other) boards [1]. 8 9Currently the following boards are supported: 10 11* FriendlyArm NanoPi2 [2] 12* FriendlyArm NanoPC-T2 [3] 13 14 15Build 16===== 17 18* NanoPi2 and NanoPC-T2 19 20make s5p4418_nanopi2_defconfig 21make 22 23 24Installation 25============ 26 27- Download Official-ROMs-SDCard-20190718.7z from [4] (images files for android, 28 friendlyCore and LUbuntu) 29- Use s5p4418-sd-lubuntu-desktop-xenial-4.4-armhf-20190718.img to make a SD-card 30- Use dd in the directory where U-Boot has been built to update U-Boot: 31 (replace <SD-card> with the device used for the SD-card, e.g. sdc) 32 sudo dd seek=3841 if=u-boot.bin of=/dev/<SD-card> 33- Boot the board from this SD-card 34 35The source code for (the used?) LUbuntu 16.04 can be found at [5]. 36 37 38Links 39===== 40 41[1] FriendlyArm U-boot v2016.01: 42 43https://github.com/friendlyarm/u-boot/tree/nanopi2-v2016.01 44 45 46[2] NanoPi2: 47 48http://wiki.friendlyarm.com/wiki/index.php/NanoPi_2 49 50 51[3] NanoPC-T2: 52 53http://wiki.friendlyarm.com/wiki/index.php/NanoPC-T2 54 55 56[4] FriendlyArm image files for NanoPi2: 57 58http://download.friendlyarm.com//NanoPi2 59 60 61[5] FriendlyArm LUbuntu 16.04 Source Code for NanoPi2: 62 63https://github.com/friendlyarm/linux/tree/nanopi2-v4.4.y 64
README.s5pc1xx
1 2Summary 3======= 4 5This README is about U-Boot support for SAMSUNG's ARM Cortex-A8 based S5PC1xx 6family of SoCs (S5PC100 [1] and S5PC110). 7 8Currently the following board is supported: 9 10* SMDKC100 [2] 11 12Toolchain 13========= 14 15While ARM Cortex-A8 support ARM v7 instruction set (-march=armv7a) we compile 16with -march=armv5 to allow more compilers to work. For U-Boot code this has 17no performance impact. 18 19Build 20===== 21 22* SMDKC100 23 24make smdkc100_config 25make 26 27 28Interfaces 29========== 30 31cpu 32 33To check SoC: 34 35 if (cpu_is_s5pc100()) 36 printf("cpu is s5pc100\n"); 37 38 or 39 40 if (cpu_is_s5pc110()) 41 printf("cpu is s5pc110\n"); 42 43gpio 44 45 struct s5pc100_gpio *gpio = (struct s5pc100_gpio*)S5PC100_GPIO_BASE; 46 47 /* GPA[0] pin set to irq */ 48 gpio_cfg_pin(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, GPIO_IRQ); 49 50 /* GPA[0] pin set to input */ 51 gpio_direction_input(&gpio->gpio_a, 0); 52 53 /* GPA[0] pin set to output/high */ 54 gpio_direction_output(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, 1); 55 56 /* GPA[0] value set to low */ 57 gpio_set_value(&gpio->gpio_a, 0, 0); 58 59 /* get GPA[0] value */ 60 value = gpio_get_value(&gpio->gpio_a, 0); 61 62Links 63===== 64 65[1] S5PC100: 66 67http://www.samsung.com/global/business/semiconductor/productInfo.do? 68fmly_id=229&partnum=S5PC100 69 70[2] SMDKC100: 71 72http://meritech.co.kr/eng/products/product_view.php?num=28 73
README.sata
11. SATA usage in U-Boot 2 3 There are two ways to operate the hard disk 4 5 * Read/write raw blocks from/to SATA hard disk 6 * ext2load to read a file from ext2 file system 7 81.0 How to read the SATA hard disk's information? 9 10 => sata info 11 12SATA device 0: Model: ST3320620AS Firm: 3.AAD Ser#: 4QF01ZTN 13 Type: Hard Disk 14 Supports 48-bit addressing 15 Capacity: 305245.3 MB = 298.0 GB (625142448 x 512) 16 171.1 How to raw write the kernel, file system, dtb to a SATA hard disk? 18 19 Notes: Hard disk sectors are normally 512 bytes, so 20 0x1000 sectors = 2 MBytes 21 22 write kernel 23 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/uImage.837x 24 => sata write 40000 0 2000 25 26 write ramdisk 27 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/ramdisk.837x 28 => sata write 40000 2000 8000 29 30 write dtb 31 => tftp 40000 /tftpboot/mpc837xemds.dtb 32 => sata write 40000 a000 1000 33 341.2 How to raw read the kernel, file system, dtb from a SATA hard disk? 35 36 load kernel 37 => sata read 200000 0 2000 38 39 load ramdisk 40 => sata read 1000000 2000 8000 41 42 load dtb 43 => sata read 2000000 a000 1000 44 45 boot 46 => bootm 200000 1000000 2000000 47 481.3 How to load an image from an ext2 file system in U-Boot? 49 50 U-Boot doesn't support writing to an ext2 file system, so the 51 files must be written by other means (e.g. linux). 52 53 => ext2ls sata 0:1 / 54 <DIR> 4096 . 55 <DIR> 4096 .. 56 <DIR> 16384 lost+found 57 1352023 uImage.837x 58 3646377 ramdisk.837x 59 12288 mpc837xemds.dtb 60 12 hello.txt 61 62 => ext2load sata 0:1 200000 /uImage.837x 63 64 => ext2load sata 0:1 1000000 /ramdisk.837x 65 66 => ext2load sata 0:1 2000000 /mpc837xemds.dtb 67 68 => bootm 200000 1000000 2000000 69
README.sched
1Notes on the scheduler in sched.c: 2~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 3 4 'sched.c' provides an very simplistic multi-threading scheduler. 5 See the example, function 'sched(...)', in the same file for its 6 API usage. 7 8 Until an exhaustive testing can be done, the implementation cannot 9 qualify as that of production quality. It works with the example 10 in 'sched.c', it may or may not work in other cases. 11 12 13Limitations: 14~~~~~~~~~~~~ 15 16 - There are NO primitives for thread synchronization (locking, 17 notify etc). 18 19 - Only the GPRs and FPRs context is saved during a thread context 20 switch. Other registers on the PowerPC processor (60x, 7xx, 7xxx 21 etc) are NOT saved. 22 23 - The scheduler is NOT transparent to the user. The user 24 applications must invoke thread_yield() to allow other threads to 25 scheduler. 26 27 - There are NO priorities, and the scheduling policy is round-robin 28 based. 29 30 - There are NO capabilities to collect thread CPU usage, scheduler 31 stats, thread status etc. 32 33 - The semantics are somewhat based on those of pthreads, but NOT 34 the same. 35 36 - Only seven threads are allowed. These can be easily increased by 37 changing "#define MAX_THREADS" depending on the available memory. 38 39 - The stack size of each thread is 8KBytes. This can be easily 40 increased depending on the requirement and the available memory, 41 by increasing "#define STK_SIZE". 42 43 - Only one master/parent thread is allowed, and it cannot be 44 stopped or deleted. Any given thread is NOT allowed to stop or 45 delete itself. 46 47 - There NOT enough safety checks as are probably in the other 48 threads implementations. 49 50 - There is no parent-child relationship between threads. Only one 51 thread may thread_join, preferably the master/parent thread. 52 53(C) 2003 Arun Dharankar <ADharankar@ATTBI.Com> 54
README.scrapyard
1Over time, support for more and more boards gets added to U-Boot - 2while other board support code dies a silent death caused by 3negligence in combination with ordinary bitrot. Sometimes this goes 4by unnoticed, but often build errors will result. If nobody cares any 5more to resolve such problems, then the code is really dead and will 6be removed from the U-Boot source tree. The remainders rest in peace 7in the imperishable depths of the git history. Please use the tools 8git provides to read through this history. A common example would be: 9$ git log -p --follow -- board/technexion/twister 10to see the history and changes made to the Technexion "twister" board 11from introduction to removal. 12
README.semihosting
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * Copyright 2014 Broadcom Corporation. 4 */ 5 6Semihosting is ARM's way of having a real or virtual target communicate 7with a host or host debugger for basic operations such as file I/O, 8console I/O, etc. Please see 9http://infocenter.arm.com/help/index.jsp?topic=/com.arm.doc.dui0471c/Bgbjjgij.html for more information. 10 11For developing on armv8 virtual fastmodel platforms, semihosting is a 12valuable tool since it allows access to image/configuration files before 13eMMC or other NV media are available. 14 15There are two main ARM virtual Fixed Virtual Platform (FVP) models, 16Versatile Express (VE) FVP and BASE FVP (See 17http://www.arm.com/products/tools/models/fast-models/foundation-model.php) 18The initial vexpress64 u-boot board created here runs on the VE virtual 19platform using the license-free Foundation_v8 simulator. Fortunately, 20the Foundation_v8 simulator also supports the BASE_FVP model which 21companies can purchase licenses for and contain much more functionality. 22So we can, in u-boot, run either model by either using the VE FVP (default), 23or turning on CONFIG_BASE_FVP for the more full featured model. 24 25Rather than create a new armv8 board similar to armltd/vexpress64, add 26semihosting calls to the existing one, enabled with CONFIG_SEMIHOSTING 27and CONFIG_BASE_FVP both set. Also reuse the existing board config file 28vexpress_aemv8a.h but differentiate the two models by the presence or 29absence of CONFIG_BASE_FVP. This change is tested and works on both the 30Foundation and Base fastmodel simulators. 31 32The semihosting code adds a command: 33 34 smhload <image> <address> [env var] 35 36That will load an image from the host filesystem into RAM at the specified 37address and optionally store the load end address in the specified 38environment variable. 39
README.serial_multi
1The support for multiple serial interfaces as implemented is mainly 2intended to allow for modem dial-in / dial-out while still being able 3to use a serial console on a (different) serial port. 4 5MPC8XX Specific 6=============== 7At the moment, the ports must be split on a SMC and a SCC port on a 88xx processor; other configurations are not (yet) supported. 9 10Support for hardware handshake has not been implemented yet (but is 11in the works). 12 13*) The default console depends on the keys pressed: 14 - SMC if keys not pressed (modem not enabled) 15 - SCC if keys pressed (modem enabled) 16 17*) The console can be switched to SCC by any of the following commands: 18 19 setenv stdout serial_scc 20 setenv stdin serial_scc 21 setenv stderr serial_scc 22 23*) The console can be switched to SMC by any of the following commands: 24 25 setenv stdout serial_smc 26 setenv stdin serial_smc 27 setenv stderr serial_smc 28 29*) If a file descriptor is set to "serial" then the current serial device 30will be used which, in turn, can be switched by above commands. 31 32*) The baudrate is the same for all serial devices. But it can be switched 33just after switching the console: 34 35 setenv sout serial_scc; setenv baudrate 38400 36 37After that press 'enter' at the SCC console. Note that baudrates <38400 38are not allowed on LWMON with watchdog enabled (see CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE in 39include/configs/lwmon.h). 40 41 42PPC4XX Specific 43=============== 44*) The default console is UART0 45 46*) The console can be switched to UART1 by any of the following commands: 47 setenv stdout serial1 48 setenv stderr serial1 49 setenv stdin serial1 50 51*) The console can be switched to UART0 by any of the following commands: 52 setenv stdout serial0 53 setenv stderr serial0 54 setenv stdin serial0 55
README.sha1
1SHA1 usage: 2----------- 3 4In the U-Boot Image for the pcs440ep board is a SHA1 checksum integrated. 5This SHA1 sum is used, to check, if the U-Boot Image in Flash is not 6corrupted. 7 8The following command is available: 9 10=> help sha1 11sha1 address len [addr] calculate the SHA1 sum [save at addr] 12 -p calculate the SHA1 sum from the U-Boot image in flash and print 13 -c check the U-Boot image in flash 14 15"sha1 -p" 16 calculates and prints the SHA1 sum, from the Image stored in Flash 17 18"sha1 -c" 19 check, if the SHA1 sum from the Image stored in Flash is correct 20 21 22It is possible to calculate a SHA1 checksum from a memoryrange with: 23 24"sha1 address len" 25 26If you want to store a new Image in Flash for the pcs440ep board, 27which has no SHA1 sum, you can do the following: 28 29a) cp the new Image on a position in RAM (here 0x300000) 30 (for this example we use the Image from Flash, stored at 0xfffa0000 and 31 0x60000 Bytes long) 32 33"cp.b fffa0000 300000 60000" 34 35b) Initialize the SHA1 sum in the Image with 0x00 36 The SHA1 sum is stored in Flash at: 37 CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE + CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN + SHA1_SUM_POS 38 for the pcs440ep Flash: 0xfffa0000 + 0x60000 + -0x20 39 = 0xffffffe0 40 for the example in RAM: 0x300000 + 0x60000 + -0x20 41 = 0x35ffe0 42 43 note: a SHA1 checksum is 20 bytes long. 44 45"mw.b 35ffe0 0 14" 46 47c) now calculate the SHA1 sum from the memoryrange and write 48 the calculated checksum at the right place: 49 50"sha1 300000 60000 35ffe0" 51 52Now you have a U-Boot-Image for the pcs440ep board with the correct SHA1 sum. 53 54If you do a "buildman -k pcs440ep" or a "make all" to get the U-Boot image, 55which will be found in ../current/ipam390/ - the correct SHA1 sum will be 56automagically included in the U-Boot image. 57 58Heiko Schocher, 11 Jul 2007 59
README.silent
1The config option CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE can be used to quiet messages 2on the console. If the option has been enabled, the output can be 3silenced by setting the environment variable "silent". 4 5- CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE_UPDATE_ON_SET 6 When the "silent" variable is changed with env set, the change 7 will take effect immediately. 8 9- CONFIG_SILENT_CONSOLE_UPDATE_ON_RELOC 10 Some environments are not available until relocation (e.g. NAND) 11 so this will make the value in the flash env take effect at 12 relocation. 13 14The following actions are taken if "silent" is set at boot time: 15 16 - Until the console devices have been initialized, output has to be 17 suppressed by testing for the flag "GD_FLG_SILENT" in "gd->flags". 18 19 - When the console devices have been initialized, "stdout" and 20 "stderr" are set to "nulldev", so subsequent messages are 21 suppressed automatically. Make sure to enable "nulldev" by 22 enabling CONFIG_SYS_DEVICE_NULLDEV in your board defconfig file. 23 24 - When booting a linux kernel, the "bootargs" are fixed up so that 25 the argument "console=" will be in the command line, no matter how 26 it was set in "bootargs" before. If you don't want the linux command 27 line to be affected, define CONFIG_SILENT_U_BOOT_ONLY in your board 28 config file as well, and this part of the feature will be disabled. 29
README.socfpga
1---------------------------------------- 2SOCFPGA Documentation for U-Boot and SPL 3---------------------------------------- 4 5This README is about U-Boot and SPL support for Altera's ARM Cortex-A9MPCore 6based SOCFPGA. To know more about the hardware itself, please refer to 7www.altera.com. 8 9 10socfpga_dw_mmc 11-------------- 12 13Here are macro and detailed configuration required to enable DesignWare SDMMC 14controller support within SOCFPGA 15 16#define CONFIG_SYS_MMC_MAX_BLK_COUNT 256 17-> Using smaller max blk cnt to avoid flooding the limited stack in OCRAM 18 19--------------------------------------------------------------------- 20Cyclone 5 / Arria 5 generating the handoff header files for U-Boot SPL 21--------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 23This text is assuming quartus 16.1, but newer versions will probably work just fine too; 24verified with DE1_SOC_Linux_FB demo project (https://github.com/VCTLabs/DE1_SOC_Linux_FB). 25Updated/working projects should build using either process below. 26 27Note: it *should* work from Quartus 14.0.200 onwards, however, the current vendor demo 28projects must have the IP cores updated as shown below. 29 30Rebuilding your Quartus project 31------------------------------- 32 33Choose one of the follwing methods, either command line or GUI. 34 35Using the command line 36~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 37 38First run the embedded command shell, using your path to the Quartus install: 39 40 $ /path/to/intelFPGA/16.1/embedded/embedded_command_shell.sh 41 42Then (if necessary) update the IP cores in the project, generate HDL code, and 43build the project: 44 45 $ cd path/to/project/dir 46 $ qsys-generate soc_system.qsys --upgrade-ip-cores 47 $ qsys-generate soc_system.qsys --synthesis=[VERILOG|VHDL] 48 $ quartus_sh --flow compile <project name> 49 50Convert the resulting .sof file (SRAM object file) to .rbf file (Raw bit file): 51 52 $ quartus_cpf -c <project_name>.sof soc_system.rbf 53 54 55Generate BSP handoff files 56~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 57 58You can run the bsp editor GUI below, or run the following command from the 59project directory: 60 61 $ /path/to/bsb/tools/bsp-create-settings --type spl --bsp-dir build \ 62 --preloader-settings-dir hps_isw_handoff/soc_system_hps_0/ \ 63 --settings build/settings.bsp 64 65You should use the bsp "build" directory above (ie, where the settings.bsp file is) 66in the following u-boot command to update the board headers. Once these headers 67are updated for a given project build, u-boot should be configured for the 68project board (eg, de0-nano-sockit) and then build the normal spl build. 69 70Now you can skip the GUI section. 71 72 73Using the Qsys GUI 74~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 75 761. Navigate to your project directory 772. Run Quartus II 783. Open Project (Ctrl+J), select <project_name>.qpf 794. Run QSys [Tools->QSys] 80 4.1 In the Open dialog, select '<project_name>.qsys' 81 4.2 In the Open System dialog, wait until completion and press 'Close' 82 4.3 In the Qsys window, click on 'Generate HDL...' in bottom right corner 83 4.3.1 In the 'Generation' window, click 'Generate' 84 4.3.2 In the 'Generate' dialog, wait until completion and click 'Close' 85 4.4 In the QSys window, click 'Finish' 86 4.4.1 In the 'Quartus II' pop up window, click 'OK' 875. Back in Quartus II main window, do the following 88 5.1 Use Processing -> Start -> Start Analysis & Synthesis (Ctrl+K) 89 5.2 Use Processing -> Start Compilation (Ctrl+L) 90 91 ... this may take some time, have patience ... 92 936. Start the embedded command shell as shown in the previous section 94 6.1 Change directory to 'software/spl_bsp' 95 6.2 Prepare BSP by launching the BSP editor from ECS 96 => bsp-editor 97 6.3 In BSP editor 98 6.3.1 Use File -> Open 99 6.3.2 Select 'settings.bsp' file 100 6.3.3 Click Generate 101 6.3.4 Click Exit 102 103 104Post handoff generation 105~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 106 107Now that the handoff files are generated, U-Boot can be used to process 108the handoff files generated by the bsp-editor. For this, please use the 109following script from the u-boot source tree: 110 111 $ ./arch/arm/mach-socfpga/qts-filter.sh \ 112 <soc_type> \ 113 <input_qts_dir> \ 114 <input_bsp_dir> \ 115 <output_dir> 116 117Process QTS-generated files into U-Boot compatible ones. 118 119 soc_type - Type of SoC, either 'cyclone5' or 'arria5'. 120 input_qts_dir - Directory with compiled Quartus project 121 and containing the Quartus project file (QPF). 122 input_bsp_dir - Directory with generated bsp containing 123 the settings.bsp file. 124 output_dir - Directory to store the U-Boot compatible 125 headers. 126 127This will generate (or update) the following 4 files: 128 129 iocsr_config.h 130 pinmux_config.h 131 pll_config.h 132 sdram_config.h 133 134These files should be copied into "qts" directory in the board directory 135(see output argument of qts-filter.sh command above). 136 137Here is an example for the DE-0 Nano SoC after the above rebuild process: 138 139 $ ll board/terasic/de0-nano-soc/qts/ 140 total 36 141 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 8826 Mar 21 18:11 iocsr_config.h 142 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 4398 Mar 21 18:11 pinmux_config.h 143 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 3190 Mar 21 18:11 pll_config.h 144 -rw-r--r-- 1 sarnold sarnold 9022 Mar 21 18:11 sdram_config.h 145 146Note: file sizes will differ slightly depending on the selected board. 147 148Now your board is ready for full mainline support including U-Boot SPL. 149The Preloader will not be needed any more. 150 151---------------------------------------------------------- 152Arria 10 generating the handoff header files for U-Boot SPL 153---------------------------------------------------------- 154 155A header file for inclusion in a devicetree for Arria10 can be generated 156by the qts-filter-a10.sh script directly from the hps_isw_handoff/hps.xml 157file generated during the FPGA project compilation. The header contains 158all PLL, clock, pinmux, and bridge configurations required. 159 160Please look at the socfpga_arria10_socdk_sdmmc-u-boot.dtsi for an example 161that includes use of the generated handoff header. 162 163Devicetree header generation 164~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 165 166The qts-filter-a10.sh script can process the compile time genetated hps.xml 167to create the appropriate devicetree header. 168 169 170 $ ./arch/arm/mach-socfpga/qts-filter-a10.sh \ 171 <hps_xml> \ 172 <output_file> 173 174 hps_xml - hps_isw_handoff/hps.xml from Quartus project 175 output_file - Output filename and location for header file 176 177The script generates a single header file names <output_file> that should 178be placed in arch/arm/dts. 179
README.spear
1 2SPEAr (Structured Processor Enhanced Architecture). 3 4SPEAr600 is also known as SPEArPlus and SPEAr300 is also known as SPEArBasic 5 6The SPEAr SoC family embeds a customizable logic that can be programmed 7one-time by a customer at silicon mask level (i.e. not at runtime!). 8 9U-Boot supports four SoCs: SPEAr600, SPEAr3xx 10 11All 4 SoCs (SPEAr3xx and SPEAr600) share common peripherals. SPEAr300 and 12SPEAr600 do not have EMI. 13 141. ARM926ejs core based (sp600 has two cores, the 2nd handled only in Linux) 152. FastEthernet (sp600 has Gbit version, but same controller - GMAC) 163. USB Host 174. USB Device 185. NAND controller (FSMC) 196. Serial NOR ctrl 207. I2C 218. SPI 229. CLCD 2310. others .. 24 25Everything is supported in Linux. 26u-boot is currently not supporting all peripeharls (just a few as listed below). 271. USB Device 282. NAND controller (FSMC) 293. Serial Memory Interface 304. EMI (Parallel NOR interface) 314. I2C 325. UART 33 34Build options 35 make spear320_config 36 spear320 build with environment variables placed at default 37 location i.e. Serial NOR device 38 make spear320_pnor_config 39 This option generates a uboot image that supports emi controller 40 for CFI compliant parallel NOR flash. Environment variables are 41 placed in Parallel NOR device 42 make spear320_nand_config 43 spear320 build with environment variables placed in NAND device 44 make spear320_usbtty_config 45 spear320 build with usbtty terminal as default and environment 46 placed at default location 47 make spear320_usbtty_pnor_config 48 spear320 build with usbtty terminal as default and environment 49 placed in pnor device 50 make spear320_usbtty_nand_config 51 Build with usbtty terminal as default and environment placed in 52 NAND device 53 make spear300_config 54 make spear300_nand_config 55 make spear300_usbtty_config 56 make spear300_usbtty_nand_config 57 make spear310_config 58 make spear310_pnor_config 59 make spear310_nand_config 60 make spear310_usbtty_config 61 make spear310_usbtty_pnor_config 62 make spear310_usbtty_nand_config 63 make spear600_config 64 make spear600_nand_config 65 make spear600_usbtty_config 66 make spear600_usbtty_nand_config 67 68Mac id storage and retrieval in spear platforms 69 70Please read doc/README.enetaddr for the implementation guidelines for mac id 71usage. Basically, environment has precedence over board specific storage. The 72ethaddr beeing used for the network interface is always taken only from 73environment variables. Although, we can check the mac id programmed in i2c 74memory by using chip_config command 75
README.splashprepare
1--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2Splash Screen 3--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4The splash_screen_prepare() function is a weak function defined in 5common/splash.c. It is called as part of the splash screen display 6sequence. It gives the board an opportunity to prepare the splash 7image data before it is processed and sent to the frame buffer by 8U-Boot. Define your own version to use this feature. 9 10CONFIG_SPLASH_SOURCE 11 12Use the splash_source.c library. This library provides facilities to declare 13board specific splash image locations, routines for loading splash image from 14supported locations, and a way of controlling the selected splash location 15using the "splashsource" environment variable. 16 17splashsource works as follows: 18- If splashsource is set to a supported location name as defined by board code, 19 use that splash location. 20- If splashsource is undefined, use the first splash location as default. 21- If splashsource is set to an unsupported value, do not load a splash screen. 22 23A splash source location can describe either storage with raw data, a storage 24formatted with a file system or a FIT image. In case of a filesystem, the splash 25screen data is loaded as a file. The name of the splash screen file can be 26controlled with the environment variable "splashfile". 27 28To enable loading the splash image from a FIT image, CONFIG_FIT must be 29enabled. The FIT image has to start at the 'offset' field address in the 30selected splash location. The name of splash image within the FIT shall be 31specified by the environment variable "splashfile". 32 33In case the environment variable "splashfile" is not defined the default name 34'splash.bmp' will be used. 35
README.srio-pcie-boot-corenet
1--------------------------------------- 2SRIO and PCIE Boot on Corenet Platforms 3--------------------------------------- 4 5For some PowerPC processors with SRIO or PCIE interface, boot location can be 6configured to SRIO or PCIE by RCW. The processor booting from SRIO or PCIE can 7do without flash for u-boot image, ucode and ENV. All the images can be fetched 8from another processor's memory space by SRIO or PCIE link connected between 9them. 10 11This document describes the processes based on an example implemented on P4080DS 12platforms and a RCW example with boot from SRIO or PCIE configuration. 13 14Environment of the SRIO or PCIE boot: 15 a) Master and slave can be SOCs in one board or SOCs in separate boards. 16 b) They are connected with SRIO or PCIE links, whether 1x, 2x or 4x, and 17 directly or through switch system. 18 c) Only Master has NorFlash for booting, and all the Master's and Slave's 19 U-Boot images, UCodes will be stored in this flash. 20 d) Slave has its own EEPROM for RCW and PBI. 21 e) Slave's RCW should configure the SerDes for SRIO or PCIE boot port, set 22 the boot location to SRIO or PCIE, and holdoff all the cores. 23 24 ----------- ----------- ----------- 25 | | | | | | 26 | | | | | | 27 | NorFlash|<----->| Master |SRIO or PCIE | Slave |<---->[EEPROM] 28 | | | |<===========>| | 29 | | | | | | 30 ----------- ----------- ----------- 31 32The example based on P4080DS platform: 33 Two P4080DS platforms can be used to implement the boot from SRIO or PCIE. 34 Their SRIO or PCIE ports 1 will be connected directly and will be used for 35 the boot from SRIO or PCIE. 36 37 1. Slave's RCW example for boot from SRIO port 1 and all cores in holdoff. 38 00000000: aa55 aa55 010e 0100 0c58 0000 0000 0000 39 00000010: 1818 1818 0000 8888 7440 4000 0000 2000 40 00000020: f440 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 41 00000030: 0000 0000 0083 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 42 00000040: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0813 8040 063c 778f 43 44 2. Slave's RCW example for boot from PCIE port 1 and all cores in holdoff. 45 00000000: aa55 aa55 010e 0100 0c58 0000 0000 0000 46 00000010: 1818 1818 0000 8888 1440 4000 0000 2000 47 00000020: f040 0000 0100 0000 0020 0000 0000 0000 48 00000030: 0000 0000 0083 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 49 00000040: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0813 8040 547e ffc9 50 51 3. Sequence in Step by Step. 52 a) Update RCW for slave with boot from SRIO or PCIE port 1 configuration. 53 b) Program slave's U-Boot image, UCode, and ENV parameters into master's 54 NorFlash. 55 c) Set environment variable "bootmaster" to "SRIO1" or "PCIE1" and save 56 environment for master. 57 setenv bootmaster SRIO1 58 or 59 setenv bootmaster PCIE1 60 saveenv 61 d) Restart up master and it will boot up normally from its NorFlash. 62 Then, it will finish necessary configurations for slave's boot from 63 SRIO or PCIE port 1. 64 e) Master will set inbound SRIO or PCIE windows covered slave's U-Boot 65 image stored in master's NorFlash. 66 f) Master will set an inbound SRIO or PCIE window covered slave's UCode 67 and ENV stored in master's NorFlash. 68 g) Master will set outbound SRIO or PCIE windows in order to configure 69 slave's registers for the core's releasing. 70 h) Since all cores of slave in holdoff, slave should be powered on before 71 all the above master's steps, and wait to be released by master. In the 72 startup phase of the slave from SRIO or PCIE, it will finish some 73 necessary configurations. 74 i) Slave will set a specific TLB entry for the boot process. 75 j) Slave will set a LAW entry with the TargetID SRIO or PCIE port 1 for 76 the boot. 77 k) Slave will set a specific TLB entry in order to fetch UCode and ENV 78 from master. 79 l) Slave will set a LAW entry with the TargetID SRIO or PCIE port 1 for 80 UCode and ENV. 81 82How to use this feature: 83 To use this feature, you need to focus those points. 84 85 1. Slave's RCW with SRIO or PCIE boot configurations, and all cores in holdoff 86 configurations. 87 Please refer to the examples given above. 88 89 2. U-Boot image's compilation. 90 For master, U-Boot image should be generated normally. 91 92 For example, master U-Boot image used on P4080DS should be compiled with 93 94 make P4080DS_config. 95 96 For slave, U-Boot image should be generated specifically by 97 98 make xxxx_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_config. 99 100 For example, slave U-Boot image used on P4080DS should be compiled with 101 102 make P4080DS_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_config. 103 104 3. Necessary modifications based on a specific environment. 105 For a specific environment, the addresses of the slave's U-Boot image, 106 UCode, ENV stored in master's NorFlash, and any other configurations 107 can be modified in the file: 108 include/configs/corenet_ds.h. 109 110 4. Set and save the environment variable "bootmaster" with "SRIO1", "SRIO2" 111 or "PCIE1", "PCIE2", "PCIE3" for master, and then restart it in order to 112 perform the role as a master for boot from SRIO or PCIE. 113 114NOTE: When the Slave's ENV parameters are stored in Master's NorFlash, 115 it can fetch them through PCIE or SRIO interface. But the ENV 116 parameters can not be modified by "saveenv" or other commands under 117 the Slave's u-boot environment, because the Slave can not erase, 118 write Master's NorFlash by PCIE or SRIO link. 119
README.standalone
1Design Notes on Exporting U-Boot Functions to Standalone Applications: 2====================================================================== 3 41. The functions are exported by U-Boot via a jump table. The jump 5 table is allocated and initialized in the jumptable_init() routine 6 (common/exports.c). Other routines may also modify the jump table, 7 however. The jump table can be accessed as the 'jt' field of the 8 'global_data' structure. The struct members for the jump table are 9 defined in the <include/exports.h> header. E.g., to substitute the 10 malloc() and free() functions that will be available to standalone 11 applications, one should do the following: 12 13 DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR; 14 15 gd->jt->malloc = my_malloc; 16 gd->jt->free = my_free; 17 18 Note that the pointers to the functions are real function pointers 19 so the compiler can perform type checks on these assignments. 20 212. The pointer to the jump table is passed to the application in a 22 machine-dependent way. PowerPC, ARM, MIPS, Blackfin and Nios II 23 architectures use a dedicated register to hold the pointer to the 24 'global_data' structure: r2 on PowerPC, r9 on ARM, k0 on MIPS, 25 P3 on Blackfin and gp on Nios II. The x86 architecture does not 26 use such a register; instead, the pointer to the 'global_data' 27 structure is passed as 'argv[-1]' pointer. 28 29 The application can access the 'global_data' structure in the same 30 way as U-Boot does: 31 32 DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR; 33 34 printf("U-Boot relocation offset: %x\n", gd->reloc_off); 35 363. The application should call the app_startup() function before any 37 call to the exported functions. Also, implementor of the 38 application may want to check the version of the ABI provided by 39 U-Boot. To facilitate this, a get_version() function is exported 40 that returns the ABI version of the running U-Boot. I.e., a 41 typical application startup may look like this: 42 43 int my_app (int argc, char *const argv[]) 44 { 45 app_startup (argv); 46 if (get_version () != XF_VERSION) 47 return 1; 48 } 49 504. The default load and start addresses of the applications are as 51 follows: 52 53 Load address Start address 54 x86 0x00040000 0x00040000 55 PowerPC 0x00040000 0x00040004 56 ARM 0x0c100000 0x0c100000 57 MIPS 0x80200000 0x80200000 58 Blackfin 0x00001000 0x00001000 59 NDS32 0x00300000 0x00300000 60 Nios II 0x02000000 0x02000000 61 RISC-V 0x00600000 0x00600000 62 63 For example, the "hello world" application may be loaded and 64 executed on a PowerPC board with the following commands: 65 66 => tftp 0x40000 hello_world.bin 67 => go 0x40004 68 695. To export some additional function long foobar(int i,char c), the following steps 70 should be undertaken: 71 72 - Append the following line at the end of the include/_exports.h 73 file: 74 75 EXPORT_FUNC(foobar, long, foobar, int, char) 76 77 Parameters to EXPORT_FUNC: 78 - the first parameter is the function that is exported (default implementation) 79 - the second parameter is the return value type 80 - the third parameter is the name of the member in struct jt_funcs 81 this is also the name that the standalone application will used. 82 the rest of the parameters are the function arguments 83 84 - Add the prototype for this function to the include/exports.h 85 file: 86 87 long foobar(int i, char c); 88 89 Initialization with the default implementation is done in jumptable_init() 90 91 You can override the default implementation using: 92 93 gd->jt->foobar = another_foobar; 94 95 The signature of another_foobar must then match the declaration of foobar. 96 97 - Increase the XF_VERSION value by one in the include/exports.h 98 file 99 100 - If you want to export a function which depends on a CONFIG_XXX 101 use 2 lines like this: 102 #ifdef CONFIG_FOOBAR 103 EXPORT_FUNC(foobar, long, foobar, int, char) 104 #else 105 EXPORT_FUNC(dummy, void, foobar, void) 106 #endif 107 108 1096. The code for exporting the U-Boot functions to applications is 110 mostly machine-independent. The only places written in assembly 111 language are stub functions that perform the jump through the jump 112 table. That said, to port this code to a new architecture, the 113 only thing to be provided is the code in the examples/stubs.c 114 file. If this architecture, however, uses some uncommon method of 115 passing the 'global_data' pointer (like x86 does), one should add 116 the respective code to the app_startup() function in that file. 117 118 Note that these functions may only use call-clobbered registers; 119 those registers that are used to pass the function's arguments, 120 the stack contents and the return address should be left intact. 121
README.t1040-l2switch
1This file contains information for VSC9953, a Vitesse L2 Switch IP 2which is integrated in the T1040/T1020 Freescale SoCs. 3 4About Device: 5============= 6VSC9953 is an 8-port Gigabit Ethernet switch supports the following features: 7 - 8192 MAC addresses 8 - Static Address provisioning 9 - Dynamic learning of MAC addresses and aging 10 - 4096 VLANs 11 - Independent and shared VLAN learning (IVL, SVL) 12 - Policing with storm control and MC/BC protection 13 - IPv4 and IPv6 multicast 14 - Jumbo frames (9.6 KB) 15 - Access Control List 16 - VLAN editing, translation and remarking 17 - RMON counters per port 18 19Switch interfaces: 20 - 8 Gigabit switch ports (ports 0 to 7) are external and are connected to external PHYs 21 - 2 switch ports (ports 8 and 9) of 2.5 G are connected (fixed links) 22 to FMan ports (FM1@DTSEC1 and FM1@DTSEC2) 23 24Commands Overview: 25============= 26Commands supported 27 - enable/disable a port or show its configuration (speed, duplexity, status, etc.) 28 - port statistics 29 - MAC learning 30 - add/remove FDB entries 31 - Port-based VLAN 32 - Private/Shared VLAN learning 33 - VLAN ingress filtering 34 - Port LAG 35 36Commands syntax 37ethsw [port <port_no>] { enable | disable | show } - enable/disable a port; show a port's configuration 38ethsw [port <port_no>] statistics { [help] | [clear] } - show an l2 switch port's statistics 39ethsw [port <port_no>] learning { [help] | show | auto | disable } - enable/disable/show learning configuration on a port 40ethsw [port <port_no>] [vlan <vid>] fdb { [help] | show | flush | { add | del } <mac> } - add/delete a mac entry in FDB; use show to see FDB entries; 41 if [vlan <vid>] is missing, VID 1 will be used 42ethsw [port <port_no>] pvid { [help] | show | <pvid> } - set/show PVID (ingress and egress VLAN tagging) for a port 43ethsw [port <port_no>] vlan { [help] | show | add <vid> | del <vid> } - add a VLAN to a port (VLAN members) 44ethsw [port <port_no>] untagged { [help] | show | all | none | pvid } - set egress tagging mode for a port 45ethsw [port <port_no>] egress tag { [help] | show | pvid | classified } - configure VID source for egress tag. 46 Tag's VID could be the frame's classified VID or the PVID of the port 47ethsw vlan fdb { [help] | show | shared | private } - make VLAN learning shared or private 48ethsw [port <port_no>] ingress filtering { [help] | show | enable | disable } - enable/disable VLAN ingress filtering on port 49ethsw [port <port_no>] aggr { [help] | show | <lag_group_no> } - get/set LAG group for a port 50 51=> ethsw show 52 Port Status Link Speed Duplex 53 0 enabled down 10 half 54 1 enabled down 10 half 55 2 enabled down 10 half 56 3 enabled up 1000 full 57 4 disabled down - half 58 5 disabled down - half 59 6 disabled down - half 60 7 disabled down - half 61 8 enabled up 2500 full 62 9 enabled up 2500 full 63=> 64
README.tee
1============= 2TEE uclass 3============= 4 5This document describes the TEE uclass in U-Boot 6 7A TEE (Trusted Execution Environment) is a trusted OS running in some 8secure environment, for example, TrustZone on ARM CPUs, or a separate 9secure co-processor etc. A TEE driver handles the details needed to 10communicate with the TEE. 11 12This uclass deals with: 13 14- Registration of TEE drivers 15 16- Managing shared memory between U-Boot and the TEE 17 18- Providing a generic API to the TEE 19 20The TEE interface 21================= 22 23include/tee.h defines the generic interface to a TEE. 24 25A client finds the TEE device via tee_find_device(). Other important functions 26when interfacing with a TEE are: 27 28- tee_shm_alloc(), tee_shm_register() and tee_shm_free() to manage shared 29 memory objects often needed when communicating with the TEE. 30 31- tee_get_version() lets the client know which the capabilities of the TEE 32 device. 33 34- tee_open_session() opens a session to a Trusted Application 35 36- tee_invoke_func() invokes a function in a Trusted Application 37 38- tee_close_session() closes a session to a Trusted Application 39 40Much of the communication between clients and the TEE is opaque to the 41driver. The main job for the driver is to receive requests from the 42clients, forward them to the TEE and send back the results. 43 44OP-TEE driver 45============= 46 47The OP-TEE driver handles OP-TEE [1] based TEEs. Currently it is only the ARM 48TrustZone based OP-TEE solution that is supported. 49 50Lowest level of communication with OP-TEE builds on ARM SMC Calling 51Convention (SMCCC) [2], which is the foundation for OP-TEE's SMC interface 52[3] used internally by the driver. Stacked on top of that is OP-TEE Message 53Protocol [4]. 54 55OP-TEE SMC interface provides the basic functions required by SMCCC and some 56additional functions specific for OP-TEE. The most interesting functions are: 57 58- OPTEE_SMC_FUNCID_CALLS_UID (part of SMCCC) returns the version information 59 which is then returned by TEE_IOC_VERSION 60 61- OPTEE_SMC_CALL_GET_OS_UUID returns the particular OP-TEE implementation, used 62 to tell, for instance, a TrustZone OP-TEE apart from an OP-TEE running on a 63 separate secure co-processor. 64 65- OPTEE_SMC_CALL_WITH_ARG drives the OP-TEE message protocol 66 67- OPTEE_SMC_GET_SHM_CONFIG lets the driver and OP-TEE agree on which memory 68 range to used for shared memory between Linux and OP-TEE. 69 70The GlobalPlatform TEE Client API [5] is implemented on top of the generic 71TEE API. 72 73Picture of the relationship between the different components in the 74OP-TEE architecture: 75 76 U-Boot Secure world 77 ~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~ 78 +------------+ +-------------+ 79 | Client | | Trusted | 80 | | | Application | 81 +------------+ +-------------+ 82 /\ /\ 83 || || 84 \/ \/ 85 +------------+ +-------------+ 86 | TEE | | TEE Internal| 87 | uclass | | API | 88 +------------+ +-------------+ 89 | OP-TEE | | OP-TEE | 90 | driver | | Trusted OS | 91 +------------+-----------+-------------+ 92 | OP-TEE MSG | 93 | SMCCC (OPTEE_SMC_CALL_*) | 94 +--------------------------------------+ 95 96RPC (Remote Procedure Call) are requests from secure world to the driver. 97An RPC is identified by a special range of SMCCC return values from 98OPTEE_SMC_CALL_WITH_ARG. 99 100References 101========== 102 103[1] https://github.com/OP-TEE/optee_os 104 105[2] http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.den0028a/index.html 106 107[3] drivers/tee/optee/optee_smc.h 108 109[4] drivers/tee/optee/optee_msg.h 110 111[5] http://www.globalplatform.org/specificationsdevice.asp look for 112 "TEE Client API Specification v1.0" and click download. 113
README.ti-secure
1README on how boot images are created for secure TI devices 2 3CONFIG_TI_SECURE_DEVICE: 4Secure TI devices require a boot image that is authenticated by ROM 5code to function. Without this, even JTAG remains locked and the 6device is essentially useless. In order to create a valid boot image for 7a secure device from TI, the initial public software image must be signed 8and combined with various headers, certificates, and other binary images. 9 10Information on the details on the complete boot image format can be obtained 11from Texas Instruments. The tools used to generate boot images for secure 12devices are part of a secure development package (SECDEV) that can be 13downloaded from: 14 15 http://www.ti.com/mysecuresoftware (login required) 16 17The secure development package is access controlled due to NDA and export 18control restrictions. Access must be requested and granted by TI before the 19package is viewable and downloadable. Contact TI, either online or by way 20of a local TI representative, to request access. 21 22Booting of U-Boot SPL 23===================== 24 25 When CONFIG_TI_SECURE_DEVICE is set, the U-Boot SPL build process 26 requires the presence and use of these tools in order to create a 27 viable boot image. The build process will look for the environment 28 variable TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG, which should be the path of the installed 29 SECDEV package. If the TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG variable is not defined or 30 if it is defined but doesn't point to a valid SECDEV package, a 31 warning is issued during the build to indicate that a final secure 32 bootable image was not created. 33 34 Within the SECDEV package exists an image creation script: 35 36 ${TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG}/scripts/create-boot-image.sh 37 38 This is called as part of the SPL/u-boot build process. As the secure 39 boot image formats and requirements differ between secure SOC from TI, 40 the purpose of this script is to abstract these details as much as 41 possible. 42 43 The script is basically the only required interface to the TI SECDEV 44 package for creating a bootable SPL image for secure TI devices. 45 46 Invoking the script for AM33xx Secure Devices 47 ============================================= 48 49 create-boot-image.sh \ 50 <IMAGE_FLAG> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> 51 52 <IMAGE_FLAG> is a value that specifies the type of the image to 53 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid 54 values are: 55 SPI_X-LOADER - Generates an image for SPI flash (byte swapped) 56 X-LOADER - Generates an image for non-XIP flash 57 MLO - Generates an image for SD/MMC/eMMC media 58 2ND - Generates an image for USB, UART and Ethernet 59 XIP_X-LOADER - Generates a single stage u-boot for NOR/QSPI XiP 60 61 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot 62 loaderbinary file (depending on the boot media, this is usually 63 either u-boot-spl.bin or u-boot.bin). 64 65 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure 66 image. The output binary images should be used in place of the standard 67 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides and 68 releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used) 69 u-boot-spl_HS_SPI_X-LOADER - byte swapped boot image for SPI flash 70 u-boot-spl_HS_X-LOADER - boot image for NAND or SD/MMC/eMMC rawmode 71 u-boot-spl_HS_MLO - boot image for SD/MMC/eMMC media 72 u-boot-spl_HS_2ND - boot image for USB, UART and Ethernet 73 u-boot_HS_XIP_X-LOADER - boot image for NOR or QSPI Xip flash 74 75 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the 76 <INPUT_FILE> 77 78 Invoking the script for AM43xx Secure Devices 79 ============================================= 80 81 create-boot-image.sh \ 82 <IMAGE_FLAG> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> 83 84 <IMAGE_FLAG> is a value that specifies the type of the image to 85 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid 86 values are: 87 SPI_X-LOADER - Generates an image for SPI flash (byte 88 swapped) 89 XIP_X-LOADER - Generates a single stage u-boot for 90 NOR/QSPI XiP 91 ISSW - Generates an image for all other boot modes 92 93 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot 94 loaderbinary file (depending on the boot media, this is usually 95 either u-boot-spl.bin or u-boot.bin). 96 97 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure 98 image. The output binary images should be used in place of the standard 99 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides and 100 releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used) 101 u-boot-spl_HS_SPI_X-LOADER - byte swapped boot image for SPI flash 102 u-boot_HS_XIP_X-LOADER - boot image for NOR or QSPI flash 103 u-boot-spl_HS_ISSW - boot image for all other boot media 104 105 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the 106 <INPUT_FILE> 107 108 Invoking the script for DRA7xx/AM57xx Secure Devices 109 ==================================================== 110 111 create-boot-image.sh \ 112 <IMAGE_TYPE> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> 113 114 <IMAGE_TYPE> is a value that specifies the type of the image to 115 generate OR the action the image generation tool will take. Valid 116 values are: 117 X-LOADER - Generates an image for NOR or QSPI boot modes 118 MLO - Generates an image for SD/MMC/eMMC boot modes 119 ULO - Generates an image for USB/UART peripheral boot modes 120 121 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot 122 loader binary file (for this platform, this is always u-boot-spl.bin). 123 124 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure image. 125 The output binary images should be used in place of the standard 126 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides 127 and releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used) 128 u-boot-spl_HS_MLO - boot image for SD/MMC/eMMC. This image is 129 copied to a file named MLO, which is the name that 130 the device ROM bootloader requires for loading from 131 the FAT partition of an SD card (same as on 132 non-secure devices) 133 u-boot-spl_HS_ULO - boot image for USB/UART peripheral boot modes 134 u-boot-spl_HS_X-LOADER - boot image for all other flash memories 135 including QSPI and NOR flash 136 137 <SPL_LOAD_ADDR> is the address at which SOC ROM should load the 138 <INPUT_FILE> 139 140 Invoking the script for Keystone2 Secure Devices 141 ================================================ 142 143 create-boot-image.sh \ 144 <UNUSED> <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> <UNUSED> 145 146 <UNUSED> is currently ignored and reserved for future use. 147 148 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the public world boot 149 loader binary file (only u-boot.bin is currently supported on 150 Keystone2 devices, u-boot-spl.bin is not currently supported). 151 152 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the final secure image. 153 The output binary images should be used in place of the standard 154 non-secure binary images (see the platform-specific user's guides 155 and releases notes for how the non-secure images are typically used) 156 u-boot_HS_MLO - signed and encrypted boot image that can be used to 157 boot from all media. Secure boot from SPI NOR flash is not 158 currently supported. 159 160 Invoking the script for K3 Secure Devices 161 ========================================= 162 163 The signing steps required to produce a bootable SPL image on secure 164 K3 TI devices are the same as those performed on non-secure devices. 165 The only difference is the key is not checked on non-secure devices so 166 a dummy key is used when building U-Boot for those devices. For secure 167 K3 TI devices simply use the real hardware key for your device. This 168 real key can be set with the Kconfig option "K3_KEY". The environment 169 variable TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG is also searched for real keys when the 170 build targets secure devices. 171 172Booting of Primary U-Boot (u-boot.img) 173====================================== 174 175 The SPL image is responsible for loading the next stage boot loader, 176 which is the main u-boot image. For secure TI devices, the SPL will 177 be authenticated, as described above, as part of the particular 178 device's ROM boot process. In order to continue the secure boot 179 process, the authenticated SPL must authenticate the main u-boot 180 image that it loads. 181 182 The configurations for secure TI platforms are written to make the boot 183 process use the FIT image format for the u-boot.img (CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK 184 and CONFIG_SPL_LOAD_FIT). With these configurations the binary 185 components that the SPL loads include a specific DTB image and u-boot 186 image. These DTB image may be one of many available to the boot 187 process. In order to secure these components so that they can be 188 authenticated by the SPL as they are loaded from the FIT image, the 189 build procedure for secure TI devices will secure these images before 190 they are integrated into the FIT image. When those images are extracted 191 from the FIT image at boot time, they are post-processed to verify that 192 they are still secure. The outlined security-related SPL post-processing 193 is enabled through the CONFIG_SPL_FIT_IMAGE_POST_PROCESS option which 194 must be enabled for the secure boot scheme to work. In order to allow 195 verifying proper operation of the secure boot chain in case of successful 196 authentication messages like "Authentication passed" are output by the 197 SPL to the console for each blob that got extracted from the FIT image. 198 199 The exact details of the how the images are secured is handled by the 200 SECDEV package. Within the SECDEV package exists a script to process 201 an input binary image: 202 203 ${TI_SECURE_DEV_PKG}/scripts/secure-binary-image.sh 204 205 This is called as part of the u-boot build process. As the secure 206 image formats and requirements can differ between the various secure 207 SOCs from TI, this script in the SECDEV package abstracts these 208 details. This script is essentially the only required interface to the 209 TI SECDEV package for creating a u-boot.img image for secure TI 210 devices. 211 212 The SPL/u-boot code contains calls to dedicated secure ROM functions 213 to perform the validation on the secured images. The details of the 214 interface to those functions is shown in the code. The summary 215 is that they are accessed by invoking an ARM secure monitor call to 216 the device's secure ROM (fixed read-only-memory that is secure and 217 only accessible when the ARM core is operating in the secure mode). 218 219 Invoking the secure-binary-image script for Secure Devices 220 ========================================================== 221 222 secure-binary-image.sh <INPUT_FILE> <OUTPUT_FILE> 223 224 <INPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the input binary image 225 226 <OUTPUT_FILE> is the full path and filename of the output secure image. 227
README.ubi
1------------------- 2UBI usage in U-Boot 3------------------- 4 5UBI support in U-Boot is broken down into five separate commands. 6The first is the ubi command, which has six subcommands: 7 8=> help ubi 9ubi - ubi commands 10 11Usage: 12ubi part [part] [offset] 13 - Show or set current partition (with optional VID header offset) 14ubi info [l[ayout]] - Display volume and ubi layout information 15ubi create[vol] volume [size] [type] - create volume name with size 16ubi write[vol] address volume size - Write volume from address with size 17ubi write.part address volume size [fullsize] 18 - Write part of a volume from address 19ubi read[vol] address volume [size] - Read volume to address with size 20ubi remove[vol] volume - Remove volume 21[Legends] 22 volume: character name 23 size: specified in bytes 24 type: s[tatic] or d[ynamic] (default=dynamic) 25 26 27The first command that is needed to be issues is "ubi part" to connect 28one mtd partition to the UBI subsystem. This command will either create 29a new UBI device on the requested MTD partition. Or it will attach a 30previously created UBI device. The other UBI commands will only work 31when such a UBI device is attached (via "ubi part"). Here an example: 32 33=> mtdparts 34 35device nor0 <1fc000000.nor_flash>, # parts = 6 36 #: name size offset mask_flags 37 0: kernel 0x00200000 0x00000000 0 38 1: dtb 0x00040000 0x00200000 0 39 2: root 0x00200000 0x00240000 0 40 3: user 0x01ac0000 0x00440000 0 41 4: env 0x00080000 0x01f00000 0 42 5: u-boot 0x00080000 0x01f80000 0 43 44active partition: nor0,0 - (kernel) 0x00200000 @ 0x00000000 45 46defaults: 47mtdids : nor0=1fc000000.nor_flash 48mtdparts: mtdparts=1fc000000.nor_flash:2m(kernel),256k(dtb),2m(root),27392k(user),512k(env),512k(u-boot) 49 50=> ubi part root 51Creating 1 MTD partitions on "nor0": 520x000000240000-0x000000440000 : "mtd=2" 53UBI: attaching mtd1 to ubi0 54UBI: physical eraseblock size: 262144 bytes (256 KiB) 55UBI: logical eraseblock size: 262016 bytes 56UBI: smallest flash I/O unit: 1 57UBI: VID header offset: 64 (aligned 64) 58UBI: data offset: 128 59UBI: attached mtd1 to ubi0 60UBI: MTD device name: "mtd=2" 61UBI: MTD device size: 2 MiB 62UBI: number of good PEBs: 8 63UBI: number of bad PEBs: 0 64UBI: max. allowed volumes: 128 65UBI: wear-leveling threshold: 4096 66UBI: number of internal volumes: 1 67UBI: number of user volumes: 1 68UBI: available PEBs: 0 69UBI: total number of reserved PEBs: 8 70UBI: number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling: 0 71UBI: max/mean erase counter: 2/1 72 73 74Now that the UBI device is attached, this device can be modified 75using the following commands: 76 77ubi info Display volume and ubi layout information 78ubi createvol Create UBI volume on UBI device 79ubi removevol Remove UBI volume from UBI device 80ubi read Read data from UBI volume to memory 81ubi write Write data from memory to UBI volume 82ubi write.part Write data from memory to UBI volume, in parts 83 84 85Here a few examples on the usage: 86 87=> ubi create testvol 88Creating dynamic volume testvol of size 1048064 89 90=> ubi info l 91UBI: volume information dump: 92UBI: vol_id 0 93UBI: reserved_pebs 4 94UBI: alignment 1 95UBI: data_pad 0 96UBI: vol_type 3 97UBI: name_len 7 98UBI: usable_leb_size 262016 99UBI: used_ebs 4 100UBI: used_bytes 1048064 101UBI: last_eb_bytes 262016 102UBI: corrupted 0 103UBI: upd_marker 0 104UBI: name testvol 105 106UBI: volume information dump: 107UBI: vol_id 2147479551 108UBI: reserved_pebs 2 109UBI: alignment 1 110UBI: data_pad 0 111UBI: vol_type 3 112UBI: name_len 13 113UBI: usable_leb_size 262016 114UBI: used_ebs 2 115UBI: used_bytes 524032 116UBI: last_eb_bytes 2 117UBI: corrupted 0 118UBI: upd_marker 0 119UBI: name layout volume 120 121=> ubi info 122UBI: MTD device name: "mtd=2" 123UBI: MTD device size: 2 MiB 124UBI: physical eraseblock size: 262144 bytes (256 KiB) 125UBI: logical eraseblock size: 262016 bytes 126UBI: number of good PEBs: 8 127UBI: number of bad PEBs: 0 128UBI: smallest flash I/O unit: 1 129UBI: VID header offset: 64 (aligned 64) 130UBI: data offset: 128 131UBI: max. allowed volumes: 128 132UBI: wear-leveling threshold: 4096 133UBI: number of internal volumes: 1 134UBI: number of user volumes: 1 135UBI: available PEBs: 0 136UBI: total number of reserved PEBs: 8 137UBI: number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling: 0 138UBI: max/mean erase counter: 4/1 139 140=> ubi write 800000 testvol 80000 141Volume "testvol" found at volume id 0 142 143=> ubi read 900000 testvol 80000 144Volume testvol found at volume id 0 145read 524288 bytes from volume 0 to 900000(buf address) 146 147=> cmp.b 800000 900000 80000 148Total of 524288 bytes were the same 149 150 151Next, the ubifsmount command allows you to access filesystems on the 152UBI partition which has been attached with the ubi part command: 153 154=> help ubifsmount 155ubifsmount - mount UBIFS volume 156 157Usage: 158ubifsmount <volume-name> 159 - mount 'volume-name' volume 160 161For example: 162 163=> ubifsmount ubi0:recovery 164UBIFS: mounted UBI device 0, volume 0, name "recovery" 165UBIFS: mounted read-only 166UBIFS: file system size: 46473216 bytes (45384 KiB, 44 MiB, 366 LEBs) 167UBIFS: journal size: 6348800 bytes (6200 KiB, 6 MiB, 50 LEBs) 168UBIFS: media format: w4/r0 (latest is w4/r0) 169UBIFS: default compressor: LZO 170UBIFS: reserved for root: 0 bytes (0 KiB) 171 172Note that unlike Linux, U-Boot can only have one active UBI partition 173at a time, which can be referred to as ubi0, and must be supplied along 174with the name of the filesystem you are mounting. 175 176 177Once a UBI filesystem has been mounted, the ubifsls command allows you 178to list the contents of a directory in the filesystem: 179 180 181=> help ubifsls 182ubifsls - list files in a directory 183 184Usage: 185ubifsls [directory] 186 - list files in a 'directory' (default '/') 187 188For example: 189 190=> ubifsls 191 17442 Thu Jan 01 02:57:38 1970 imx28-evk.dtb 192 2998146 Thu Jan 01 02:57:43 1970 zImage 193 194 195And the ubifsload command allows you to load a file from a UBI 196filesystem: 197 198 199=> help ubifsload 200ubifsload - load file from an UBIFS filesystem 201 202Usage: 203ubifsload <addr> <filename> [bytes] 204 - load file 'filename' to address 'addr' 205 206For example: 207 208=> ubifsload ${loadaddr} zImage 209Loading file 'zImage' to addr 0x42000000 with size 2998146 (0x002dbf82)... 210Done 211 212 213Finally, you can unmount the UBI filesystem with the ubifsumount 214command: 215 216=> help ubifsumount 217ubifsumount - unmount UBIFS volume 218 219Usage: 220ubifsumount - unmount current volume 221 222For example: 223 224=> ubifsumount 225Unmounting UBIFS volume recovery! 226 227 228Usage of the UBI CRC skip-check flag of static volumes: 229------------------------------------------------------- 230Some users of static UBI volumes implement their own integrity check, 231thus making the volume CRC check done at open time useless. For 232instance, this is the case when one use the ubiblock + dm-verity + 233squashfs combination, where dm-verity already checks integrity of the 234block device but this time at the block granularity instead of verifying 235the whole volume. 236 237Skipping this test drastically improves the boot-time. 238 239U-Boot now supports the "skip_check" flag to optionally skip the CRC 240check at open time. 241 242Usage: Case A - Upon UBI volume creation: 243You can optionally add "--skipcheck" to the "ubi create" command: 244 245ubi create[vol] volume [size] [type] [id] [--skipcheck] 246 - create volume name with size ('-' for maximum available size) 247 248Usage: Case B - With an already existing UBI volume: 249Use the "ubi skipcheck" command: 250 251ubi skipcheck volume on/off - Set or clear skip_check flag in volume header 252 253Example: 254=> ubi skipcheck rootfs0 on 255Setting skip_check on volume rootfs0 256 257BTW: This saves approx. 10 seconds Linux bootup time on a MT7688 based 258target with 128MiB of SPI NAND. 259
README.ubispl
1Lightweight UBI and UBI fastmap support 2 3# Copyright (C) Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> 4# 5# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL 2.0+ BSD-3-Clause 6 7Scans the UBI information and loads the requested static volumes into 8memory. 9 10Configuration Options: 11 12 CONFIG_SPL_UBI 13 Enables the SPL UBI support 14 15 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS 16 The maximum number of logical eraseblocks which a static volume 17 to load can contain. Used for sizing the scan data structure 18 19 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE 20 The maximum physical erase block size. Either a compile time 21 constant or runtime detection. Used for sizing the scan data 22 structure 23 24 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS 25 The maximum physical erase block count. Either a compile time 26 constant or runtime detection. Used for sizing the scan data 27 structure 28 29 CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS 30 The maximum volume ids which can be loaded. Used for sizing the 31 scan data structure. 32 33Usage notes: 34 35In the board config file define for example: 36 37#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI 38#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS 256 39#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE (256*1024) 40#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS 4096 41#define CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS 8 42 43The size requirement is roughly as follows: 44 45 2k for the basic data structure 46 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_VOL_IDS * CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_VOL_LEBS * 8 47 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEBS * 64 48 + CONFIG_SPL_UBI_MAX_PEB_SIZE * UBI_FM_MAX_BLOCKS 49 50The last one is big, but I really don't care in that stage. Real world 51implementations only use the first couple of blocks, but the code 52handles up to UBI_FM_MAX_BLOCKS. 53 54Given the above configuration example the requirement is about 5M 55which is usually not a problem to reserve in the RAM along with the 56other areas like the kernel/dts load address. 57 58So something like this will do the trick: 59 60#define SPL_FINFO_ADDR 0x80800000 61#define SPL_DTB_LOAD_ADDR 0x81800000 62#define SPL_KERNEL_LOAD_ADDR 0x82000000 63 64In the board file, implement the following: 65 66static struct ubispl_load myvolumes[] = { 67 { 68 .vol_id = 0, /* kernel volume */ 69 .load_addr = (void *)SPL_KERNEL_LOAD_ADDR, 70 }, 71 { 72 .vol_id = 1, /* DT blob */ 73 .load_addr = (void *)SPL_DTB_LOAD_ADDR, 74 } 75}; 76 77int spl_start_uboot(void) 78{ 79 struct ubispl_info info; 80 81 info.ubi = (struct ubi_scan_info *) SPL_FINFO_ADDR; 82 info.fastmap = 1; 83 info.read = nand_spl_read_flash; 84 85#if COMPILE_TIME_DEFINED 86 /* 87 * MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS is the number of physical erase blocks 88 * in the FLASH which are reserved for the SPL. Think about 89 * mtd partitions: 90 * 91 * part_spl { .start = 0, .end = 4 } 92 * part_ubi { .start = 4, .end = NR_PEBS } 93 */ 94 info.peb_offset = MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS; 95 info.peb_size = CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE; 96 info.vid_offset = MY_NAND_UBI_VID_OFFS; 97 info.leb_start = MY_NAND_UBI_DATA_OFFS; 98 info.peb_count = MY_NAND_UBI_NUM_PEBS; 99#else 100 get_flash_info(&flash_info); 101 info.peb_offset = MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS; 102 info.peb_size = flash_info.peb_size; 103 104 /* 105 * The VID and Data offset depend on the capability of the 106 * FLASH chip to do subpage writes. 107 * 108 * If the flash chip supports subpage writes, then the VID 109 * header starts at the second subpage. So for 2k pages size 110 * with 4 subpages the VID offset is 512. The DATA offset is 2k. 111 * 112 * If the flash chip does not support subpage writes then the 113 * VID offset is FLASH_PAGE_SIZE and the DATA offset 114 * 2 * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE 115 */ 116 info.vid_offset = flash_info.vid_offset; 117 info.leb_start = flash_info.data_offset; 118 119 /* 120 * The flash reports the total number of erase blocks, so 121 * we need to subtract the number of blocks which are reserved 122 * for the SPL itself and not managed by UBI. 123 */ 124 info.peb_count = flash_info.peb_count - MY_NAND_NR_SPL_PEBS; 125#endif 126 127 ret = ubispl_load_volumes(&info, myvolumes, ARRAY_SIZE(myvolumes); 128 129 .... 130 131} 132 133Note: you can load any payload that way. You can even load u-boot from 134UBI, so the only non UBI managed FLASH area is the one which is 135reserved for the SPL itself and read from the SoC ROM. 136 137And you can do fallback scenarios: 138 139 if (ubispl_load_volumes(&info, volumes0, ARRAY_SIZE(volumes0))) 140 if (ubispl_load_volumes(&info, volumes1, ARRAY_SIZE(volumes1))) 141 ubispl_load_volumes(&info, vol_uboot, ARRAY_SIZE(vol_uboot)); 142
README.ublimage
1--------------------------------------------- 2UBL image Boot Image generation using mkimage 3--------------------------------------------- 4 5This document describes how to set up an U-Boot image that can be directly 6booted by a DaVinci processor via NAND boot mode, using an UBL header, 7but without need for UBL. 8 9For more details see section 11.2 "ARM ROM Boot Modes" of 10http://focus.ti.com/lit/ug/sprufg5a/sprufg5a.pdf 11 12Command syntax: 13-------------- 14./tools/mkimage -l <u-boot_file> 15 to list the UBL image file details 16 17./tools/mkimage -T ublimage \ 18 -n <board specific configuration file> \ 19 -d <u-boot binary> <output image file> 20 21For example, for the davinci dm365evm board: 22./tools/mkimage -n ./board/davinci/dm365evm/ublimage.cfg \ 23 -T ublimage \ 24 -d u-boot-nand.bin u-boot.ubl 25 26You can generate the image directly when you compile u-boot with: 27 28$ make u-boot.ubl 29 30The output image can be flashed into the NAND. 31 32Please check the DaVinci documentation for further details. 33 34Board specific configuration file specifications: 35------------------------------------------------- 361. This file must present in the $(BOARDDIR) and the name should be 37 ublimage.cfg (since this is used in Makefile). 382. This file can have empty lines and lines starting with "#" as first 39 character to put comments. 403. This file can have configuration command lines as mentioned below, 41 any other information in this file is treated as invalid. 42 43Configuration command line syntax: 44--------------------------------- 451. Each command line must have two strings, first one command or address 46 and second one data string 472. Following are the valid command strings and associated data strings:- 48 Command string data string 49 -------------- ----------- 50 MODE UBL special mode, on of: 51 safe 52 Example: 53 MODE safe 54 55 ENTRY Entry point address for the user 56 bootloader (absolute address) = TEXT_BASE 57 nand_spl loader. 58 Example: 59 ENTRY 0x00000020 60 61 PAGES Number of pages (size of user bootloader 62 in number of pages) 63 Example: 64 PAGES 27 65 66 START_BLOCK Block number where user bootloader is present 67 Example: 68 START_BLOCK 5 69 70 START_PAGE Page number where user bootloader is present 71 (for RBL always 0) 72 Example: 73 START_PAGE 0 74 75------------------------------------------------ 76 77Structure of the u-boot.ubl binary: 78 79compile steps: 80 811) nand_spl code compile, with pad_to = (TEXT_BASE + 82 (CONFIG_SYS_NROF_PAGES_NAND_SPL * pagesize)) 83 Example: cam_enc_4xx pad_to = 0x20 + (6 * 0x800) = 0x3020 = 12320 84 -> u-boot-spl-16k.bin 85 86 !! TEXT_BASE = 0x20, as the RBL starts at 0x20 87 882) compile u-boot.bin ("normal" u-boot) 89 -> u-boot.bin 90 913) create u-boot-nand.bin = u-boot-spl-16k.bin + u-boot.bin 92 934) create u-boot.ubl, size = 1 page size NAND 94 create UBL header and paste it before u-boot.bin 95 96This steps are done automagically if you do a "make all" 97 98-> You get an u-boot.ubl binary, which you can flash 99 into your NAND. 100 101Structure of this binary (Example for the cam_enc_4xx board with a NAND 102page size = 0x800): 103 104offset : 0x00000 | 0x800 | 0x3800 105content: UBL | nand_spl | u-boot code 106 Header | code | 107 108The NAND layout looks for example like this: 109 110(Example for the cam_enc_4xx board with a NAND page size = 0x800, block 111size = 0x20000 and CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER 5): 112 113offset : 0x80000 | 0xa0000 | 0xa3000 114content: UBL | nand_spl | u-boot code 115 Header | code | 116 ^ ^ 117 ^ 0xa0000 = CONFIG_SYS_NROF_UBL_HEADER * 0x20000 118 ^ 119 0x80000 = Block 4 * 0x20000 120 121If the cpu starts in NAND boot mode, it checks the UBL descriptor 122starting with block 1 (page 0). When a valid UBL signature is found, 123the corresponding block number (from 1 to 24) is written to the last 32 124bits of ARM internal memory (0x7ffc-0x8000). This feature is provided 125as a basic debug mechanism. If not found, it continues with block 2 126... last possible block is 24 127 128If a valid UBL descriptor is found, the UBL descriptor is read and 129processed. The descriptor gives the information required for loading 130and control transfer to the nand_spl code. The nand_spl code is then 131read and processed. 132 133Once the user-specified start-up conditions are set, the RBL copies the 134nand_spl into ARM internal RAM, starting at address 0x0000: 0020. 135 ^^^^ 136 137The nand_spl code itself now does necessary intializations, and at least, 138copies the u-boot code from NAND into RAM, and jumps to it ... 139 140------------------------------------------------ 141Author: Heiko Schocher <hs@denx.de> 142
README.udp
1Udp framework 2 3The udp framework is build on top of network framework and is designed 4to define new protocol or new command based on udp without modifying 5the network framework. 6 7The udp framework define a function udp_loop that take as argument 8a structure udp_ops (defined in include/net/udp.h) : 9 10struct udp_ops { 11 int (*prereq)(void *data); 12 int (*start)(void *data); 13 void *data; 14}; 15 16The callback prereq define if all the requirements are 17valid before running the network/udp loop. 18 19The callback start define the first step in the network/udp loop, 20and it may also be used to configure a timemout and udp handler. 21 22The pointer data is used to store private data that 23could be used by both callback. 24 25A simple example to use this framework: 26 27static struct udp_ops udp_ops = { 28 .prereq = wmp_prereq, 29 .start = wmp_start, 30 .data = NULL, 31}; 32 33... 34 35err = udp_loop(&udp_ops); 36
README.unaligned-memory-access.txt
1Editors note: This document is _heavily_ cribbed from the Linux Kernel, with 2really only the section about "Alignment vs. Networking" removed. 3 4UNALIGNED MEMORY ACCESSES 5========================= 6 7Linux runs on a wide variety of architectures which have varying behaviour 8when it comes to memory access. This document presents some details about 9unaligned accesses, why you need to write code that doesn't cause them, 10and how to write such code! 11 12 13The definition of an unaligned access 14===================================== 15 16Unaligned memory accesses occur when you try to read N bytes of data starting 17from an address that is not evenly divisible by N (i.e. addr % N != 0). 18For example, reading 4 bytes of data from address 0x10004 is fine, but 19reading 4 bytes of data from address 0x10005 would be an unaligned memory 20access. 21 22The above may seem a little vague, as memory access can happen in different 23ways. The context here is at the machine code level: certain instructions read 24or write a number of bytes to or from memory (e.g. movb, movw, movl in x86 25assembly). As will become clear, it is relatively easy to spot C statements 26which will compile to multiple-byte memory access instructions, namely when 27dealing with types such as u16, u32 and u64. 28 29 30Natural alignment 31================= 32 33The rule mentioned above forms what we refer to as natural alignment: 34When accessing N bytes of memory, the base memory address must be evenly 35divisible by N, i.e. addr % N == 0. 36 37When writing code, assume the target architecture has natural alignment 38requirements. 39 40In reality, only a few architectures require natural alignment on all sizes 41of memory access. However, we must consider ALL supported architectures; 42writing code that satisfies natural alignment requirements is the easiest way 43to achieve full portability. 44 45 46Why unaligned access is bad 47=========================== 48 49The effects of performing an unaligned memory access vary from architecture 50to architecture. It would be easy to write a whole document on the differences 51here; a summary of the common scenarios is presented below: 52 53 - Some architectures are able to perform unaligned memory accesses 54 transparently, but there is usually a significant performance cost. 55 - Some architectures raise processor exceptions when unaligned accesses 56 happen. The exception handler is able to correct the unaligned access, 57 at significant cost to performance. 58 - Some architectures raise processor exceptions when unaligned accesses 59 happen, but the exceptions do not contain enough information for the 60 unaligned access to be corrected. 61 - Some architectures are not capable of unaligned memory access, but will 62 silently perform a different memory access to the one that was requested, 63 resulting in a subtle code bug that is hard to detect! 64 65It should be obvious from the above that if your code causes unaligned 66memory accesses to happen, your code will not work correctly on certain 67platforms and will cause performance problems on others. 68 69 70Code that does not cause unaligned access 71========================================= 72 73At first, the concepts above may seem a little hard to relate to actual 74coding practice. After all, you don't have a great deal of control over 75memory addresses of certain variables, etc. 76 77Fortunately things are not too complex, as in most cases, the compiler 78ensures that things will work for you. For example, take the following 79structure: 80 81 struct foo { 82 u16 field1; 83 u32 field2; 84 u8 field3; 85 }; 86 87Let us assume that an instance of the above structure resides in memory 88starting at address 0x10000. With a basic level of understanding, it would 89not be unreasonable to expect that accessing field2 would cause an unaligned 90access. You'd be expecting field2 to be located at offset 2 bytes into the 91structure, i.e. address 0x10002, but that address is not evenly divisible 92by 4 (remember, we're reading a 4 byte value here). 93 94Fortunately, the compiler understands the alignment constraints, so in the 95above case it would insert 2 bytes of padding in between field1 and field2. 96Therefore, for standard structure types you can always rely on the compiler 97to pad structures so that accesses to fields are suitably aligned (assuming 98you do not cast the field to a type of different length). 99 100Similarly, you can also rely on the compiler to align variables and function 101parameters to a naturally aligned scheme, based on the size of the type of 102the variable. 103 104At this point, it should be clear that accessing a single byte (u8 or char) 105will never cause an unaligned access, because all memory addresses are evenly 106divisible by one. 107 108On a related topic, with the above considerations in mind you may observe 109that you could reorder the fields in the structure in order to place fields 110where padding would otherwise be inserted, and hence reduce the overall 111resident memory size of structure instances. The optimal layout of the 112above example is: 113 114 struct foo { 115 u32 field2; 116 u16 field1; 117 u8 field3; 118 }; 119 120For a natural alignment scheme, the compiler would only have to add a single 121byte of padding at the end of the structure. This padding is added in order 122to satisfy alignment constraints for arrays of these structures. 123 124Another point worth mentioning is the use of __attribute__((packed)) on a 125structure type. This GCC-specific attribute tells the compiler never to 126insert any padding within structures, useful when you want to use a C struct 127to represent some data that comes in a fixed arrangement 'off the wire'. 128 129You might be inclined to believe that usage of this attribute can easily 130lead to unaligned accesses when accessing fields that do not satisfy 131architectural alignment requirements. However, again, the compiler is aware 132of the alignment constraints and will generate extra instructions to perform 133the memory access in a way that does not cause unaligned access. Of course, 134the extra instructions obviously cause a loss in performance compared to the 135non-packed case, so the packed attribute should only be used when avoiding 136structure padding is of importance. 137 138 139Code that causes unaligned access 140================================= 141 142With the above in mind, let's move onto a real life example of a function 143that can cause an unaligned memory access. The following function taken 144from the Linux Kernel's include/linux/etherdevice.h is an optimized routine 145to compare two ethernet MAC addresses for equality. 146 147bool ether_addr_equal(const u8 *addr1, const u8 *addr2) 148{ 149#ifdef CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS 150 u32 fold = ((*(const u32 *)addr1) ^ (*(const u32 *)addr2)) | 151 ((*(const u16 *)(addr1 + 4)) ^ (*(const u16 *)(addr2 + 4))); 152 153 return fold == 0; 154#else 155 const u16 *a = (const u16 *)addr1; 156 const u16 *b = (const u16 *)addr2; 157 return ((a[0] ^ b[0]) | (a[1] ^ b[1]) | (a[2] ^ b[2])) == 0; 158#endif 159} 160 161In the above function, when the hardware has efficient unaligned access 162capability, there is no issue with this code. But when the hardware isn't 163able to access memory on arbitrary boundaries, the reference to a[0] causes 1642 bytes (16 bits) to be read from memory starting at address addr1. 165 166Think about what would happen if addr1 was an odd address such as 0x10003. 167(Hint: it'd be an unaligned access.) 168 169Despite the potential unaligned access problems with the above function, it 170is included in the kernel anyway but is understood to only work normally on 17116-bit-aligned addresses. It is up to the caller to ensure this alignment or 172not use this function at all. This alignment-unsafe function is still useful 173as it is a decent optimization for the cases when you can ensure alignment, 174which is true almost all of the time in ethernet networking context. 175 176 177Here is another example of some code that could cause unaligned accesses: 178 void myfunc(u8 *data, u32 value) 179 { 180 [...] 181 *((u32 *) data) = cpu_to_le32(value); 182 [...] 183 } 184 185This code will cause unaligned accesses every time the data parameter points 186to an address that is not evenly divisible by 4. 187 188In summary, the 2 main scenarios where you may run into unaligned access 189problems involve: 190 1. Casting variables to types of different lengths 191 2. Pointer arithmetic followed by access to at least 2 bytes of data 192 193 194Avoiding unaligned accesses 195=========================== 196 197The easiest way to avoid unaligned access is to use the get_unaligned() and 198put_unaligned() macros provided by the <asm/unaligned.h> header file. 199 200Going back to an earlier example of code that potentially causes unaligned 201access: 202 203 void myfunc(u8 *data, u32 value) 204 { 205 [...] 206 *((u32 *) data) = cpu_to_le32(value); 207 [...] 208 } 209 210To avoid the unaligned memory access, you would rewrite it as follows: 211 212 void myfunc(u8 *data, u32 value) 213 { 214 [...] 215 value = cpu_to_le32(value); 216 put_unaligned(value, (u32 *) data); 217 [...] 218 } 219 220The get_unaligned() macro works similarly. Assuming 'data' is a pointer to 221memory and you wish to avoid unaligned access, its usage is as follows: 222 223 u32 value = get_unaligned((u32 *) data); 224 225These macros work for memory accesses of any length (not just 32 bits as 226in the examples above). Be aware that when compared to standard access of 227aligned memory, using these macros to access unaligned memory can be costly in 228terms of performance. 229 230If use of such macros is not convenient, another option is to use memcpy(), 231where the source or destination (or both) are of type u8* or unsigned char*. 232Due to the byte-wise nature of this operation, unaligned accesses are avoided. 233 234-- 235In the Linux Kernel, 236Authors: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>, 237 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 238With help from: Alan Cox, Avuton Olrich, Heikki Orsila, Jan Engelhardt, 239Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, Uli Kunitz, 240Vadim Lobanov 241
README.uniphier
1U-Boot for UniPhier SoC family 2============================== 3 4 5Recommended toolchains 6---------------------- 7 8The UniPhier platform is well tested with Linaro toolchains. 9You can download pre-built toolchains from: 10 11 http://www.linaro.org/downloads/ 12 13 14Compile the source 15------------------ 16 17The source can be configured and built with the following commands: 18 19 $ make <defconfig> 20 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=<toolchain-prefix> DEVICE_TREE=<device-tree> 21 22The recommended <toolchain-prefix> is `arm-linux-gnueabihf-` for 32bit SoCs, 23`aarch64-linux-gnu-` for 64bit SoCs, but you may wish to change it to use your 24favorite compiler. 25 26The following tables show <defconfig> and <device-tree> for each board. 27 2832bit SoC boards: 29 30 Board | <defconfig> | <device-tree> 31---------------|-----------------------------|------------------------------ 32LD4 reference | uniphier_ld4_sld8_defconfig | uniphier-ld4-ref (default) 33sld8 reference | uniphier_ld4_sld8_defconfig | uniphier-sld8-def 34Pro4 reference | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-ref 35Pro4 Ace | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-ace 36Pro4 Sanji | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro4-sanji 37Pro5 4KBOX | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pro5-4kbox 38PXs2 Gentil | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pxs2-gentil 39PXs2 Vodka | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-pxs2-vodka (default) 40LD6b reference | uniphier_v7_defconfig | uniphier-ld6b-ref 41 4264bit SoC boards: 43 44 Board | <defconfig> | <device-tree> 45---------------|-----------------------|---------------------------- 46LD11 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld11-ref 47LD11 Global | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld11-global 48LD20 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld20-ref (default) 49LD20 Global | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-ld20-global 50PXs3 reference | uniphier_v8_defconfig | uniphier-pxs3-ref 51 52For example, to compile the source for PXs2 Vodka board, run the following: 53 54 $ make uniphier_v7_defconfig 55 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabihf- DEVICE_TREE=uniphier-pxs2-vodka 56 57The device tree marked as (default) can be omitted. `uniphier-pxs2-vodka` is 58the default device tree for the configuration `uniphier_v7_defconfig`, so the 59following gives the same result. 60 61 $ make uniphier_v7_defconfig 62 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-gnueabihf- 63 64 65Booting 32bit SoC boards 66------------------------ 67 68The build command will generate the following: 69- u-boot.bin 70- spl/u-boot.bin 71 72U-Boot can boot UniPhier 32bit SoC boards by itself. Flash the generated images 73to the storage device (NAND or eMMC) on your board. 74 75 - spl/u-boot-spl.bin at the offset address 0x00000000 76 - u-boot.bin at the offset address 0x00020000 77 78The `u-boot-with-spl.bin` is the concatenation of the two (with appropriate 79padding), so you can also do: 80 81 - u-boot-with-spl.bin at the offset address 0x00000000 82 83If a TFTP server is available, the images can be easily updated. 84Just copy the u-boot-spl.bin and u-boot.bin to the TFTP public directory, 85and run the following command at the U-Boot command line: 86 87To update the images in NAND: 88 89 => run nandupdate 90 91To update the images in eMMC: 92 93 => run emmcupdate 94 95 96Booting 64bit SoC boards 97------------------------ 98 99The build command will generate the following: 100- u-boot.bin 101 102However, U-Boot is not the first stage loader for UniPhier 64bit SoC boards. 103U-Boot serves as a non-secure boot loader loaded by [ARM Trusted Firmware], 104so you need to provide the `u-boot.bin` to the build command of ARM Trusted 105Firmware. 106 107[ARM Trusted Firmware]: https://github.com/ARM-software/arm-trusted-firmware 108 109 110Verified Boot 111------------- 112 113U-Boot supports an image verification method called "Verified Boot". 114This is a brief tutorial to utilize this feature for the UniPhier platform. 115You will find details documents in the doc/uImage.FIT directory. 116 117Here, we take LD20 reference board for example, but it should work for any 118other boards including 32 bit SoCs. 119 1201. Generate key to sign with 121 122 $ mkdir keys 123 $ openssl genpkey -algorithm RSA -out keys/dev.key \ 124 -pkeyopt rsa_keygen_bits:2048 -pkeyopt rsa_keygen_pubexp:65537 125 $ openssl req -batch -new -x509 -key keys/dev.key -out keys/dev.crt 126 127Two files "dev.key" and "dev.crt" will be created. The base name is arbitrary, 128but need to match to the "key-name-hint" property described below. 129 1302. Describe FIT source 131 132You need to write an FIT (Flattened Image Tree) source file to describe the 133structure of the image container. 134 135The following is an example for a simple usecase: 136 137---------------------------------------->8---------------------------------------- 138/dts-v1/; 139 140/ { 141 description = "Kernel, DTB and Ramdisk for UniPhier LD20 Reference Board"; 142 #address-cells = <1>; 143 144 images { 145 kernel { 146 description = "linux"; 147 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/LINUX/DIR/arch/arm64/boot/Image.gz"); 148 type = "kernel"; 149 arch = "arm64"; 150 os = "linux"; 151 compression = "gzip"; 152 load = <0x82080000>; 153 entry = <0x82080000>; 154 hash-1 { 155 algo = "sha256"; 156 }; 157 }; 158 159 fdt-1 { 160 description = "fdt"; 161 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/LINUX/DIR/arch/arm64/boot/dts/socionext/uniphier-ld20-ref.dtb"); 162 type = "flat_dt"; 163 arch = "arm64"; 164 compression = "none"; 165 hash-1 { 166 algo = "sha256"; 167 }; 168 }; 169 170 ramdisk { 171 description = "ramdisk"; 172 data = /incbin/("PATH/TO/YOUR/ROOTFS/DIR/rootfs.cpio"); 173 type = "ramdisk"; 174 arch = "arm64"; 175 os = "linux"; 176 compression = "none"; 177 hash-1 { 178 algo = "sha256"; 179 }; 180 }; 181 }; 182 183 configurations { 184 default = "config-1"; 185 186 config-1 { 187 description = "Configuration0"; 188 kernel = "kernel"; 189 fdt = "fdt-1"; 190 ramdisk = "ramdisk"; 191 signature-1 { 192 algo = "sha256,rsa2048"; 193 key-name-hint = "dev"; 194 sign-images = "kernel", "fdt", "ramdisk"; 195 }; 196 }; 197 }; 198}; 199---------------------------------------->8---------------------------------------- 200 201You need to change the three '/incbin/' lines, depending on the location of 202your kernel image, device tree blob, and init ramdisk. The "load" and "entry" 203properties also need to be adjusted if you want to change the physical placement 204of the kernel. 205 206The "key-name-hint" must specify the key name you have created in the step 1. 207 208The FIT file name is arbitrary. Let's say you saved it into "fit.its". 209 2103. Compile U-Boot with FIT and signature enabled 211 212To use the Verified Boot, you need to enable the following two options: 213 CONFIG_FIT 214 CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE 215 216They are disabled by default for UniPhier defconfig files. So, you need to 217tweak the configuration from "make menuconfig" or friends. 218 219 $ make uniphier_v8_defconfig 220 $ make menuconfig 221 [ enable CONFIG_FIT and CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE ] 222 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- 223 2244. Build the image tree blob 225 226After building U-Boot, you will see tools/mkimage. With this tool, you can 227create an image tree blob as follows: 228 229 $ tools/mkimage -f fit.its -k keys -K dts/dt.dtb -r -F fitImage 230 231The -k option must specify the key directory you have created in step 1. 232 233A file "fitImage" will be created. This includes kernel, DTB, Init-ramdisk, 234hash data for each of the three, and signature data. 235 236The public key needed for the run-time verification is stored in "dts/dt.dtb". 237 2385. Compile U-Boot again 239 240Since the "dt.dtb" has been updated in step 4, you need to re-compile the 241U-Boot. 242 243 $ make CROSS_COMPILE=aarch64-linux-gnu- 244 245The re-compiled "u-boot.bin" is appended with DTB that contains the public key. 246 2476. Flash the image 248 249Flash the "fitImage" to a storage device (NAND, eMMC, or whatever) on your 250board. 251 252Please note the "u-boot.bin" must be signed, and verified by someone when it is 253loaded. For ARMv8 SoCs, the "someone" is generally ARM Trusted Firmware BL2. 254ARM Trusted Firmware supports an image authentication mechanism called Trusted 255Board Boot (TBB). The verification process must be chained from the moment of 256the system reset. If the Chain of Trust has a breakage somewhere, the verified 257boot process is entirely pointless. 258 2597. Boot verified kernel 260 261Load the fitImage to memory and run the following from the U-Boot command line. 262 263 > bootm <addr> 264 265Here, <addr> is the base address of the fitImage. 266 267If it is successful, you will see messages like follows: 268 269---------------------------------------->8---------------------------------------- 270## Loading kernel from FIT Image at 84100000 ... 271 Using 'config-1' configuration 272 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256,rsa2048:dev+ OK 273 Trying 'kernel' kernel subimage 274 Description: linux 275 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC 276 Type: Kernel Image 277 Compression: gzip compressed 278 Data Start: 0x841000c8 279 Data Size: 6957818 Bytes = 6.6 MiB 280 Architecture: AArch64 281 OS: Linux 282 Load Address: 0x82080000 283 Entry Point: 0x82080000 284 Hash algo: sha256 285 Hash value: 82a37b7f11ae55f4e07aa25bf77e4067cb9dc1014d52d6cd4d588f92eee3aaad 286 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK 287## Loading ramdisk from FIT Image at 84100000 ... 288 Using 'config-1' configuration 289 Trying 'ramdisk' ramdisk subimage 290 Description: ramdisk 291 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC 292 Type: RAMDisk Image 293 Compression: uncompressed 294 Data Start: 0x847a5cc0 295 Data Size: 5264365 Bytes = 5 MiB 296 Architecture: AArch64 297 OS: Linux 298 Load Address: unavailable 299 Entry Point: unavailable 300 Hash algo: sha256 301 Hash value: 44980a2874154a2e31ed59222c9f8ea968867637f35c81e4107a984de7014deb 302 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK 303## Loading fdt from FIT Image at 84100000 ... 304 Using 'config-1' configuration 305 Trying 'fdt-1' fdt subimage 306 Description: fdt 307 Created: 2017-10-20 14:32:29 UTC 308 Type: Flat Device Tree 309 Compression: uncompressed 310 Data Start: 0x847a2cb0 311 Data Size: 12111 Bytes = 11.8 KiB 312 Architecture: AArch64 313 Hash algo: sha256 314 Hash value: c517099db537f6d325e6be46b25c871a41331ad5af0283883fd29d40bfc14e1d 315 Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK 316 Booting using the fdt blob at 0x847a2cb0 317 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 318 reserving fdt memory region: addr=80000000 size=2000000 319 Loading Device Tree to 000000009fffa000, end 000000009fffff4e ... OK 320 321Starting kernel ... 322---------------------------------------->8---------------------------------------- 323 324Please pay attention to the lines that start with "Verifying Hash Integrity". 325 326"Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256,rsa2048:dev+ OK" means the signature check 327passed. 328 329"Verifying Hash Integrity ... sha256+ OK" (3 times) means the hash check passed 330for kernel, DTB, and Init ramdisk. 331 332If they are not displayed, the Verified Boot is not working. 333 334 335Deployment for Distro Boot 336-------------------------- 337 338UniPhier SoC family boot the kernel in a generic manner as described in 339doc/README.distro . 340 341To boot the kernel, you need to deploy necesssary components to a file 342system on one of your block devices (eMMC, NAND, USB drive, etc.). 343 344The components depend on the kernel image format. 345 346[1] Bare images 347 348 - kernel 349 - init ramdisk 350 - device tree blob 351 - boot configuration file (extlinux.conf) 352 353Here is an exmple of the configuration file. 354 355-------------------->8-------------------- 356menu title UniPhier Boot Options. 357 358timeout 50 359default UniPhier 360 361label UniPhier 362 kernel ../Image 363 initrd ../rootfs.cpio.gz 364 fdtdir .. 365-------------------->8-------------------- 366 367Then, write 'Image', 'rootfs.cpio.gz', 'uniphier-ld20-ref.dtb' (DTB depends on 368your board), and 'extlinux/extlinux.conf' to the file system. 369 370[2] FIT 371 372 - FIT blob 373 - boot configuration file (extlinux.conf) 374 375-------------------->8-------------------- 376menu title UniPhier Boot Options. 377 378timeout 50 379default UniPhier 380 381label UniPhier 382 kernel ../fitImage 383-------------------->8-------------------- 384 385Since the init ramdisk and DTB are contained in the FIT blob, 386you do not need to describe them in the configuration file. 387Write 'fitImage' and 'extlinux/extlinux.conf' to the file system. 388 389 390UniPhier specific commands 391-------------------------- 392 393 - pinmon (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_PINMON) 394 shows the boot mode pins that has been latched at the power-on reset 395 396 - ddrphy (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_DDRPHY_DUMP) 397 shows the DDR PHY parameters set by the PHY training 398 399 - ddrmphy (enabled by CONFIG_CMD_DDRMPHY_DUMP) 400 shows the DDR Multi PHY parameters set by the PHY training 401 402 403Supported devices 404----------------- 405 406 - UART (on-chip) 407 - NAND 408 - SD/eMMC 409 - USB 2.0 (EHCI) 410 - USB 3.0 (xHCI) 411 - GPIO 412 - LAN (on-board SMSC9118) 413 - I2C 414 - EEPROM (connected to the on-board I2C bus) 415 - Support card (SRAM, NOR flash, some peripherals) 416 417 418Micro Support Card 419------------------ 420 421The recommended bit switch settings are as follows: 422 423 SW2 OFF(1)/ON(0) Description 424 ------------------------------------------ 425 bit 1 <---- BKSZ[0] 426 bit 2 ----> BKSZ[1] 427 bit 3 <---- SoC Bus Width 16/32 428 bit 4 <---- SERIAL_SEL[0] 429 bit 5 ----> SERIAL_SEL[1] 430 bit 6 ----> BOOTSWAP_EN 431 bit 7 <---- CS1/CS5 432 bit 8 <---- SOC_SERIAL_DISABLE 433 434 SW8 OFF(1)/ON(0) Description 435 ------------------------------------------ 436 bit 1 <---- CS1_SPLIT 437 bit 2 <---- CASE9_ON 438 bit 3 <---- CASE10_ON 439 bit 4 Don't Care Reserve 440 bit 5 Don't Care Reserve 441 bit 6 Don't Care Reserve 442 bit 7 ----> BURST_EN 443 bit 8 ----> FLASHBUS32_16 444 445The BKSZ[1:0] specifies the address range of memory slot and peripherals 446as follows: 447 448 BKSZ Description RAM slot Peripherals 449 -------------------------------------------------------------------- 450 0b00 15MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-00efffff 00f00000-00ffffff 451 0b01 31MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-01efffff 01f00000-01ffffff 452 0b10 64MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-03efffff 03f00000-03ffffff 453 0b11 127MB RAM / 1MB Peri 00000000-07efffff 07f00000-07ffffff 454 455Set BSKZ[1:0] to 0b01 for U-Boot. 456This mode is the most handy because EA[24] is always supported by the save pin 457mode of the system bus. On the other hand, EA[25] is not supported for some 458newer SoCs. Even if it is, EA[25] is not connected on most of the boards. 459 460-- 461Masahiro Yamada <yamada.masahiro@socionext.com> 462Oct. 2017 463
README.update
1Automatic software update from a TFTP server 2============================================ 3 4Overview 5-------- 6 7This feature allows to automatically store software updates present on a TFTP 8server in NOR Flash. In more detail: a TFTP transfer of a file given in 9environment variable 'updatefile' from server 'serverip' is attempted during 10boot. The update file should be a FIT file, and can contain one or more 11updates. Each update in the update file has an address in NOR Flash where it 12should be placed, updates are also protected with a SHA-1 checksum. If the 13TFTP transfer is successful, the hash of each update is verified, and if the 14verification is positive, the update is stored in Flash. 15 16The auto-update feature is enabled by the CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP macro: 17 18#define CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP 1 19 20 21Note that when enabling auto-update, Flash support must be turned on. Also, 22one must enable FIT and LIBFDT support: 23 24#define CONFIG_FIT 1 25#define CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 1 26 27The auto-update feature uses the following configuration knobs: 28 29- CONFIG_UPDATE_LOAD_ADDR 30 31 Normally, TFTP transfer of the update file is done to the address specified 32 in environment variable 'loadaddr'. If this variable is not present, the 33 transfer is made to the address given in CONFIG_UPDATE_LOAD_ADDR (0x100000 34 by default). 35 36- CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX 37 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX 38 39 These knobs control the timeouts during initial connection to the TFTP 40 server. Since a transfer is attempted during each boot, it is undesirable to 41 have a long delay when a TFTP server is not present. 42 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX specifies the number of milliseconds to wait for 43 the server to respond to initial connection, and CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX 44 gives the number of such connection retries. CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX must 45 be non-negative and is 0 by default, CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX must be 46 positive and is 100 by default. 47 48Since the update file is in FIT format, it is created from an *.its file using 49the mkimage tool. dtc tool with support for binary includes, e.g. in version 501.2.0 or later, must also be available on the system where the update file is 51to be prepared. Refer to the doc/uImage.FIT/ directory for more details on FIT 52images. 53 54 55Example .its files 56------------------ 57 58- doc/uImage.FIT/update_uboot.its 59 60 A simple example that can be used to create an update file for automatically 61 replacing U-Boot image on a system. 62 63 Assuming that an U-Boot image u-boot.bin is present in the current working 64 directory, and that the address given in the 'load' property in the 65 'update_uboot.its' file is where the U-Boot is stored in Flash, the 66 following command will create the actual update file 'update_uboot.itb': 67 68 mkimage -f update_uboot.its update_uboot.itb 69 70 Place 'update_uboot.itb' on a TFTP server, for example as 71 '/tftpboot/update_uboot.itb', and set the 'updatefile' variable 72 appropriately, for example in the U-Boot prompt: 73 74 setenv updatefile /tftpboot/update_uboot.itb 75 saveenv 76 77 Now, when the system boots up and the update TFTP server specified in the 78 'serverip' environment variable is accessible, the new U-Boot image will be 79 automatically stored in Flash. 80 81 NOTE: do make sure that the 'u-boot.bin' image used to create the update 82 file is a good, working image. Also make sure that the address in Flash 83 where the update will be placed is correct. Making mistake here and 84 attempting the auto-update can render the system unusable. 85 86- doc/uImage.FIT/update3.its 87 88 An example containing three updates. It can be used to update Linux kernel, 89 ramdisk and FDT blob stored in Flash. The procedure for preparing the update 90 file is similar to the example above. 91 92TFTP update via DFU 93------------------- 94 95- It is now possible to update firmware (bootloader, kernel, rootfs, etc.) via 96 TFTP by using DFU (Device Firmware Upgrade). More information can be found in 97 ./doc/README.dfutftp documentation entry. 98
README.usb
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2001 4 * Denis Peter, MPL AG Switzerland 5 */ 6 7USB Support 8=========== 9 10The USB support is implemented on the base of the UHCI Host 11controller. 12 13Currently supported are USB Hubs, USB Keyboards, USB Floppys, USB 14flash sticks and USB network adaptors. 15Tested with a TEAC Floppy TEAC FD-05PUB and Chicony KU-8933 Keyboard. 16 17How it works: 18------------- 19 20The USB (at least the USB UHCI) needs a frame list (4k), transfer 21descripor and queue headers which are all located in the main memory. 22The UHCI allocates every milisecond the PCI bus and reads the current 23frame pointer. This may cause to crash the OS during boot. So the USB 24_MUST_ be stopped during OS boot. This is the reason, why the USB is 25NOT automatically started during start-up. If someone needs the USB 26he has to start it and should therefore be aware that he had to stop 27it before booting the OS. 28 29For USB keyboards this can be done by a script which is automatically 30started after the U-Boot is up and running. To boot an OS with a an 31USB keyboard another script is necessary, which first disables the 32USB and then executes the boot command. If the boot command fails, 33the script can reenable the USB kbd. 34 35Common USB Commands: 36- usb start: 37- usb reset: (re)starts the USB. All USB devices will be 38 initialized and a device tree is build for them. 39- usb tree: shows all USB devices in a tree like display 40- usb info [dev]: shows all USB infos of the device dev, or of all 41 the devices 42- usb stop [f]: stops the USB. If f==1 the USB will also stop if 43 an USB keyboard is assigned as stdin. The stdin 44 is then switched to serial input. 45Storage USB Commands: 46- usb scan: scans the USB for storage devices.The USB must be 47 running for this command (usb start) 48- usb device [dev]: show or set current USB storage device 49- usb part [dev]: print partition table of one or all USB storage 50 devices 51- usb read addr blk# cnt: 52 read `cnt' blocks starting at block `blk#'to 53 memory address `addr' 54- usbboot addr dev:part: 55 boot from USB device 56 57Config Switches: 58---------------- 59CONFIG_CMD_USB enables basic USB support and the usb command 60CONFIG_USB_UHCI defines the lowlevel part.A lowlevel part must be defined 61 if using CONFIG_CMD_USB 62CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD enables the USB Keyboard 63CONFIG_USB_STORAGE enables the USB storage devices 64CONFIG_USB_HOST_ETHER enables USB ethernet adapter support 65 66 67USB Host Networking 68=================== 69 70If you have a supported USB Ethernet adapter you can use it in U-Boot 71to obtain an IP address and load a kernel from a network server. 72 73Note: USB Host Networking is not the same as making your board act as a USB 74client. In that case your board is pretending to be an Ethernet adapter 75and will appear as a network interface to an attached computer. In that 76case the connection is via a USB cable with the computer acting as the host. 77 78With USB Host Networking, your board is the USB host. It controls the 79Ethernet adapter to which it is directly connected and the connection to 80the outside world is your adapter's Ethernet cable. Your board becomes an 81independent network device, able to connect and perform network operations 82independently of your computer. 83 84 85Device support 86-------------- 87 88Currently supported devices are listed in the drivers according to 89their vendor and product IDs. You can check your device by connecting it 90to a Linux machine and typing 'lsusb'. The drivers are in 91drivers/usb/eth. 92 93For example this lsusb output line shows a device with Vendor ID 0x0x95 94and product ID 0x7720: 95 96Bus 002 Device 010: ID 0b95:7720 ASIX Electronics Corp. AX88772 97 98If you look at drivers/usb/eth/asix.c you will see this line within the 99supported device list, so we know this adapter is supported. 100 101 { 0x0b95, 0x7720 }, /* Trendnet TU2-ET100 V3.0R */ 102 103If your adapter is not listed there is a still a chance that it will 104work. Try looking up the manufacturer of the chip inside your adapter. 105or take the adapter apart and look for chip markings. Then add a line 106for your vendor/product ID into the table of the appropriate driver, 107build U-Boot and see if it works. If not then there might be differences 108between the chip in your adapter and the driver. You could try to get a 109datasheet for your device and add support for it to U-Boot. This is not 110particularly difficult - you only need to provide support for four basic 111functions: init, halt, send and recv. 112 113 114Enabling USB Host Networking 115---------------------------- 116 117The normal U-Boot commands are used with USB networking, but you must 118start USB first. For example: 119 120usb start 121setenv bootfile /tftpboot/uImage 122bootp 123 124 125To enable USB Host Ethernet in U-Boot, your platform must of course 126support USB with CONFIG_CMD_USB enabled and working. You will need to 127add some config settings to your board config: 128 129CONFIG_CMD_USB=y /* the 'usb' interactive command */ 130CONFIG_USB_HOST_ETHER=y /* Enable USB Ethernet adapters */ 131 132and one or more of the following for individual adapter hardware: 133 134CONFIG_USB_ETHER_ASIX=y 135CONFIG_USB_ETHER_ASIX88179=y 136CONFIG_USB_ETHER_LAN75XX=y 137CONFIG_USB_ETHER_LAN78XX=y 138CONFIG_USB_ETHER_MCS7830=y 139CONFIG_USB_ETHER_RTL8152=y 140CONFIG_USB_ETHER_SMSC95XX=y 141 142As with built-in networking, you will also want to enable some network 143commands, for example: 144 145CONFIG_CMD_NET=y 146CONFIG_CMD_PING=y 147CONFIG_CMD_DHCP=y 148 149and some bootp options, which tell your board to obtain its subnet, 150gateway IP, host name and boot path from the bootp/dhcp server. These 151settings should start you off: 152 153#define CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK 154#define CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY 155#define CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME 156#define CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH 157 158You can also set the default IP address of your board and the server 159as well as the default file to load when a 'bootp' command is issued. 160However note that encoding these individual network settings into a 161common exectuable is discouraged, as it leads to potential conflicts, 162and all the parameters can either get stored in the board's external 163environment, or get obtained from the bootp server if not set. 164 165#define CONFIG_IPADDR 10.0.0.2 (replace with your value) 166#define CONFIG_SERVERIP 10.0.0.1 (replace with your value) 167#define CONFIG_BOOTFILE "uImage" 168 169 170The 'usb start' command should identify the adapter something like this: 171 172CrOS> usb start 173(Re)start USB... 174USB EHCI 1.00 175scanning bus for devices... 3 USB Device(s) found 176 scanning bus for storage devices... 0 Storage Device(s) found 177 scanning bus for ethernet devices... 1 Ethernet Device(s) found 178CrOS> print ethact 179ethact=asx0 180 181You can see that it found an ethernet device and we can print out the 182device name (asx0 in this case). 183 184Then 'bootp' or 'dhcp' should use it to obtain an IP address from DHCP, 185perhaps something like this: 186 187CrOS> bootp 188Waiting for Ethernet connection... done. 189BOOTP broadcast 1 190BOOTP broadcast 2 191DHCP client bound to address 172.22.73.81 192Using asx0 device 193TFTP from server 172.22.72.144; our IP address is 172.22.73.81 194Filename '/tftpboot/uImage-sjg-seaboard-261347'. 195Load address: 0x40c000 196Loading: ################################################################# 197 ################################################################# 198 ################################################################# 199 ################################################ 200done 201Bytes transferred = 3557464 (364858 hex) 202CrOS> 203 204 205Another way of doing this is to issue a tftp command, which will cause the 206bootp to happen automatically. 207 208 209MAC Addresses 210------------- 211 212Most Ethernet dongles have a built-in MAC address which is unique in the 213world. This is important so that devices on the network can be 214distinguised from each other. MAC address conflicts are evil and 215generally result in strange and eratic behaviour. 216 217Some boards have USB Ethernet chips on-board, and these sometimes do not 218have an assigned MAC address. In this case it is up to you to assign 219one which is unique. You should obtain a valid MAC address from a range 220assigned to you before you ship the product. 221 222Built-in Ethernet adapters support setting the MAC address by means of 223an ethaddr environment variable for each interface (ethaddr, eth1addr, 224eth2addr). There is similar support on the USB network side, using the 225names usbethaddr, usbeth1addr, etc. They are kept separate since we 226don't want a USB device taking the MAC address of a built-in device or 227vice versa. 228 229So if your USB Ethernet chip doesn't have a MAC address available then 230you must set usbethaddr to a suitable MAC address. At the time of 231writing this functionality is only supported by the SMSC driver. 232
README.vf610
1U-Boot for Freescale Vybrid VF610 2 3This file contains information for the port of U-Boot to the Freescale Vybrid 4VF610 SoC. 5 61. CONVENTIONS FOR FUSE ASSIGNMENTS 7----------------------------------- 8 91.1 MAC Address: It is stored in fuse bank 4, with the 16 msbs in word 2 and the 10 32 lsbs in word 3. 11
README.video
1SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2/* 3 * (C) Copyright 2000 4 * Paolo Scaffardi, AIRVENT SAM s.p.a - RIMINI(ITALY), arsenio@tin.it 5 */ 6 7"video-mode" environment variable 8================================= 9 10The 'video-mode' environment variable can be used to enable and configure 11some video drivers. The format matches the video= command-line option used 12for Linux: 13 14 video-mode=<driver>:<xres>x<yres>-<depth>@<freq><,option=string> 15 16 <driver> The video driver name, ignored by U-Boot 17 <xres> The X resolution (in pixels) to use. 18 <yres> The Y resolution (in pixels) to use. 19 <depth> The color depth (in bits) to use. 20 <freq> The frequency (in Hz) to use. 21 <options> A comma-separated list of device-specific options 22 23 24U-Boot MPC8xx video controller driver 25===================================== 26 27The driver has been tested with the following configurations: 28 29- MPC823FADS with AD7176 on a PAL TV (YCbYCr) - arsenio@tin.it 30 31Example: video-mode=fslfb:1280x1024-32@60,monitor=dvi 32 33 34U-Boot sunxi video controller driver 35==================================== 36 37U-Boot supports hdmi and lcd output on Allwinner sunxi SoCs, lcd output 38requires the CONFIG_VIDEO_LCD_MODE Kconfig value to be set. 39 40The sunxi U-Boot driver supports the following video-mode options: 41 42- monitor=[none|dvi|hdmi|lcd|vga|composite-*] - Select the video output to use 43 none: Disable video output. 44 dvi/hdmi: Selects output over the hdmi connector with dvi resp. hdmi output 45 format, if edid is used the format is automatically selected. 46 lcd: Selects video output to a LCD screen. 47 vga: Selects video output over the VGA connector. 48 composite-pal/composite-ntsc/composite-pal-m/composite-pal-nc: 49 Selects composite video output, note the specified resolution is 50 ignored with composite video output. 51 Defaults to monitor=dvi. 52 53- hpd=[0|1] - Enable use of the hdmi HotPlug Detect feature 54 0: Disabled. Configure dvi/hdmi output even if no cable is detected 55 1: Enabled. Fallback to the lcd / vga / none in that order (if available) 56 Defaults to hpd=1. 57 58- hpd_delay=<int> - How long to wait for the hdmi HPD signal in milliseconds 59 When the monitor and the board power up at the same time, it may take some 60 time for the monitor to assert the HPD signal. This configures how long to 61 wait for the HPD signal before assuming no cable is connected. 62 Defaults to hpd_delay=500. 63 64- edid=[0|1] - Enable use of DDC + EDID to get monitor info 65 0: Disabled. 66 1: Enabled. If valid EDID info was read from the monitor the EDID info will 67 overrides the xres, yres and refresh from the video-mode env. variable. 68 Defaults to edid=1. 69 70- overscan_x/overscan_y=<int> - Set x/y overscan value 71 This configures a black border on the left and right resp. top and bottom 72 to deal with overscanning displays. Defaults to overscan_x=32 and 73 overscan_y=20 for composite monitors, 0 for other monitors. 74 75For example to always use the hdmi connector, even if no cable is inserted, 76using edid info when available and otherwise initalizing it at 1024x768@60Hz, 77use: "setenv video-mode sunxi:1024x768-24@60,monitor=dvi,hpd=0,edid=1". 78 79 80TrueType fonts 81-------------- 82 83U-Boot supports the use of antialiased TrueType fonts on some platforms. This 84has been tested in x86, ARMv7 and sandbox. 85 86To enable this, select CONFIG_CONSOLE_TRUETYPE. You can choose between several 87fonts, with CONSOLE_TRUETYPE_NIMBUS being the default. 88 89TrueType support requires floating point at present. On ARMv7 platforms you 90need to disable use of the private libgcc. You can do this by disabling 91CONFIG_USE_PRIVATE_LIBGCC. See chromebook_jerry for an example. Note that this 92increases U-Boot's size by about 70KB at present. 93 94On ARM you should also make sure your toolchain supports hardfp. This is 95normally given in the name of your toolchain, e.g. arm-linux-gnueabihf (hf 96means hardware floating point). You can also run gcc with -v to see if it has 97this option. 98
README.virtio
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2018, Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com> 4 5VirtIO Support 6============== 7 8This document describes the information about U-Boot support for VirtIO [1] 9devices, including supported boards, build instructions, driver details etc. 10 11What's VirtIO? 12-------------- 13VirtIO is a virtualization standard for network and disk device drivers where 14just the guest's device driver "knows" it is running in a virtual environment, 15and cooperates with the hypervisor. This enables guests to get high performance 16network and disk operations, and gives most of the performance benefits of 17paravirtualization. In the U-Boot case, the guest is U-Boot itself, while the 18virtual environment are normally QEMU [2] targets like ARM, RISC-V and x86. 19 20Status 21------ 22VirtIO can use various different buses, aka transports as described in the 23spec. While VirtIO devices are commonly implemented as PCI devices on x86, 24embedded devices models like ARM/RISC-V, which does not normally come with 25PCI support might use simple memory mapped device (MMIO) instead of the PCI 26device. The memory mapped virtio device behaviour is based on the PCI device 27specification. Therefore most operations including device initialization, 28queues configuration and buffer transfers are nearly identical. Both MMIO 29and PCI transport options are supported in U-Boot. 30 31The VirtIO spec defines a lots of VirtIO device types, however at present only 32network and block device, the most two commonly used devices, are supported. 33 34The following QEMU targets are supported. 35 36 - qemu_arm_defconfig 37 - qemu_arm64_defconfig 38 - qemu-riscv32_defconfig 39 - qemu-riscv64_defconfig 40 - qemu-x86_defconfig 41 - qemu-x86_64_defconfig 42 43Note ARM and RISC-V targets are configured with VirtIO MMIO transport driver, 44and on x86 it's the PCI transport driver. 45 46Build Instructions 47------------------ 48Building U-Boot for pre-configured QEMU targets is no different from others. 49For example, we can do the following with the CROSS_COMPILE environment 50variable being properly set to a working toolchain for ARM: 51 52 $ make qemu_arm_defconfig 53 $ make 54 55You can even create a QEMU ARM target with VirtIO devices showing up on both 56MMIO and PCI buses. In this case, you can enable the PCI transport driver 57from 'make menuconfig': 58 59Device Drivers ---> 60 ... 61 VirtIO Drivers ---> 62 ... 63 [*] PCI driver for virtio devices 64 65Other drivers are at the same location and can be tuned to suit the needs. 66 67Requirements 68------------ 69It is required that QEMU v2.5.0+ should be used to test U-Boot VirtIO support 70on QEMU ARM and x86, and v2.12.0+ on QEMU RISC-V. 71 72Testing 73------- 74The following QEMU command line is used to get U-Boot up and running with 75VirtIO net and block devices on ARM. 76 77 $ qemu-system-arm -nographic -machine virt -bios u-boot.bin \ 78 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \ 79 -device virtio-net-device,netdev=net0 \ 80 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \ 81 -device virtio-blk-device,drive=hd0 82 83On x86, command is slightly different to create PCI VirtIO devices. 84 85 $ qemu-system-i386 -nographic -bios u-boot.rom \ 86 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \ 87 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0 \ 88 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \ 89 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd0 90 91Additional net and block devices can be created by appending more '-device' 92parameters. It is also possible to specify both MMIO and PCI VirtIO devices. 93For example, the following commnad creates 3 VirtIO devices, with 1 on MMIO 94and 2 on PCI bus. 95 96 $ qemu-system-arm -nographic -machine virt -bios u-boot.bin \ 97 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \ 98 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0 \ 99 -drive if=none,file=test0.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \ 100 -device virtio-blk-device,drive=hd0 \ 101 -drive if=none,file=test1.img,format=raw,id=hd1 \ 102 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd1 103 104By default QEMU creates VirtIO legacy devices by default. To create non-legacy 105(aka modern) devices, pass additional device property/value pairs like below: 106 107 $ qemu-system-i386 -nographic -bios u-boot.rom \ 108 -netdev tap,ifname=tap0,id=net0 \ 109 -device virtio-net-pci,netdev=net0,disable-legacy=true,disable-modern=false \ 110 -drive if=none,file=test.img,format=raw,id=hd0 \ 111 -device virtio-blk-pci,drive=hd0,disable-legacy=true,disable-modern=false 112 113A 'virtio' command is provided in U-Boot shell. 114 115 => virtio 116 virtio - virtio block devices sub-system 117 118 Usage: 119 virtio scan - initialize virtio bus 120 virtio info - show all available virtio block devices 121 virtio device [dev] - show or set current virtio block device 122 virtio part [dev] - print partition table of one or all virtio block devices 123 virtio read addr blk# cnt - read `cnt' blocks starting at block 124 `blk#' to memory address `addr' 125 virtio write addr blk# cnt - write `cnt' blocks starting at block 126 `blk#' from memory address `addr' 127 128To probe all the VirtIO devices, type: 129 130 => virtio scan 131 132Then we can show the connected block device details by: 133 134 => virtio info 135 Device 0: QEMU VirtIO Block Device 136 Type: Hard Disk 137 Capacity: 4096.0 MB = 4.0 GB (8388608 x 512) 138 139And list the directories and files on the disk by: 140 141 => ls virtio 0 / 142 <DIR> 4096 . 143 <DIR> 4096 .. 144 <DIR> 16384 lost+found 145 <DIR> 4096 dev 146 <DIR> 4096 proc 147 <DIR> 4096 sys 148 <DIR> 4096 var 149 <DIR> 4096 etc 150 <DIR> 4096 usr 151 <SYM> 7 bin 152 <SYM> 8 sbin 153 <SYM> 7 lib 154 <SYM> 9 lib64 155 <DIR> 4096 run 156 <DIR> 4096 boot 157 <DIR> 4096 home 158 <DIR> 4096 media 159 <DIR> 4096 mnt 160 <DIR> 4096 opt 161 <DIR> 4096 root 162 <DIR> 4096 srv 163 <DIR> 4096 tmp 164 0 .autorelabel 165 166Driver Internals 167---------------- 168There are 3 level of drivers in the VirtIO driver family. 169 170 +---------------------------------------+ 171 | virtio device drivers | 172 | +-------------+ +------------+ | 173 | | virtio-net | | virtio-blk | | 174 | +-------------+ +------------+ | 175 +---------------------------------------+ 176 +---------------------------------------+ 177 | virtio transport drivers | 178 | +-------------+ +------------+ | 179 | | virtio-mmio | | virtio-pci | | 180 | +-------------+ +------------+ | 181 +---------------------------------------+ 182 +----------------------+ 183 | virtio uclass driver | 184 +----------------------+ 185 186The root one is the virtio uclass driver (virtio-uclass.c), which does lots of 187common stuff for the transport drivers (virtio_mmio.c, virtio_pci.c). The real 188virtio device is discovered in the transport driver's probe() method, and its 189device ID is saved in the virtio uclass's private data of the transport device. 190Then in the virtio uclass's post_probe() method, the real virtio device driver 191(virtio_net.c, virtio_blk.c) is bound if there is a match on the device ID. 192 193The child_post_bind(), child_pre_probe() and child_post_probe() methods of the 194virtio uclass driver help bring the virtio device driver online. They do things 195like acknowledging device, feature negotiation, etc, which are really common 196for all virtio devices. 197 198The transport drivers provide a set of ops (struct dm_virtio_ops) for the real 199virtio device driver to call. These ops APIs's parameter is designed to remind 200the caller to pass the correct 'struct udevice' id of the virtio device, eg: 201 202int virtio_get_status(struct udevice *vdev, u8 *status) 203 204So the parameter 'vdev' indicates the device should be the real virtio device. 205But we also have an API like: 206 207struct virtqueue *vring_create_virtqueue(unsigned int index, unsigned int num, 208 unsigned int vring_align, 209 struct udevice *udev) 210 211Here the parameter 'udev' indicates the device should be the transport device. 212Similar naming is applied in other functions that are even not APIs, eg: 213 214static int virtio_uclass_post_probe(struct udevice *udev) 215static int virtio_uclass_child_pre_probe(struct udevice *vdev) 216 217So it's easy to tell which device these functions are operating on. 218 219Development Flow 220---------------- 221At present only VirtIO network card (device ID 1) and block device (device 222ID 2) are supported. If you want to develop new driver for new devices, 223please follow the guideline below. 224 2251. add new device ID in virtio.h 226#define VIRTIO_ID_XXX X 227 2282. update VIRTIO_ID_MAX_NUM to be the largest device ID plus 1 229 2303. add new driver name string in virtio.h 231#define VIRTIO_XXX_DRV_NAME "virtio-xxx" 232 2334. create a new driver with name set to the name string above 234U_BOOT_DRIVER(virtio_xxx) = { 235 .name = VIRTIO_XXX_DRV_NAME, 236 ... 237 .remove = virtio_reset, 238 .flags = DM_FLAG_ACTIVE_DMA, 239} 240 241Note the driver needs to provide the remove method and normally this can be 242hooked to virtio_reset(). The driver flags should contain DM_FLAG_ACTIVE_DMA 243for the remove method to be called before jumping to OS. 244 2455. provide bind() method in the driver, where virtio_driver_features_init() 246 should be called for driver to negotiate feature support with the device. 247 2486. do funny stuff with the driver 249 250References 251---------- 252[1] http://docs.oasis-open.org/virtio/virtio/v1.0/virtio-v1.0.pdf 253[2] https://www.qemu.org 254
README.vxworks
1# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 2# 3# Copyright (C) 2013, Miao Yan <miao.yan@windriver.com> 4# Copyright (C) 2015-2018, Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com> 5# Copyright (C) 2019, Lihua Zhao <lihua.zhao@windriver.com> 6 7VxWorks Support 8=============== 9 10This document describes the information about U-Boot loading VxWorks kernel. 11 12Status 13------ 14U-Boot supports loading VxWorks kernels via 'bootvx' and 'bootm' commands. 15For booting old kernels (6.9.x) on PowerPC and ARM, and all kernel versions 16on other architectures, 'bootvx' shall be used. For booting VxWorks 7 kernels 17on PowerPC and ARM, 'bootm' shall be used. 18 19With CONFIG_EFI_LOADER option, it's possible to chain load a VxWorks x86 kernel 20via the UEFI boot loader application for VxWorks loaded by 'bootefi' command. 21 22VxWorks 7 on PowerPC and ARM 23--------------------------- 24From VxWorks 7, VxWorks starts adopting device tree as its hardware description 25mechanism (for PowerPC and ARM), thus requiring boot interface changes. 26This section will describe the new interface. 27 28Since VxWorks 7 SR0640 release, VxWorks starts using Linux compatible standard 29DTB for some boards. With that, the exact same bootm flow as used by Linux is 30used, which includes board-specific DTB fix up. To keep backward compatibility, 31only when the least significant bit of flags in bootargs is set, the standard 32DTB will be used. Otherwise it falls back to the legacy bootm flow. 33 34For legacy bootm flow, make sure the least significant bit of flags in bootargs 35is cleared. The calling convention is described below: 36 37For PowerPC, the calling convention of the new VxWorks entry point conforms to 38the ePAPR standard, which is shown below (see ePAPR for more details): 39 40 void (*kernel_entry)(fdt_addr, 0, 0, EPAPR_MAGIC, boot_IMA, 0, 0) 41 42For ARM, the calling convention is shown below: 43 44 void (*kernel_entry)(void *fdt_addr) 45 46When using the Linux compatible standard DTB, the calling convention of VxWorks 47entry point is exactly the same as the Linux kernel. 48 49When booting a VxWorks 7 kernel (uImage format), the parameters passed to bootm 50is like below: 51 52 bootm <kernel image address> - <device tree address> 53 54VxWorks bootline 55---------------- 56When using 'bootvx', the kernel bootline must be prepared by U-Boot at a 57board-specific address before loading VxWorks. U-Boot supplies its address 58via "bootaddr" environment variable. To check where the bootline should be 59for a specific board, go to the VxWorks BSP for that board, and look for a 60parameter called BOOT_LINE_ADRS. Assign its value to "bootaddr". A typical 61value for "bootaddr" on an x86 board is 0x101200. 62 63If a "bootargs" variable is defined, its content will be copied to the memory 64location pointed by "bootaddr" as the kernel bootline. If "bootargs" is not 65there, command 'bootvx' can construct a valid bootline using the following 66environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, serverip, 67gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs. 68 69When using 'bootm', just define "bootargs" in the environment and U-Boot will 70handle bootline fix up for the kernel dtb automatically. 71 72When using 'bootefi' to chain load an x86 kernel, the UEFI boot loader 73application for VxWorks takes care of the kernel bootline preparation. 74 75Serial console 76-------------- 77It's very common that VxWorks BSPs configure a different baud rate for the 78serial console from what is being used by U-Boot. For example, VxWorks tends 79to use 9600 as the default baud rate on all x86 BSPs while U-Boot uses 115200. 80Please configure both U-Boot and VxWorks to use the same baud rate, or it may 81look like VxWorks hangs somewhere as nothing outputs on the serial console. 82 83x86-specific information 84------------------------ 85Before direct loading an x86 kernel via 'bootvx', one additional environment 86variable need to be provided. This is "vx_phys_mem_base", which represent the 87physical memory base address of VxWorks. 88 89Check VxWorks kernel configuration to look for LOCAL_MEM_LOCAL_ADRS. For 90VxWorks 7, this is normally a virtual address and you need find out its 91corresponding physical address and assign its value to "vx_phys_mem_base". 92 93For boards on which ACPI is not supported by U-Boot yet, VxWorks kernel must 94be configured to use MP table and virtual wire interrupt mode. This requires 95INCLUDE_MPTABLE_BOOT_OP and INCLUDE_VIRTUAL_WIRE_MODE to be included in a 96VxWorks kernel configuration. 97 98Both 32-bit x86 and 64-bit x64 kernels can be loaded. 99 100There are two types of graphics console drivers in VxWorks. One is the 80x25 101VGA text mode driver. The other one is the EFI console bitmapped graphics mode 102driver. To make these drivers function, U-Boot needs to load and run the VGA 103BIOS of the graphics card first. 104 105 - If the kernel is configured with 80x25 VGA text mode driver, 106 CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_SET_VESA_MODE must be unset in U-Boot. 107 - If the kernel is configured with bitmapped graphics mode driver, 108 CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_SET_VESA_MODE need remain set but care must be taken 109 at which VESA mode is to be set. The supported pixel format is 32-bit 110 RGBA, hence the available VESA mode can only be one of the following: 111 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_10F 112 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_112 113 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_115 114 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_118 115 * FRAMEBUFFER_VESA_MODE_11B 116
README.watchdog
1Watchdog driver general info 2 3CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG 4 This enables hw_watchdog_reset to be called during various loops, 5 including waiting for a character on a serial port. But it 6 does not also call hw_watchdog_init. Boards which want this 7 enabled must call this function in their board file. This split 8 is useful because some rom's enable the watchdog when downloading 9 new code, so it must be serviced, but the board would rather it 10 was off. And, it cannot always be turned off once on. 11 12CONFIG_WATCHDOG_TIMEOUT_MSECS 13 Can be used to change the timeout for i.mx31/35/5x/6x. 14 If not given, will default to maximum timeout. This would 15 be 128000 msec for i.mx31/35/5x/6x. 16 17CONFIG_WDT_AT91 18 Available for AT91SAM9 to service the watchdog. 19 20CONFIG_FTWDT010_WATCHDOG 21 Available for FTWDT010 to service the watchdog. 22 23CONFIG_FTWDT010_HW_TIMEOUT 24 Can be used to change the timeout for FTWDT010. 25 26CONFIG_IMX_WATCHDOG 27 Available for i.mx31/35/5x/6x to service the watchdog. This is not 28 automatically set because some boards (vision2) still need to define 29 their own hw_watchdog_reset routine. 30 TODO: vision2 is removed now, so perhaps this can be changed. 31 32CONFIG_XILINX_TB_WATCHDOG 33 Available for Xilinx Axi platforms to service timebase watchdog timer. 34
README.zfs
1This patch series adds support for ZFS listing and load to u-boot. 2 3To Enable zfs ls and load commands, modify the board specific config file with 4#define CONFIG_CMD_ZFS 5 6Steps to test: 7 81. After applying the patch, zfs specific commands can be seen 9 in the boot loader prompt using 10 UBOOT #help 11 12 zfsload- load binary file from a ZFS file system 13 zfsls - list files in a directory (default /) 14 152. To list the files in zfs pool, device or partition, execute 16 zfsls <interface> <dev[:part]> [POOL/@/dir/file] 17 For example: 18 UBOOT #zfsls mmc 0:5 /rpool/@/usr/bin/ 19 203. To read and load a file from an ZFS formatted partition to RAM, execute 21 zfsload <interface> <dev[:part]> [addr] [filename] [bytes] 22 For example: 23 UBOOT #zfsload mmc 2:2 0x30007fc0 /rpool/@/boot/uImage 24 25References : 26 -- ZFS GRUB sources from Solaris GRUB-0.97 27 -- GRUB Bazaar repository 28 29Jorgen Lundman <lundman at lundman.net> 2012. 30